Home

downloaded

1. Screen Write InstantHMI allows each application screen to have its own unique set of macro key definitions called Screen Macros The Screen Macros are stored within the screen file Any common global definitions applicable to all screens in the Project called Project Macros are stored in the file MACROS IDB The global definitions are overridden by local definitions specific to the current screen That is any keystrokes from the operator at runtime will first be translated using the macro key definitions for the current screen if no such definition exists then any definition in the global macro file MACROS IDB will be used and the resulting commands will be executed Note All local or global definitions for the same macro key will be executed that is you may chain together multiple macro commands to be executed by a single macro key action InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Macro Editor Page 6 2 6 1 Getting Started InstantHMI LaunchPad includes several tools Report Designer Section 5 Macro Editor this Section 6 Script Editor Section 7 and Data Source Manager Section 2 3 5 All these tools are integrated into the Screen Designer discussed in Section 4 If you have not installed InstantHMI for Windows on your computer do so now see Appendix A When installation is complete you should see a program group InstantH
2. InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 18 The scale previews shown correspond to the number Large and Small Tics shown To change the Tics click on the Large Small Tics edit field and type the number of tics desired and the Tab key Observe the scales in the preview change Click on one of the four available scale selections and then click OK This places a resizable Scale on the top left corner of your screen Re size and drag the Scale to position it at the desired location on the screen An example of the use of Scales and Tanks is shown below Water In Water Out Figure 4 17 Screen Designer Object Using Scales and Tank Bitmap Object Use this tool accessed from the Screen Designer menu Objects gt Static Objects gt Bitmap to create bitmap objects that include bitmap images created and saved in some other application This tool will be useful to include your company logo scanned images of the part of your machine or process on display screen CAD images etc To include a bitmap on your screen select this tool and position the mouse cursor where you want the top left corner of the bitmap To re size the bitmap drag a rectangle of the desired size to place the bitmap You will see a Select Bitmap browser dialog Select desired bitmap and click OK You will see the Bitmap Properties dialog You may resize the bitmap maintain its aspect ratio to avoid disto
3. LessOrEqual InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Script Editor Page 7 14 GOTO END Greater X 1 END Here if Local 101 is positive X is set to 1 otherwise X is set to 1 iv T 10 WHILE T gt 0 BEEP 1 WAIT 500 T T 1 Here the script will cause 10 short Beeps with a half second pause between beeps 7 3 Examples Example 1 Power Systems We will illustrate the use of math equations in a script with a simple example from Power Systems involving the calculation of KVA Kilo Volt Ampere using KW Kilo Watt and KVAR Kilo Volt Ampere Reactive data Assume the following register and local memory allocations Meaning KW reading input to PLC computed KW KVAR reading input to PLC computed KVAR computed KVA where KVA KW KVAR Figure 7 2 Register Definitions for Power Systems Example We have used Local Memory for the intermediate results if these results are needed they may be stored in registers The script needed for this example is shown in Figure below a GetRegisterlnt 801 b GetRegisterlnt 803 c a a SetLocallnt 1 c d b b SetLocallnt 3 d e C d e Sart e SetRegisterlInt 806 e Beep 5 Figure 7 3 Script 1 SCT for Power System Example We will create a screen with five data fields with the following dataspecs Monitor Integer Register Address 801 monitor KW Monitor Local Address 1 Monitor Int
4. Figure 4 48 Creating a Message Display Object We illustrate Register based Messages with an example Suppose the Temperature Msgs message group contains 10 messages corresponding to the values 0 1 9 Each line represents a possible message to be displayed in a field data type Monitor data format Message data Memory Register Field Width 15 Address 123 Message Group Temperature Msgs At runtime if register 123 has the value 2 in it then text for line 2 in Temperature Msgs group Temp between 20 and 30 degrees will be displayed Note that the field width must be wide enough for the text of the longest message The message text will have the color and size as designated for the data field Select Date format if you wish to display the Computer System date on your screen Date format is valid only if you choose Data Type Monitor Note that Date format causes the runtime to constantly update the PLC registers or Local Memory you choose and also the data field on the screen For faster screen updates you should use Local Memory with Date format unless you wish to transfer computer system date information into your PLC registers The system date will be read from the computer and stored in three consecutive PLC Registers or Local memory locations starting with the address you specify for the field with Date format The first location will contain the month MM the second location will contain the date DD and the thi
5. InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 7 Note The Show Display Properties button exposes the Tag Display Properties These display properties stored with the tag definition are used for pre formatted screen display objects in InstantHMI usually on non PC platforms The Screen Designer can access the Display Object Properties Section 4 6 2 stored with objects on user designed screens these properties supersede the default display properties stored with the tag definition Tag Name Click on the Tag Name field and enter a descriptive tag name This identifies the information item you need from your controller for monitoring data logging etc Note1 You may also assign a Tag Alias to a tag name Section 3 3 3 A Tag Alias is useful when a controller tag name Example ControlLogix Tag Name or Bristol Signal Name is not known when designing your tag database and screen objects and you need to refer to a controller tag on the fly Note2 Group membership of the tag are managed in the Tag Manager using the Add Tag To Group and the Remove Tag From Group buttons Data Source and Device Name The Data Source for the tag provides the raw data of the tag object If no Data Source has been defined click on Edit Data Source button to invoke the Data Source Manager to define data source parameters including a comm link lf your Data Source uses TCP IP communication
6. On the Plot Setup screen you may select the Time Period Minute Hours etc Plot Interpolation None or Line and the Tag Group to be plotted In addition you may assign any tag from the selected group to the four pens by tapping on the button next to the pen labels 1 2 3 4 You may also assign colors to the pen traces on the Real Time plot by tapping on the color tiles associated with each of the four pens When you tap on Done after completing the Plot Setup you will see the Real Time trend of the tags you assigned to the four pens The left hand end of the Time axis corresponds to the time you initiated the trend by tapping Done on the Plot Setup The current time is on the top left On the Real Time Trend screen you may Show or Hide any pen trace turn on or off the grid lines You may temporarily Pause the trend while InstantHMI continues to collect the trend data so it can display it later for you when you Start the trend again The trend plot will scroll left when the end of the Time period is reached and InstantHMI will continue to record the real time trend data until you stop the real time trend by tapping on the Stop button or switch to Main Menu by tapping on Menu gt Main Menu Trend History Tap on the History button and set Trend History Plot Setup properties to see the Trend History plot InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PDA Page 10 13 Plot Set
7. ccoooooncccnncccccnonnncnnnncnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononnnnnennnnononnnnns 11 3 11 2 4 TCP IP Used in Project DeployMent coocccnccccnccnncccnoncnnncononcnnnnnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnncnnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnrnnonnannnnnnss 11 5 TL25 FERIA Ay ite tse eae eet e halted ioe let teeta tweets alin aod 11 6 is TRIP IMtertace Example iaa 11 7 A A A a ee eee 12 1 A O A An 12 1 12 2 OPC Client Objects m Screen Desierta int 12 2 123 OFC OVER GOM MATE Pa a taa 12 3 12 3 1 Configure DCOM on Server PC and Client PCS ooccccnnnccccccnncccnnccnononnncnnnnnononnnnnnonnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 12 3 12 3 2 Configure DCOM for OPCEnum Server PC cccocccccccnnnnccccnoccnccnnnconononnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 12 7 12 3 3 Configure DCOM for OPCEnum Client PC cooooccncnnnccccccoccncnnnccnonnnnncnnnnnonnnnonnnonnnnnonnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnos 12 9 12 34 DOMAINS Ys WOKO UD Senei E id ca 12 11 12 3 5 DCOM over TCP IP Protocol with NetBlOS oooocccccnccccccconccnncccnnoncccnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnononnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 12 12 12 4 Example DCOM Tor UNIOPG EVO ticas it ctas 12 14 12 4 1 Configure DCOM on Server PO adea e eri a i a a a a 12 14 12 4 2 Configure DCOM on Client PC 2 0 0 ccccecccccccecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesseaeaseeeeeeessaeaaeeeeeesssaaaaeees 12 16 TENSON VAC IY tdi 13 1 13 1 Installation Considerations ii A seeded a a Aa 1
8. Elbe a EtherNet IP Total 2 E Comm Link TCP IP Device Name ControlLogix Driver EtherNet IP Add New Timeout 1000 Station Offset O Comm Lank Device Manga ICA RE Cerin Login e Drmer Names Ehehe Daia Sowces Comm Links 2 odbus TCP CEM Links Comm Link TEPIP Comm Link TCP IP MAN ERE Device Name Walchem Driver Walchern Modbus TCP Timeout 2000 Station Offset O E Dance Marne Controllogie E Diver gt Ethereal E Timeout 1000 E Station isel O 2 Modbus TCR E Canin Link TEPIP E Device Mame Walchem E Garver Wralchem Modbus TOP E Tirneout 2000 a E asnan a ai a Dalia Source Manager J HELP Screens Repris lage Dala Sources 7 E SOFTWARE Pig Harma al INC WG iy ASAS Figure 9 5 Data Source Manager and Editor TLE U Advanced orin m oo o ooo o E oo oaa ooa oaa fans IingtamHMI IF Manapar Dance Mame ControlLogix Walchem If you are using a printer connect it to the appropriate port on the PC Printer reports are also saved to disk We recommend that you refer to the spooling capability Section 5 3 in InstantHMI for greater control of your saved reports Any printing will be done on the printer configured for printing under Windows 9 3 2 Screens You may use the LaunchPad gt Setup gt Screens command to decide what screens are included in your project
9. Go Ae ee ee eof Ree ee een MRE Tere eRe Wer Pe rE ee ee ee ee ee eee 9 5 JIS SDE Cla AGS sacs saanddetady eva sccs cstalasteh taba seth II Mi tedaran kotalic 9 6 Jo AIG OC AAA A ese uice hei eales EE ed en canner E aa 9 7 Jes prot Dala LOJIJI Nene tren ere eer ree er rer amen a iar do ee eee ee 9 7 9 4 RUIME MENU s str ocio 9 8 oa Meo a arene ere ete eaten tes ern eee nr eran eh ee crane om eee eter eg ae ee errr see eer Meer ee or en ee ee eer ea eee eri eae 9 10 NI aac ago dm sa P IE EEE EE dein See athe cece E E EA EET 9 10 gA SOMO CIS essai hs ea a eat cee Dace eye ieee See Gale ae ieee ets Seti li ects 9 11 a e cus teed Aetese dened a T 9 11 O45 COMMUN OM ccscc sete se rtecec case nessnncese cree setesesSes esas dues accethcncxeae ino sesteeen cane amesancceat curse daucepecemceouessancentc aqua mesesgode 9 11 9 46 CONIL ito ol 9 12 SAT AaS ia 9 12 Ss O 9 12 A A ee 9 13 SA TO Prin SAaVie Sd id clic a 9 13 A 9 13 AE nn adit eta ak ule Meat iia Ges aah a a iets a S 9 13 926 Dalta ERVIN ROA IN A das 9 16 IP UEN A O 9 18 A O tosarsadueundans 9 18 a FAC DOUG A A nea teccon xentxauri da eachanaavanencntuarenns 9 19 IO TOUCH SCN SCI east dc dd deta dl cores cea 9 19 911 COMMUNICATIONS EOFS ia ad 9 19 O 10 1 10 1 PDA and CE Platform Familia nani losa drid 10 1 102 TCI MENU rt A E cee E E 10 2 tTO 2k LOOM Logosa a aE E ase ies us cnet ate a se E A a gue sleet 10 2 10 2 2 Data MONO Panic ie cis 10 3 PA A ere reer ee eee eee eee et 10
10. Use Object Assembly Parameters to Re Assign Object Assembly Tank Status at Runtime Type Format Type Address Membership Figure 4 13 Item 1 Item 2 tem 4 Water Level Tank B Monitor integer Local 151 TankB Alarm State TankB Monitor Integer Local 152 TankB Alarm Message TankB Monitor Message Local 152 TankB We have included here an excerpt from a Water Supply System example described in detail in Quick Start Guide Six tags from the tag database are shown as well as the Object Assembly Tank Status Note that the Tag Group Tank A or Tank B will be selected by user at Runtime so the single Tank Status object assembly may display Tank A Status or Tank B Status The same assembly could be used for many tanks defined in a similar manner The Tag Group ID may also be selected by the Tag Value of a special tag assigned to the Object Assembly This allows the use of a Pull Down List a Spinner or even a PLC register at runtime to switch the Object Assembly from one tag group to another TANK A STATUS Water Level Alarm State Dep Feet a ARERRERERERRER Figure 4 13 Object Assembly Tank Status Define Object Assembly x InstantHMl Assien Tag Group Object Assembly Mame Group ID Group Mame Tags in Tank E Tank BRE 1 Tank A Water Level Tank B Object Assembly Parameters A et E Alarm state Tank E Data Source Not Used Station ID Not Used Tag Group Selected By Us
11. Y Int16 Station Start Address Bit w edit o 1 Tag Name Address Register 1 1 Register 2 Register 3 Register 4 Register 5 Register v Decimal v Field Width fo 5 Device Name 940 demo node 120 R W rw rw rw rw rw Tag Yalue 101 102 103 104 105 Comm Status Comm OK Comm OK Comm OK Comm OK Comm OK rw rf rf rf rw Register 7 Register 8 Register 9 Register 10 O O O O 3 4 5 Register 6 6 5 9 1 0 C Select All a om ve Comm OK Comm OK Comm OK Comm OK Comm OK 000000000000 Data Items 10 s A Create Tag s Figure 9 3 DataViewer Modbus InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PC Page 9 3 Step 4 Click on Design Screen to access the Screen Designer and build a screen using widgets etc You may skip designing a screen since the Runtime generates automatically a WatchList screen If no screens have been added to the project this WatchList screen will appear as the first screen Otherwise this screen will be the last screen Step 5 Click on Test Screen in Runtime to verify the functionality of the screen you designed Switch to Watch List or other available pre formatted screens for monitoring data entry and supervisory control Use Watch Lists in Runtime to monitor modify controller tags from different groups A single watch list in an object assemb
12. a Excel Workbook inserted in Screen Designe A a A O Item1 ttem2 Total aS b a a Click on this object ta Run Excel Double click on this object to edit in Excel Screen with embedded OLE document AAA AAALAALAA AAA IAEA LIA AAA LETTE EEE NELLA A AAA AAA AAA AAA AENA IAEA AAA IAEA A ALI LEAL ILLIA LI CILES A B C D E F G E 1 Excel Workbook inserted in Screen Designe 3 itemi ttem2 Total 45 L 4 6 Click on this object to Run Excel 4 8 Double click on this object to edit in Excel 4 9 l I AN N A 10 A A 2 h JM 4 bl Sheet1 4 1015 356 SELECT MM System 106 Figure 4 32 Excel Running in Screen Designer Allows Editing OLE Document Excel Worksheet Note that the Excel Menus and Tool Bars appear along with Screen Designer Menu and Tool Bars You may use them to edit the inserted OLE Excel Worksheet document When you exit Excel you will see the edited worksheet document incorporated in the screen document Animate Control See Section 4 6 10 4 6 10 ActiveX Object As stated earlier OLE technology can be used to create compound documents OLE2 the next release of OLE introduced COM Component Object Model which defines a common communication protocol for objects to interact with each other based on abstract interfaces This enabled application developers to use COM in ways that had nothing to do with OLE In 1996 Microsoft coined t
13. eee ere ee C Console Root Computers i Component Services Computers E am Stop MS OTC Refresh all components MEE AAA AAA A Figure 12 6 Configuring DCOM Steps A amp B Step C Click the Default Properties Tab Ensure Enable Distributed COM on this Computer is Checked The Default Authentication Level should be set to Connect Default Impersonation Level should be set to Identify My Computer Properties EES Default Protocols MSDTC COM Security General Options Default Properties mi Enable COM Internet Services on this computer Default Distributed COM Communication Properties The Authentication Level species security at the packet level Default Authentication Level Connect The impersonation level species whether applications can determine who iz calling them and whether the application can do operations using the chent s identity Default Impersonation Level F Identify Security for reference tracking can be provided if authentication is used and that the default impersonation level is not anonymous Provide additional security for reference tracking Cancel Apply Figure 12 7 Configuring DCOM Steps C Step D Click the Default Protocols Tab If more than one protocol exists ensure Connection oriented TCP IP is at the TOP of the list Other protocols may be used but are beyond the scope of this document InstantHMI C
14. from the pull down list that appears Click on Enter Macro button Note that for upper case D you must click on the Shift check box and then select the D key Note To prevent unauthorized access to documents at runtime the Document Viewer with integrated text and graphic printing support for all platforms is accessible only through the Macro function the project designer may decide to enable operator access 2 Execute Script This macro has the syntax Execute Script Script Name and causes all statements in the script to be executed In conjunction with a touchzone this macro command can enhance the functionality of your runtime screens tremendously 3 Exit Runtime Engine When this macro is executed at runtime it will perform the Exit Runtime Engine function with or without Prompt for operator confirmation chosen by you 4 Go To Field This macro allows you to move to a specific field on any screen on the monitor and has the syntax Go To Field Screen Name Field ID Note that this macro available only on the PC Runtime is retained for legacy purposes and we recommend you not use this macro see Set Data macro Macro Key Command lt CTRL gt T Go To Field Training tmpzone1 29 For example suppose the field of your choice is on screen Training tmpzone1 in our Demo and has the Field ID 29 as determined from the doc file for the screen and you want to define the key Ctrl T as the macro key Click on the check bo
15. A Te High w 15 al High 46 15 E 1 High 46 15 7 j Limits A Lori mt den C ust chix mp r te Normal 6 50 wat Now nal g 50 E r Normal 56 50 Low tap fas Lever em 15 us of Ticks Lene my 5 a WF Leonor Len 4 10 m Lew Low ie EN cs Lew Low ie po Figure 4 59 Gauge Properties Three Examples do Enter the data values for the Limits high value low value and corresponding angles for the neeedle and Labels Name Units and of ticks with a label Note that the needle angle is in degrees anti clockwise with respect to a right horizontal zero reference By selecting the colors and ranges for High High High Normal Low and Low Low ranges you can customize the gauge to meet your requirements Three examples are shown in Figure 4 59 Click on Done button to change the gauge parameters or X Cancel button to retain the old properties and return to the Display Object Properties dialog box This dialog shows the Gauge in its pre view panel click on Simulate button to pre view gauge as it will appear at runtime Select Plot to include a Real Historic Trend Plot on your screen Section 4 6 8 Select V H Bar to have a dynamic vertical horizontal bar on screen The low left end 0 value and high right end 100 value you enter along with the value in the register whose address you must specify will determine the size of the vertical no
16. InstantHMI Databases Page 3 3 automatically created tags for these memory locations to the Tag Database Use the Watch List in InstantHMI Runtime to monitor tag groups controller memory of interest in a tabular form 3 2 1 Data Viewer PC The Data Viewer tool allows you to define data blocks identify the tags of interest in the controller and then save them to the tag database The data viewer tool is an integral part of the new project wizard Section 2 4 1 To use the data table viewer you define a data block as follows select a Data Source and a Device Name if appropriate select a Memory Type and enter the Station number Start Address and the number of consecutive data items You may also select the Data Type and Display Format and enter the display Field Width as appropriate see Section 4 11 for details We have illustrated Data Table Viewer for Register Memory with a Data Source and Device Name selected The automatically created tag names Register 1 Register 2 appear in the Tag Name column Click on Go Online button to monitor the tag data values The LED widget will blink each time the table is updated The Comm Status for each tag is also indicated Before saving the automatically created tags to the tag database you may double click on the tag name field to enter a new tag name You may also change the r w Read Write property and make the tag read only You may now select any tags by clicking on its checkbox
17. it Delete i Read ccezss White Access Figure 4 43 Set Password Attributes 4 10 Help The Help menu offers the following commands to help you with the Screen Designer program Index Shows an index to Screen Designer topics on which you can get help Using Help Provides general instructions on using the Help system About Screen Designer Displays the version number of Screen Designer application Index Use this command to display the Screen Designer Help Index Table of Contents From the index of Help topics you can select any desired topic to browse through the available information on line You can click the Contents button in the Help window whenever you want to return to the Index Table of Contents of Help topics You may also click on the Search button and look for help on topics of interest to you Note Another way to use online Help in Screen Designer is to press Shift F1 which adds a question mark to the mouse pointer Then click on the menu item you need help on Using Help Use this command for instructions about using Help Screen Designer includes an elaborate on line help system like the one available in many Windows application programs If you are not familiar with this help system you may want to learn about using help We suggest that you try and use the Help Index command as described above and return to Using Help command only if you find it necessary This is because the Using Help co
18. 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI User DLL Page 14 12 formulas Contains code for reading the status of the Product Assignment Reviewer and Wash Formula Reviewer ACSFORM CPP ACSFORM H Contains the class information and member functions for managing the Product assignments and Wash and Dry formulas ACSRUN CPP ACSRUN H Contains the code to cycle through the status of all Washers all Dryers Shuttle and the Conveyor Also contains code to control the shuttle under certain conditions and for downloading Product Assignments ACSWASH CPP ACSWASH H Contains the code for automating the Washers Performs formula downloading Washer unloading and moving shuttle to Washer ACSDRY CPP ACSDRY H Contains the code for automating the Dryers Calls for the shuttle when shuttle is loaded and dryer is empty unloads the shuttle into the dryer download product assignment and the Dry formula Also unloads the dryer onto the conveyor if conveyor is empty ACSUTILS CPP ACSUTILS H Contains general purpose functions PRINTSTR CPP PRINTSTR H Code for printing the Product Assignments and Wash and Dry formulas ACSDEFS H Definition file for states and structures USERDLL H Contains the structure that is passed between the Runtime and the User DLL IHMIUSER DEF Definition file for the project 14 8 5 User DLL Classes CProductMgr Array of pointers to CProductFormula objects CProd
19. 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PG tg ET Key Function Label Default Key F1 Screen 1 lt F1 gt F2 Screen 2 lt F2 gt F10 Screen 10 lt F10 gt System Key 0 SCREEN lt Alt S gt System Key 1 INPUT FIELD SELECT lt TAB gt System Key 2 WRITE lt ENTER gt System Key 3 CANCEL lt ESC gt System Key 4 MES lt Shift F4 gt System Key 5 NO lt Shift F5 gt System Key 6 PRINT lt ALT P gt P System Key 7 RESERVED lt Shift F7 gt System Key 8 ALARMS lt ALT A gt System Key 9 RESERVED lt Shift F9 gt System Key 10 SPOOL lt ALT P gt O System Key 11 HELP lt ALT H gt System Key 12 RESERVED lt Ctrl F2 gt System Key 13 RESERVED lt Ctrl F3 gt System Key 14 RESERVED lt Ctrl F4 gt System Key 15 TOGGLE BIT OFF ON lt Ctrl F5 gt Runtime Menu must be turned on Figure 9 17 Function Key Labels The Function Keys are listed in Figure 9 17 As shown each of the process screens Screen 1 Screen 2 etc may be assigned to a dedicated Function Key lt F1 gt lt F2 gt etc The operator may view Screen 1 by pressing lt F1 gt Screen 2 by pressing lt F2 gt etc These definitions are provided in Macros IDB and may be changed to suit your application The InstantHMI System Keys SCREEN INPUT FIELD SELECT WRITE CANCEL YES NO PRINT ALARMS SPOOL HELP and TOGGLE BIT OFF ON may be used with any screen if the situation permits These System Keys are described below As noted some of these System Keys require the Runtime Menu to be turned o
20. 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 27 the time intervals You have a choice of colors for the text titles plot window color and plot backgrounds for both the real time and historic views Real Time Color_ Tag Name Current value minwal maxval Temp Zone 1 0 00 100 00 MA Temp Zone 2 0 00 100 00 HA Temp Zone 3 0 00 100 00 MO Temp Zone 4 0 00 100 00 Figure 4 28 Plot Widget Sowing Real Time Trend at Runtime Select a pen and associate a tag variable to be plotted You can select the Tag Names for Pens 1 4 as needed from the All Tags group or select a Tag Group which assigns the first four tags from the group to Pens 1 4 You can choose the Pen colors You can also specify the data value corresponding to Low Value on the plot and High Value on the plot these will be used to scale the plotted trends automatically You may select the grid colors and the number of tics for the x axis and y axis scales You may choose to include a Legend listing the pens tag names and values etc below the plot area You may also choose to include History view this allows the runtime operator to select Runtime History view from a pull down menu included in the top right of the runtime plot view When all the specs needed for the plot are finished click on the OK button You will see a plot object on the design screen If this is not what you want you may select it and resize it or go back and edit the specs for the plot using the Edit
21. 25 Sample Time 1000 Imsec s y Script lt No Script gt Edit Color Foreground 7 Background Messages Operator Names z Remark This is Pull Down List object Combo Box Cancel Figure 4 54 Pull Down List Object Select Macro Button to place a macro button on the screen The macro button is functionally equivalent to the Windows button control Note that the Macro Button properties dialog box allows you to place a Label text in your choice of colors and Font attach a macro key to the button and or induce a Switch To Selected Screen functionality Only the portion of the Label Text that will fit the available button area will be displayed You may have multiple lines of text text wrapping happens automatically if the button height can accommodate them as shown in the button examples in the figure Compare the Macro Button to the graphic input Button widget discussed in Section 4 11 3 Macro Button Properties Display Properties Label Font Text Color ie Background Color Button Action M Simulate Macro Key Line 1 Line 2 Line 1 Switch To Screen IClipboard scr Figure 4 55 Macro Button Object Line 2 Select Check List to place one or more check boxes on the screen You will be prompted for the number of check box controls you want on the screen The check box is functionally equivalent to the Windows check box control Note that the check box display object properties dialog box allows you t
22. Driver Mame Comm Link Device Mame TCPAP REO cc AS 1005 hi Device Names CCM Remote Station 1005 a RS 1005 IP Address TCP Port Figure 11 5 Data Source IP Manager PDA CE InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Station Offset Time Out CAMI Mec InstantHMI TCP IP Page 11 5 Note Some features in this paragraph may not be available in the current implementation The IP Manager is useful when the InstantHM node computer with InstantHMI Runtime Engine running does not have a static IP address due to dial up Internet access or a dynamic IP environment InstantHMI allows IP names to be used in your InstantHMI tags for use in Widget and Data Objects Later at run time it is possible to assign actual IP addresses to these IP names If the IP address changed you simply have to use the IP Manager and change the IP address that is assigned to a IP name and all of your objects now point to the correct IP address The IP Address Manager simplifies setup in a dynamic IP environment It is also possible for an InstantHMI node that is going to be sharing data an InstantHMI Server to inform potential InstantHMI client nodes of its IP address by email Then any client node can retrieve the InstantHMI server node s IP address from its email and connect to the server It is simpler and we also recommend it for any InstantHMI server using the TCP IP connectivity option to use
23. Figure 10 24 Trend History Chart PDA 10 3 6 Bar Graph When InstantHMI starts executing on your Palm or Pocket PC the Menu Screen is the first screen to appear Tap on the Trend Graphs gt Bar Graph button to go to the Bar Graph Monitor screen On this screen you will see a pull down list of available tag groups and a bar graph If you have any selected group or any selected tag s on the Data Monitor Screen you will see the default horizontal stacked bar graph If the bar graph properties have not been set as you want tap on the Properties button to setup the bar graph properties InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Graph Properties Graph Style Group Boiler Group Display e Horizontal e Spaced Bars Tag Names Detail w Tog Home amp value A Boiler 1 Pressure A Boiler 1 Pressure B Mi O Boiler 1 Temperature B Boiler 1 Temperature C Mi Boiler 2 Pressure C Boiler 2 Pressure D Boiler 2 Temperature E Boiler 3 Pressure F Boiler 3 Temperature Boiler 4 Pressure H Boiler 4 Temperature Lo it Figure 10 25 Bar Graph Properties Setup PDA D BC gt Boiler 2 Temperature E Mi Boiler 3 Pressure F Wi O Boiler 3 Temperature G Wi o Boiler 4 Pressure H Mi Boiler 4 Temperature On the bar graph properties screens you can customize the tag s displayed on the bar graph Group Tap on the pull down arrow at the top to select one of the named tag groups or the un named
24. IF YOU TRANSFER POSSESSION OF THE PROGRAM OR ANY COPY TO ANOTHER PARTY YOUR LICENSE IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED TERM This license is effective until terminated You may terminate it at any other time by destroying the Program together with all copies in any form It will also terminate upon conditions set forth elsewhere in this Agreement You agree upon such termination to destroy the Program together with all copies in any form No refunds will be made on termination of license LIMITED WARRANTY SH warrants the diskette s and computer chips on which the Program is furnished to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of delivery to you as evidenced by a copy of your receipt However SH does not warrant that the Program will meet your requirements or that the operation of the Program will be uninterrupted or error free THE PROGRAM IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY EXCEPT AS STATED ABOVE OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES SH s entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be the replacement of any diskette s and or chips not meeting SH s Limited Warranty and which is returned to SH with a copy of your receipt INNO EVENT WILL SH BE LIABLE
25. Project Guide Help Documents Quick Stark User Manual Project Reports Project Guide Figure 2 6 LaunchPad Pop up Dialog Before and After Login To Login you may right click anywhere on LaunchPad border area to access the pop up dialog Figure 2 6 and select Login If required you must Login to access assigned InstantHMI functions If you try to access any protected functions requiring user authentication the Login dialog will appear and to let you to enter your User Name and Password Depending on your authentication InstantHMI will allow access to the assigned functions and deny access to other unassigned functions Please Login x User Name Administrator Figure 2 7 Login Dialog After you login you may access the pop up dialog Figure 2 6 to do the following e Change Password e Lockout InstantHMI e Logout If you select change password a dialog box appears enter your old password you used to login enter your new password and enter it a second time to confirm your new password selection and then click Change Change Password x Old Password New Password 2000000 Contirm Password eeee Figure 2 8 Change Password InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 5 To Logout select Logout lt User Name gt and enter your password The system will default to user Guest if no one is logged The system administrator
26. Remove Permissions for Everyone Allow Deny Full Control 0 Read O Special Permissionz O O For special permissions or for advanced settings Advanced click Advanced Figure 12 15 Configuring DCOM for OPCEnum Steps G InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHM OPC Page 12 9 Step H In the Identity tab you can select anyone of the options We recommend you use either The launching user or The System Account services only OpcE num Properties Ei ES General Location Security Endpoints Identity Which user account do you want to use to run this application C The interactive user C This user Meer AA Password A Eontirm password o The System account services only Braves Figure 12 16 Configuring DCOM for OPCEnum Steps H 12 3 3 Configure DCOM for OPCEnum Client PC OPCEnum is used by any OPC clients to browse available OPC servers Use the following steps to configure the OPCEnum DCOM component Step A In Windows click on Start gt Run type dcomcnfg and then click OK Step B Under Component Services expand Computers gt My Computer gt DCOM Config Step C Right Click OpcEnum and choose properties Step D In the General tab select an Authentication Level of None OpcEnum Properties ki E General Location Security Endpoints Identity General properties of this DCOM application Apolication Name Op
27. Sale sislaleleie m Z O O uv z N MD COM Matsushita Maxcom Messung Messung Mitsubishi Mitsubishi Mitsubishi FX2N Mitsubishi Format 1 Maxcom Messung 4 A Series X Series X2N Series 4 85 PC IF A or FX Series 85 PC IF A or FX Series Mitsubishi Format 4 84 384 484 584 884 984 Modbus RTU 4 Modbus Plus RTU 4 Modbus ASCII 4 4 4 3 6 78 0 62 0 3 2 0 8 2 0 62 5 1 8 J 0 53 0 5 0 0 5 0 02 0 0 00 3 2 7 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 E 84 384 484 584 884 984 J Daniel Enron modbus extensions Modbus Daniel Enron Modbus Enhanced Omron OPC 2 0 OPC 3 0 irect Net CCM2 Flow Computers Omron O N O O E O O D gt a 2 D a O 9 Boreal Dad loo 3 C fe 5 2 S 13 a O do Cc 3 S 3 Z e N 3 ep D op O S 3 18 1 1 JME 3 o oil 3 E O E E O ep mn LO Cc n O O 3 xe D aal o D o O ep D D 7 O N E J J U DLO5 DL205 DL305 DL405 and Compatibles 00 505 Series 5 Series 100U 115U 130U S595U 7 Series 212 221 222 224 and others 7 200 wEM 241 module oftPLC nstantHMI Runtime Engines 48 DAN 38 _ 04 45 495 1 Modbus TCP EEN o 4 389 8 08 EA O Siemens N Sul A 4 4 360 ORPLO ME 5 4 5 5 8 5 9 9 5 TCP IP InstanthMI Inter node 5 5 T U A z Square D i Square D ymax 300 400 500 700 Squ
28. Server gets CCM2 PLC info Data direct from CCM2 PLC InstantHMl Data Source Editor Data Source Mame Data Source Marne CCM2 Data Source CCM2 Data Source Comm Link Ports Comm Link Hal Mode Marnes COMI Y IHMI Node CCM2 Controller Driver Names Remote Data Source Marne CCM2 DirectNet v CCM2 Data Source Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits SEDO Mone 06 j k Time Cut Station Offset Time Cut Station Offset 1000 0 1000 Figure 11 11 Data Source for Server Node 1 and Client Node 2 To accomplish the above objective it is sufficient to do the following e Deploy a copy of the InstantHMI project from Node 1 on Node 2 This will include the screens Figure 11 10 for example and the Tag Database e Assume Node 1 Data Source CCM2 Data Source defines the serial link parameters to access and control the DL205 PLC serially Figure 11 11 Since all screen objects refer to the CCM2 Data Source edit this Data Source for Node 2 making Comm Link IHMI Node and Remote Data Source CCM2 Data Source It is convenient to use the same name CCM2 Data Source for the client local Data Source Name as well This will allow you to use without any change all screen objects and screens copied from Node 1 and deployed on Node 2 e Now run InstantHMI on Node 2 If Node 1 is running it will begin listening for connection request
29. Simpler is Better software philosophy the many useful and convenient features and the Instant On Ready to Go approach of PDA based technology InstantHMI 5 0 hopes to be your preferred HMI SCADA solution This manual covers all platforms on which InstantHMI can be deployed Windows PC Windows CE Windows Mobile Pocket PC and Palm OS All figures and discussions are illustrated with any one of the platforms unless there are significant differences among the implementations for the different platforms in which case the specific platform will be identified Differences that are obvious or minor graphical appearance type will not be documented If a specific feature Is critical for successful implementation of your project you must verify its availability please contact Software Horizons for assistance 1 2 InstantHMI Design and Runtime Platforms InstantHMI LaunchPad allows you to design your HMI project on a Windows PC platform and deploy it on any Windows PC Windows CE or PDA Windows Mobile Pocket PC or Palm platform which has an installed InstantHMI Runtime engine PC based HMI is well understood and most people are familiar with the concept However since full featured HMI on a PDA platform is not commonly expected and is not well understood in the rest of this section we address some salient PDA and CE platform issues While InstantHMI Nodes Runtime engines on various platforms can interact with each other any Ins
30. 901 992 993 l l l InstantHMI Tag Editor Data Specification Tag Editor Tag ID Tag Names Group Name 003 Test Tag3 y Tag Manager lt All Tags gt Tag Definitions Tag Name Memory Type Address Bit Register y 1103 0 5 Integer v lt No Msg Group Selected y Tag Description Field Width Format Message Groups Device Name Data Type Register 103 Data OK Cancel lt None gt y Data Source lt None gt v Edit Figure 5 10 Spool record Format file 5 SPL Suppose data is spooled to disk three times due to spooling events defects triggered by the spool register Suppose Register 1 had the values 101 102 103 at the three spooling instances Similarly let Register 2 have the values 201 202 203 and Register 3 have the values 301 302 303 at the same three spooling instances The PLC registers 101 102 103 are assumed to be programmed in the PLC to accumulate the total of the values in registers 1 2 and 3 respectively at the spooling instances Similarly it is assumed that the ladder logic accepts input from the operator when a visual defect is detected and enters the trigger value 5 in the Spool Register Suppose the report 1 PRT is printed on demand by the operator at this point You will see the report shown in Figure 5 11 Notice that the three spooled data records are embedded in the printer report InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008
31. Assume that Controller A Station 1 has 64 configuration parameters stored in a bank of registers R2101 R2164 similar to Example 1 Save the configuration in a recipe named controller configuration A Now suppose you wish to setup another Controller B Station 3 similar to Station A The configuration parameters for station B match the functional definition of those in Station A registers R2101 R2164 The 64 tags defined for Station A registers R2101 InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 28 R2164 match the corresponding tags defined for Station B the only difference being the Station for the two Controllers The controller configuration A from Station A will have the value 1 for Station This Station must be offset to match the value 3 for Station of Controller B before transferring the saved Controller Configuration A recipe This is easily done using the Station Offset parameter included in Data Source part of the tag definition Sections 3 1 Station Offset Station Controller B Station Controller A 2 3 Data Logs You may use spooled reports Section 5 3 as a way of logging data in a text file use commas or other delimiter to separate variables which may then be imported into Microsoft Excel or other suitable software for analysis InstantHMI provides a powerful optional feature to support two types of data l
32. Data Source Manager Data Sourte Mama therNet IP Total 2 Comm Link TCP IP Device Name ControlLogix Driver EtherNet IP Add New Timeout 1000 Station Offset O Comm Link TCP IP Device Name Walchem Driver Walchem Modbus TCP Timeout 2000 Station Offset O m a gt EtherMetie Canin Lirik Diente Nanas TOB BIP HF a ComfirolLogia Driver Harmes EtheratP Comm Links 2 Eiherlevie A A comm Link Tee E Dowce Marie Controllogie E Orr EtharheniP E Timeout 1000 E Siation Offset O ae Modbus TCH E Canim Link TOPAP E Derice Mame WWalchem Time Cul Tison isel 1000 o l Fudeanced o oo o o OO fanny fre Intact P Manager EPS O TF i 1 E Oer Walehem Modbus TOP A rigot 200 _ On a tet La Dalia Source Manager e E nc pl Figure 3 1 Data Source Manager and Editor PC Each tag in the tag database will have a Data Source attached to it For the active objects placed on a screen you will be able to override the tag data source at screen creation time if you so desire This may be necessary for projects where you want to view the same parameter on multiple controllers where the only difference may be the IP address or station number In the case of the station number you may use the station offset concept at the active object level If a station offset is specified this offset will be added to the station n
33. Edit Properties Test HTrend Temp Zone 4 20 0000 Hide For Help press Fl Figure 13 12 Historic Trend Plot Screen Click on Change Profile button to make changes to the profile to get the trend plot to your liking Click on the left or right scroll buttons at the bottom to scroll the trend to left or right by half a time period Click on Reset Plot to return to the trend plot displayed initially Change Plot Properties Many graph properties can be accessed and changed by clicking on the Edit Properties button Text Parameters Text a Vertical Axis Font F LINE ATTRIBUTES From LINE ATTRIBUTES Color Intercept Ez To Intercept Ticks Grids Grids D ZE ps St H i i Minor Ticks Minor Style Minar Tieke 1 M Minor Style J Position Above Position Right Below Logarithmic Scale G Left M Logarithmic Scale C Middle Cancel C Middle Gid Figure 13 13 Historic Trend Plot Graph Properties Text Parameters for Main title x axis title and y axis title are changed either by double clicking on the title text itself or by clicking Graph Properties button InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Historic Trend Utility Page 13 12 Show Hide pen trace from Trend Charts The datasets section of the profile specification dialog allows the selection of up to four pens for
34. IHMIRPT Report Designer Page 5 10 Summary of Defects Reg 1 data Reg 2 data Reg 3 data Spool data 101 201 Spool data 102 Spool data 103 Total 306 Figure 5 11 Printed Report Using 1 PRT Edit Tag To Edit or review your data specs move the beam cursor to the line with a tag data field and click the left button to position the blinking text entry cursor and click on Tag Data gt Edit tag command or use the short cut key Ctrl E Make sure that the Data spec dialog box shows the Tag number you selected and not a New Tag being created Go through the Dialog box selections and make changes as needed oee Printer Report Tenplate Exanple Figure 5 12 Report Designer Dataspec Dialog Box To Delete a data field delete the line containing the field tag Alternatively position the cursor at the pipe symbol for the field and use the Del key as many times as required to delete and the tag following it you may also type over the and the tag following it with spaces or other characters When you create a data spec for a field you will notice a Tag number appearing immediately after the pipe symbol It is important that you do not change this Tag number if you want the correct information printed at runtime You may of course delete the Tag number if you are deleting the field associated with it Caution The report and spool template files have embedded Tag information Use only Report Designer to ed
35. Input Monitor Widget to place a thumb wheel spinner on your screen that the operator can click on to increment or decrement the value in the associated memory address You can set the Spinner high end value and low end value in tag editor screen The range of the spinner is Low End Value High End Value and it wraps around Select Graphic Format V Bar Monitor Widget to have a dynamic vertical bar on the screen The low end 0 value and high end 100 value along with the value in the register whose address you must specify will determine the size of the vertical bar seen by the operator The color of this vertical bar is fixed Red Select Graphic Format Gauge Monitor Widget to have a dynamic needle moving in a circular arc enclosed in a box You can set the data values for the low end and high end in tag editor screen Note that the gauge Green range 0 40 Yellow range 41 80 and Red range 81 100 are specified in Once you set the values you will see the needle represent the associated memory address value on the gauge Select Graphic Format Fader Input Monitor Widget to place a fader slider on the screen The operator can set any value between Low end value and High end value to an associated memory address by dragging the slider on the fader up and down or click on the fader slot You can set the Low end value and High end value in tag editor screen Select Graphic Format Knob Input Monitor Widget to plac
36. Print command to print a report on the printer You may need Password authorization for this function This command works exactly like System Key 6 Print Section 9 4 10 The report printed will correspond to the screen displayed on the monitor That is if you are looking at screen 2 and use the Print command then report 2 PRT will be printed Of course the format and content of the report is totally flexible and determined by you and may contain any information from any other screen or any PLC registers not on the screen if you so desire Spool Report Use the Reports gt Spool command to spool reports to disk You may need Password authorization for this function This command works exactly like System Key 10 Spool Section 9 4 10 The spooled data is controlled by the spool record format for your screen 1 SPL for screen 1 SCR 2 SPL for screen 2 SCR etc The saved spool report will be named SPOOL S1 for screen 1 SPOOL S2 for screen 2 etc See Section 5 3 for a detailed discussion on Spooling Note that using the SPOOL command in conjunction with the PRINT command the operator can produce totally different reports to suit diagnostic or other special needs InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PC Page 9 13 Log Reports You may access Alarm Logs Event Logs Comm Logs and data logs The logged data can be transferred to the LaunchPad platform InstantHMI MDB or csv file and th
37. Script Editor Page 7 9 This example will return the Sine of 50 degrees Note Cos Tan Sinh Cosh Tanh have the same syntax Cos Degrees This function returns the value of Cosine function of the Degrees specified as a double precision number Tan Degrees This function returns the value of Tangent function of the Degrees specified as a double precision number Sart Number This function returns the positive square root of the Number specified as a double precision value Example a Sart 4096 This example will return the Square Root of 4096 Note ABS and Log have the same syntax ABS Number This function returns the absolute value of the Number specified Log Number This function returns the logarithm of the Number specified Ceiling Number Significance This function rounds Number up away from zero to the nearest multiple of significance Floor Number Significance This function rounds Number down towards zero to the nearest multiple of significance Round Number NumDigits Direction This function rounds Number to a specified number of digits NumDigits Set Direction to 1 to round down 1 to round up or 0 to round to nearest whole number 5 Miscellaneous Functions Script Function Return Value Beep Number Wait Msecs SelB i Beep Number This function produces a beep sound on the PC if sound is not muted Higher Number
38. Service Log prt report template on the left hand panel to select it click on slot 3 on the right panel and then click on Assign button to make the assignment as shown Figure 2 34 Instant ENT PROJECT Demo s Available Reports Printer Spool Assigned Printer Reports 227 DESIGN ao en giier S25 m Service Log prt 1 P 3 Service Log prt 4 SETUP 5 6 i af 7 8 g 1 Fy RUN Ren 1 SSS 1 D 1 v Delete Report Report Desinger HELP ede Gay sorrwane Licensed to HORIZONS d Wine My Name My Company Figure 2 34 Setup gt Reports gt Printer To exclude a previously assigned printer report from the project click to highlight and select the printer report in the Assigned Printer Reports panel and then click on the Remove button To create a new printer report template for the project click on the Report Designer button Our discussion here for Printer Reports applies to Spool Reports as well The slot number are used at Runtime to associate reports with screens The spool and printer report templates are used by the runtime engines to produce printer and spool reports In addition Special Tags can be setup in the LaunchPad to generate event driven reports and logs The LaunchPad can collect all Reports produced in the various runtime engines Printer Spool Datalogs Alarm Logs Event Logs System User activity logs etc for later analysis 2 4 7
39. The first screen is the one Runtime Engine will display after the Logo screen Instant HMI PROJECT Available Screens Project Screens 52 DESIGN yA CE Application Steel scr A 11 Demo Control Center scr A CE tmpzone1 scr 12 PC tmpzonel scr CE tmpzones scr _ Add gt 3 PC tmpzones scr q Demo Application Control C 4 CE tmpzonel scr SETUP Demo Control Center scr 15 CE tmpzones scr Demo Thank You scr 7 Insert gt 6 PPC TempZonel scr Demo Sample Applications 17 PPC TempZones scr Palm Application WYatlow st 18 Palm TempMonitor scr ww Palm TempMonitor scr 9 Palm TrendDisplay scr St RUN Palm TrendDisplay scr a lt Remove 10 Demo Application Contr z A eT a a HELP Licensed to My Name My Company Figure 9 6 Project Screens InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PC Page 9 6 The order of the screens is controlled by you and serves merely as an added convenience for the operator when he uses the runtime Screens gt Select menu The screens at runtime may also be accessed by the operator using the corresponding Function keys lt F1 gt lt F2 gt etc defined in the global Project Macros file Macros IDB see Section 9 4 10 9 3 3 Special Tags Command Functions ProjectElements ToolorUtility Section Special Tags Print Control Tags TagManager Add Remove Dialog Figure 9 7 Setup
40. This is useful for text objects on the screen You can configure alarming by clicking Tag Manager gt Tag Editor gt Setup Alarms Setup the alarm conditions and ensure you check the Flash Object checkbox Scripting You can also use scripting to achieve the desired effect The LED objects allow for a O and 1 value For data that ranges other than 0 or 1 or for more sophisticated graphical objects you can use Active Bitmaps What you want to do is create a script that reads the tag that you want to use for blinking After reading the tag in the script you can then decide and program whether or not an object should blink how often it should blink etc You can then write values 0 or 1 if using a LED object or any value if using Active Bitmaps to a Local Tag to simulate blinking of an object These Local Tag values will be monitored by a LED or Active Bitmap 6 How can create Momentary Buttons To create a Momentary Button you may use Touchzones Section 4 6 5 in the InstantHMI manual What you do is create two macros One macro will execute when the Touchzone is pressed and the other will execute when the Touchzone is released After creating the macros you will create a Touchzone on the screen Attach bitmaps to the Touchzone to represent the pressed and unpressed states and then attach the pressed and released macros to the Touchzone You can see some touchzone examples in the Demo project provided with each PC install
41. Thumbnails Test Config Tag Name Tag Value Screens List EvM Aeration Tank 45 EWM Settling Tank Pelo EvvMM Clarifier 65 ae zane Copy Config acros Clarifier EWM Grit Tank 78 Recipes EWM ae 56 EvWMM Aeration Tank i E EWM Setting Tank 5 Troubleshoot Scripts 1 6 Test Config Bitmaps New Config Delete Config 4 Config Functions Add Tag s Configuration Manager i Edit Tag Value Remove Tag s Gag sorrwane HORIZONS 4 Of ine Figure 3 22 Configuration Manager PC You will see the Configuration Manager dialog box showing a pull down list of configuration groups defined for your project Use Configuration Manager to design edit and manage the configuration groups associated with the tag database to suit your project needs To define a new configuration group name click on the New Configuration button The tags from the tag database included in the configuration definition together with the data values for the configuration are displayed in a table in the Configuration Manager dialog To include a new tag in the configuration definition click on the Add Tag s button select the tag s from the tag database displayed and click Done To edit the configuration tag value which defaults to zero click on the tag to select it in the table of configuration tags click on the Edit Tag Value button and then enter the tag value for the configuration You may also double
42. Use lt Page Up gt key to scroll up by one screen and lt Page Down gt key to scroll down one screen Use lt Ctrl Home gt or lt Ctrl End gt to go to beginning or end of the report Now type any text you wish The only reserved character is the pipe symbol which serves to identify the data location in the report All text entry in Report Designer is usually done in insert mode that is whatever you type is inserted at the cursor For editing you may use the Tab InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 IHMIRPT Report Designer Page 5 3 Backspace Del Ins Right arrow gt and Left arrow for any editing in the usual manner Note that you may set the Tab Width to any number of spaces you like See Section 9 Runtime Engine Tab Width 8 parameter Its default value is 8 Press the Ins key to toggle the insert mode to overwrite mode when you do this text you type will replace the text to the right of the cursor You may go back and correct or modify any part of the report on the screen Step 2 Enter Data specs Use the Tag Data menu to enter Data specs for any data you wish to include in your report Step 3 Save Report Refer to Sections 5 2 1 for more details You may also use File Exit to exit Report Designer You will be reminded to save your report template file if it is not saved 5 2 Main Menu Menu Bar The menu bar lists the main menu commands File Edit View Insert Tag
43. VGA Monitor and printers if any are energized Your PLC should be powered up as well and wired up properly for communication Make sure that InstantHMI is properly installed registered and activated with activation code provided by Software Horizons InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PC Page 9 5 9 3 Project Setup Runtime Engine uses the Data Source parameters to configure the communication ports and other setup parameters to identify special purpose registers in your PLC etc To make changes in the setup use the LaunchPad gt Setup button 9 3 1 Data Sources InstantHMI supports various communication links serial Ethernet IR RF etc depending on runtime platform see Section 8 to access the raw data for your application Use the Data Source Manager and Editor to setup one or more data sources as required for your application You may define multiple data sources each associated with a different communication driver in the same application Carefully select the data source comm link parameters Baud Rate Parity Data Bits and Stop Bits to match the corresponding communication parameters in your PLC Make sure the com port name COM1 COM2 etc matches the com port to which your PLC is connected Finally the Driver Name should match the InstantHMI driver name for your PLC i A Dala Source Edito InstantHMI Data Source Manager LANA ESA SE OY Dita Source Hame
44. When you see the desired line click the mouse If you drag the mouse click and hold the left button while moving the mouse then you will be drawing continuously on the screen To finish drawing the Poly Line release the mouse button and press the Esc key InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 16 Draw Object Use this tool accessed from the Screen Designer menu Objects gt Static Objects gt Draw to create static freehand drawn objects The drawing pen width and pen color are controlled by a pop up dialog box shown to you when the draw object is created Change the pen and color as desired and press the Enter key to start drawing by dragging the mouse on the screen Use the Escape key to open the dialog box to change pen size and color for further drawing All free hand drawing done with a single selection of the Draw object will be treated as a single object for future reference The draw dialog box may also be opened by pressing the escape key to change pen color or pen width when editing the draw object When finished with drawing tool press Escape key and click on Done in the draw dialog box Fill Object Use this tool accessed from the Screen Designer menu Objects gt Static Objects gt Fill to create Static graphical fill objects to fill any open area of screen bounded by a well defined continuous single color boundary When you choose the fill tool the tool name Fil
45. a e dd do B 1 BZ ASSOC QUESTIONS ana rico ci oa B 1 CR Ee AIG AMO a da aa E C 1 InstantHMI for Your Application Page tt 1 InstantHMI for your Application 1 1 Introduction InstantHMI incorporates our Design Once Deploy Anywhere HMI technology This will allow you to design your HMI project on a Windows PC platform and deploy it on any Windows PC or Windows CE or PDA Windows Mobile Pocket PC or Palm platform which has an installed InstantHMI Runtime engine Install it on Windows PC platforms for a traditional single or multi node Client Server HMI setup For a mobile wireless solution install it directly on a Windows Mobile PDA or use our InstantChio technology to run from a CF SD card Use InstantPanel our Windows CE color touch system 5 6 8 10 4 and 12 1 screens for panel mount machine control applications Any InstantHMI runtime engine can stand alone or be part of a client server network ve Platform Scalable Platform Independent UNETU HMI Next Generation HMI SCADA Technology Pocket a Ali Rug poet a nstantChip Runtime Po ate ur OS rm Palm TIT Runtime dEl po Copyright 2000 2007 Softw Horizons Inc All Rights Re ed Figure 1 1 InstantHMI for Your Hardware Platform InstantHMI 5 0 reinforces the Simpler is Better Software Philosophy by re architecting and re engineering the numerous HMI functions in InstantHMI 4 x With its Design Once Deploy Anywhere HMI technology the
46. and may contain any number of letters numbers period and underscore _ You may not use blanks or the minus sign in variable names Global variables are shared between scripts Global variables may be used to transfer parameter values between Scripts because these variables retain their values between executions of any and all scripts The declaration GlobalVar VarName defines VarName as a global script variable This function has no return value void All global variables must be declared otherwise they will be treated as local variables However for backward compatibility with scripts created using previous version of InstantHMI Script Editor undeclared single character upper case variables A B Z are treated as global variables declared automatically by the Script Editor We recommend you include all your GlobalVar declarations in the Startup script Startup sct for your easy reference InitAllGlobals Value This function allows you to set the initial value of all the 26 global script variables A B Z to the specified Value This function has no return value void Example InitAllGlobals 50 This example will set all global variables A Z to a value of 50 Note InitAllLocals has the same syntax LocalVar VariableName Starting with version 4 1 2 B2005 you are allowed to use any long variable names for local variables You were previously restricted to use any of 26 local
47. and the communication parameters such as Baud rate Parity Data bits Stop bits Station ID etc See Section 10 3 1 for details InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PDA Page 10 6 Port e Direct Serial Baud w 9600 Pority e Mone Dota Bits w 5 Stop Bits e 1 Device w Modbus ATU Enhanced Time Cut 1000 msec Station Offset 0 Figure 10 10 Comm Setup PDA Bar Code Tap on the Barcode button to access the Barcode Setup Screen The Barcode Input function can be used if InstantHMI with barcoding option is installed on a handheld equipped with a barcode scanner such as Symbol PPT28xx Barcode Setup i Barcode Transfer Settings Barcode Transfer Tag Barcode Tag Max Barcode Registers fo Barcode String Order High byte low byte Low byte high byte Handshaking Tag No Handshak ing gt O _ Cancel GE es Sem 3 26 pa Figure 10 11 Barcode Setup PDA Database Info Tap on the Database Info button to access the Database Info Setup Screen Tap on il for help tips on this Database Info popup screen The Tag DB Info and Msg DB Info functions are discussed in Section 3 7 Tap on the Return button to return to the previous screen Database Info Tag DE Info isg DE Info Figure 10 12 Database Info Menu PDA 10 2 7 Troubleshoot The Troubleshoot button leads to an interactive selection
48. copy MasterSetup idb IHMI4 DB Backup copy IHRCP idb IHMI4 DB Backup copy IHRecPrefDB idb IHMI4 DB Backup copy IHScanHist idb IHMI4 DB Backup copy IHMISettings idb IHMI4 DB Backup copy IHSystemDB idb IHMI4 DB Backup copy IHTDB idb IHMI4 DB Backup copy IHTShoot idb IHMI4 DB Backup copy IHMlUsers idb IHM4 DB Backup ren IHBMP idb IHMI BitmapDB idb ren IHCONFIG idb IHMI ConfigDB idb ren IHDLEVENTS idb IHMI DatalogEventsDB idb ren IHDSM idb IHMI DataSourceDB idb ren Macros idb IHMI MacrosDB idb ren IHMSG idb IHMI MessageDB idb ren Network idb IHMI NetworkDB idb ren MasterSetup idb IHMI ProtectionDB idb ren IHRCP idb IHMI RecipeDB idb ren IHRecPrefDB idb IHMI PreferenceDB idb ren HScanHist idb IHMI ScanHistoryDB idb ren IHMISettings idb IHMI SettingsDB idb ren IHSystemDB idb IHMI SystemDB idb ren IHTDB idb IHMI TagDB idb ren IHTShoot idb IHMI TroubleshootDB idb ren IHMlUsers idb IHMI UsersDB idb echo IHMI4 IHMI5 bat file finished A 3 InstantHMI Activation Utility A 3 1 Introduction The InstantHMI Activation Utility allows you to register and activate your InstantHMI LaunchPad and PC Runtime Engine installations Without activation InstantHMI will run only as a limited evaluation To enjoy all of the features you need to activate Activating is as simple as filling in a registration form and emailing faxing or postal mailing the registration information to Software Horizons Once Software Horizons receives your registration in
49. gt Programs gt Microsoft ActiveSync to start Active Sync then click File gt Get Connected Step 3 Connect the Pocket PC to your PC InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 18 Connectivity with InstantPanel Windows CE Panel Platform InstantHMI uses the database synchronization feature Active Sync on Windows CE platforms to deploy projects To Serially ActiveSync with a Windows CE Panel provided by Software Horizons use the following instructions Step 1 If Active Sync is not installed on your PC do so now ActiveSync can be downloaded from the Microsoft Website using the following link http www microsoft com windowsmobile downloads activesync38 mspx Step 2 Run ActiveSync on your PC then click File gt Get Connected Step 3 Connect COM1 DB9 Male on CE Panel to RS 232 on PC using adapter provided by Software Horizons Step 4 On PC click Next button in ActiveSync Step 5 On CE Panel Navigate to the Windows folder My Computer gt Windows and run REPLLOG EXE Step 6 On PC once connected you will be prompted to create a Partnership We recommend that you do this as this is necessary to use Network ActiveSync later on Connectivity with Palm OS Platform InstantHMI uses the database synchronization feature Hot Sync on Palm OS platforms to deploy projects Step 1 If Hot Sync is not installed on your PC do so now HotSync software is u
50. lt All Tags gt group Bar Tag Names Select tags to be associated with each bar A B l by tapping on the button on the left hand side next to the check box Only checked tag s will be shown on the bar graph screen the others will be hidden Tap on the More Button to setup more graph properties On the Graph Style screen you can select various items to customize your bar graph display Display Select Horizontal or Vertical bar graph display Select Stacked up to 9 Bars A B C l or Spaced upto 7 bars A B G bars for your bar graph Detail Select Tag Name and or Tag value to be displayed for each bar You can Hide or Show these details while viewing the bar graph Bar Colors Select bar colors for each of the bars A B l by tapping on the button next to the color indicator for the bar Tap on Done to return to the graph properties screen Again tap on Done to return to the Bar graph monitor screen and see your bar graph displayed with the new bar graph properties Tap on Cancel to discard the changes and return to the Bar Graph monitor screen and see the bar graph with the old bar graph properties Note that tapping on the Hide Show Details button allows you to hide or show the details tag name and or tag value for the bars InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PDA Page 10 15 Bar Graph Graph Group Y Boiler Group A nm Q A D O
51. produces a longer beep This function has no return value void Wait Msecs This function pauses the execution and waits for the specified Msecs This function has no return value void GetBit Variable BitNumber This function returns the boolean bit value in the specified Bit Number position 0 1 15 in the specified Variable InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Script Editor Page 7 10 Example a GetBit b 1 This example will get Bit Number 1 from variable b and place the result into variable a SetBit Variable BitNumber BitValue This function sets the Bit Number in Variable equal to the Bit Value 0 or 1 Example SetBit a 1 0 This example will set Bit Number 1 in variable a to O GetLast Error This function returns the last runtime error encountered during script execution as per the table in Section 7 4 and resets the error to zero Execute Macro Macro Key Just as the macro command Execute Script Script Name causes all statements in the script Script Name to be executed this script function executes the macro command defined for the Macro Key However make sure you avoid nested script execution which is disallowed as the result is unpredictable 6 Recipe Functions RecipeLoad RecipeName RecipeSave RecipeName RecipeWrite RecipeName RecipeLoad RecipeName Use the Recipe Loa
52. versions You should use the Uni code version unless you have older Windows such as Windows 95 Unicode version has all the features of non Unicode version in addition it may support as in additional languages Unicode Palm OS platforms do not support Uni code A 1 1 Compatible Hardware Certain features such as color serial connectivity Bluetooth WiFi may not be supported by the hardware or may require a later version of Windows or Palm OS or Pocket PC Other features may require hardware attachments or specific vendor manufactured PDA For example TDS Recons are rugged and Symbol PDA support barcoding InstantHMI correctly senses compatible hardware in most cases The following tables list hardware known to be compatible CE 4 10 4 20 5 0 InstantPanel AppSrvCE ICP DAS Maple InstantHMI Standard Features CE NET 4 X 5 X Systems and compatibles with ARM MIPS Data Logging Recipes X86 SH3 SH4 Processors Barcode RFID support Scripting Graphics and Color Pocket PC Compaq HP Ipaq 17xx 19xx 24xx 36xx InstantHMI Standard Features 2000 2002 2003 38xx 39xx 42xx 59xx 65xx 69xx Data Logging Recipes Windows Mobile Dell Axim X3 X3i X30 X5 Barcode RFID support Scripting 5 0 or later TDS Recon TDS Ranger Ranger X Graphics and Color Symbol PPT8800 and compatibles from other manufacturers Palm OS Palm lllc m505 m515 Tungsten Series and InstantHMI Standard Features 3 5 4 0 or later compatibles
53. where X is your CD ROM drive to begin installation You will see the following dialog g Platform Scalable Platform Independent New Generation HMI Technology Runtime Engine Design Once Deploy Anywhere Figure A 2 InstantHMI Installation from CD Click on LaunchPad Designer amp PC Runtime Engine to start the installation The rest of the installation is exactly as described above under the heading Installing InstantHMI for Download InstantHMI Copyright 2000 20088 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Installation Registration and Activation Page A 8 Security Requirements to run InstantHMI on Windows XP 2000 InstantHMI should be installed under the Administrator account or an account with full administrative privileges 1 The InstantHMI install directory including all files and folders need Full Control Access 2 Depending on the OS individual user temp folders Documents and Settings Username Local Settings temp need Full Control Access 3 The C Windows Temp need Full Control Access For Registration Activation information see Section A 3 2 A 2 2 InstantHMI Runtime Engine for PC When you install the LaunchPad Designer on your PC the Runtime Engine for PC is automatically installed See Section A 2 1 A 2 3 InstantHMI Runtime Engine for CE lf you have ordered InstantPanel CE touch systems from Software Horizons the runtime engine is pre installed and ready to go Contact Software Horizo
54. you may do so carefully using the group names and Group ID in IHMI TagExport Groups csv and the Tag Number ID in IHMI TagExport csv The Tag Groups and their tag members are displayed in the tree diagram in the Tag Manager The tag groups are listed alphabetically Note that the special default group called All Tags includes all the tags in the tag database Likewise the special group called Alias Tags includes all the alias tags for other tags in the tag database Any group with a sign on its left contains one or more tags assigned to it to see the collapsed tags assigned to this group click on the sign To collapse a tag list in view under its group heading click on the sign attached to the group Double click on a tag or a tag group in the tree to view and or edit the details To select a tag or a tag group click on it and see your selection hi light You may access the three tag functions New Tag Edit Tag and Delete Tag Section3 3 4 the Alias Tag function Section 3 3 3 and the four Group functions New Group Add Tag Remove Tag from group and Remove Group Section 3 3 2 by clicking on the corresponding function buttons Click on Save button periodically while working with the Tag Manager Click on Done when you are finished with the Tag Manager 3 3 2 Tag Group Functions PC InstantHMI maintains a database of all the various information items tags of interest to you in a tag database
55. Acquisition EtherNet IP Interface to Controllers Maintenance amp Troubleshooting View your Application Solution in InstantHMI Runtime e Please exit all other Windows programs Click Next to install InstantHMI software on your computer Extracting Files Please Wait InstantHMI Copyright 2000 20088 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Installation Registration and Activation Page A 6 You will be informed of the progress while the installation files are being extracted from the downloaded file IHMI PCInstall Unicode exe When this extraction is complete you are ready to begin the installation process Exit all other Windows programs and then click on Next to continue with the installation To quit without installing click on Exit You will see the InstantHMI License Agreement You may select I Disagree and click Exit to quit installing InstantHMI If you select Agree you will be able to click on Next to continue with the installation License Agreement oe Platform Scalable Platform Independent ite tive HMI New Generation HMI Technology InstantHMI License Agreement Terms and Conditions SOFTWARE HORIZONS INC Instant HMI PROGRAM LICENSE AGREEMENT YOU SHOULD CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING THIS PACKAGE IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THEM PROMPTLY RETURN THE PACKAGE WITHIN 10 DAYS AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED USING THIS PACKAGE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF TH
56. All figures and examples in this manual are for illustrative purposes only In no way does including these figures and examples in this manual constitute a guarantee as to their suitability for any specific application To test and approve all programs prior to installation is the responsibility of the end user A 1 3 Registration Activation Policy What is Registration Activation Software Registration Activation is a copy protection scheme that uses an Activation Code to enable full functionality of our software product It prevents the use of unlicensed software and thus protects the software manufacturer as well as the customer interested in preventing the use of unlicensed software How does it work When you install InstantHMI it will generate a unique Serial Number for that specific installation of the software on that specific computer device You then send this Serial Number along with requested registration information to Software Horizons See the detailed registration instructions in Section A 3 2 in this manual Upon receipt of your Registration information Software Horizons will issue an Activation code which you will enter into the software on the computer device that generated the Serial Number to enable the functionality you purchased NOTE When you purchase our software license you are in effect paying for the Registration Activation code If you have problems after you have activated your registered software please contact
57. Authentication Level of Default UmOPC Server Properties General Location Security Endpoints Identity General properties of this DCOM application Application Name UniQPC Server Application ID BS3906C9 FE 09 407 0 8F52 4057E 4144746 Application Type Local Server Authentication Level MEETS Local Path Cancel Apply Figure 12 25 DCOM for UniOPC Server Steps A D Step E In the Location tab choose Run application on this computer Do not make more than one selection UnmOPC Server Properties El ES General Location Security Endpoints Identity The following settings allow DCOM to locate the correct computer for this application If you make more than one selection then COM uses the first applicable one Client applications may overde your selections I Run application on this computer F Aun application on the following computer Cancel Apply Figure 12 26 DCOM for UniOPC Server Step E InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHM OPC Page 12 15 Step F In the Security tab Select Use Default for Launch and Activation Permissions and Access Permissions and Customize for the Configuration Permissions Click the Edit button under Configuration Permissions to edit permissions UniOPC Server Properties lx General Location Security Endpoints Identity Which user account do you
58. Backspace key Use the lt Enter gt key to transfer the current field entry to the designated tag memory address Tap on the ESC key to cancel the entry and return to the data field on your screen InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PDA Page 10 19 QuickPad NumericMode E 12 47 QuickPad Alpha Mode 12 46 imisi Numeric Mode 12 48 Figure 10 33 QuickPad Data Entry Pads PDA If the QuickPad keypad shown is not what you want tap on 123 or ABC or HEX or BIN to switch to the Integer or Alpha or Hex or Binary keypad Tap on the keyboard icon if you need the full keyboard provided by the PDA operating system You will notice that the QuickPad keys are much larger than the PDA s keyboard and in addition only the relevant keys are displayed to make data entry even easier QuickPad Binary Mode 4 12 49 InstantHMI Data Entry a 12 50 Input Data Figure 10 34 QuickPad Data Entry Example PDA InstantHMI has a built in facility for checking if the data entered by the Operator is in a valid range This feature for Checking Limits must be requested at screen creation time in SCREEN DESIGNER see Section 3 3 3 Note You may include a Macro Key labeled as you wish for example Write Screen Data and attach this key to the macro function Screen Write discussed in Section 6 3 Data Entry Using Stylus Only InstantHMI allows any screen to b
59. Controllers This example will illustrate the parameter setup in the above User DLL to set Output 2 on the Watlow 96 Controller address 717 to heat at 3 00am and to turn off at 7 00pm for controller stations 1 and 2 lt will also disable the time trigger control on Sundays December 25 1997 and July 4 1998 The USERDLL section in the IHMI 4 INI contains the following NUMBER _OF EXCEPTIONS 2 SKIP1 12 25 97 SKIP2 07 04 98 14 8 Example 4 Commercial Laundry Controller 14 8 1 Introduction This user DLL involves a specific implementation using ACS Controllers an OEM manufacturer in a Commercial Laundry application 14 8 2 Laundry Application Time Line of Activity Step 1 Operator loads Washer Step 2 Operator enters Product Code into ACS Controller Step 3 Operator pushes Start button on the Washer Step 4 User DLL detects Start button press and loads the wash formula of the entered Product Code into the Washer Step 5 Washer is sequenced by ACS Controller as per loaded formula User DLL monitors the status of ACS Controllers and PLCs Step 6 Washer finishes the load Step 7 When Washer is finished with load User DLL signals the Shuttle to pick up the load InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI User DLL Page 14 10 Step 8 User DLL signals Washer to unload onto the Shuttle and transfers the Product Code to the Shuttle Step 9 When a dryer becomes free User DLL s
60. Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Script Editor Page 7 16 Declare named Local Variables for the script LocalVar FirstTime LocalVar Temp1 LocalVar Temp2 LocalVar Al Unscaled LocalVar Al Scaled Check to see if this is the first time running the script if FirstTime 0 FirstTime 1 SetLocallnt 101 3072 goto END Get Local 101 unscaled subtract 2048 and place result in Tempi Al Unscaled GetLocallnt 101 Temp1 Al Unscaled 2048 0 Temp2 16 0 2048 0 Do the conversion place result in Al Scaled Al Scaled Temp1 Temp2 4 0 Set the result in local 102 SetLocallnt 102 Al Scaled END Figure 7 6 Script 4 20 mA SCT for 4 20 mA Example Example 3 Ramp and Soak This example illustrates how a script can be used for implementing a ramp and soak scheme To keep the example simple a simulation approach is used and the control details are eliminated For convenience of operator data entry a screen is setup for entering the ramp and soak profile Different profiles could be setup before hand as recipes to be selected but that approach is not illustrated here ALCL jx Me 0 wee 19 o bpt pa Os Se oaa oa Tielziojsoleisjeleleisia tw Je JJ sis jf af 3 A Y Ll ln Enter Ramp Soak Parameters for Screen 9 A mel JOTA A E LA Dreses y 210 jaje leisio After Entering Data ent
61. Description Error in executing GetLocallnt function Error in executing GetLocalLong function Error in executing GetLocalFloat function Error in executing GetLocalDouble function Error in executing SetLocallnt function Error in executing SetLocalLong function Error in executing SetLocalFloat function Error in executing SetLocalDouble function Error in executing GetField function Error in executing SetField function Error in executing GetRegister function Attempt at division by zero error Error in executing GetByte function Error in executing SetByte function Error in executing GetMemory function Error in executing SetMemory function Error in executing SetRegister function Unsupported function called No ActiveX Control associated with script ActiveX Control Property name does not exist or is read only ActiveX Control Dispatch not implemented ActiveX Control verb not supported Figure 7 9 List of Error Messages for Script Editor InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 8 Communication Links InstantHMI provides various options to connect your Runtime Engine platform to the machine process controllers The communication links supported include e Wired Serial Cable Section 8 2 or TCP IP Ethernet Section 11 e Wireless IR Section 8 3 e Wireless RF Section 8 4 Machine Process gt Comm Interface _Serial TCP P Infrared WiFi Bluetooth Runtime LaunchPad
62. Designer Help System runs in its own window you may run Report Designer and Help in two tiled windows side by side use the Report Designer window to do your work after displaying the help on the topic you need in the Help window There are many different ways you can use the Help System experiment and find the way that suits the way you work About Use this command to display information about Report Designer copyright notice and version number InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 IHMIRPT Report Designer Page 5 12 About InstantHMI Report Designer E Copyright C 1393 2008 Software Horizons Inc Version 5 0 1 2 Build 2001 Figure 5 14 Help About Report Designer 5 3 Spooling You may use spool record templates which you can use with the spooling capability discussed in this Section to print multiple reports to disk concurrently This spooling capability in effect provides you with multiple up to 100 virtual printers You may also merge the spooled reports into a single printed report whose template is under your total control Spooling feature is available on PC CE and Pocket PC platforms 5 3 1 Naming Spool Files For user convenience named spool templates are preferable but to allow access to spool template files from controller registers numbered template files SPL 1 2 99 are more convenient Here we describe how you may assign any named spool record templa
63. Figure 11 2 shows a more complex configuration We have one InstantHMI node acting as a supervisory computer Super Node that is collecting data from several server InstantHMI nodes Each of the server InstantHMI nodes is connected to a PLC or network of PLCs This allows the Super Node to read and or write data to the attached PLCs of the remote nodes InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI TCP IP Page 11 2 Using the above example as a guide you can configure InstantHMI to exchange information among InstantHMI nodes This can be used for example if you need to transfer data from one PLC to another that are at different sites or to transfer data from one type of PLC model A to another model B at a remote location 11 2 TCP IP Interface Setup Overview The InstantHMI node computer with a PLC connected to it is termed a Server node Any other InstantHMI node which reads writes data to from the Server node is termed a Client node Note that a single node may perform both roles a client accessing data through another node acting as a server and a server providing data access to some other client node Each tag in the tag database for both Client and Server will have a Data Source attached to it For the data objects placed ona screen you will be able to override the tag data source at screen creation time if you so desire This may be necessary for projects where you want to v
64. Fixed Uint Fixed Long Fixed Ulong ASCII Select Integer format if data in the field is to be a signed integer stored in a single 16 bit register Select Ulnteger if the data is to be an unsigned integer Select Hex format if data in the field is to be represented as a string of hex digits 0 9 A F Select Binary format if data in the field is to be represented as a string of zeros and ones Select BCD format if data in the field is to be a Binary Coded Decimal Note that in this case the highest value you can store in a 16 bit register is 9999 Select Message format if you wish to display an appropriate message from a Message Group Note that Message format is valid even for Input l on the runtime screen You may create message groups and the messages for each group using the Message Manager Section 3 4 After you select Data Format Message tap on the More button and select the message group where the messages for this tag field are listed and then tap Done in the More Tag Properties screen Tag Properties Nore Boiler 1 Temperature Low End value High End flue 0 100 Message Group Marne w o Group Selected Figure 3 13 More Tag Properties Choose Data Memory Register or Local and type in the Address xxxx etc At run time the integer value in Register xxxx will be used as the message number to display the corresponding text message from the message group assigned to this tag field Example We illustrate Re
65. IHMI Node with Device Node Name to match that of the server that is its associated IP address Note Some features in this paragraph may not be available in the current implementation After the runtime engine is initialized if it has a Client task that is it requires read write access to controller data from other server nodes it will try to connect with the server s If the IP address is not known or the server is off line the client will use known email address for the server and request the server s IP address or its status Once a reply email is received with the server s IP address the client will proceed to connect with the server If the connection is accepted the client will ask the server for its available Data Sources the server will send a list of available data sources and the client will match its remote data source name with an appropriate data source name from the server The client will then send a list of active tags referencing the server as the remote IHMI Node which the server will then add to its list of monitor tags When the server detects that the client data has changed it will send the changed data to the requesting client The client will receive the data from the server and update the screen and other data objects as appropriate 11 2 3 TCP IP Client Objects in Screen Designer When you create any data object in the InstantHMI Screen Designer you will have the option of addressing a local client s own
66. IP nodes Step 3 Identify Tags Click on Help button for a quick review of Step 3 Identify Tags When ready click on Identify Tags button to access the Data Viewer tool which allows you to define data blocks identify the tags of interest in the controller and then save them to the tag database Step 3 Identify Tags Select Controller 1 i ES Memory Type New Project Wizard dal AA A IR A Device 940 demo node 120 Modb This wizard provides the quickest way to create an Data Source Neme emory Type Data Type Display Format InstantHMI Dataviewer H il Project for your application allows you to define a y Step 1 Create New Project data block consecutive El raw Regster 2 2 02 B E rw Regster3 3 03 Enter Data Bloc memory locations aa Online J Step 2 Define Data Source El no Reguera 4 w start Address memory eaten ga Onin he a ro gt m s to check communication with ng Step 3 Identify Tags AB 1 a Caram Of Edna F riw Register 10 10 11 0 Corren OF your controler select anc step 4 Design screen save tags in the Tag Database step 5 Test in Runtime D Click Online to Monitor Data Bloc Figure 2 26 New Project Wizard Step3 Define Data Source Enter Memory Data Items to Monitor Identify Tags Select the controller memory type Enter the data block start address Enter the number of data items to monitor in the Data Viewer Click Online button and let the Data Viewer
67. Lancel Figure 5 7 Report Designer Dataspec Dialog Box Specify the data Format to be used in the report by clicking on one of the formats in the pull down list Select a message group if display format is Message To enter Field Width move the mouse cursor inside the edit control box where it changes to an beam click the left button and then type the number desired The Tag ID box shows the tag number chosen automatically and maintained internally for the current data item If you change your mind about creating the new data item click on the Cancel button Click on the OK button to accept your data specs you will return to the report design window where your data position will be indicated by a pipe symbol followed by a three digit tag number The pipe symbol identifies a tag and is reserved for this purpose in printer report and spool record Templates InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 IHMIRPT Report Designer Page 5 8 Report Designer supports the special data format Spool file Spooling is a very powerful feature used in data logging and reporting This feature is covered briefly here with a more detailed discussion in Section 5 3 The Spool_file format is used to include in your report spooled report files written to disk Spool reports are exactly like printer reports the only difference is that they are printed on a virtual printer that is written to a disk file To print spo
68. M Same f Same On 1 Stop Set Remark Toggle Switch OK Cancel Button Properties Button Properties Type Windows Button Preview Type Bitmap Button y Preview M Show Frame Color Mv Show Frame Color iv Latch Input Start iv Latch Input On iv Maintain Aspect Ratio Press On Release Off Parameters Press On Release Off Parameters eu Cue Text Text Button See out Yalue Text Font Color Color Yalue Bitmap File omo strt set set set of 0 IMw Swich ORbmp vV Same M Same T Same on fa se Set EN Set ofi immeswich Ombmp cer cer cer Figure 4 49 Display Object Properties Widget Windows Bitmap Buttons You may also create a Button by using the Widgets palette Click on the Button Widget note that the cursor changes shape to a button cursor move to the desired location on screen and click You get the default InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 47 button on screen and the cursor changes to a Select Tool cursor Double click on the button and change any button properties Widget Button Properties For the Off state enter the tag value example 0 and label text example Start Note that we have chosen to label the button with the action to take push to Start For the On state enter the tag value example 1 and label text example Stop You also have complete control of the text font text color
69. Manager PDA InstantHMI allows access to Controllers over an RF link using Ethernet and or serial adapter modules available as an RF kit from Software Horizons Inc Wireless RF connectivity using Modbus TCP or other protocols involves TCP IP in most cases which in turn requires IP addresses for the Controller nodes You may access the IP manager screen through the Data Source editor or through the InstantHMI Menu Screen Tag Variables gt IP Manager InstantHMI makes the job of specifying IP addresses more convenient by allowing you to associate Device Names to IP addresses Only the device names will be used in Tags associated with that Controller device If the IP address for a Controller node is changed all you need to do is use the IP editor to reenter the changed IP address for the Controller device name All the tags for the Controller remain unchanged Tap the Add button to add a new device name Tap the Delete button to delete a selected device name or tap the Edit button to change the device s IP Address Tap on Done button to exit the IP Manager 3 2 Data Table Viewer Click on LaunchPad gt Tags gt Data Viewer or in Screen Designer click on Tag Data gt Data Viewer to access the Data Viewer tool to rapidly verify communications with controller memory of interest display the data from these memory locations in a tabular form and transfer the InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008
70. Node CZ lt 192 168 0 12 gt Chet can you check the hopper Node MI Mitsubishi PLC Node CZ lt 192 168 0 12 gt Node RP Win2000 PC Sure back to you in a sec Node RP Win ME Connected InstantHMl Nodes New Message to Send Node CZ lt 192 168 0 12 gt M Accept Incoming Messages Broadcast Sent Message Figure 11 9 Chat Utility Dialog To access the Chat feature in the Runtime Engine click on Comm Links gt Chat Utility the chat utility dialog will appear The InstantHMI Chat feature also allows for dissemination of information to multiple InstantHMI nodes using the Broadcast Sent Message mode The broadcast chat mode may be restricted to certain nodes Click on one of the available InstantHMI node names to chat with When a TCP IP connection is made with the selected node its name will appear in the Connected InstantHMI Nodes list Any node may Accept Incoming Messages or refuse such messages In the broadcast chat mode each of the connected InstantHMI nodes will see your sent message In the private non broadcast chat mode only the selected connected node will receive the private chat messages sent To switch between broadcast and private chat modes click on the Broadcast Sent Message check box To start a private chat make sure the Broadcast Sent Message box is unchecked and select one of the Connected InstantHMI Nodes or one of the Available InstantHMI Nodes to start a private chat wi
71. OEM DLL and User DLL which can be programmed by you and or us to meet most any requirements In order to accomplish the above objectives the Runtime engine utilizes a communication link Section 8 and a driver COMMxx DLL to connect the operator and the raw data source via programmable and other I O controllers used in the application The two digit number xx in COMMxx identifies the communication driver 04 for Modicon RTU Comm04 DLL driver 33 for Allen Bradley DF1 driver Comm33 DLL 78 for Allen Bradley EtherNet IP driver Comm78 DLL etc A variety of communication drivers are available A partial list of drivers is included in Appendix C please consult Software Horizons for your driver needs Also Multiple driver support is available where additional drivers are connected to other communication ports on the computer These drivers may be for other PLC s or other I O devices A driver kit comm00 is available to help you write your own drivers Software Horizons can InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PC Page 9 2 also provide you with a price quote for the services to customize the driver kit or the User DLL to meet any special requirements of your application If InstantHMI is not installed on your platform do so now Appendix A You can access the runtime engine by clicking on the runtime icon or the Run Project button on the InstantHMI LaunchPad if the runtime is installed
72. Open Note You can also access the Install Tool dialog by selecting Install from the Palm Desktop program group or by double clicking IHMIxx PRC file from Software Horizons Inc Step 6 Click Done in the Install Tool dialog Step 7 Perform a HotSync operation to install InstantHMI on your handheld A 2 6 Converting InstantHMI 4 x Projects to 5 0 We have provided a Batch file listed below to help you with the conversion echo off echo IHMI4 IHMI5 bat Converts InstantHMI 4 x Projects to 5 0 GONO ttl echo Step 1 It will backup your InstantHMI 4 x Project Files echo Step 2 It will rename 4 x databases to match 5 0 conventions echo echo To use echo 1 Install InstantHMI 5 0 C IHMI 4 or C IHMI 5 echo This will retain all project folders you have created echo echo 2 Copy IHMI4 IHMI5 bat file to 4 x PROJECT Folder to be converted to 5 0 echo EXAMPLE C IHMI 5 Test Project echo echo 3 Run IHMI4 IHMI5 bat echo echo Type Ctrl C to Terminate this Batch Job pause InstantHMI Copyright 2000 20088 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Installation Registration and Activation Page A 10 md IHMI4 Project Backup copy IHMI4 Project Backup v md IHMI4 DB Backup copy IHBMP idb IHMI4 DB Backup copy IHCONFIG idb IHMI4 DB Backup copy IHDLEVENTS idb IHMI4 DB Backup copy IHDSM idb IHMI4 DB Backup copy Macros idb IHMI4 DB Backup copy IHMSG idb IHMI4 DB Backup copy Network idb IHMI4 DB Backup
73. PLC Each washer and dryer is assigned a unique number that specifies that machine s location The parameters WASH _LOCATION1 9 specify the location of each washer and the parameters DRY _LOCATION1 9 specify the location of each dryer The SHUTTLE PARK _LOCATION specifies a location that the shuttle should go to while it is waiting to be either loaded or unloaded The User DLL has a single entry point called UserEntry which is located in the file IHMlUser cpp This is the starting point for all actions that will take place A global variable called State has been declared to maintain the overall state of the User DLL The four states include initialize read pause idle and run The state initialize reads some required variables from the IHMI 4 INI file contained in the Windows directory and loads the Product Code assignments and Wash and Dry formulas into memory This state is entered only at the start of the program The read state reads the runtime local memory addresses that contain the states of the Washers Dryers Shuttle and the Conveyor The read state also reads the status of the Product Assignment Wash Formula and Dry Formula editors and the status for the Product Assignment Reviewer and Wash Formula Reviewer The source file for these actions is ACSREAD CPP The pause idle state is entered via local memory address 500 If the value two is entered into this memory location all editing of Product Assignments and Formulas will be ha
74. Page A 7 While extracting and copying files you will see several informative bitmaps illustrating important and useful features of InstantHMI you can benefit from Installing InstantHMI Please Wait Thank you Platform Scalable Platform Independent MSF HMI de A ew Generation HMI Technology ve Platform Scalable Platform Independent Instant HMI New Generation HMI Technology Project Protection Choose Your Flavor Tag Database Screens Scripts Macros Object Assemblies etc May be protected Project Protection benefits OEMs System Integrators and Project Designers Installation is complete Click Run Demo to review InstantHMI features Exit A A E F x Later Run Quick Start PC project to learn InstantHMI project design When Installation is complete you will be so informed You may Exit the installation at this time however we recommend that you click on Run Demo to get a 2 minute review of several InstantHMI features and then Exit the Demo to return to the LaunchPad Subsequently select the project tab Quick Start PC and Run it to learn about InstantHMI project design which you may adapt to suit your own application see the companion document Quick Start Guide accessible by clicking the Help button on the LaunchPad Installing from InstantHMI CD Insert the InstantHMI CD into your CD ROM drive the installation will automatically start If not click Start gt Run then type X setup exe
75. Setup gt Special Tags When you click on the Special Tags button you will see the Tags assigned to serve special tag functions Section 9 3 3 InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 20 Print Control Spool Control Switch Screen Update Enable and Recipe Enable SP HMI PROJECT Demo Special Tags Assigned Tag s Print Control Demo Print Register Spool Control Switch Screen Update Enable Recipe Enable Tag Manager De assign Tag gt sie My Company Figure 2 35 Setup gt Special Tags Print Control For example the tag named Demo Print Register is assigned the Print Control special tag function To define a special tag click on the Special Tag function on the left hand panel Print Control selected in Figure 2 35 and then click on Assign button This will invoke the Tag Manager to select or define associated tag s from the project tag database to be used to trigger printer reports included in your project To exclude a tag from the Assigned Tags list click to highlight and select it and then click on the De Assign Tag button To create a new tag to be assigned for Print Control click on the Tag Manager button 2 5 Run When you click on the Run command button the LaunchPad displays the Splash screen for the selected project with a count down of 10 seconds You may now click on the Pause but
76. TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS LOST MONIES OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH PROGRAMS NOT DISTRIBUTED BY SH SUCH PROGRAM EVEN IF SH HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT IN WHOLE OR IN PART APPLY TO YOU GENERAL You may not sublicense assign or transfer this license or the Program except as expressly provided in this Agreement Any attempt otherwise to sublicense assign or transfer any of the rights duties or obligations hereunder is void This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts Should you have any questions concerning this Agreement you may contact SH by writing to Software Horizons Inc 100 Treble Cove Road N Billerica Massachusetts 01862 YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTAND IT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT IT IS THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE AGREEMENT BETWEEN US WHICH SUPERSEDES ANY PROPOSAL OR PRIOR AGREEMENT ORAL OR WRITTEN AND ANY OTHER COMMUNICATIONS BETWEE
77. TXT You may also Fax 978 670 8787 or mail the registration form to Software Horizons Click on Done button to continue with the activation process at a later time InstantHMI software will run in a restricted demo mode until the software has been activated InstantHMl Registration Form Instructions Step 1 Fill in registration form below Step 2a Click Save and email registration form to actiyate instanthmi com or Step 2b Click Print and fax registration form to 978 670 8787 Step 3 Click Done and wait for Activation Code Required Information ail Email Company Software Horizons Inc Telephone Controller Optional Information Address AN City PO State as Country Ee Zip o Title o Fax fp Distributor fe Distributor Phone Figure A 6 Registration Form Step 2 Activate e When you have received the activation code from Software Horizons run the Activation Utility LaunchPad gt Help gt Activation as described above and click on Activate Now button An Activation Status window similar to the one below will popup To activate LaunchPad click on Activate LaunchPad Enter the appropriate Activation Code in the space provided or check the Get Activation Update Code from File option and click OK This will allow you to select a file containing the Activation Code InstantHMI Copyright 2000 20088 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Installation Registration and Act
78. Tool and Object interchangeably to denote items in the Static Objects menu This is because the Text tool is used to create the Text object Box tool is used to create Box object etc Note that the Status Bar always shows the tool object selected Any selected tool remains in effect until another tool is selected See Section 4 9 2 Customization to set the defaults for your screen design InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 15 Text Enter text after selecting desired Font size color etc The Status Line shows current font and color Line Create line objects Z Poly Line Create connected multiple line objects a Draw Create freehand drawn graphic objects Ke Fill Create graphic fill objects Box Create box rectangle objects The box may be empty or filled e Circle Create circle objects The circle may be empty or filled E Tank Create Tank objects E Scale Create Scale objects ME Bitmap Load bitmap objects bitmaps imported from other applications 3 Text Object Use Text tool accessed from the Screen Designer menu Objects gt Static Objects gt Text to create static text objects on screen that is to enter text on the screen The Status Bar shows the current Text font and color Use the Font menu and the Color menu to change the font and color for the text You may also change the font and color of any text on screen by using the Select tool to sele
79. When you use this key the first time an Alarm Screen will be displayed showing all the Monitor fields from all the screens that have been tagged for checking high and low alarm conditions The fields that are in an alarm state High or Low will be indicated see also Section 9 4 6 Alarm Manager yf ie All Alarm Tags All Alarm Tags Nan Active Alarms po Status value Alarm Histor 3 5 Low 22 43 24 08 17 2006 aik Temp zone 1 High 79 22 43 34 08 17 2006 Temp Zone 2 No Alarm 64 22 43 09 08 47 2006 Temp zone 3 No Alarm 40 22 43 09 08 47 2006 Temp Zone Mo Alarm 22 43 09 08 47 2006 Figure 9 18 Alarm Conditions Viewer InstantHMI will continue to log the alarms on any Monitor fields for which the Check Limits option was chosen at screen creation time Whenever the field data value exceeds the High Limit a High Alarm will be logged A log file will be created using the file name YYMMDD LOG where YY denotes InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PC Page 9 16 the year MM the month and DD the date The logged message will have the following Ascii format Time Tagname Screen Field Alarm State HiLim LoLim Data Value If the field data value falls below the Low Limit a Low Alarm will be logged When the data value in a Monitor field under Alarm state returns to normal range then an Alarm Cleared state will be logged When you see the Alarm Conditions window select
80. alarming functions are currently not changeable There may be changes that Software Horizons can make to InstantHMI to accommodate you For example it may be possible to display Tag Descriptions in the Alarm Object and store that data into the Alarm Log Please call Software Horizons to discuss this further so we can explore your options InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 FAQ Frequently Asked Questions Page B 2 4 want to log and show historic data What do need for this There are two components required a To just log data in an ODBC format use the Datalogging Option 43 Win DLG 01 b To plot trends of historical data logged with the Datalogging Option use the Historic Trending Option 43 Win His Trend c You also have the choice of using the free built in Spooling and Reporting functions The InstantHMI manual Section 5 details how to setup reports You can then import that data in CSV format into Microsoft Excel or other software and make your own graphs Designing reports so that they are compatible with your graphing software is your responsibility 5 How can make Objects Blink Generally there are two approaches Alarming and Scripting Alarming You can configure specific tags to check for alarm conditions When a tag is in alarm the object s associated with it should flash on the screen Please note you cannot blink Graphical Object like a LED
81. allows the small touch screen of the handheld to be used to view Data Registers I O bits Timer Counter values etc in conveniently named tag groups The Data Table function allows you to view modify controller information even when you have not setup any tags Parameter values such as P I D can be input from the handheld by touch or with the help of a stylus Password protection is built in Register and other data values can be logged in the handheld computer and reviewed later InstantHMI is Screens and Buttons oriented to make it straightforward and easy to use PLC communication protocol parameters can be easily configured The Tag Editor allows you to add modify or delete tags OEM versions come with pre created tag database These tags are used to monitor and or modify data through the runtime screen The Tag Group Manager allows you to organize tags into named groups this is useful in functional grouping of tags Recipes Configuration etc InstantHMI allows on demand data logging of selected tags in a database which can be reviewed on the handheld in a scrollable table or the handheld can be connected to a desktop PC at a later time to transfer the logged data for Historic Trending Reporting or other analysis InstantHMI has an architecture which supports traditional HMI screens designed and deployed using the LaunchPad Development system on PDA platforms This feature permits OEM and machine control applications to be built using
82. as your data location will serve as the upper left corner of an animated box or the center of an animated circle Select Active Fill to fill an area of screen starting from the dataspec location to a boundary color you specify The color of the fill will be controlled dynamically by the tag value bit 0 1 integer 0 15 or long 24 bit rgb value at run time You may use this Fill feature to fill any shape with a color you specify for the boundary Note that if the boundary is not well defined closed you may get unexpected spill results at run time To guard against any potential problem test using the Static Fill Option See Section 4 6 1 from the main menu before using the Active Fill dataspec option You have three choices e a bit fill whose On Color and Off Color you can specify The color at runtime reflects the On value 1 or Off value 0 state of the bit you specify in a tag e g Register or Local memory address and bit number e A 16 color fill based on the integer value 0 15 in the associated tag register or Local memory Any register values higher than 15 will be reduced to the range 0 15 by using the remainder obtained after dividing the register value by 16 Note that the circle can be animated on the screen using sixteen colors you specify e A 24 bit color fill based on the rgb value in the associated tag long integer stored in register or Local memory Select Line Animate to create a powerful monitor widge
83. begin polling outside sources to correct the alarm via telephone pager email etc If an outside source does not acknowledge the alarm then the runtime will continue polling the outside sources until an acknowledgement is received All this can be part of a user definable alarm script If a tag goes into alarm condition it can cause the logging of the of the currently logged in user name to the alarm log When an object is in an alarm state if the data object is a text data object then the object will flash on screen and may also produce an audible beep or play a wav file if setup to do so Most widget objects do not indicate any kind of alarm condition for the object Note In a future implementation the object may be surrounded by a red flashing rectangle in its alarm state Event Manager Scheduler Note Some features in this paragraph may not be available in the current implementation InstantHMI implements an Event Manager which allows you to define any number of Events and lets you assign the actions to be taken by the runtime engine and the LaunchPad when any of these events is detected That is InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 31 if Event then Action An event may be any function involving tag data values such as a combination of tags being in a certain range of values at the same time where none of the tag values may be an alarm condition These ev
84. button and then tap on the User Name field so you can enter your User Name Similarly enter your Password and tap OK A valid User Name and Password are required to access any of the functions on the Menu Screen Without logging in you may only access About IHM Help and Exit Es Instant NOE AMI HMI For Palm os for Palm 05 Tap on Resume button to return to InstantHMl Password application screens UserName User More Figure 10 2 Login Logout Screen IPDA To prevent unauthorized access you may Logout if you are leaving the Palm handheld unattended this will permit the data logging and other background activity to continue uninterrupted If there is no user activity detected for a specified time 30 Sec 10 Min the system will automatically enter the Logout State where data entry and monitor screens are hidden from unauthorized users InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PDA Page 10 3 To return to your InstantHMI application screens tap on the Resume button and enter your Password The Administrator with a higher level password may resume any suspended InstantHMlI operation InstantHMI traps the silk screened buttons on the Palm such as Home Calculator etc and prevents their use while executing InstantHMI application program InstantHMI also traps the Power button turning off power is allowed only after Exit from the InstantHMI applic
85. by interacting with InstantHMI through Screen Objects using Mouse Touch Screen some other pointing device and Keyboard keys The macro button Section 4 11 4 which may be attached to a macro key and or induce a Switch To Selected Screen functionality is an easy way to provide operator access to any of the pre defined system commands see Section 9 5 Figure 9 17 The Touch Zone object Section 4 6 5 allows use of more fancy graphical customized buttons for the same purpose The Macro Editor discussed in this section allows you to define alternative virtual or real keys to provide the same functions as the pre defined commands listed in Figure 6 1 In addition you may create view and delete macro command sequences COMMAND PARAMETERS Document Viewer DocumentT ype Execute Script ScriptName Exit Runtime Engine Goto Field PLC Function Print ScreenName FieldID Flash Write Run Mode Stop Mode ReportName Print Screen Read Inputs Recipe Save Recipe Write COND OF W DP ScreenName RecipeName RecipeName do Set Data Show Alarms ScreenName TagName Value Large Medium Small HelpScreenName Tag Group Name Large Small TagName Tag Group Name Large Small ReportName ScreenName Show Help Screen Show Historic Trend Show Keypad Show Real Time Trend Spool Switch Screen Transmit String String Wait MilliSecends SYSTEM KEYS See Section 9 5 Figure 6 1 List of Macro Commands
86. click on the tag to edit it To exclude a tag from the list of configuration tags click on it to select it and then click on the Remove Tag button To define a new configuration group quickly you may click on the Copy Configuration button to copy a selected configuration group to a new configuration name and then edit it as needed To delete a selected configuration group click on the Delete Configuration button Note that the tags included in the configuration definition will not be deleted from the tag database only the tag values defined for the configuration will be deleted 3 6 4 Configurations PDA Configuration w My Custom Configuration Sensor Type T Linearization Temp Units Temp Decimal Places Infosense Enable InfoSense Point InfoSense Point2 InfoSense Points y Restore Compare Figure 3 23 Configuration Manager PDA InstantHMI allows you to define a configuration in terms of selected tags from the tag database Configurations can be saved and given names of your choice Configuration parameters form one or more controllers can be saved in the handheld new configurations created in the handheld or the InstantHMI LaunchPad and stored configurations could be restored back in controllers InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 25 When you tap on the Utilities gt Configuration you will see the configuration screen Tap on Setup gt Co
87. corresponding Angle for knob positions Note that angles are measured anti clockwise with the horizontal line left to right as the zero reference so that 90 will point to top of the screen and 270 will point to bottom of the screen etc Select Knob Background and Knob Color as desired If the preview shown is satisfactory click on Done button to change the knob parameters or X Cancel button to retain the old parameters and return to the Display Object Properties dialog box You may also create a Knob by using the Widgets palette Click on the knob Widget note that the cursor changes shape to a knob cursor move to the desired location on screen and click You get the default knob on screen and the cursor changes to a Select Tool cursor Double click on the knob and change any knob properties Select Spinner to place on your screen a thumb wheel spinner which the operator can click on to increment or decrement the integer value in the associated memory address If you double click on the Spinner the Display Object Properties dialog box pops up Click on Properties and you will see the following dialog box for Spinner Parameters 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 49 Spinner Parameters E High value hoo Low valie E Incremental Steps 0 Figure 4 52 Spinner Parameters Enter the spinner low and high end data values and the incremental step value to use when you click on the up or down arrow of the sp
88. data and display format parameters Depending on the raw data source each tag can have an IP address assigned to it in the Data Source gt IP Manager The IP Manager maintains a list of IP addresses port numbers and descriptive names for the devices controller and InstantHMI runtime nodes The Data Source entries include a driver name so that InstantHMI can support multiple brands of controllers over the same TCP IP network simultaneously InstantHMl Tag Manager Demo Management Total Tags 240 Elevator 3 Garage Control 3 IHMI Palm 53 IHMI PPC New Tag a IHMI Training Edit Tag a IHMI WinCE E Miscellaneous Delete Tag 59 Real Historic Trend Temp Zone 1 Flame Group Functions Requlation Zone1 Set Point Zone 1 New Group Status Zone 1 Add Tag Switch Zone 1 Temp Message Zone 1 i Remove Tag Temp Zone 1 G9 Waste Management M Database Functions Done Figure 2 17 Design gt Tags gt Tag Database gt Tag Manager w Lar n Ge m o Ww ow oomo ooon oono oom 0 imi Remove Group The InstantHMI Screen Designer allows you to assign tags from the Tag Database to any data display objects you include on the screen If the desired tag definition is not already in the Tag Database then you may create a new tag on the fly using the Tag Editor or if no tag specification is desired at the time then a default tag linked to local memory will be generate
89. data source or a remote server data source The data source identifies where the runtime data will come from Each data source will have a name you provide to identify it In addition you will select the communication link Direct Serial Infrared TCP IP to controller or TCP IP to IHMI Node in the case of a local client s own data source you will also identify the communication driver The remote data item for the client will come from an Runtime Engine server running on a TCP IP network such as the Internet or LAN If the communication method is TCP IP then you will select or identify a Device by a Device Node Name that links to the IP address and Port of the controller or InstantHMI device IHMI Node that Originates the data For a remote data item on the client screen the communication link between the client InstantHMI node and the raw data is the TCP IP link to the remote InstantHMI node server to which the data source is linked InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI TCP IP linc tantM Mata Saunia Editor InstantHMl Data Source Manager Data Sourte Mana 65 EtherNet IP Total 2 Elan Z Comm Link TCP IP ori Link Diente Nanas Device Name ControlLogix CPAP RF Mel ComtrolLogix BE E Driver EtherNet IP Add New Driver Narea Timeout 1000 Ethesbl tP Station Offset 0 Edit Gaia Sources Comm Links 2 Modbus TCP Remove Kihe
90. designed for a different platform to the current project platform the resulting screen may or may not be to your liking depending on the transformation required for InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 2 the conversion Feel free to edit the resulting screen or create a new screen for the current platform The PC platform screens are named scr and all other platform screens are named as iscr fie Edt View TegDeta Objects Format Took Options Help DZU T E 4890372Y9gs0 145 26 SECT Figure 4 2 Screen Designer Design Area Pocket PC PI 4 1 1 Title Bar The title bar is located along the top of the Screen Designer design window To move the window drag the title bar A maximized window cannot be moved or resized Note You can also move dialog boxes by dragging their title bars Screen Designer window title bar contains the following elements e Program Control menu button Screen Designer Icon Name of the Screen File Name of the Program InstantHMI Screen Designer Minimize button Maximize Restore button Close button When you click on the Control Menu button Screen Designer Icon on the title bar you will see a pull down menu of six options Restore Control Menu Use this command to return the active window to its size and position before you chose the Maximize or Minimize command Move Control Menu Use this command to display a four headed a
91. does not back up InstantHMI files and other program files not stored in the Synchronized Files Folder If you have the InstantHMI LaunchPad option installed then you can use it for convenient backup and restoration of InstantHMI project and data files Palm OS We assume that you will review the documentation from Palm Inc and achieve sufficient familiarity with the use of the Palm handheld and its useful functions You should at least familiarize yourself with the HotSync feature of the Palm handheld When you are using InstantHMI to create tags tag groups etc or some other application on the Palm to enter data it is always a good idea to have a backup of your work on the handheld This can be done by HotSync operation which ensures that all data in your Palm Handheld is backed up in your Palm desktop setup on your PC In the unlikely event you encounter a Fatal Exception alert while using any application on your Palm handheld you may be forced to hard Reset your Palm handheld and erase all data You may then HotSync with your desktop PC to restore all data that was backed up during the previous HotSync operation Windows CE We assume that you will review the documentation for your Windows CE 3 0 or higher computer and achieve sufficient familiarity with its useful functions When you are using InstantHMI to create tags tag groups etc or some other application on the CE device to enter data it is always a g
92. execute this command from the Edit menu hold down the left mouse button and drag the outline of the bounding rectangle to the desired new location Release the mouse button to finish Hit the ESC key to deselect all selected objects 4 3 4 Copy Object To copy a group of objects use the Select tool to establish the selection After the objects are selected execute this command from the Edit menu hold down the left mouse button and drag the outline of the bounding rectangle to the desired location Release the mouse button to finish Hit the ESC key to deselect all selected objects 4 3 5 Delete Object To delete a group of objects use the Select tool to establish the selection After the objects are selected execute this command from the Edit menu all selected objects will be deleted You may also press the Del key to delete the objects Use the Undelete Object command to restore your deletion 4 3 6 Make Object Assembly The Screen Designer allows for the creation of Object Assemblies Object Assemblies may include active data objects as well as static objects bitmaps and touch zones Also bitmap objects are allowed to be part of object assemblies and they resize if the object assembly is resized An object InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 10 assembly will behave as a single object which can be selected re sized deleted etc Use the Edit menu option Make Object Assemb
93. f Use Default C Customize Configuration Permissions C Use Default Customize Edit cancel apo Figure 12 19 Configuring DCOM for OPCEnum Client Step F Step G For each user that may launch OPCEnum set permissions to Full Control Allow and Read Allow Click OK to save changes InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHM OPC Page 12 11 Change Configuration Permission 2x Security Group or user names ER INTERACTIVE ER NETWORK ER SYSTEM Add Remove Permissions for Everyone Allow Deny Full Control O Read O Special Permissions O O For special permissions or for advanced settings Advanced click Advanced Cancel Figure 12 20 Configuring DCOM for OPCEnum Client Step G Step H In the Identity tab you can select either of the options It is recommended to use either The launching user or The System Account services only OpcEnum Properties El ES General Location Security Endpoints Identity Which user account do you want to use to run this application The interactive user C This user Ser Password Eont password O ihe system account services onip Browse Figure 12 21 Configuring DCOM for OPCEnum Client Step H 12 3 4 Domains vs Workgroups When using OPC over DCOM in a Windows environment the type of network that is being used Domain or Workgroup determi
94. feature implemented in InstantHMI Section 3 3 3 InstantHMl Tag Aliases Tag Name 4 20 mA Output Status 1 Tag Aliases Figure 3 9 Alias Tag Map Test Tag Click on the Test Tag button to invoke the driver referred to in the data source if it is valid and you have a PC runtime engine installed the driver will display the tag value if the communication required for the tag was successful Done and Cancel The Tag Editor dialog box includes several fields that were discussed above After completing the tag parameter editing and specifications click on the Done button to save the changes you made or click on the X button to cancel and discard the changes you made 3 3 5 Tag Database Manager PDAs You may access the Tag Manager in InstantHMI runtime on the PDA by tapping on the Tag Manager button on the Tag Variables pop up dialog If the tag database is password protected Passwords assigned to Read or Modify tag database you will be asked to Enter Password Depending on your password you will be allowed to view or modify the tag database Once you enter your password and tap OK you will see the Tag Manager with a list of all tags from the tag database in a scrollable table on the screen The of tags in the tag database is displayed at the top InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 13 Message Groups Group Names IinstantHM
95. from Node 2 and other Runtime Engine clients When Node 2 client tries to connect with the server Node 1 there may be some type of authentication involving user name and password passed to ensure that Node 1 can accept connection request from Node 2 Once the connection is accepted Node 2 will ask the server Node 1 for its available Data Sources Node 1 will send a list of available data sources which we know to include CCM2 Data Source and Node 2 will match its remote data source name with the name CCM2 Data Source from Node 1 Node 1 will now send a list of active tags referencing the server Node 1 as the remote IHMI Node which Node 1 will then add to its list of monitor tags When the server Node 1 detects that the data has changed it will send the changed data to the requesting client Node 2 The client Node 2 will receive the data from the server Node 1 and update the screen data objects InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI TCP IP Page 11 9 On Server Node 1 try entering data into the input field Fader and see if it is monitored back on the Gauge on the Server Node 1 as well as Client Node 2 On client Node 2 try entering data into the input field Fader and see if it is monitored back on the Gauge on the Client Node 2 as well as Server Node 1 This successfully tests the ease with which you can duplicate and deploy projects on multiple Client Nodes All it took was a simple re defi
96. from other manufacturers Data Logging Recipes Graphics and Color Palm Illxe Palm Vx Palm VIIx m500 Ixe Palm Vx Palm VIIx m500 Monochrome hardware hardware Zire Iii ci A with SD slot InstantHMI installed on Noain card Please contact Software Horizons to determine if your hardware is compatible with InstantHMI Checking PDA Compatibility with InstantHMI Pocket PC Installation Step la To get started download InstantHMI 4 1 for your Pocket PC from InstantHMI Pocket PC Installation http Awww instanthmi com download IHMI 4 IHMI PPC V41 exe Step 1b Create a new folder on your PC Desktop and run IHMI PPC V41 exe When prompted extract all the files to the new folder Make sure ActiveSync is installed on your PC and your Pocket PC is connected to your PC Run setup exe to begin installation Click Install to begin the installation process After agreeing to the License Agreement you will see the InstantHMI Installation Select Install Directory dialog Here you can specify where InstantHMI should be installed If you are installing to an SD CF card click the browse button and choose the appropriate card the path will InstantHMI Copyright 2000 20088 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Installation Registration and Activation Page A 2 typically be either Storage Card InstantHMI SD Card InstantHMI or CF Card InstantHMl The default InstantHMI path will install InstantHMI to the Pocket PC s main
97. in many different ways keyboard entry mouse entry or both When a touch screen is installed touch may be used to replace or supplement mouse entry Light Pen or other pointing devices may also be used Data Entry Using QuickPad The InstantHMI QuickPad keypad facilitates convenient data entry especially when a touch screen is provided but no keyboard is available The appropriate QuickPad Decimal Hex Binary Alpha pops up depending on the data format specified for the data entry field InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PC Page 9 17 i Tm MN QuickPad Sut QuickPad cel 123 45 D431 1114100 gogg pagg cile lallo t Figure 9 19 QuickPa Data Entry Using Keyboard Only Switch to the desired screen by pressing its assigned key usually F1 F2 etc as defined in Macros IDB or by using the Screen command Here we assume that the screen you have selected has some data fields for User Input Press the Update system key or the Tab key The first user input data field will be highlighted You can press the Tab key repeatedly to visit each of the user input fields according to the Tabbing Order set for this screen Section 4 9 1 You could also click the mouse on any data field to select it for data entry You may enter new data in any of the user input fields and press the Enter key to write your entry in the associated memory address If you do not press t
98. in this group Tap on a message to select it This hilights the message in the selected message group Tap on the Del Message button to delete the selected message from the message group Tap on the Done button to exit the Messages screen Tap on the New Message button on the Messages Screen to define a new message for the current group or tap on the Edit Message button to edit an old message You will then see the Message Editor screen where you can define edit the message item selected Enter the numeric value and the text of message to display corresponding to this numeric value Tap on OK button to keep the new or edited message item for the message group or tap on Cancel button to discard the message item InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 20 3 5 Bitmaps Bitmap groups in InstantHMI include names of bitmaps The bitmaps are stored in files having the same name as the bitmaps with the extension file type bmp 3 5 1 Bitmap Screen Capture Utility Microsoft Windows provides the Paint utility and the Clip Board mechanism You may use a screen or window print command Shift PrtScr or Alt PrtScr or similar key combinations on your PC to capture an image on the Windows Clip Board You may use any other application which allows you to copy bitmap images to the Windows clipboard This captured image may be pasted in Microsoft Paint to create your bitmap
99. is available for all ARM CE platforms but not for x86 CE platforms Text and graphic bitmaps may be printed Contact Software Horizons with your portable PDA or CE platform based printing requirements and a quote for complete printing solution InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI TCP IP Page 11 1 11 TCP IP Interface 11 1 Introduction TCP IP is a network communication protocol that allows nodes computers and other devices on an Ethernet network to exchange information among them TCP IP can be used in a LAN Local Area Network or through the Internet InstantHMI implements TCP IP which allows the transfer of data between InstantHMI nodes PC PDA or Windows CE across the room or across the world For illustrative purposes we show below two InstantHMI configurations for TCP IP networking Many other configurations are of course possible InstantHMIT Server InstantHMI Client Figure 11 1 InstantHMI TCP IP link over Internet Figure 11 1 shows one InstantHMI node client node connected through the Internet to another InstantHMI node server connected to a PLC The client node can view and modify data from the PLC connected to the server node across the Internet This allows you the flexibility of having remote InstantHMI nodes interconnected InstantHMI Node Client InstantHMI InstantHMI Server et Server Figure 11 2 InstantHMI TCP IP link over LAN
100. key to make the change in the memory address for this field Note that the Write function may be incorporated in the Tab key Section 9 6 InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PC Page 9 15 System Key 3 Cancel This key is operational only in the data update mode Use this key to cancel the data changes made in the screen field but not yet written to the memory address for this field restore data value on screen field and leave the update mode System Key 4 YES ON Use this key to enter the boolean value YES ON in a data field The YES ON value in Boolean field will turn on the corresponding bit and assign it the value 1 Recall the discussion on Boolean format in Section 4 11 2 System Key 5 NO OFF Use this key to enter the boolean value NO OFF in a data field The NO OFF value in a Boolean field will turn off the corresponding bit and assign it the value 0 Recall the discussion on Boolean format in Section 4 11 2 System Key 6 Print Use this key to print a report on demand on the printer The report printed will correspond to the screen displayed on the monitor as prescribed in your project Setup Of course the format and content of the report is totally flexible and determined by you and may contain any information from any other screen or any PLC registers not on the screen if you so desire System Key 7 Reserved This Key is reserved System Key 8 Alarms
101. listed below Subtraction gt gt lt lt Logical AND amp amp OR _ Logical OR 1 Bitwise complement NOT 7 2 0 Functions Valid functions 57 in all are grouped into eight categories as listed in table below Function Categories ActiveX Functions Miscellaneous Functions Communications Functions Recipe Functions Local Memory Functions Time Date Functions Math Trig Functions Variable Initialization Functions InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Script Editor Page 7 4 ActiveXGetProperty PropertyName 6 ActiveXSetProperty PropertyName Value 4 ActiveXSetDoVerb VerbName o B5 ActiveXSetDoVerbld Verbld SetDataSoure DataSourceName o 8GetTag TagName double o 51SetTag TagName Value 29 Getecisterint Address Bit Saton double FP 0 SetRegisterInt Address Bit Station Value ooo 16 GetByte Address Byte Station double 48 SetByte Address Byte Station Value void 26 GetMemory MemType Address Bit Station dolSetMemory MemType Address Bit Station Value Void 28 GetLocalLong Address doble 23 GetLocalFloat Address doe 22 GetLocalDouble Address double 7 SeiLocalint Address IntValue aslsettocalLong Address LongValue BOOL 46 SetLocaiFioat Address FloatValue BOOL As SetLocalDouble Address DoubleValue BOOL Ao ale ob Ata Vale obte asin V
102. maximum number of screens is 65536 The data field will be tied to the PLC or other I O device addresses when you select a Tag Name and data type format etc as explained below Screen Designer will display your data field on the screen using a string of indicating your choice of field width font and color or a widget with an appropriate bitmap or a raised box You should select color and font for the data field by using the Color and Font options from the Display Object dialog box Note that if you select a field width which is too small for the data the run time engine will display in the available field width instead of displaying truncated data or overflowing the display field Note that if you select a field width which is too small for the data the run time engine will display in the available field width instead of displaying truncated data or overflowing the display field So you must select appropriate field width To change field width or any other data specification select the data object for editing by double clicking on it Note that the customization option Section 4 9 2 can be used to set Data Text font Widget defaults etc To define a new data field using Method 2 the Objects gt Data Object menu choice position the Cross Hair at the spot where you wish to display data and click the left button Screen Designer will pop up the Display Object Properties Dialog Box Here you may select a Data Type from a pull down li
103. of System Components Display Communication Outputs Alarms Control and Errors and the Observed Symptoms Indication This displays a small subset of Probable Causes for you to select so that you may focus on the corresponding Corrective Actions displayed on the handheld The InstantHMI LaunchPad software provides a Troubleshooting Editor which can be used to set up the Troubleshoot scheme from scratch to suit the individual end user application requirements see Section 2 3 2 InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PDA Page 10 7 Subsystems Categories Alarms Symptomss Indications Alarm occurring when it shouldn t Possible Causes Alor settings incorrect Corrective Actions Adjust the alarm settings to be correct for the application Figure 10 13 Troubleshooting PDA 10 2 8 Help Tap on the Help button on the Menu Screen for a concise set of topics with associated help screens explaining various functions in InstantHMI Extensive help is available on line while InstantHMI is running Whenever you see the symbol i on any screen or pop up screen you may tap on it to view help for that screen Data Monitor Trend Graphs Comm Setup Data Logging Recipe Tag Variables 10 2 9 About IHMI When you tap on the About IHMI button you will see the following dialog box Tap on i for help tips on this About IHMI popup screen About InstantH
104. on the Tool Palette and drag a rectangle encompassing all the objects in the Tank A you just assembled and right click to pop up the Block Menu Click on Make Object Assembly to display the following dialog Define Object Assembly E Define Object Assembly Object Assembly Mame Tank A Done Object Assembly Mame Tank A Object Assembly Parameters Data Source Decin Station ID Not Used Tag Group Not Used Mw Save To Library Hide Parameters Figure 4 12 Make Object Assembly Tank A Show Hide Parameters in Dialog Enter the name Tank A ignore the other Object Assembly Parameters which are explained later on and click OK You have successfully created the Object Assembly Tank A and stored it in the Object Assembly library Note The default name for the library is ObjectAssembly LIB You may change the object assembly library name using Options Customization Misc Section 4 9 2 InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 12 Besides the label Tank A the only item unique to Tank A is the tag value Tank Level A You may use the User Specified Tag Group property to switch from tag Tank Level A to tag Tank Level B use a second name tag which takes two values Tank A and Tank B We will illustrate this using a Tank Status object assembly to represent Tank A and Tank B at runtime
105. profile using different file name Print Window Print currently open trend plot Print Options Set Print Parameters Print Setup Set up default printer parameters Four Most recently Used Profiles xit Exit IHMITrend Historic Trend Utility I 60 IN m Use File gt New Window Ctrl N command to create a new Trend Profile in IHMITrend You may click on the tool bar button or press the short cut key Ctrl N instead of using the menu choice to execute File New command Be sure to save the current file if you want to preserve any changes After saving the current file a new blank screen is presented Use File gt Open Profile command to open an existing profile You may click on the tool bar button or press the shortcut key Ctrl O instead of using the menu choice to execute File Open command You will see a File Open Dialog box which allows you to specify which profile file to open Type or select the File Name you want to open This box lists files with the extension you InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Historic Trend Utility Page 13 8 select in the List Files of Type box default is prf Select the Folder directory in which IHMITrend will find the profile that you want to open Use File gt Close Profile command to close the current profile Use File gt Save Profile command to save the current profile to its current name and directory You may click on t
106. protection Section2 4 3 to change platform and screen resolution Simply select a simple password to protect screens let the screens be protected and re saved Repeat the same resetting the password to no password Project Designer Administrator usually deploys projects and not the operator InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 13 Step 2 Define Data Source Step 2 Define Data Source Ed InstantHMI Data Source Editor New Project Wizard A Source Name Data Source Name D This wizard provides the quickest way to create an MBTCPIP Edit Device HMI Project for your application Comm Link Device Names peca ll TCPAP RF vY 940 demo node 120 J step 1 Create New Project Driver Names Modbus TCP w Properties gt Step 2 Define Data Source step 3 Identify Tags Time Out Station Offset 1000 0 Step 4 Design Screen step 5 Test in Runtime Data source provides the raw data of the tag object Screen object translates raw data to display format InstantHMI maintains a database of all the various tags of interest to you in a tag database Figure 2 25 New Project Wizard Step2 Define Data Source Click on Help button for a quick review of Step 2 Define Data Source When ready click on Define Data Source button A Enter the new Data Source name B Select Communication Link C Select Communication Driver D Edit device specification for TCP
107. simply define the appropriate sequence of commands associated with the same macro key The runtime will execute all the macro functions sequentially as you have defined them See example in Section 6 4 6 3 Macro Commands Use the pull down list of Macro Commands to select the desired command and then enter the appropriate Parameter s that appear in the dialog box When you have completely specified the macro click the Enter Macro button and see your macro definition displayed in the dialog window If more than one command is to be tied to a single macro key repeatedly select the same key code and define the additional commands If the specified macro key definition already exists it will be appended with the new command sequence Refer to Figure 6 1 for a full listing of macro commands These are discussed in detail below 1 Document Viewer This macro allows you to setup a macro button to give the operator access to the InstantHMI Document Viewer at runtime to view selected reports logs of interest The syntax for this macro is Document Viewer Document Type Macro Key Command lt SHIFT gt D Document Viewer S01 S02 For example this is how you can define a macro key D to invoke the Document Viewer to let the operator view all spool files created in the project during runtime Select the macro key D Now select the command Document Viewer by clicking on it in the commands list box Select the Parameter Document Type S01 S02
108. specialized screens see Project Protection Section 2 4 3 If you have any special applications contact us so we may adapt InstantHMI to meet your special needs InstantHMI runtime installed in the PDA Palm OS or Pocket PC makes configuration diagnostic trouble shooting and data logging tasks for your controller equipment as simple as possible The compact shirt pocket size of the handheld and the infrared beaming and wireless RF capability incorporated in InstantHMI provide for the greatest mobility and make InstantHMI available any time any place as a human machine interface The creation of tags may be done directly on the handheld with InstantHMl however this chore is made much more convenient using the LaunchPad s Screen Designer Section 4 running on a Windows Desktop PC 1 3 InstantHMI Overview The important elements in the design and implementation of a Human Machine Interface HMI are shown in the InstantHMI Architecture block diagram below InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI for Your Application Page 1 4 InstantHMI Architecture Machine Process Comm Interface Wireless _Serial TCPNP Infrared WiFi Bluetooth Runtime LaunchPad Engine Operator Display Screen Report Table Viewer Designer Designer tsi Human Operator Figure 1 3 InstantHMI Architecture InstantHMI provides the LaunchPad Project Management platform which e
109. storage memory Step 1c To obtain compatibility information from your Pocket PC 1 Run InstantHMI on your handheld 2 Note down PPC Serial Number if any 3 Exit InstantHMI 4 Connect Pocket PC to your computer 5 On PC start File Explorer 6 Navigate to the Mobile Device folder in left pane 7 Under Mobile Device select My Pocket PC 8 Navigate to the InstantHMI folder See Step 1b 9 Copy the IHMICompuUtilDB dat file to your PC 10 Email IHMICompUtilDB dat file back to Software Horizons service instanthmi com A 1 2 InstantHMI License Agreement We assume that you have read the InstantHMI Program license agreement and agree with its terms If you have not read the license agreement we urge you to do so Please recall that the license agreement clearly states You assume responsibility for the selection of the Program to achieve your intended results and for the installation use and results obtained from the Program Under no circumstances shall Software Horizons Inc be held liable or responsible for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use of or the application of InstantHMI individually or in combination with other software and or hardware All persons using InstantHMI must be willing to accept responsibility to set up the various components in InstantHMI to suit their application and for choosing an application appropriate for the InstantHMI components individually or in combination with other equipment
110. the Objects gt Touch Zone menu to define touch zones on the screen Save Screen and Exit Use the File gt Save option to save your screen Use the File gt Exit option to exit the program 4 2 File The File menu offers the following commands New Create new application screen Open Open existing application screen Save Save currently open application screen using same file name SaveAs Save currently open application screen using different file name Recent File Not used Exit Exit Screen Designer program File gt New Ctrl N Use this command to create a new application screen in Screen Designer Be sure to save the current application screen if you want to preserve any changes If you have not saved your application screen a dialog box will pop up prompting you to save After you choose Yes or No a blank new screen is presented File gt Open Ctrl O Use this command to open an existing application screen You will see a File Open Dialog box InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 7 Pl overview P tchzanes P thankyou P ltrpzonel P tripzones P wastewtr File name Scr Files of type Cancel Open as read only Figure 4 6 Screen Designer File Open Dialog To understand what each element in the Open dialog box stands for you may click on the What Is This question mark button on the right of the Open di
111. the alarm and click the Acknowledge button Acknowledged alarms will be marked with a or an ACK icon and logged in the Log file Select View Active Alarms to see only the active alarms listed This may be useful to select and acknowledge alarms Click DONE button to return to your screen System Key 9 Reserved This Key is reserved System Key 10 Spool This key works similar to System Key 6 Print Key to spool files to disk on demand The spooled data is controlled by the spool record format for your screen assigned in project Setup The saved spool report will be named SPOOL S1 for screen 1 SPOOL S2 for screen 2 etc See Section 5 3 for a detailed discussion on Spooling Note that using the SPOOL Key in conjunction with the PRINT Key the operator can produce totally different reports to suit diagnostic or other special needs System Key 11 Help Use this key to look at the help screen for the current screen sch When on the help screen press any key or click the mouse button to return to your screen System Key 12 Reserved This Key is reserved System Key 13 Reserved This Key is reserved System Key 14 Reserved This Key is reserved System Key 15 Reserved This Key is reserved System Key 16 Toggle Bit ON OFF Use this key similar to System Key 4 and System Key 5 to toggle the values in boolean input fields from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON 9 6 Data Entry in Runtime Runtime Engine allows data entry
112. the object you wish to select and drag it on the screen to position the object or you may use the sizer boxes to resize the selected object just as you would resize any Windows window that is drag the desired sizer box to resize To select a different object simply click near it the previously selected object will be automatically deselected and the new object will be selected The Screen Designer also gives you the capability to modify common features of multiple selected objects For example if you selected a static text object and a text data object you would be able to change the font and color of both objects at the same time The Block Select tool lets you click and drag the mouse to select all objects in any rectangular region on the screen To select multiple objects hold the shift key down and continue to select all the objects you want by clicking on them Hit the ESC key to deselect all selected objects a Untitlod ecr inrianthhi Screon Designar Pie Cdt vew Togbata Objects Format Took Options Meli De kT Ek Ze ee HASTE ose aa gt pr MM anal 1 Figure 4 8 Sizer Boxes Show Object Selected Box Pres ESC bo De telect You may perform any Edit operations on the selected objects Also you may move any selected object by dragging it on the screen to the desired location Use the arrow keys to nudge selected InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Scre
113. the recipe definition together with the data values for the selected recipe are displayed in a table in the Recipe Manager dialog InstantHMl Recipe Manager SP HMI PROJECT i i Recipes Demo Recipe iv Tag Name Tag Value EWM Settling Tank 6 EWM Grit Tank EVVM Clarifier EWM Aeration Tank Total 2 screen Elements Recipes 2 Screens Thumbnails Demo Recipel Screens List E EWM Aeration Tank 45 Scripts El EWM Clarifier 65 toes El EWM Grit Tank 78 Settli Configurations ja 2 EWM Settling Tank 56 Troubleshoot Scripts H Demo Recipe2 Bitmaps Group Functions New Recipe Copy Recipe Delete Recipe Recipe Functions Add Tag s Recipe Manager G m sorrwane HORIZONS 4 Mine Edit Tag Value Remove Tag s mpl Figure 9 14 Recipe Manager To edit the recipe tag value click on the tag to select it in the table of recipe tags click on the Edit Value button and then enter the tag value for the recipe You may also double click on the tag to edit it To save an edited recipe click on the Save button You may need Password authorization for this function The recipe will be saved to the storage medium on the runtime platform Click the Write to Controller button to transfer the recipe to the controller Click the Read from Controller button to read the recipe parameters from the controller To make it easier for the operator you may set up macros and bu
114. the trend charts Set the dataset properties of all selected pens Once you exit the profile specification dialog by clicking Done Button you will have the option to Show Hide the trace of each pen selected All pen traces are shown by default You can hide a pen trace by clicking the Hide button Once hidden the button label will change to Show You can click the Show button to show the pen trace The ability to toggle the Show Hide state of the trace of the pen is helpful when the plot traces overlap Step 4 Print Trend Charts In your trend history analysis if you have discovered interesting trend click on File gt Print Window to obtain a trend chart printout for your records Note If you do not wish to see a trace printed you must de select the corresponding tag in the Datasets Profile Specification display the trend and then print InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 14 User DLL 14 1 Introduction InstantHMI User DLL is an integral part of the InstantHMI architecture It is an MS Windows dynamic link library DLL that you may write to extend the functionality of the runtime engine to meet your own special requirements The InstantHMI architecture allows User DLL to exchange information with the InstantHMI runtime engine Once written your User DLL becomes an integral part of the InstantHMI runtime engine and enables access to runtime process information for analys
115. then type a setup exe to begin the installation process Follow all on screen instructions to complete the installation InstantHMI Copyright 2000 20088 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Installation Registration and Activation Page A 9 E liston tH 4 1 Inafollation Inst AMI Platform Scalable Plathor Independent Platform Scalable Platform Independent ETET Mew Generatloan HMI Technology New Generation HMI Technolo gy InstantHMl Setup Device not detected Please connect device and click Install Figure A 4 Pocket PC Runtime Installation Welcome and Device Not Detected A 2 5 InstantHMI Runtime Engine for Palm OS InstantHMI software for Palm is delivered over the Internet or on a 3 5 floppy disk in some cases upon special arrangement You can install InstantHMI application software on your Palm handheld during a HotSync operation using a Windows PC Palm desktop software HotSync Manager must be installed prior to Installation of InstantHMI runtime engine for Palm Step 1 Copy or download the InstantHMI application IHMIxx PRC into the Add on folder in your Palm Desktop directory on your computer C PalmDesktop Add on Step 2 Double click the Palm Desktop icon on your desktop Step 3 Click the Install button Step 4 Select your Palm user name in the Install Tool dialog Step 5 Click Add and when the Open dialog box appears select the IHMIxx PRC application file for InstantHMI and click
116. this edit field Type in the address number Since in most cases Screen Designer has no way to check for valid addresses you must enter a valid address The range of valid address for Register memory will depend on the particular controller you are using Note that Screen Designer will accept addresses as integers only When a Bit Number is required in addition to a register address for a complete specification of the address for Bit Data Memory for example you must enter a bit number InstantHMI allows communication with multiple PLC or I O devices concurrently These devices may be connected in a multi drop or network arrangement to a single Com Port on the computer InstantHMI also supports communication via multiple Com Ports concurrently You have the option of choosing same or different communication drivers for the different Com Ports to meet your requirements These PLCs which serve as the raw data sources are identified in the Data Source manager which allows you to identify the Com Port parameters and communication diver that will be used to communicate with a group of PLC in a multi drop or network setup Enter the Station number as part of the Tag definition to identify the specific PLC which has the raw data for the current data field Example Suppose you have three Modicon PLC s with station numbers 1 2 3 in a Modbus network connected to COM1 on the computer and one Allen Bradley PLC with station number 9 connected over a serial D
117. to draw the rectangular outline of the box You may change the outline color or thickness of any box you drew by selecting it and then changing the Pen Color or Pattern The changes apply only to the selected box object all future box objects will have the Pen Color shown on the Status Bar Circle Object Use this tool accessed from the Screen Designer menu Objects gt Static Objects gt Circle to draw a circle that is create static circle objects The current pen width and pen color are used to draw the circular outline of these objects Note that the status line shows the pen color for the circle To draw a circle position the mouse at the center of the proposed circle and drag the mouse hold the left button down while moving the mouse You will see a rubber band circle indicating what your circle would look like When you are happy with the circle on screen release the mouse button You may change the outline color or thickness of any circle by selecting it and then changing the Pen Color or Pattern You may also choose to fill the circle The current pen width and pen color are used to draw the circular outline of these objects The interior of the circle is filled with the current fill color Tank Object Use this tool accessed from the Screen Designer menu Objects gt Static Objects gt Tank to create and include Tank objects on your screen You have a choice of Tank Colors tank Styles Flat InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Sof
118. to execute the Cut command Copy Ctrl C Use this command to copy selected text onto the clipboard This command is not available grayed out if there is no text currently selected Copying data to the clipboard replaces the previously stored clipboard contents You may use the toolbar Copy icon or the short cut key Ctrl C to execute the Copy command Paste Ctrl V Use this command to insert a copy of the clipboard contents at the insertion point This command is not available if the clipboard is empty You may use the toolbar Paste icon or the shortcut key Ctrl V to execute the Paste command 9 2 3 View The View Menu lists the following two commands Tool Bar Tool Bar Use this command to display or hide the Toolbar which includes buttons for some of the most common commands in Report Designer such as File Open A check mark appears next to the menu item when the Toolbar is displayed QE Figure 5 3 Tool Bar The toolbar is displayed across the top of the Report Designer window below the menu bar The toolbar has eight buttons that provide quick mouse access to commands in Report Designer as shown in the table below You click the appropriate button on the toolbar to execute the desired command InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 IHMIRPT Report Designer Page 5 6 Button Command File New Open a new report File Open Open an existing report IHMIRPT displays the Open
119. tool retrieve and display the memory data values DO gt Step 4 Design Screen Click on Help button for a quick review of Step 4 Design Screen When ready click on Design Screen button to access the Screen Designer which allows you to create widgets and other data blocks on the screen tie them to controller tags You may also create text and other graphic objects and then save the screen InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Step 4 Design Screen New Project Wizard This wizard provides the quickest way to create an Hdl Project for your application y step 1 Create Mew Project Pick LED from Widget Palette S Step 2 Define Data Source TANK A STATUS f Water Level Ala tate y step 3 Identify Tags mE On the Screen po HRA reat TE o a FRR HP J POr ng Step 4 Design Sereen x Ez Create Widgets and other Data Objects Pick and place LED Data Object from step 2 Test in Runtime Widget Palette to define data fields on your screen and tie them to your PLC AAA Create Text and Graphic Objects Use Tool Palette to enter Text Design screen draw Box Line etc and obtain the desired layout for the screen Figure 2 27 New Project Wizard Step4 Design Screen Step 5 Test Screen in Runtime Click on Help button for a quick review of Step 5 Test Screen in Runtime When ready click on Run Screen button to access the Runtime Engine which allow
120. us for assistance before Un Installing Re Installing the software Un Installing Re Installing the software once it is activated will generate a new Serial Number different from your original Serial Number and will invalidate the previously activated software Please see our Activation Registration Policy below InstantHMI Copyright 2000 20088 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Installation Registration and Activation Page A 3 Registration Activation Policy Software Horizons will provide the customer with only one 1 Activation code for each purchased software product license that requires Activation Once an activation code has been issued for a specific software installation requests for additional activation codes in conjunction with the same software license will be subject to the following terms The Backup Procedure in Section A 4 4 explains how you may avoid re activation charges 1 Please backup your InstantHMI installation after it is registered and activated Contact Software Horizons if you need help to do a proper backup In case of a hard reset of your PDA the backed up software can be restored to the original PDA This should not require a new activation from Software Horizons 2 If for any reason you are unable to use the registered and activated InstantHMI installation you may request a new activation e Mail or fax to us a signed statement on your company letterhead describing the problem with
121. use in your own application Throughout this manual we will use the Demo project for illustrative purposes We recommend that you use the Demo project elements Screens Scripts Macros etc as a tool to shorten your learning curve in using InstantHMI for your application solution A sample screen from the Temperature Monitoring application included in the Demo project Figure 1 5 shows boiler and pump states and allows the input of Temperature Setpoint and monitoring of High Low Temperature alarm conditions InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI for Your Application Page 1 6 L InstantHMI Runtime PC tmpzone1 scr Temperature Zone 1 Boiler Temperature Setpoint alue Alarm Log Switch Screen Counter 6 15 19 20 12 19 2006 Alarm Log z 15 19 20 12 19 2006 a Viewer gt 6 Alan 15 19 20 12 19 2006 lt Viewer 15 19 20 12 19 2006 15 19 20 12 19 2006 Home Pause Next gt No Alarms No Errors KeyOk NUM SCRL Figure 1 5 Demo Project Sample Screen We recommend that for self training on screen design controller interface and project design you refer to the separate document Quick Start Guide We include below a brief description of the Water Supply System used in the Quick Start Guide for illustration You may access the Quick Start Guide by clicking the Help button at the bottom left of the LaunchPad Figure 1 4 Figure 1 6 Application Exampl
122. will cause data to be logged more frequently a higher sample time leads to the tag value to be logged less frequently Note that your InstantHMI installation must have the Historic trending option installed for the logged data to be useful for trending analysis InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 10 Alarm Setup and Management InstantHMl Tag Editor Tag Name Data Source 4 20 mA Output Status 1 Modbus TCP v lt Enter tag description gt Device Name MiFlow Controller bd Tag Definitions Alarm Setup ABE 3 Address Bit Station Data Type i 7 Enable Alarm Check Register v 2020 0 1 Int32 Alarm Setpoints Alarm Sample Time Cl Unsigned High High gt 1000 msec Datalog Interval Alarm Sample Time V High gt Alarm Indication Log To Database Setup Alarms wie Blink Object Default Tag Display Properties Y Sound Alarm Text Format Field Width Monitor Sample Time f Low Low lt Decimal v B l 2 1000 msec Y M Range Low Graphic Format Low End Value High End Value lt None gt M 0 100 Figure 3 8 Alarm Setup in Tag Editor PC High In Tag Editor you may Enable Alarm Check against Alarm Setpoints you designate If the data type is Monitor then a High or Low alarm will be generated at runtime if data exceeds the specified limit The data field value will be checked at
123. will depend on the number of defects which determines how many times the spooling action will be requested This is controlled by operator demand at run time and by the Spool Register contents events Our record format 5 SPL specifies one line of data sampled from Registers 1 3 InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 IHMIRPT Report Designer Page 5 9 Tag 2 The Register 101 contains total of Reg 1 data column as maintained in the PLC Tag 3 The Register 102 contains total of Reg 2 data column as maintained in the PLC Tag 4 The Register 103 contains total of Reg 3 data column as maintained in the PLC tf InstantHMI Report Designer UNTITLED st tS oea a Summary of Defects Data Specification Tag ID Tag Names 1001 Spool Register Tag Manager Field width Format File ID Message Groups E ells i Cancel Figure 5 9 Sample Report File 1 PRT The spool record template file 5 SPL shown in Figure 5 10 contains a single line starting with Spool data The tag information stored in 5 SPL by Report Designer is used by run time for spooling to disk the data corresponding to Tags 10 11 and 12 Note Do not confuse the Tags 10 11 12 in 5 SPL with the same tag numbers in 1 PRT They contain different data specs For illustration we have shown in Figure 5 10 the data spec dialog box for Tag 12 Tag 10 and 11 are similar cf JinstantHiMi Report Designer a Deml El Ble
124. your previous installation and the fact that you can no longer use the previous installation and that the re installed software requires another activation registration code e There will be a nominal processing re activation fee of 50 10 of original software purchase price for your new activation For example if you ordered a 295 software package your re activation fee would be 50 29 50 or 79 50 e On receipt of the statement in item 1 and the payment in item 2 above Software Horizons will issue a re activation code 3 We will not honor any request for any further re activations You will need to purchase a new software license at full price This policy applies to any software from Software Horizons that requires a software Registration Activation code If you have questions about Registration Activation or about this policy please contact Software Horizons Inc 100 Treble Cove Road N Billerica MA 01862 Tel 978 670 8700 Fax 978 670 8787 Website www InstantHMI com A 2 Installing InstantHMI InstantHMI provides Platform Scalable Platform Independent HMI technology for PC Window CE and PDA Pocket PC Palm platforms InstantHMI LaunchPad Development System is used to design your HMI project screens tag database macros scripts etc and then deploy the project to the target platform PC CE or PDA You need to Install the LaunchPad on a Windows PC and the Runtime Engine s on the appropriate platform PC CE or P
125. 0 0 0 0 10 19 93 10 32 52 10 33 25a 760 4 0 0 4 0 10 19 93 10 47 07a 10 50 18a 2730 1 0 0 1 0 10 19 93 10 56 18a 10 59 50a 2843 1 0 2 17 0 10 19 93 11 00 54a 11 01 10a 143 0 0 0 0 Figure 9 22 sample Communication Statistics InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PDA Page 10 1 10 Runtime Engine PDA InstantHMI LaunchPad Section 2 allows you to design your HMI project on a Windows PC platform and deploy it on any Windows PC or PDA Palm or Pocket PC or Windows CE platform which has an installed InstantHMI Runtime Engine In Section 9 we discussed Runtime Engine on PC platforms In this Section we discuss Runtime Engines for PDA and Windows CE platforms Although InstantHMI provides most of the PC Runtime functionality on Windows CE and PDA platforms there are unique platform characteristics Windows CE platforms tend to be touch panels mounted near the action panel mount and more often have very specific more often limited control and monitoring requirements PDAs have a distinctly different Instant On Ready to Go philosophy in addition to special features such as barcoding GPS and built in wireless links and tend to be used intermittently and on the Go InstantHMI Runtime Engines for PDAs support this philosophy inherently by providing various features including pre formatted screens that can be configured or modified instantly in addition to usual screens that yo
126. 0 40 60 80 100 Show Detail Figure 10 26 Bar Graph PDA Tap on the pull down arrow 7 at the top to select one of the named tag groups or the un named lt All Tags gt group Tap on the Done button on the bar graph monitor screen to return to the Data Monitor screen InstantHMI allows tags to be grouped under group names of your choice With tag groups you may select a specific group name such as Boiler Variables in the monitor screen shown above The concept of Tag Groups and the Tag Positioning Bar in the Tag Manager along with the Bar Graph Screen makes monitoring any number of tags an easy task in InstantHMI 10 3 7 Bar Codes The Barcode Input function can be used if InstantHMI with barcoding option is installed on a handheld equipped with a barcode scanner such as Symbol PPT28xx Bar Codes can be scanned and stored in the handheld They may also be transferred to a controller connected to the handheld using a serial or wireless RF link with InstantHMI acting as a go between Wireless RF Link f Access Point serial to Ethernet Figure 10 27 Wireless Barcode Transfer Example PDA The Barcode Setup screen allows you to specify whether you wish to transfer the scanned barcode to the controller registers Max barcode consecutive registers starting with the address specified in Barcode Transfer Tag You may also setup a Handshake Tag which InstantHMI can use to signal the controller by setting the ha
127. 008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 31 read edit the database can be assigned by the Owner Administrator OEM of the database using appropriate password In the Screen Designer click on Tag Data gt Tag Manager to design edit and manage the tag database to suit your project needs You will see the Tag Manager dialog box showing a tree structure displaying all the defined tags and tag groups in your tag database Buttons are provided to access Database Functions tag Group Functions and Tag Functions Click the Database Info button to see the Database Info and for the password protection of Database contents from editing by unauthorized persons InstantHHl Tag Database Info Craner Created 10 31 03 13 58 33 Last Modified 10 3103 14 00 06 Number Of Tags 94 Password To Read DB Disabled Edit Password To Edit DB Disabled _ Edit Figure 3 31 Tag Database Info PC On a PDA platform when you tap on the Main Menu gt Setup gt Database Info you will see a pop up dialog Box Tag Database Info Owner Ramal Created 111102 11 23 58 am Last Modified 1111 02 11 35 03 am Humber Of Tags 235 Password lodification Password To Read DE Enter Old Password Database Info SERRE Cd Fwd Tag DE Info Msg DE Info Password To Edit DB Enter Mew Password Mew Pwd Figure 3 32 Tag Database Info PDA Tap on the Tag DB Info button to access the header record You may change th
128. 11 5 Graphic Data Format Monitor Widgets sc A derien inip iiia 4 51 AAG COO and FON eson a r a a aR 4 56 dali Sample TIMO caes 4 56 a Ra We Me O A A e eee Ne meer eth 4 57 AVAGO ACW A cada eciceearmenSansec cutee E A R E a A 4 57 AW VO OK o o a I sees 4 57 4 12 Edit Data Display DSi entes ld inten id 4 57 A 13 Document Data Display ODO cti sd 4 58 Repo DESINE eirean get EE er ee ret ee meen eet ee eee er eee 5 1 Os VO TUNING LAI Ossett a cten teases acta a ceccinccisce docep a a seuss nae Gendaceee 5 1 g2 Mal Menu Ment Barsa aitorlourido 5 3 A ose O A E ET E AES A ce tieety aces AEA E AEE E E ER ce S A AEE ees 5 3 DERA O E NEE A E E E NE E E E ES crete call A A EN E E EE T 5 4 LOWY AE E EE A E ane E E EE oe E E E EA E EE NEE E E EEE E E E E 5 5 BZ AVIS A a a e paid ea cule aaa el ie hac 0 Avian a oan al Me anen ON ua esua aie 5 6 g2 WAG ala canta cerca toate A o O enh cane iecetasan de aedoes 5 7 A O each anise Sa cases essen vara sorts Selatan dace au E ee eee eee 5 10 A A E enna 5 12 093 1 Nanind spo0l Files pi Godan ccten eee dee ed ee cace ca a iteueaes 5 12 AO e rede ee te ee eee ere ree ee 5 13 53 93 SOO Register FUNCIONS aaia a E N e E TE 5 13 9o FE MUNIN Sea E a cn ea vce ern tn ee ea ee ecg eater ae 5 16 54 Creating Reports at RUNUME ii A dente A A a E a 5 17 5 4 1 Using Reports gt Print Menu at RUMME cierres 5 17 5 4 2 Using Reports gt Spool Menu at Runtime oocccccnnccccncccncnnnnncconononcnnnn
129. 11 5 Graphic Data Format Monitor Widgets The monitor widgets allow the operator to monitor the discrete and analog values When you select Graphic display category and data type Monitor you have a choice of the monitor widgets shown in the table InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 52 V H Bar V H Meter The abbreviation V stands for Vertical and H stands for Horizontal The input widgets in Section 4 11 3 can also act as monitor widgets if you invoke the Input Monitor data format Select LED to place an indicator light on the screen Associated with the LED are two states Off and On and corresponding trigger values Trigger Off and Trigger On e The LED is in its Off state when the associated tag value lt Trigger Off e The LED is in its On state when the associated tag value gt Trigger On LED Properties Type Round Preview Off lt o Color if Flash Color O if Intermediate Color Flash n gt E Color Flash AA Done Figure 4 58 LED Parameters A third Intermediate state may also be defined to represent the intermediate values during transition from On to Off or vice versa Note When the associated tag takes on only two discrete values 0 and 1 for example the intermediate is the state during transition from O to 1 or vice versa Entering the trigger values for Off and On states and define Colors fo
130. 2 pro 1 40 32 pr 1 40 32 pro 1 40 33 pro Figure 10 31 Datalog Viewer PDA The logged data may be transferred to a desktop PC using the InstantHMl LaunchPad The logged data can then be subjected to analysis using Microsoft Excel or other tools available to you InstantHMI provides the capability to view logged data on a Trend History plot as discussed in Section 13 Time 13 36 39 Grid y Md bp Menu Figure 10 32 Trend History PDA 10 5 Data Entry in Runtime Runtime Engine on a PC allows data entry in many different ways keyboard entry mouse entry or both When a touch screen is installed touch may be used to replace or supplement mouse entry Light Pen or other pointing devices may also be used A PDA has a built in touch screen a tiny soft key pop up keyboard and a stylus used for tapping on the touch screen To make data entry more convenient in a PDA InstantHMI provides the QuickPad pop up soft keypad Switch to the desired screen on the PDA using the stylus to tap on touch zone buttons or Screen menu choices Here we assume that the screen you have selected has some data fields for User Input Tap on the edit area of the data field Depending on the data format of the input field Decimal Integer Alpha Hex Binary the appropriate QuickPad keypad will pop up Tap on the large keys provided to enter data To enter numeric data use the numeric keys O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 and 9 If you make a mistake use
131. 3 10 24 1849 VANADES a pia 10 3 o teeemteen a pase tatu tadh a uument eae paca i eeaicntaaduaeee 10 4 AOE SOUL ENEE a aac tate E ERE E ae terete E AE E TEE see te canta tena E E E EE E E te ceaten as 10 5 102 7 col o El OO AA reed e yu O a waar erence vera sbetese ences wSednce ae taeeds 10 6 oem atten seen E eect staan ene 10 7 10 2 9 About Ia sian teh camectne a a chic enechae Sac Sone susiemawel a 10 7 A se ere eee ee Re eer thease Eee eee E Meee een nent ee ewes mene n Mee ore erie 10 8 TS Dala MONIMOMING nadar ol camsensucind a a a a T E 10 8 103 T COMIM SEUD Cle CIN as espace tars eeccpetc E R A 10 8 1032 Data Monitor Screens da i n 10 9 103 3 Gontroller Data Tableros sacada ici 10 9 1 05324 Graphic Mono SCT tiesa 10 10 WoS end Grapho A A 10 12 A re Ne ee ere 10 13 e OS cara te are cesar try ti ace vate eae es eastern same pe aati sae se pa aes tno ete a eas one eee at aaie meetert eae 10 15 1 023 8 COMMUNICA UOM EMO Saca 10 16 10 4 Data Logging siria 10 16 10 5 Data ERIV IA RUANO oe es ete e E RR sack Ose lene be O ia oras Son 10 18 TOO PINUNO REPO Sa ti a id a io add ceca 10 19 TERA ete one ieee eee oer etree net creer ee eee oe eres eee eee ee er eee en acer eres 11 1 TINTO CU CUORE EE 11 1 112 TCP IPsInie mace Setup OVEKVICW onc 25a cinco direis a e 11 2 112 t TOPP nstanthiViRSery eh Nod Grades tases Ida gene cca Dp E A 11 3 Maz TOPAR INStantRAM Gent NOG tao bici 11 3 11 2 3 TCP IP Client Objects in Screen Designer
132. 3 2 AA 13 2 13 1 2 Install ODBC DSN Data Source Name Setup oooccccccncccccconnncnnnncconnnnncnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnns 13 2 13 1 3 Create Default IHMIDatalog Default MDB Database oooocccccnncccccconnccnnnnccnnnonncnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnans 13 4 13 2 MISA POE MS o als 13 5 A A ete tian eee ames rere er ee ee eee nee RE E er eects EEE see eee re nate eee erie nen meee ae eee en ee re ree ree 13 6 A 13 7 E A 13 7 E A sie cetae dee A tiitbar sivas sabl canaries 13 8 13220 WNAOW MENU 5 23 cens ee tui A se ede scutes cctaclenan teens to aaa 13 8 122 6 THE ID IMIG ts set eae an a asada aa bad ole ta laste estes 13 8 13 3 Application Data Tor Histori Trending mitad id de 13 9 13 39 APPICa Ion E an DIO OS 13 9 13 30 52 OC ADDIICATON Dala e e e e al a de e od O 13 9 13 3 3 Analyze Logged Data in IMITA das 13 9 DS sored a aa aaa a eG a a lll Ea 14 1 a E hse hie E A EE AE EEEE EE EAE A EAS A EENE 14 1 TE AAAI RE E a D E EEEE e E E eee E T E EA E A E 14 1 14 3 skelelon US DLL O a a 14 2 144 SECA CONSI ANA ada 14 4 145 Example 12 Ready Wite PLG Dala ia e el o o e o 14 4 14 6 Example 2 Time Triggered SpooliNg ooocccccnccccccconncnnnnononononncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenoss 14 6 AOSTA UC Et tati 14 6 14 6 2 Use of Time Triggered User DLL oonnnncccconcnncccconconccononcnncnononcnnnnononnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnannnnnnnnnanrnnnnnnnnnannns 14
133. 3 4 Data Table Viewer PDA To use the data table you enter the Start Address and the number of consecutive locations of the selected Memory Type of interest Tap on the Properties button to review and or change any associated Data Table Properties Tap on the M onitor button to read the memory locations and update the data values in the data table Tap on C ontinuous monitor to continuously update the data table 3 3 Tag Database 3 3 1 Tag Database Manager PC In the Screen Designer click on Tools gt Tag Manager to design edit and manage the tag database to suit your project needs You will see the Tag Manager dialog box showing a tree structure displaying all the defined tags and tag groups in your tag database Buttons are provided to access Database Functions tag Group Functions and Tag Functions InstantHMi Tag Manager 240 EA Demo Management Total Tags 240 a Elevator a Garage Control 3 IHiM Palm fa IHMI PPC e 9 IHML Training Edit Tag E IHMI WinCE Owner H Real Historic Trend Alias Tag Map on Ea SE Temp Zone 1 03 08 06 10 4353 09 05 07 17 55 42 Flame Fegulation Zane1 Number Of Tags Set Point Zone 1 __ New Group 240 otatus Zone 1 Add Tag Switch Zone 1 Password Temp Message Zone 1 Remove Tag Read DB Disabled Temp Lone 1 Remove Group fal Waste Management ls Edit DB Disabled gt Edit Database Functions Edit Done Done New Tag InstantAMi Tag Database Info Tag Functions Group
134. 4 14 E OODI acne wa a ee et art a ccc tm ch ee cals eae tee ashe tune ee nant etc atta 4 14 AGA Stale ODICC IS a a ce AS o E eo ties 4 14 A62 Dala OD cis eee eee ee ee ere ee eee eer 4 19 AN Sd e io Mac 4 20 AA ECLAS MDI A a 4 21 46 9 rouch LIN O e tan aan ne 4 24 A A A e a e ea a 4 25 46 Alarm Log Viewer ODEO ana a a eee ee ieee te eet a due ale Dodd eet 4 26 4 6 9 Real TimeHistoric Tri A A i i 4 26 AAA A A a 4 27 AG AO ACIVEX A eea toda cecisndirars tact ar 4 29 46 11 OLEACUVOA VES tits 4 33 A A R A E he uur ham ces 4 34 A O oda demdeceetonmeeutamnaes 4 34 A eeeeeeeet teeter erence tne eerie cen erent aio Geen rer eM Sener E nee Ieee ne erent rn ener eT ener cee ceene Senne ere 4 35 SS A A eee ee eee ee ne eee te ee ee a eee Pe see oe ee ace ee eee ee ee tee earn eh 4 37 A BPN O a 4 37 NLS Ws 6 0 9 mere ee ee eer cee Pee werent ae rec ete erica er Vee eee er eer me eet eer cette ere reer ree eter cee mee eer re eee eee eee 4 37 E TaAbDInG Order Opon ennaa a tes cease upauicce Neue eA eave stubead so iunstaneul nana tw stad imeceecens 4 37 49 2 GUSTOMMZ o a E A S 4 38 TO SPSS WOT ODIO s En O E E O 4 39 ATO HEID a ne enone ten ec ce a a a a oe er Oe 4 39 doi Create Data Display ODIOSO usina iaa 4 40 A A O eee re 4 42 NAS A ose tnamces Atenataetn wlan N i E a dee a a colt oucGamnetetondee E 4 43 4d Graphic Data Formats IMpurWIdgelS a a espace ares aves ee eet ore eae 4 45 ASN AeA COO AlCl A OOM Stand ia 4 49 4
135. 6 14 7 Examples me nggered COMMON eison E E dectaaiai s 14 7 lios 6 CHO AAA a a a eaS 14 7 14 7 WSS Ol UserDLL a a ned ea E 14 7 14 7 APP ICAO to Watlow Controllers seissen E E a 14 9 14 8 Example 4 Commercial Laundry Controller ooooncccnnccccnoonnccnnncnonnnnnnnnnnnonononancnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanenons 14 9 Ci A O A 14 9 14 8 2 Laundry Application Time Line Of Activity oocccconnnncconcncconcnconannnonnnnnnononononnnnnnnnnncnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnrnnnnannns 14 9 1403 WS Er DLE OV SIV le tics is liar 14 10 14 64 User DEL Project File Descriptions acieecct wa ia 14 11 14 80 User DLL CAS SOS A E adioes Oa TRE A E Ea 14 12 O O 14 12 A Installation Registration and ACTUA ION ria leech the Rhee ee Ah hee i ha edad RH A A 1 A E ae ceececenceen a Gansec acerca A 1 AC OMS AUS TARO alentar pela a eee A 1 A 1 2 InstantHMI License Agreement ccccccccseeecceeeeecceeseecseneecceuscecsaececsageeessaueessaueeessaueeessaeeeessaneeetsuseessneesens A 2 AS REO IS TAO ACUVAIIONZRONGY ee eal wll ret A 2 Ae MAS TAMING MAS UA ek i ii ii E a A 3 A 2T Installing Launehrad IDESiGner ON PG ita titiritero is A 3 A 2 2 InstantHMI Runtime Engine for PO sacas an A 8 A2 S MStaMNANMIRUNUME ENGINE fOr OE zranenia a O RTE A 8 A 2 4 InstantHMI Runtime Engine for Pocket PC c ccccccccccsssseeecceeeeeeeeceaeeeeeceeeeeeeesauaeeeeeseeaeeeesseaseeeeeessneeeeseas A 8 A 2 5 InstantHMI Runtime Engine for Palm O
136. 6 4 Macro Example Figure 6 3 illustrates how you may define the macro key lt CTRL gt BACKSPACE to toggle a bit Tag2 definition not shown here refers to a bit using a sequence of three macro commands Macro Key Command Sequence lt CTRL gt BACKSPACE SET DATA Tag2 1 lt CTRL gt BACKSPACE WAIT 100 lt CTRL gt BACKSPACE SET DATA Tag2 0 Figure 6 3 Macro Command Sequence To define the command sequence for macro key CTRL BACKSPACE click on the CTRL check box and select BACKSPACE from the list box Click on SET DATA under Macro Command select the tag name Tag2 from the pull down list and enter the tag value 1 Click on Enter Macro button Then select the same macro key again to start the second command in the sequence select the command WAIT and enter the value 100 under Parameter s Click on Enter Macro button Select the same macro key a third time and enter the third command Click on Enter Macro button Review the macro sequence displayed Click on Done The file of Demo Project Macros MACROS IDB is included on your InstantHMI disk A partial list of the Demo Project Macros is shown in Figure 6 2 InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Script Editor Page 7 1 7 Script Editor The Runtime Engine enables the operator to perform his project tasks by interacting with InstantHMI through Screen Objects using Mouse Touch Screen or some other pointing device and Keyboard keys The ma
137. AST SPOOL parameter will be stored in local memory address 2 TRIGGER_HOUR will be stored in local memory address 3 TRIGGER_MINUTE will be stored in local memory address 4 TRIGGER SECOND will be stored in local memory address 5 and SPOOL_ACTION will be stored in local memory address 6 By placing these parameters in local memory the operator has the flexibility to change any of these parameters at runtime if so desired Example 2A Spool Individual To have InstantHMI execute the Spool Individual function using spool control files 10 SPL 20 SPL daily at 12 00 noon the USERDLL section of your IHMI 4 INI should contain the following TRIGGER _HOUR TRIGGER_MINUTE TRIGGER_SECOND SPOOL_ACTION 0 LOCAL_START_ADDRESS 1 InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI User DLL Page 14 7 Example 2B Spool Delete To have InstantHMI execute the Spool Delete function for spool data files SPOOL SO1 SPOOL S05 daily at 5 30pm the USERDLL section of your IHMI 4 INI should contain the following SPOOL _ACTION 256 LOCAL START ADDRESS 1 Example 2C Archive Minutes To have InstantHMl execute the Archive Minutes function for spool data files SPOOL S23 SPOOL S33 daily at 6 45am the USERDLL section of your IHMI 4 INI should contain the following Example 2D Save Hours To have InstantHMI execute the save hours function for spool data files SPOOL S01 SPOOL S15 daily at 12 00pm the USERDLL s
138. Any tag maybe assigned to one or more tag groups for convenient access to the controller information in functional groups Four Group Function buttons are provided in the tag manager The New Group button is used to create a new Tag Group name For convenience this button is also available in the Tag Editor dialog box when you click on the Add Tag to Group button The Remove Group button is used to remove a group from the list of groups The Add Tag to group button is available in the Tag Manager dialog as well as the Tag Editor dialog Likewise the Remove Tag from group button is available in the Tag Manager dialog as well as the Tag Editor dialog Any tag may be assigned to one or more tag groups If the tag and the group are already created you may select the group and click the Add Tag to group button and use the popup dialog to select the tags you like to add to the group Alternatively while creating or editing the tag definition in the Tag Editor you may click on the Add Tag To Group button This will display the available Tag Groups that you can assign the tag to To assign the tag to a new group not in the list of groups click on the New Group button and create a new Tag Group name Click on one of the available Tag Groups to select it the selected group is hi lighted Click OK to assign the tag to the selected group or Cancel to make no group assignment You will return to the Tag Editor dialog Note the tag groups that the current tag
139. Configuring DCOM Steps G InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI OPC Step H Step Page 12 7 For both Access Permissions and Launch and Activation Permissions Step E click Edit Defaults and make the same changes that were made in Step F Access Permissions and Step G Launch and Activation Permissions Click OK to save changes to DCOM 12 3 2 Configure DCOM for OPCEnum Server PC OPCEnum is used by OPC clients to browse available OPC servers Use the following steps to configure the OPCEnum DCOM component Step A Step B Step C Step D Step E In Windows click on Start gt Run type dcomenfg and then click OK Under Component Services expand Computers gt My Computer gt DCOM Config Right Click OpcEnum and choose properties In the General tab select an Authentication Level of None OpcEnum Properties 7 General Location Security Endpoints Identity The following settings allow DCOM to locate the correct computer for this application If vou make more than one selection then DCOM uses the first applicable one Client applications may oweride your selections Y Run application on this computer F Aun application on the following computer Cancel Apply Figure 12 12 Configuring DCOM for OPCEnum Steps A D In the Location tab choose Run application on this computer Do not make more than one selection OpcEnum Prope
140. DA A 2 1 Installing LaunchPad Designer on PC If you have not ordered InstantHMI LaunchPad or PC Runtime Engine you may skip this Section Review Section 4 1 of this manual to understand the benefits of the InstantHMI LaunchPad software for your application When you install the InstantHMI LaunchPad on your PC for your convenience the PC Runtime Engine will be automatically installed InstantHMI Copyright 2000 20088 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Installation Registration and Activation Page A 4 InstantHMI Software Downloads gt E tuntime amp M E LaunchPad Development System with LaunchPad Development System with PC Runtime Quick Start Guide PC Runtime Quick Start Guide Manual and Free Demo Project Manual and Free Demo Project Ver 5 0 Build 2002 Unicode ea Ver 5 0 Build 1002 Non Unicode Date 02 October 2007 gt Ned bers Date 02 October 2007 Size 32 0 MB Size 32 0 MB Download v5 0 Unicode gt Download v5 0 Non Unicode gt Note Windows 95 or earlier require Non Unicode Note Windows XP and later support Unicode Caution Users of InstantHMI 4 0 4 1 or 4 2 must Caution Users of InstantHMI 4 0 4 1 or 4 2 must obtain a license upgrade before installing InstantHMI obtain a license upgrade before installing InstantHMI 3 0 9 0 Download v4 2 0 Unicode gt Download v4 2 0 Non Unicode gt Download v4 1 2 Unicode gt Download v4 1 2 Non Unicode gt Download v4 0 34 Non Uni
141. Data Help 5 2 1 File The File menu offers the following commands New Create new application report Open Save SaveAs Print Print Preview Print Setup Report1 PRT Report2 PRT Report3 PRT 4 Report4 PRT Exit Open existing application report Save currently open application report using same file name Save currently open application report using different file name Print currently open report file Not implemented Setup printer for printing Last four report files opened in IHMIRPT for editing You may double click these directly for editing Exit IHMIRPT Report Generator program File gt New Ctrl N Use this command to create a new report template Be sure to save the current report template if you want to preserve any changes If you have not saved your report template a dialog box will pop up prompting you to save After you choose Yes or No a blank new template is presented You may click on the tool bar button or press the shortcut key Ctrl N instead of using the menu choice to execute File New command InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 IHMIRPT Report Designer Page 5 4 File gt Open Cirl O Use this command to open an existing report template You may click on the tool bar button or press the shortcut key Ctrl O instead of using the menu choice to execute File Open command You will see a File Open Dialog box Files of
142. ESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS Software Horizons Inc SH provides Instant HMI the Program and licenses its use pursuant to license agreements You assume responsibility for the selection of the Program to achieve your intended results and for the installation use and results obtained from the Program You may a Operate the Program on a single Pocket PC only b Transfer the Program subject to the terms of this license to another party if the other party agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement If you transfer the Program you must at the same time either transfer all copies whether in printed or machine readable form to the same party or destroy any copies not transferred You may not a use copy modify or transfer the Program or any copy in whole or in part except as expressly provided for in this license b provide or allow use of the Program in any network time sharing multiple CPU or multiple user arrangements c grant sub licenses or other rights in the Exit I Disagree Next you will select the installation folder C IHMI 4 is the default where the InstantHMI programs LaunchPad Screen Designer PC Runtime Engine etc will be installed Select Installation Folder Select Program Folder ae Platform Scalable Platform Independent ve Instant HMI New Generation HMI Technology Instant HMI Selected Program Folder Platform Independence 9 InstantHMI 4 1 Human Machine Interface Existing F
143. Editar InstantHMI Data Source Manager A ee Data Sourte Manna EtherNet P Total 2 EB Comm Link TCP IP Device Name ControlLogix Driver EtherNet IP Add New Timeout 1000 Station Offset O pl Comm Link TCP IP Device Name Walchern Driver Walchem Modbus TCP Timeout 2000 Station Offset O Daia Sources Comm Laks 2 GF EiherHeiF A E Comm Link TOPARr E Domed Marne Contra E Dimar gt Ethereal oo o o oa OO fanaa fT Ping Figure 2 21 Data Source Manager and Editor Each tag in the tag database will have a Data Source attached to it For the active objects placed on a screen you will be able to override the tag data source at screen creation time if you so desire This may be necessary for projects where you want to view the same parameter on multiple controllers where the only difference may be the IP address or station number In the case of the station number you may use the station offset concept at the active object level If a station offset is specified this offset will be added to the station number specified in the tag object InstantHMI allows access to controllers over an Ethernet LAN using wireless RF connectivity using EtherNet IP Modbus TCP or other protocols involving TCP IP which require IP addresses for the PLC or InstantHMI runtime nodes InstantHMI makes the job of specifying IP addresses more convenient by allowing
144. Editor To completely specify a macro you need to define a Macro Key and a Macro command including any command Parameters To define a Macro Key choose one of the key codes from the pull down Macro Key list and click on the Cirl and Shift attribute check boxes if desired Section 6 3 has details for specifying macro commands and associated parameters When you are finished specifying a new macro click on the Enter Macro button New macros you create will be appended to the end of the displayed list Project Screen Macros You may click on any existing macro to select it Click on the Delete button to delete the selected macro Use the Move Up and Move Down bution to order the list Project Screen Macros as you wish This may be useful if you wish to use multiple commands attached to a single macro key The Runtime executes all commands listed for a specific macro key in the Project Macros or the current Screen Macros When you are finished with creating editing and inserting the macros and the macro list Project Screen Macros reflects your preferences then click on the Done button to save them and return to the Screen Designer If you do not want to save any of the changes you made in this Macro Editor session then press the Esc key or click on the Cancel Buiton InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Macro Editor Page 6 3 Note If you need multiple macro commands to be initiated with a single macro key
145. Engine creen e Macros amp Scripts Human Operator Figure 8 1 InstantHMI Architecture 8 1 RS 232 Signal Assignments Legacy controllers and devices may have RS 232 DB 25 connectors For your convenience the signal assignments for the usual DB 9 connectors and the corresponding DB 25 assignments are listed in the table below Operator Display OEM DLL 9 Function 25Pin 1 Received Line Signal Detect 8 6 DataSetReady 6 8 CleartoSend ___5 9 Ringindicator___ 22 8 2 RS 232 RS 485 Serial Link using Cables Different controllers require different cable connections The cable connections are described in the driver appendix for your controller included in section C InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Communication Links Page 8 2 8 3 IR Link using Infrared Kit Kit Contents Pocket PC ltem A Infrared Converter Adapter in Orange or Yellow color Figure 8 2 Item B IR Adapter w Power Supply Black Box with InstantHMI Label Figure 8 2 Note If you are using a Pocket PC 2002 PDA example Compaq Ipaq 3800 series for Infrared to function properly you may need to do the following Tap Start gt Settings Tap Connections tab Tap Beam Icon Uncheck the box Receive all incoming beams and select discoverable mode Figure 8 2 Infrared Converter and IR Adapter with Power Supply Instructions Infrared communications in the IR Kit is
146. Ethernet cables item D Instead these kits come with a single RJ 45 crossover cable item E that connects directly your Controller to your Access point You must have a PC with a working Network Interface Adapter 10Mbit RJ 45 type to configure the RF Kit The PC must be configured to use the TCP IP Protocol and initially needs to have an IP Address in the 192 168 0 XXX range this may be changed later Please ensure that no devices have duplicate IP Addresses as this will cause network problems The RF Kit from Software Horizons provided for your convenience is pre tested for correct functionality Software Horizons provides only limited support for configuration of your wireless network and devices Please read and follow the product manuals for help with your configuration For assistance with these products please contact the manufacturer Overview The Wireless Access Point AP is required for wireless access to your network The AP has a usual range of 100 meters indoors and 300 meters outdoors Any wireless device you are using must be well within this range for RF communications to work properly Default Configuration Access Point Item A Your Wireless Access Point is configured for the address 192 168 0 200 You can change this address by using the configuration software that comes with your Access Point CF Wireless Adapter Item B lf you purchased a handheld from Software Horizons with your RF Kit your Compact Fla
147. F1 link to COM2 on the computer Suppose you have four data display fields on your screen each one showing data from one of the four different PLC s connected to the two Com Ports on the computer Your tag specifications for these fields may be as shown below Field Data Source Station Remark DS1 DS1 defines Modicon Modbus Com Parameters DS1 DS1 defines Modicon Modbus Com Parameters 2 3 DS1 DS1 defines Modicon Modbus Com Parameters 4 DS2 DS2 defines AB DF1 Com Parameters Station Offset PDAs InstantHMI allows communication with multiple PLC or I O devices concurrently These devices may be connected in a multi drop or network arrangement to the serial port on the PDA or to an infrared head which can be beamed at using the built in infrared transceiver on the PDA The actual station number used by the comm driver is Station Number Station Offset The default value of Station Offset is O The use of Station Offset a single editing change in the PDA allows a group of tags defined for one controller station to be used to communicate with a different controller station if necessary Datalog Setup Click the Log to Database check box in the Tag Editor dialog box if you wish to log the data in a monitored data field to an ODBC compatible database InstantHMI MDB for historical trending Section 13 or other analysis using tools available to you You may select the Datalog Interval defaulted to 1 sec Specifying a smaller datalog sample time
148. Functions Figure 3 5 Tag Database Manager PC Click the Access Info button to see the Database Info and the password protection of Database contents from editing by unauthorized persons Click the Import Database button to import tag information from a Comma Separated Variable CSV file into the Tag Database The default CSV filename is IHMI TagExport csv with the associated IHMI TagExport Groups csv containing group InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 5 names however you can import any file that is in the correct format Click the Export Database button to export your entire Tag Database into a Comma Separated Variable file Again the default filename is IHMI TagExport csv however you can save it using any name you like This CSV file can then be imported into Excel or similar program for viewing editing While defining a large number of tags and Tag Groups the following approach might be a big time saver e Define the anticipated tag group names e Define one or two representative tags for each memory type and assign them to desired tag groups e Export tag database IHMI TagExport csv containing Edit tag database using Microsoft Excel or other suitable software to add define additional tags Note We recommend that you do the editing of group membership only in the Tag Manager However if you wish to do this while you are editing the tag information
149. HMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Historic Trend Utility Page 13 7 The Status Bar is displayed at the bottom of the IHMITrend window and it includes four panels The first panel is the Command Prompt panel and describes actions of menu items as you use the mouse or arrow keys to navigate through menus If after viewing the description of the command you do not wish to execute the command then release the mouse button while the mouse pointer is off the command or press the ESC key The three panels labeled CAPS NUM SCRL describe the state of the Caps Lock Num Lock and Scroll Lock respectively When any of these locks are engaged the corresponding panel indicator will show up 13 2 2 Main Menu File View Window Help Figure 13 10 Historic Trend Utility Main Menu The menu bar lists the main menu commands You will be using the main menu and other menu commands to create your Trend Profiles The status bar will provide instantaneous feedback Use the context sensitive help by pressing the help key F1 after highlighting any menu item this will display the contextual help about the menu item selected 13 2 3 File Menu The File Menu offers the following commands New Window Create new trend profile Open Profile Open existing trend profile Close Profile Close currently open trend profile Save Profile Save currently open trend profile Save Profile As Save currently open trend
150. Hor a Pore Opt Printers Scale Begira Aparir dated Windies 100 Spet Hasmah are Dish Ci Phat Cote Cares ES amp A arek See THEN Test rd Leri aed Tanta obrado Parent oe AE AA ES Top A aa Figure 13 2 ODBC DSN ET Step 1 1 Step 2 The Administrative Tools dialog should now appear Now double click on Data Sources ODBC E Administrative Toots y l ES Ee ARES Be Edt ew ER TES Bab stack gt gt seno Garos gusto AD E Address p Administrative Tools eo aJ E Component Computer Data Sources Event Viewer Admi nistrative Services Management LOC roc D E al Select an kem bo wen its i Fa description Local Security Pertormaine Serves Tanel Serre Policy Adminishration Ferrer ee eee B objech s 10 2 kB LE My Computer E Figure 13 3 ODBC DSN Setup Step 2 Configures dinini tee settings For other Windows OS click Start gt Settings gt Control Panel and double click on ODBC Data Sources 32bit Step 3 The ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog should now appear ODBC Data Source Administrator User DSN System DSN File DSN Drivers Tracing Connection Pooling About User Data Sources Name Driver dd dBASE Files Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Excel Files Microsoft Excel Driver xls Remove FoxPro Files Microsoft FoxPro Driver dbf IHMIPFD T raining Microsoft Access Driver mdb Configure InstantHMl Datalogs Mic
151. I D parameters for the Feed Water control loop Tap on the screen fields to change the tag names to display the P I D tags and the Set Points Enter the new values based on your analysis through the screen and switch to monitoring and log the data in the handheld for the next ten minutes or so Go get your cup of coffee you earned it while InstantHMI is logging the data for your review Scenario 2 You are the operator responsible for installation and startup of a machine control system Your task includes verifying that the Input Output wiring for the system is as required before the machine can go into production The machine includes an elaborate PC based HMI Verification of the I O tags and the corresponding system response requires two persons one setting I O tag values on the HMI screen and the other to observe and verify the actual system component response But you have a mobile wireless Pocket PC with InstantHMI installed on it You walk over to a location where you can observe the system componeni s of interest use the InstantHMI I O tags to set the I O values and observe the actual system response Your colleague can be doing other useful tasks during this verification period rather than act as your helper Scenario 3 Your process which has been running fine for a long period of time has started exhibiting certain unusual behavior You have certain ideas on what may be going wrong but you would like to collect some additional dat
152. InstantHMI 5 0 HMI SCADA Software for Windows PC Windows CE and PDA Pocket PC Windows Mobile Smart Phone Palm OS Platforms InstantHMT 5 0 Reinforces Simpler is Better HMI Philosophy fnew On PROJECT MyProject 8 f hie iy F the Best HMI Solutions CE Touch Panels El SOFTWARE HORIZONS A me simplify Part 51Man xx Version 5 0 14 2008 Jul 20 Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 100 Treble Cove Road N Billerica MA 01862 USA All rights reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without the written permission of Software Horizons Inc Software Horizons and InstantHMI are registered trademarks and InstantPanel Ol Widgets are trademarks of Software Horizons Inc All other trademarks belong to the respective companies InstantHMI Choose your flavor Enjoy the benefits Welcome to InstantHMI version 5 0 your multi platform HMI solution which reinforces our motto Simplify while building upon the success of InstantHMI 4 x to accomplish our vision Design Once Deploy Anywhere platform scalable new generation HMI Technology for Windows PC Windows CE touch panels PDA Pocket PC and Palm OS and Smart Phone Platforms In late 1999 we embarked upon the challenge of meeting this vision The new InstantHMI architecture was first released in version 1 x for PDAs Palm and Pocket PC and in version 2 0 functional differe
153. L REGISTER FUNCTIONS Function Selected Action Desired SPOOL INDIVIDUAL Spool in file SPOOL SXX using record format in spool control file XX SPL SPOOL DELETE Delete contents in SPOOL SXX Note that XX can be 00 SPOOL AGGREGATE Spool in file SPOOL S00 using record format in XX SPL Use this function to merge information from different XX SPL Reserved ARCHIVE SECONDS Archive SPOOL SXX into file DDHHMMSS SXX Delete contents in SPOOL SXX Note that XX can be 00 ARCHIVE MINUTES Archive SPOOL SXX into file MMDDHHmm SXxX Delete contents in SPOOL SXX Note that XX can be 00 ARCHIVE HOURS Archive SPOOL SXX into file YYMMDDHH SXX Delete contents in SPOOL SXX Note that XX can be 00 ARCHIVE DAYS Archive SPOOL SXX into file YYMMDD SXX Delete contents in SPOOL SXX Note that XX can be 00 Reserved SAVE SECONDS Save information for XX SPL into file DDHHmmss SXX New spool file every second SAVE MINUTES Save information for XX SPL into file MMDDHHmm SXX New spool file every minute SAVE HOURS Save information for XX SPL into file YYMMDDHH SXX New spool file every Hour SAVE DAYS Save information for XX SPL file into file YYMMDD SXX New spool file every day Reserved Figure 5 16 Spool register Functions SPOOL REGISTER FUNCTIONS SUMMARY Register Value Spool format File Number paler SPOOLING SPOOL AGGREGATE ARCHIVING SPOOL INDIVIDUAL 00 SPOOL DELETE 01 256 512 SECONDS MINUTES HOURS DA
154. Log Manager use the Data Log button menu from the Main Menu to add remove tags from the list of tags to be logged Start Stop logging data for a selected tag view logged data etc InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PC Page 9 8 Instant HMI InstantHMl Setup Event Triggers PROJECT Demo Events 1 Tag Elements Datalog Events 1 demo CLS J Tag Database a Demo Tank Setpoint Y Check Event from Startup CEMENT E Tigger Type Transition On Logging Method Log Once Trigger Tag l Trigger Value 1 Transition On Log Once Y EWM Aeration Tank Handshake Tag p Trigger Tag EWM Clarifier Handshake Value O ab ae EWM Grit Tank Datalog Sample Time 1000 Auto Manual Y EWM Settling Tank a Tags to Log E Soe OO EWM Aeration Tank a EVVM Clarifier Event Definition Message Groups Bitmap Groups Trigger Type Logging Method Tags to Log 200007 oom ooo Como Coon omm omn TANIA Datalog Evania Daia T 3 Handshake Tag A ai Y Value Sample Time mya 4 Mine Use the LaunchPad gt Design gt Tags and select Datalog Events to access the Datalog Event Manager You may think of event triggered Data Logging as the response to the following conditional statements If Event1 then datalog Tag List1 If Event2
155. MIl Human Machine Interface Run InstantHMI LaunchPad and click on LaunchPad gt Screens button and then double click on any screen preview bitmap to run the Screen Designer Click on Tools gt Macro Editor menu in Screen Designer to run the Macro Editor 6 2 Screen Project Macros The Macro Editor allows you to create global Project Macros or Screen Macros for the current screen Select Project Macros or Screen Macros from the pull down list Figure 6 2 shows the Project Macros for the Demo Project included in the standard InstantHMI installation Note that each row in this list contains a Macro Key and the assigned Macro Command A scrollable list of the available macro commands tabulated in Figure 6 1 is displayed for your convenience Macro Editor Project Macros Delete Move Up Move Down Set Data Demo Screen Exit Control 2 Set Data Demo S creen Next Back Control 1 Set Data Demo S creen Next Back Control 2 Set Data Demo S creen Next Back Control 3 Show Help Screen InstantHMl Demo Overview scr Show Help Screen InstantHhl System Overview scr Show Help Screen S ampleProjects Menu scr Show Help Screen T raining tmpzones scr Show Help Screen T raining ARealT imeHistoric Trend scr Show Help 5creen T raining Objecthssembly scr Macro Command Parameter Help Screen Name Show Help Screen hal Training tmpzonel scr Macro Key F5 Print Ctrl j Cancel Iw Shift one Figure 6 2 Macro
156. Monitoring Zone 1 Demo Project ff This script calculates Gauge readings Steady or varyng based on Button state Hegulation onet fet the Fader reading s a GetT agi Temp one 1 fi 0 2 GetT agi Set Pont Zone 1 fet the button state c O button up 1 button down b GetT ag Regulation Zonel c GetBit b 0 Calculate a delta change 5 to 5 for the Gauge field Keywords Logical Operators Math Operators e vite coo lt e aofo 7 gt e eS Functions Tag Names nit llGlobals Insert Auto M anual Insert word Int llGlobalz fu alue Data Sources This function allows you to set the initial value of all lt No sources Detined gt Insert the 6 global script variables 4 6 27 to the specified Walle Validate Done Figure 7 1 Script Editor Window 7 2 Script Elements Your script may contain various source lines each line containing upto 256 characters All lines starting with two slashes will be treated as comments A source line may contain Variables Keywords Operators and Functions Some functions may include Tag Name or Data Source as a parameter The syntax of different kinds of source lines is discussed in Sections 7 2 1 7 2 7 below InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Script Editor Page 7 2 Script files are named YourFileName sct which have a file type extension sct Since script files are save
157. N YOU AND SH RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT U S Government Restricted Rights The SOFTWARE and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 or subparagraphs c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52 227 19 as applicable Manufacturer is Software Horizons Inc 100 Treble Cove Road N Billerica MA 01862 USA Table of Contents Instan TOK your Application 1 1 A A E T 1 1 1 2 Instant Ml Design and RUNTIME Platforms 0 abi 1 1 TAS INSTANT OVC Was a e e a 1 3 tA Gerstaned immediate Vicio it 1 5 2 LatnenPad Development MN elec oats 2 1 PAE m 1 AREA AAEE E ARTE EAEE TE E ENE E TE E E IE E T EE N Cente E E S S 2 2 A r emer a oer nee trees ern ere e 2 3 O io NO 5 OU E 2 5 O tics envestt eco shahcarn side dosackaweoeusewexal Sere sed anen checdecowaaxaancesedtechakcentacecosaaxemeverace 2 5 2 3 2 Design gt Screen gt Troubleshoot SGnpts ccoo li ii da a A ta A ATi 2 6 230 3 DESIGN gt Repor di cioa 2 7 pea Bo pi 1 ACS A a a a 2 7 2 30 DESIGN gt Dala SOUNCES ii dt 2 9 DAS A de e di e e le e o de oe 2 10 2 4 1 Setup gt Project New Remove PlatformM oooncccccccnnccnccoconnonnnononcnnnoononcnnnnononnnnnnononnnnnnonannnnnnnnancnnnnnnnnenss 2 12 2A 2 SE
158. OM over TCP IP NetBIOS Step D Step E In Advanced TCP IP Settings choose the WINS tab and choose Enable NetBIOS over TCP IP Alternate DNS server Advanced TCP IP Settings ES IP Settings DNS WINS Options WINS addresses in order of use Add Edit Remove IFLMHOSTS lookup i enabled it applies to all connections for which TCP IP ts enabled T Enable LMHOSTS lookup Import LMHOSTS NetBIOS setting C Default Use NetBl0S setting from the DHCP server IF static IP address is used or the QHCP server does not provide NetBlOS setting enable NetBIOS over TCP IP Ho Enable NetBIOS over TCPAP ae C Disable NetBIOS over TCPAP Cancel Step F Click OK to close the Advanced TCP IP Settings dialog then click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog Click Close to close the Network Connections dialog InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI OPC Page 12 14 12 4 Example DCOM for UniOPC Server 12 4 1 Configure DCOM on Server PC UniOPC Server is the OPC server for Unitronics controllers Use the following steps to configure the UniOPC DCOM component Step A In Windows click on Start gt Run type dcomcnfg and then click OK Step B Under Component Services expand Computers gt My Computer gt DCOM Config Step C Right Click UniOPC and choose properties Step D In the General tab select an
159. OPC Server using DCOM Before proceeding install an OPC Server on your Client PC See Example in Section 12 2 UniOPC Server is the OPC server for Unitronics controllers Use the following steps to configure the UniOPC DCOM component Step A In Windows click on Start gt Run type dcomcnfg and then click OK Step B Under Component Services expand Computers gt My Computer gt DCOM Config Step C Right Click UniOPC and choose properties Step D In the General tab select an Authentication Level of Default UmOPC Server Properties General Location Security Endpoints Identity General properties of this DCOM application Application Name UniQPC Server Application ID B53906C9 FE 09 401 0 3F 52 4057 4144746 Application Type Local Server Authentication Level EET i Local Path Cancel Figure 12 30 DCOM for UniOPC Server Client Steps A D InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHM OPC Page 12 17 Step E In the Location tab choose Run application on the following computer and enter the name of the Server PC in this example SERVER_PC Do not make more than one selection in this dialog OpcEnum Properties El General Location Security Endpoints Identity The following settings allow DCOM to locate the correct computer for this application IF you make more than one selection then DCOM uses the first applicable one Client applicat
160. P IP Links fino m IP Manager PO a Data Source Manager Licensed to My Name My Company My Name My Company Figure 2 19 LaunchPad gt Design gt Data Sources 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 10 To request and receive data from the controller a Communication Protocol must be followed this protocol is incorporated in the communication driver in InstantHMI Table in Figure 2 20 briefly summarizes the Data Source elements associated design tools and a reference to Sections where these are discussed Command Function Data Source Elements Tool or Utility Data Sources Data Source Manager 2 3 5 TCP IP Links IP Manager 2 3 5 Figure 2 20 Designing Data Source Elements The Data Source Manager maintains a database of data sources Each data source will have a name you provide to identify it In addition you will select the communication driver and the communication link Direct Serial Infrared TCP IP to controller or TCP IP to InstantHMl If the selected communication method is direct serial or infrared then you will setup the communication parameters such as baud rate parity data bits and stop bits If the communication method is TCP IP then you will select or create a Device Name that links to the IP address and Port of the controller or InstantHMI device that originates the data f InstantHI Mata Saunia
161. Project Screens To exclude the PalmTempMonitor scr screen from the Demo project click to highlight and select it in the Project screens panel and then click on the Remove button To create a new screen for the project click on the New Screen button or click on the Screen Designer button InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 19 SP HMI PROJECT Available Screens Project Screens CE Application Steel scr A 1 Demo Control Center scr CE tmpzone1 scr 2 PC tmpzonel scr CE tmpzones scr 3 PC tmpzones scr Demo Application Control C gt 4 CE tmpzone1 scr Demo Control Center scr 5 CE tmpzones scr Demo Thank You scr A Insert gt Insert gt 6 PPC TempZone1 scr Demo Sample Applications amres 7 PPC TempZones scr Palm Application Watlow st 8 Palm Templidonitor scr Palm TempMonitor scr 9 Palm TrendDisplay scr Palm TrendDisplay scr z 10 Demo Application Contr y lt gt lt gt Delete Screen Licensed to My Name My Company Figure 2 33 Setup gt Screens 2 4 6 Setup gt Reports When you click on the Reports button you will see the Available Reports Printer or Spool depending on the radio button selection for the selected project Use the Assign button to define which printer report templates is assigned to a specific printer report slot number in your project For example click on
162. S a nise eina anana aaaea aaa aaeeei naaa eai aE aa aaan A 9 A 2 6 Converting InstantHMI 4 x Projects to 5 D cccccccccoccnncccnncccconoonocononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnans A 9 A 3 InstantHMI Activation GTINY cesta ir dto held A 10 Puce W NAMOGUCUON sere erie otter ch de Ne eee al E adel Cdl a deca del ide Leal A 10 A 3 2 PC LaunchPad Runtime Registration Activation ccccccoconncnncccnnnnnncononnnnnnnnoncnnnnononnnnnnonnnnnnnnononencnnonancnnnns A 11 ASS PDA CE Runtine Registration Activation renier e e e o il lO A 12 ALA MOWING AstantraMI ACI All Oldie de e E seousde ca aadteh atuadse ieee edavaidestabaneJenenetsentoaaes A 12 AAs Moving FC RUNUMS FAC UIM AU MA ges se sec cares bet ects EE oittotid A 12 A 4 2 Moving PC LaunchPad Designer ACtivatiOn cccccccccsseceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeessaeeeeeesseeeeeeesaaeeeeeessaaeeeeeeeas A 14 ARES CE PDA Runime Mstalation accio A 14 A 4 4 Backing up InstantHMI CE PDA Activation viii A aa A 15 AS Removing NStAN GAM ACI AO baina A 16 A 5 1 Removing PC LaunchPad Designer Activation ci a A 16 A 5 2 Removing CE PDA Runtime Activation ccccccssseecccceeseececcseeeeceeceeaeeceeeeeaeeeeeseeaueeeesseaueeeesseageesesssageeesenas A 16 B FAQ Frequently Asked QueStiONns ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeaeaeeaaaaeaaaeaaaeaeeeaaeaaaeeeeneeeeeneaeeeeees B 1 B 1 What is InstantHMI Designed to rODENM
163. SPEED SOG PSA FWO OLY SEC HD INJ ZONE PRESSURE 904 IHJ DELAY SECs HD IHJ ZONE TRANS PT 22g ADD L IMI CS EC SRO INJ ZONE SPEED 297 HOLD TIME 5 ECT SRO INJ ZONE PRESSURE 905 PLAST OLY SECT SRO INJ ZONE TRANS PT 290 PLAST MONITOR 4TH INJ ZONE SPEED 295 IHJ MONITOR 586 4TH INJ ONE PRESSURE CRASH COOLING Figure 5 1 Sample Printer Report 5 1 Getting Started If you have not installed InstantHMI LaunchPad on your PC do so now see Appendix A When installation is complete click on the InstantHMI icon to run the InstantHMI LaunchPad Click on the Screens button to run Screen Designer click on Tools gt Report Designer You may also access Repot Designer from LaunchPad directly Setup gt Reports gt Report Designer You will see the following screen Figure 5 2 You will be working with your report template in the Design Area of InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 IHMIRPT Report Designer Page 5 2 the Report Designer window using the Menu bar Section 5 2 This window also has a Title bar Section 4 1 1 and a Tool bar Section 5 2 3 at the top and a Status Bar Section 5 2 3 at the bottom Please review the discussion in Section 4 1 if you are not familiar with Screen Designer Window of InstontliMt Report Designer UNTITLED fm Cat Vew Dita Het Os ta 17 Figure 5 2 Report Designer Window Modifying Creating your Application Report A Thumb Na
164. Select option double click on the Plot data field Select the Real Time History view from the pull down menu at the top to check out the two views the operator can select at run time Note that the History view includes a scroll bar at the bottom of the plot that the operator can use to review the historic trend over any time period he selects 4 6 9 OLE Object OLE Object Linking and Embedding technology can be used to create compound documents Example Embedded Excel Worksheet in an InstantHMI Screen The InstantHMI Screen Designer and PC Runtime Engine are OLE containers OLE containers are applications that manage in addition to native data a set of OLE server items Screen Designer supports multiple embedded OLE objects and allows you to select and edit any of them We discuss OLE Objects here Activex Objects are discussed in Section 4 6 10 Creating OLE Objects The Screen Designer as a OLE container will allow you to insert OLE objects into the screen document Use the Objects gt OLE Object command to insert a new OLE object on your screen When you choose this command you will see the Insert OLE Object dialog box shown InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 28 Insert OLE Object Object Type Create New Corel Presentations 10 Drawing Media Clip Cancel e Microsoft Clip Gallery Cete MoE Microsoft Equation 3 0 Microsoft Excel Chart Microsoft Excel Worksh
165. Special Tags InstantHMI allows you to define several Special Tags for performing special functions Print Control Spool Control etc The tags in this group may be setup so that you may control printing spooling etc without operator intervention from your PLC based on events detected in your PLC To use any of the special tags assign one or more tags from your tag database to each of the Special Tags Group with the tag parameters Memory Type Address Bit Number Data Source etc to suit the special register you have defined and setup in your controller Since you may assign multiple tags for each of the Special Tags when you have multiple PLC stations the same special register from each of the stations can then perform the specified special function PROJECT Demo _ L Special Tags Assigned Tag s Print Control l Demo Print Register Spool Control Switch Screen Update Enable Recipe Enable Tag Manager De assign Tag El E SOFTWARE HORIZONS d Oe My Company Figure 9 8 Special Registers for Project Setup Print Control Tag The Print Control Tag is used for causing a printout of reports based on some events detected in your PLC A value of 1 in this register will cause report 1 PRT to be printed if value is 2 then report 2 PRT will be printed etc The register value will be changed back to 0 automatically by Runtime Engine once your request for printing is processed You should control t
166. Spool menu Current data is spooled stored in a spool report file What is done by PLC Ladder Logic Trigger the spooling action as an event by storing the appropriate value in the Spool Register How to set up a Spooling Data Logging System Create up to 99 spool template files Edit the tag Spool Register to suit your spool register address and data source Determine which spooling function you want Ensure the PLC logic loads the appropriate value into the Spool Register and thus triggers the desired spooling function The 16 bit Spool Register will be interpreted as follows The low byte 8 bits in the Spool Register will refer to the spool template file number 1 SPL 2 SPL etc You may use up to 99 spool template files 1 SPL 2 SPL 99 SPL The High byte 8 bits in the spool register will provide additional functionality as discussed below The default file which contains spooled information is SPOOL SXX and this is the file which is included in your printer reports when you use the Spool data format 5 3 3 Spool Register Functions The table in Figure 5 16 lists the Spool Register Functions You will note that the table in Figure 5 16 lists three groups of functions Spool High byte 0 2 low byte 0 99 Archive High byte 10 13 low byte 0 99 Save High byte 20 23 low byte 0 99 You may create up to 99 spool template files 1 SPL 2 SPL 99 SPL to define different data record formats as disc
167. Status Not Activated Status Activated o F Serial 201142508 Serial 201174545 Step 3 Design your Application Update 0 Update 1 Version 3 00 Version 3 00 ay Y ARE EY uos Product Code IHMIPCRT Product Code IHMIPCDS E inc Activate Move Remove LaunchPad Activation Activation Done Figure A 9 Activation Utility and Activate Runtime Button on PC2 Step 2 On PC2 Click on Activate Now button to view the Activation Status Carefully note down the Serial for the installed Runtime you wish to activate Copying down the Serial incorrectly is bound to be disastrous So please double check that you copied the Serial correctly Make sure that the status for the product you are trying to activate Runtime is Not Activated Leave this dialog displayed on PC2 you will click on Activate Runtime after generating the required activation code on PC1 as discussed in Steps 3 4 below Step 3a On PC 1 As in Step 1b start InstantHMI Activation Utility LaunchPad gt Help gt Activation Step 3b On PC1 As in Step 2 click on Activate Now button You will see the Activation Status dialog Make sure that the status for the product you are trying to move Runtime is Activated and that you see a button labeled Move Activation associated with it Step 3c On PC1 Click the Move Activation button associated with Runtime Engine You will see the following dialog Move Activation for Runt
168. Type Select the type of file you want to open PRT for Printer Report Template files SPL for Spool Report Template files and a for any text files Folders Select the project directory in which Report Designer will find the file that you want to open File gt Save Ctrl S Use this command to save the current report template to its current name and directory You may click on the tool bar button or press the short cut key Ctrl S instead of the menu choice to execute File Save command When you save a report template for the first time Report Designer displays the Save As dialog box so you can name your report If you want to change the name and directory of an existing report before you save it choose the Save As command File gt Save As Use this command to save and name the current report template Report Designer displays the Save As dialog box so you can name your report template To save a report template with its existing name and directory use the Save command Save As Dialog Box The following options allow you to specify the name and location of the file you re about to save File Name Type a new filename to save a report template with a different name A filename can be a long string of characters and an extension file type Report Designer adds the extension you specify in the Save File As Type box Folders Select the directory in which you want to store the report template File gt Print Use this co
169. UD gt Preet ak US cdo e a 2 14 24 RS es POLS C a mew Naeandcantateice a SN iece bata celeste E 2 15 ZAA SEDDS Project gt DEDO ies 2 17 245 SCID So ClO CMS troein e torte ise ind Latin cheb o a e e a cca ied 2 18 2G G2SElUD REP A eee aes 2 19 EET io 1 8 er aa 21612 falc 0 k ee ameter a NES nent a eee rate Pe OR rere et ee ee 2 19 Gy MU oat O A A o ce ae eaeoeasd 2 20 DO AN e e e a de O 2 21 2 32 Project RUNTIME OPIO a tl a li a caritas 2 21 20 RUV EMOSIE RO EC aaier a a a ai 2 21 2 DAT OIE CLINE DOM Srs aAa 2 22 OU sian ere Ses sea ere Saari Se cyanea eG anand ia eee eso eke aap ostte eee 2 24 e 5 Ee RY Tn ne ee eter 3 1 Ol Wala OUNCE Ss E E E EE E S EETA E Pandiee T AE AE E teed deters sdaenteadeeceds 3 1 22 Dia Table VIEW llei loro 3 2 31 Pata VMIeWer RO Justo lata datada 3 3 092 2 Data Table LOOW PDA sacan 3 3 39 ad Dal aD ase di iaa arie Udessaionapeomaes 3 4 3 301 lag Database Manager PO rrian e a a adden dvaddendadenduralaantshduienanan a a EEEE 3 4 332 Tag Group UNGHONS APG iener No ans 3 5 oso WAG Filla Ge A a A AO 3 6 33A tad Editore iia ii diia 3 6 3 3 5 lag Database Manager PDAS ii A A A a a a id 3 12 3 3 0 Tag Group FUNCIONS PDAS usaras rabia 3 13 397 Wag IEGNOF PDAS di a tepic 3 14 34 Message Data DaS En eE eh it a a EEEN 3 17 3 4 1 Message Database Manager PC linia 3 18 3 4 2 Message Database Manager PDAS cccccccccessseeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeaeeaseeeeeeeseaeaaaeeeeeeessaeaee
170. X The value in the low byte 1 99 selects the spool template file 1 SPL 99 SPL used for the data record format When high byte 0 and low byte xx data will be spooled in separate spool files SPOOL SXX using the format in corresponding template file XX SPL When high byte 2 and low byte xx data will be spooled in a single aggregate spool file SPOOL SOO using the record format XX SPL Thus you may control the data that gets collected in up to 100 different spool report files in a very flexible manner by controlling the Spool Register contents Note that at any time you can delete flush the contents of the individual spool report file SPOOL SXX XX 1 99 or the aggregate spool file SPOOL S00 by setting the Spool Register high byte 2 and low byte 0 99 For example if the Spool Register has the value 2 high bye 0 low byte 2 then a data record according to the template 2 SPL will be saved in the spool report file SPOOL S02 If the Spool Register has the value 514 high byte 2 low byte 2 then a data record according to the template 2 SPL will be saved in the aggregate spool report file SPOOL SO0 If the Spool Register has the value 258 high byte 1 low byte 2 then the spool report file SPOOL S02 will be deleted If the Spool Register has the value 256 high byte 1 low byte 0 then the aggregate spool report file SPOOL S00 will be deleted Note The Spool Report files SPOOL SXX may be included in printer reports as
171. YS SAVING SECONDS MINUTES HOURS DAYS Figure 5 17 Spool Register Function Summary InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 IHMIRPT Report Designer P0010 SPOOL REGISTER DELETE spoot emn ARCHIE DEAAmme 54 be MMOGHH mm SL ARCHIVED OR SAVED FILES Figure 5 18 Illustrating Spool Register Functions 5 3 4 Examples Spool Register Content High Byte Low Byte Spool Option Spool Control File Bit Number fedcba98 76543210 Example 1 00000000 00000001 Example 2 00000001 00000010 Example 3 00000010 00000011 Example 1 Spool in file SPOOL S01 using record format 1 SPL Value in the Spool Register 1 Spool format file selected SPOOL SO1 Spool option selected 00 Example 2 Delete contents in SPOOL S02 Value in the Spool Register 258 Spool format file selected SPOOL S02 Spool option selected 01 Example 3 Spool in aggregate SPOOL S00 using 3 SPL Value in the Spool Register 515 Spool format file selected SPOOL S03 Spool option selected 02 InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc Page 5 16 5 0 20Jul2008 IHMIRPT Report Designer Page 5 17 5 4 Creating Reports at Runtime 5 4 1 Using Reports gt Print Menu at Runtime Use the Reports gt Print command to print a report on the printer The report printed will correspond to the screen displayed on the monitor That is if you are looking at screen 2 and use the P
172. You may not use blanks or the minus sign in variable names Local variables are not shared between scripts These variables retain their values between executions of the same script Global variables may be used to transfer parameter values between Scripts You were previously restricted to use any of 26 local variables a b 2 and any of 26 Global variables A B Z The declaration LocalVar VarName defines VarName as a local variable The declaration GlobalVar VarName defines VarName as a global variable we recommend you include all your GlobalVar declarations in the Startup script Startup sct for your easy reference Any undeclared variables will be treated as local variables if their name is 2 or more characters long For backward compatibility with scripts created using previous version of InstantHMI Script Editor undeclared single character upper case variables A B Z are treated as global variables declared automatically by the Script Editor Undeclared single character lower case variables a b z are treated as local variables We recommend you use local vars a b z with or without declaration for temporary variables in your script All variables are of type double but may contain integer boolean float or double values The keywords If Else While Goto and symbols Label and have special syntactical meaning as explained in Section 7 2 7 7 2 2 Operators Valid Logical and Math operators are
173. a static IP address Note Due to bad Internet connections server latency and other factors you may experience difficulty getting the client object monitor sample time that you request It is best to try different sample times and see what works the best in your case 11 2 4 TCP IP Used in Project Deployment InstantHMI projects Screens and other elements may be deployed on any of the supported runtime platforms Windows PC Pocket PC Palm OS and Windows CE The LaunchPad design system allows you to select the platform which implies the OS and screen resolution InstantHMI has a built in inter node communication facility including TCP IP link serial link and RF link InstantHMI TCP IP link incorporates a Chat and File Transfer capability at each run time node as well as the LaunchPad development system This facility can be used to deploy project elements on target platforms as well as retrieve reports and data from runtime engine nodes If you click on LaunchPad gt Setup command button and then click on Deploy Project button you will see the Deploy Project dialog suitable for PDA platforms Select the Project to Deploy from the pull down list of projects select the Device to Deploy to and the Deploy Action You may also select the project elements such as Tags Project Screens etc to deploy NAF HMI D E4 PROJECT Runtime Target Platform RAT select Project Elements Project screens scripts Macros Tag Database Data Sour
174. a to confirm which of your thoughts are worth pursuing further in detail Changes or additions to the existing elaborate sophisticated HMI are not feasible over the short haul You whip out your Pocket PC based InstantHMI collect some data for tags of interest independent of and without disturbing the existing HMI and use this information to solidify your ideas and present it to the group or management for further action and or enhancement of the existing elaborate HMI Scenario 4 With a low price for the complete system Palm or Pocket PC hardware RS232 serial cable adapter and software now even the lowest cost micro PLCs and other controllers can have their own HMI InstantHMI runtime engine on a PDA node can stand alone as it does not require a runtime engine on a PC node to act as a Server When a runtime engine is also available on a PC or other platform nodes the PDA based runtime can easily exchange information with the other InstantHMI runtime nodes in a Client Server setup InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI for Your Application Page 1 3 Quick deployment of InstantHM on a PDA platform is possible without the need for elaborate Project setup if you can take advantage of the integrated Runtime and Design screens of a traditional HMI provided in InstantHMI by the use of a tag database organized into tag groups and pre formatted screens The Scrollable Monitor screen
175. abase The data source for the tag provides the raw data of the tag object The screen data display object then translates the raw data into the chosen display format of the screen object for your viewing on the InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 8 screen Clicking on Design gt Tags and selecting the Project Element Tag Database displays the tags defined in the tag database Figure 2 15 PROJ Tag Elements Tag Database 240 s All Tags Datalog Events E Auto Manual Message Groups E Chemical Bulk Tank Bitmap Groups Date Derno Mode Demo Current Screen ID Demo Print Register Demo Screen Exit Control Demo Screen Exit Message o Demo Screen Next Back Control 3 Mama Davranan Manan Dantval Tag Manager gt Screens Reports Tags Data Sources My Name GQ sortwant HORIZONS 4 Hi inc My Company mpiity Figure 2 15 Design gt Tags gt Tag Database Table in Figure 2 16 briefly summarizes the tag elements associated design tools and a reference to Sections where these are discussed Command Function Tag Elements _ Tool or Utility Tags Tag Database Tag Manager 33 Datalog Events _ Datalog Events Dialog 34 gt Message Groups Message Manager Bitmap Groups Bitmap Manager 35 Figure 2 16 Designing Tag Elements The tags in the InstantHMI Tag Database have separate raw
176. abled Message Restarted Data Terminated Early Data Ended Early Break in Data InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc Framing Error Parity Error Data Over Run Device Busy Command Error Unknown Error TCP IP Connection Failed Unable to locate device Invalid Path General Timeout No Response Pending or Returned length of 0 Bad Path Node Not Present Node Not Found No global data present Invalid Path Specified in InstantHMI ini file 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PC Page 9 20 InstantHMI also records the communication statistics in the file COMMSTAT LOG If you have any problems with communications with your PLC you may inspect the COMMSTAT LOG file see example in Figure 9 22 by clicking the Status button on the LaunchPad The profile string CommStat in InstantHMI INI file in your Windows Directory controls logging in COMMSTAT LOG COMMMSTAT NEW starts logging in a new COMMSTAT LOG file archiving the old data in a file COYYMMDD LOG where YY MM DD denote the year month and date COMMSTAT APPEND appends new data to the existing COMMSTAT LOG file InstantHMI Communication Log Port ID Date Start time End time Total Comm Total Timeouts General eae E E EO EE eee Attempts _________ Errors ______Recv Send Errors __ 0 10 07 93 09 08 26a 09 09 59a 1430 0 0 0 0 0 10 07 93 09 11 08a 09 16 00a 4282 0 0 0 0 0 10 07 93 09 16 00a 09 21 00a 4376 0 0 0 0 0 10 07 93 09 21 00a 09 22 12a 1059 0
177. accuracy or fitness for a specific purpose Therefore Software Horizons Inc shall have no liability to wou or amy other person or entity with respect to amr liabilits loss or damage caused or alleged to hare been caused directly or indirectly the program contained here This includes but is not limited Oo interruption of service loss of data loss of consulting or anticipatory profits or consequential damages from the use of these To modify the DLL create your own special functions and place calls to them within the above function UserEntry JAM User cop Copvriakt tc z000 4006 Software Horizons Inc oo ee ee ee eee ee eee eS ee a ee eS EEE EEE EEE a EE ee a a eS ee ee i finclude lt mindons gt finclude UserDLL h ff Definition of THMIUSER structure finclude IHMUser h ff Fiumotion definitions USERDLL Entry point int UserEntry THMIUSER suserinfo erinto Command USERCMD NOCH erinto Status USERSTAT MOSTATOS return SUCCESS Figure 14 2 Skeleton User DLL THM Ts er h Comv right ic 000 006 Software Horizons Inc Pet ret ret ret Cer ret o o aaa Te cae Ce CD Pete a eT rece a fi mide HOUSE E H define IAHMITSER H cplusplus extern E f eee cplusplus fee Eein exported funckions int FAR UserEntrwt JTHMIUSER userinfo 1 fe End exported functions colusplus Figure 14 3 Include File IHMlUser h InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20J
178. action steps may be required to correct a selected Possible Cause To add a Corrective Step enter its text in InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 7 Corrective Steps text field and click Add Step button Use the lt lt gt gt buttons to select any specific corrective step To remove a corrective action step select it and click the Remove button To edit a corrective action step select it enter the new text and click the Edit button For any selected topic Example Alarms click on the Symptoms entry field to enter a symptom Repeat entering additional symptoms if desired Two symptoms are shown for the topic Alarms Alarm won t clear Alarm won t occur For each Symptom add a list of Possible Causes for the symptom that the user can identify example Alarm set points incorrect and then proceed to enter the Corrective Steps script to assist in troubleshooting the problem example Step 1 of 1 Check the operation mode Finally click on Done button 2 3 3 Design gt Reports When you click on Design gt Reports button you will see the Available Report types for the selected project in the left panel To create a new printer report select its type Printer Report in the left panel and then click on the associated design tool Report Designer button To edit an existing printer report select its type in the left panel and then double cli
179. age 9 1 9 Runtime Engine PC 9 1 Introduction InstantHM LaunchPad Section 2 allows you to design your HMI project on a Windows PC platform and deploy it on any Windows PC or Windows CE or PDA Windows Mobile Pocket PC Smart Phone Palm platform which has an installed InstantHMI Runtime Engine Machine Process Comm Interface Wireless _Serial TCP IP Infrared WiFi Bluetooth Runtime E Operator LaunchPad se Display Sa te Human Operator Figure 9 1 InstantHMI Architecture Using the InstantHMI LaunchPad to design appropriate project elements for one or more runtime engines you can accomplish your application objectives including the following e Monitoring useful process variables Data Entry for direct setup and control of process by operator Trending important variables for ensuring production quality Alarm monitoring acknowledgement and response from anyplace anytime Data Logging on selected variables for troubleshooting and productivity enhancement using historic trend analysis e Recipe Control for repeatable and quick batch process setup e Reporting as per your template for your production and management personnel e TCP IP Connectivity for access to the process or machine control data from other PC s via LAN or over the Internet Any additional requirements of your application not readily supported in InstantHMI may be accomplished by extending the functionality via
180. ale obte Alco Vale loe Ta Vale oe asin Degrees loe Cos Degrees be Tan Degrees O oe lr Number O obte HABS aby obte Lo Number O obte 0 Ceiling Number Precision doble A Floor Number Precision double AA Round Number Precision double Miscellaneous __9 Beep Number od CdS Wait Mes od 6 Getit Variable BNumber BOO 22 S etBit Variable BitNumber BiValue Vod i CO TN A Execute Macro Macro Key doble alRecipeSave RecipeName od Ao RecipeWrite RecipeName koo le nt Mia Y nt IO INE CEET AO let O nt Aa O ee Y nt te CUEVA O A A InitAlIGiobals Value od 6 InitAMLocals Vale od 86 LocailVar VariableName od InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Script Editor Page 7 5 1 ActiveX Functions Script Function Return Value ActiveXGetProperty PropertyName ActiveXSetProperty PropertyName Value ActiveXSetDoVerb VerbName ActiveXSetDoVerbld Verbld ActiveXGetProperty PropertyName This function returns the value of property PropertyName as a double precision value To get the native value int float etc of the property you may assign the returned value to a Tag with format matching that of PropertyName ActiveXSetProperty PropertyName Value This function sets the value of property PropertyName equal to double precision value To set the native value int float etc of the property you may assign the desired value to any
181. alog box and then click on the element you want to learn about Note that if you move the mouse selection cursor to an element and wait for a moment a tool tip will tell you what that element s name is The following options allow you to specify which file application screen to open File Name Type or select the file name you want to open This box lists files with the extension you select in the Files of Type box Files of Type Select the type of file you want to open this must be SCR Look in Folders Select the project directory where Screen Designer should find save the file that you want to open After you have chosen the file name click on the OK button or click on the Cancel button to cancel the File Open request without opening a file If the screen file you open was saved in a resolution different from your current screen resolution it will be transformed to appear the same size as before File gt Save Ctrl S Use this command to save the current application screen to its current name and directory When you save an application screen for the first time Screen Designer displays the Save As dialog box so you can name your screen If you want to change the name and directory of an existing screen before you save it choose the Save As command File gt Save As Use this command to save and name the current application screen Screen Designer displays the Save As dialog box so you can name your screen This dial
182. alue for Non Graphics tags has no effect Tap on the OK button to save the changes you made or tap on the Cancel button to discard the changes you made The More button will be used if there is more specification available for any fields shown on this screen 3 4 Message Database InstantHMI allows you to define text messages corresponding to numeric values stored in controller registers or local memory InstantHMI maintains a database of all the various message items of interest to you in a message database A message database contains several message groups each of which may be associated with one or more tags in the tag database Each message group InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 18 contains several message items A message item consists of a numeric value and a corresponding text of message to be displayed on screen 3 4 1 Message Database Manager PC In LaunchPad click on Design gt Tags gt Message Groups or in Screen Designer click on Tag Data gt Message Groups to access the Message Database Manager where you can design edit and manage the message groups and message items associated with the tags in the tag database to suit your project needs You will see the Message Manager dialog box showing a pull down list of message groups defined for your project InstantHMl Message Manager Er da Auto On Off Total Groups 17 Demo Mode 3 Demo O
183. ame GetLocallnt 101 7 2 5 Assignment Statement The syntax of an assignment statement is simple variable expression Examples a 10 b Sin a Cos a 0 5 c A 5 7 2 6 Label and Comments Labels are identified by the prefix for example TAG and are useful in changing the sequence of execution of the script lines Note that a statement even a dummy one such as x 0 must be present on a labeled line Any line starting with will be treated as a comment line in your script and will not be executed Starting with version 4 2 of InstantHMI you may add in line comment at the end of your script code line the rest of the line starting with will be treated as a comment 7 2 Control Statement Source lines are compiled into code lines and then the script is executed sequentially starting with the first code line Control statements are useful to alter the sequence of this execution at run time InstantHMI script supports control statements involving the following keywords IF ELSE GOTO WHILE Examples control statements i IF A gt O SetLocallnt 101 1111 Here if the variable A is greater than zero i e positive then Local Memory address 101 is set to the integer value 1111 ii IF A gt O ioin 101 1111 ELSE Sinan 101 2222 Here Local 101 is set to the value 1111 if A gt O otherwise it is set to the value 2222 iii A GetLocallnt 101 IF A gt O GOTO Greater
184. anagement System PROJECT y Not Just the Best Prices OM A A the Best HMI Solutions E SOFTWARE HORIZONS 1 Oe pitty Figure 2 1 InstantHMI LaunchPad Before Activation The LaunchPad includes the following Command Buttons e Design e Setup e Run e Help The pull down list at the top allows you to select one of the available projects If you select New Project here the New Project Wizard Section 2 4 1 pops up to guide you through creation of a new project for your application PROJECT Demo New Project Wizard This wizard provides the quickest way to create an HMI Project for your application m gt Step 1 Create New Project Step 2 Define Data Source Step 3 Identify Tags Step 4 Design Screen Step 5 Test in Runtime Create New Project a E SOFTWARE HORIZONS 4 Mine Figure 2 2 InstantHMI LaunchPad After Activation When you click on a Command Button a dialog box pops up in the LaunchPad panel which gives access to the associated project elements and tools The hierarchy of project functions and the associated Project Elements Screens Databases etc as well as the Tool or Utility used in the design and setup are shown in Figure 2 3 InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 2 Project Elements Tool or Utility Section creen Objects Scripts sd Script Editor Repo Data Sources Data Source Manage
185. ance the look and feel of your application They make common actions like incrementing the value of a Register updating Boolean fields and monitoring Controller data registers easy The operator does not even need a keyboard input panel to enter data LOT V Meter 300 Speed Control HE Fast Slow Dual Spinner Gauge Knob Figure 10 18 Graphic Widgets PDA InstantHMI takes advantage of the superior graphic capability of Pocket PC to support a Graphic Monitor Screen in addition to the numeric Data Monitor Screen You may tap on the Screens gt Graphic Monitor gt Small menu to go to the Monitor screen with small graphic widgets On this screen you will see a pull down list of available tag groups and four small graphic widget tag display fields InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PDA Page 10 11 Alternatively you may tap on the Screens gt Graphic Monitor gt Medium Menu to go to the monitor screen with large graphic widgets On this screen you will see a pull down list of available tag groups and two large graphic widget tag display fields E InstantHMI 10 14a InstantHMI 46 3 26 EY Ex InstantHMI Group lt All Tags gt v Group lt All Tags gt v Local 2 LED v Local 2 Button v Local 202 y Local 2 Button v Figure 10 19 Graphic Monitor Medium Small PDA Local 2 LED v Local 201 v 107 Ph oros Alternativ
186. and button color for both the On and Off states By default the text font and color for the On state are the same as those for the Off state Choose the label font and colors to suit your application You may also choose the to show the button frame and its color Finally you may select the button to stay latched in the On Off state or return to its state after a momentary transition to the On or Off state Click on the button in the preview panel to verify desired functionality Button height and width are better adjusted visually on screen Note that you can tie a button to a bit memory up and down values must be 0 or 1 or register memory up and down values may be any numbers Click on Done button to change the button parameters or Cancel X button to retain the old parameters and return to the data specification dialog box Windows Button Properties The Windows style Button is very similar to Widget Button in terms of its properties except for the frame thickness and 3D height of the button Bitmap Button Properties For the Off state enter the tag value example 0 and select a bitmap file to represent the way the button appears on screen in the Off state For the On state enter the tag value example 1 and select a bitmap file to represent the way the button appears on screen in the On state You may also choose the to show the button frame and its color Finally you may select the button to stay latched in the On Off state or retu
187. and manage the bitmap groups and bitmaps associated with the tag database to suit your project needs You will see the Bitmap Group Manager dialog box showing a pull down list of bitmap groups defined for your project InstantHMIl Bitmap Group Manager MER IWay Switch Total Groups 36 0 3IWAYOFF BMP El 1 3WAYOFF BMP Bmp Functions 2 IWAYMAN BMP Add Bitmap E 9 CallButton 3 Direction Pence Funcinne Select Bitmap 9 Door Direction P A Elevator New Group Bitmaps Image Preview 3 Elevator Direction IWAYAUTO BMP A fra Copy Grou a a Elevator Down Call Buttons py p WAYMAN BMP IWAYOFF BMP E Elevator Up Call Buttons Delete Group AIR HDR EMP 3 Elevator F10 Button ARR_D BMP s Elevator F11 Button i ARN EPRE a Elevator F12 Button F ARR_R BMP A Elevator F1 Button a a ARR_U BMP A Elevator F2 Button 9 Elevator F3 Button oa AUTO ett i Poe Bi Help b E Elevator F6 Button BOTSHFT BMP Figure 3 19 Bitmap Database Manager and Select Bitmap Remove Bitmap Er eel eb BE ee ee EP To define a new group name click on the New Group button and enter the new bitmap group name and then click OK To define bitmaps associated with any bitmap group select the group name from the pull down list of bitmap groups and then click the Add Bitmap button You will be asked to enter a value or range of values and then assign a bitmap using the Select Bitmap dia
188. and reused to setup other similar controllers instantly The Recipe function is similar to Configuration function Both recipes and configurations are defined in terms of tag groups in InstantHMI You may think of a Recipe as an underlying script implemented in the controller whose parameters like the configuration parameters are stored in the InstantHMI runtime platform InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 22 3 6 1 Recipes PC InstantHMI allows you to define the recipes as tag groups download recipes in the runtime engine from your controller registers preview recipes in the LaunchPad Recipe Manager and upload any selected recipe from the runtime engine to the controller registers Controller configurations can be similarly viewed stored uploaded to the controller etc You could also setup additional safeguards for recipe transfer to the controller to ensure a smooth transition from one batch to the next or from one setup to the next without exceeding machine or process limits Recipes are included as one of the project elements To access recipes click on LaunchPad gt Design gt Screens and select Recipes in the Screen Elements column select a recipe name if available from the Recipe Groups pre view panel and then click on the Recipe Manager button Instant HMI InstantHMI Recipe Manager PROJECT Pe Recipes Demo Recipe v Total 2 Sy
189. ape to a fader cursor move to the desired location on screen and click You get the default fader on screen and the cursor changes to a Select Tool cursor Double click on the fader and change any fader properties InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Fader Properties Limits High End 100 Low End lo Misc Major Ticks 11 Minor Ticks 3 Background Slider v Border Preview Page 4 48 Fader Properties Limits Preview High End 1000 Low End lo Misc Minor Ticks 13 Slider Major Ticks 6 Background v Border Figure 4 50 Fader Parameters Two Examples Select Knob to place a knob on the screen The operator can enter any integer values by clicking on the knob setting desired lf you double click on the Knob the Display Object Properties dialog box appears Click on Properties and you will see the following dialog box for Knob Properties Knob Properties Knob Properties Limits Preview Limits Preview High Value 30 Angle 315 High Value 100 Angle 300 Low Value 30 Angle 225 Low Value 10 Angle 240 Misc Minor Ticks 1 Knob Color Major Ticks 7 V Border Misc Major Ticks 12 Minor Ticks 11 Background Border InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc Figure 4 51 Knob Properties Two Examples Enter the Limits High and Low data values and the
190. are Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PDA Page 10 10 Controller Data Table Memory Type Register Memory Type Register Format w Integer Start Address Start Address 1 al Bite 0 Station AO ANSET Data Format Integer O Signed MH Unsigned SampleTime 1000 Figure 10 17 Data Table PDA You simply select the Memory Type select the Data Format specify a starting address and the consecutive locations in the controller for which you want the data to be displayed on the Data Table Use the or Y controls or tap on the field to enter the data to specify the start address and consecutive locations Tap on M button to update the data values on screen or tap on C button to continuously monitor data values on screen Tap on Properties button to specify additional data properties such as Station Station Offset etc In this manner you can use InstantHMI to monitor modify data from your controller immediately after installing it on your Palm Pocket PC handheld 10 3 4 Graphic Monitor Screen Pocket PC InstantHMI for Pocket PC includes some graphical objects classified as Ol Widgets Ol Widgets are animated representations of common system monitor control units like Gauges Meters Knobs Buttons and LED s some sample widgets are shown in Figure below Ol Widgets are included for both data entry Buttons Spinners etc and monitoring Bars LED etc Ol Widgets with eye catching colors enh
191. are Horizons Inc All Rights Reserved InstantHMl Programs Version Build IHMIRPT Report Designer 5 0 0 2001 InstantHMI Runtime Engine 5 0 0 2001 InstantHMl Screen Designer 5 0 0 2001 InstantHMl Historic Trending Utility 5 D 0 2001 InstantHMl LaunchPad 5 0 0 2001 DataSourceMgr DLL 5 0 0 2001 IHMIDataTable DLL 5 0 0 2001 ScreenCapture DLL 5 0 0 2001 TagVariables DLL 5 0 0 2001 s ACTIVATE LLJ USER MANUAL QUICK START My Name My Company Figure 2 4 LaunchPad gt Help The Activate button allows you to create Registration information to be sent to Software Horizons and receive your license activation for InstantHMI software Activation is essential to access all the installed features in your InstantHMI software Appendix A The User Manual button displays the InstantHMI Manual Figure 2 5 Adobe Acrobat reader 6 0 or later needed to view this PDF file may be downloaded from www InstantHMl com acrobat The Quick Start button displays the InstantHMI Quick Start Guide PDF file Y Adobe Reader IHMI5 Manual pdf TA File Edit View Document Tools Window Help Base alo wei Fe ot e 5 0 ae Options x F Insta ntAhlt for your Application In stan t H MI 5 0 EHD 2 LaunchPad Development system IANSCACA cpu bx atowe PO Movs CE a POA S 3 Data Bases S 4 Screen Designer D5 5 Report Designer A 6 Macro Editor DS 7 Script Editor S 8 Communication Links Bookmar
192. areD 02 00 505 Series pr 00 400 Series CCM2 E O EX14B EX20 EX28B EX40 EX40H Toshiba A Series 11 T2 Toshiba A 90 and Compatibles SCII PCOM InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 ojaluiz 3 0 n n mn a O O U o O A N S o E lt 5 o o O O O 3 jel A ep D lt D 102 oF y D Toshiba m gt x lt O O m x lt NO O O UU m gt lt N al O m x lt al O O lt NO O lt pP O O 19 gt oO O o_o nN 7 7 7 2 3 1 7 1 5 7 7 7 7 1 7 7 7 1 1 7 1 Unitronics D ef lulsl s O D S A Ke D i OJo 5 Q 2 oO Q Ola O N T O c A e 3 N D D y gt D O T Q 5 z D O e O O 3 x 2 O D 5 D D wn 02 Z 3 m w O 02 D U T O o E D D Communication Drivers Page C 2 Vision 280 and Compatibles JASCNPCOM J AS Wago Westinghouse Yaskawa MP 940 etron 1700 Series Models 1708 1716 etc Zetron Ultrac 68 Group 2 Other I O Devices B amp B Electronics B Tek Weighing Scales E Tek Bilancial Gefran Serial Watlow SD Temp Controllers Infrared Link Modbus ASCII Enhanced Note 1 call for availability 2 Not available for Palm 3 Not available for Pocket PC 4 Available for Palm only InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 socket fr q y uw socket Troubleshooting Maintenance Solut
193. as Alias Tag Name Alias for BCD L1 Alias for Tag BCD L1 Y Figure 3 6 Alias Tag Map 3 3 4 Tag Editor PC When you click on the New Tag button in the Tag Manager you will see the Tag Editor dialog box with a blank Tag Name To create a new tag related to an existing tag differing in tag name and or some other tag parameters select the existing tag and then click on the Edit Tag button to access the Tag Editor dialog box InstantHMl Tag Editor Tag Name Data Source 4 20 mA Output Status 1 Modbus TCP Y lt Enter tag description gt Device Name Flow Controller E Tag Definitions InstantHMI Tag Editor l Memory Type Address Bit Station Data Type Tag Name _ Data Source Register w 2020 0 1 Int32 4 20 mA Output Status 1 Modbus TCP l Read Write v lt Enter tag description gt Device Name Unsigned Flow Controller Datalog Interval Alarm Sample Time Tag Definitions 1000 O Log To Database Setup Alarms Memory Type Address Bit Station Data Type O Register v 2020 0 1 Int32 e dt pai a Text Format Read Write vl Unsigned Field Width Monitor Sample Time Decimal Y 8 2 1000 msec Datalog Interval Alarm Sample Time Graphic Format Low End Value High End Value Log To Database Setup Alarms lt None gt Y O 100 Figure 3 7 Tag Editor Dialog PC
194. atch Error Parity Error Transmit Time Out Data Over Run Receive Time Out Device Busy General Communication Error Command Error Sum Check CRC etc Error Unknown Error Request Error TCP IP Connection Failed Response Error Unable to locate device Invalid Address Invalid Path Bad Command General Timeout Invalid Bit Number Command Disabled Bad Path Message Restarted Node Not Present Data Terminated Early Node Not Found Data Ended Early No global data present Break in Data Invalid Path Specified in InstantHMl ini file No Response Pending or Returned length of 0 When communication errors occur InstantHMI may display any of the above error codes These codes may be helpful in understanding and mitigating the cause of the errors 10 4 Data Logging Data Logging is an available optional feature in InstantHMI As discussed in Section 3 7 two types of data logging may be supported on your platform Time based data logging and Event triggered data logging For Time Based Data Logging any tags from the tag database may be assigned a Datalog Sample Time Section 3 3 7 At runtime access the Data Log Manager using the Data Log button from the Main Menu to add remove tags from the list of tags to be logged Start Stop logging data for a selected tag view logged data etc InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PDA Page 10 17 Tap the Add Tag button to include any sel
195. ation If Remote Data Source Name is not known leave it blank If the specific remote data source is unknown at project design time then the InstantHMI runtime engine will request it at runtime Note that the client objects will reference the remote server data source name InstantHMI allows access to controllers over an Ethernet LAN using wireless RF connectivity using Modbus TCP or other protocols involving TCP IP which require IP addresses for the PLC or InstantHMI runtime nodes As discussed above InstantHMl makes the job of specifying IP addresses more convenient by allowing you to associate Device Node Names to IP addresses Only the device node names will be used in Tags associated with that controller IHMI Node Hence if a network is reconfigured updating the tag database is easy All you need to do is use the IP Manager to reenter the changed IP address for the device node name Use the IP Manager to manage the list of device names and their associated IP addresses The Data Source Manager discussed above applies to non PC platforms PDAs and Windows CE as well On a PDA based InstantHMI you may access the IP manager screen through the Data Source editor or through the InstantHMI Menu Screen Tag Variables gt IP Manager The screens for Data Source IP Manager are shown below InstantHMI e 11 56 Data Source Editor m 11 55 IP Manager a 12 03 Data Source Manager 1 Data Source Mame CCM Remote Station 1005
196. ation of InstantHMI InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Communication Drivers Page C 1 C Communication Drivers For details on driver for your Controller PLC see Appendix D XX where xx is the driver number listed in the Driver list below E 10 1 2006 InstantHM Models Protocols Driver Note Group 1 Programmable Logic controllers PLC5 SLC MicroLogix Series and Compatibles gt a ts O Lm 112 Lm DF 1 Data Highway Plus DH 485 hey a Ethernet IP PCCC DF1 71 Le 1 o 35 E Ao A LC 500 Series ogix 5000 Series and Compatibles P3 FP5 Ethernet IP Aromat Cutler Hammer Cutler Hammer i4 Direct Net CCM2 Ecom Aromat J D100 Direct Logic DLO5 DLO6 DL205 DL305 DL405 and Compatible sal nN O gt D O I Y y o 3 Q 3 2 D ulol O O Ol on N 109 E D O D 09 lt O O O Ke x lt 109 D D 09 BE a gt zl lt lolm 5l zla mis Ol ao ol o al O Y TU e NO la S T S A baie X O O 235 lt 5 g Oo ela m O aj2 0 Q ol O D lt D mn O o U GE Fanuc eries 1 Series 6 Series 90 and Compatible eries 90 0 30 Interface Card PC 620 Series A 1J FA 2J FA 3S Micro1 A 3S Micro3 MicroSmart PC 620 Series DL205 DL305 DL405 and Compatible DLO5 DLO6 DL205 DL405 P3 FP5 J CP11 CP12 Micro3 MicroSmart Koyo m
197. ation to ensure that on going data logging and Trending functions are not interrupted You may however turn the back lighting on using the Power button on the Palm handheld 10 2 2 Data Monitor Group Boiler 1 Variables Boiler 1 Pressure 1 w Boiler 1 Status Boiler Started w Boiler 1 Temperature me r Data Tabie Figure 10 3 Data Monitor Screen PDA Tap on the Data Monitor button to switch to the data monitor screen which gives access to any defined tag variables or through the Data Table to any memory locations in the controller See Section 3 2 2 for details 10 2 3 Trend Graphs When you tap on the Trend Graphs button you will see the following dialog box Tap on the Return button to return to the previous screen The functions Real Time Trend History and Bar Graph are discussed in Section 10 3 5 Tap on E for help tips on this Trend Graphs popup screen 10 2 4 Tag Variables Trend Graphs 1 Figure 10 4 Trend Graphs Menu PDA Tap on Tag Variables button to access and or change the tag definitions You will see a pop up dialog with four buttons Note InstantHMI uses this kind of pop up dialog with built in Help tips in many contexts This provides a less cluttered screen fewer and relevant user choices which make for a better user experience Tag Variables E Figure 10 5 Tag Variables Menu PDA InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Ju
198. ay Categories Text Data Display Category Input Monitor Y Data Format Integer Long Boolean Alpha Fixed Float Double BCD Binary Hex Long Fixed Message Bitmap Date Time OS Y e The combo list box for Data Format lists only the valid data formats for the currently chosen Data Type and Data Display Category A subset of the Graphic widgets has properties that you can change by clicking on the Properties button under Display Object Properties dialog The current widget parameters will be described in the box titled Widget Parameters Widget data formats are discussed in Sections 4 11 3 and 4 11 5 Select Integer format if data in the field is to be an integer stored in a single 16 bit register Select Long format if data in the field is to be a long integer stored in two consecutive 16 bit registers Data will be stored with the least significant word at lower address InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page Select Boolean format if data in the field relates to the boolean status of a bit with the only two values being 1 for YES or ON and 0 for NO or OFF For display purposes you may choose any pair of message text lines from a Message Group to represent the YES NO or ON OFF pairs Note that you may choose a pair of colors for the boolean display color values for bit box and bit circle as discussed in Sections 4 11 5 Select Alpha format if th
199. below We recommend you not use 2xxx and 3xxx addresses except as provided below Certain 2000 Series Addresses 2000 2001 2005 etc are reserved for special purposes You may set Local 2000 1 to disable the special functions provided in Local 2001 2005 etc Some Local Memory addresses are used for the simulated variables as noted in table below Local Memory Simulated Function Address 2000 Disable the special Local Memory Functions here 1 disable 2001 Random number between 0 and 100 at each sample time 2002 Counter that counts up from 0 to 100 and then counts down from 100 to O 2003 Counter that counts down from 100 to 0 and then counts up from 0 to 100 2004 Random number between 0 and 100 at each sample time different from 2001 2005 Random number between 0 and 100 at each sample time different from 2001 2004 Certain 3000 Series Addresses 3000 3001 3099 are documented here and are meant to be used by Software Horizons personnel for troubleshooting purposes only You may set Local 3000 1 to disable the special functions provided in Local 30xx Local Memory Simulated Function Address mel im 3065 3099 InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 9 After choosing data Memory Type you must specify the appropriate Address and Bit number To do this move the mouse cursor to the Address field and click the left button and observe that an l bar appears in
200. bile Pocket PC Palm and Windows CE platforms may differ in format from the corresponding PC versions In InstantHMI you would design and maintain the project databases using the Tag Manager and Screen Designer in the LaunchPad However for your convenience some utilities are available in InstantHMI to manage edit databases on the target platforms such as PDAs and in such cases we have included a discussion of them along with the corresponding Tag Manager Editor and other utilities available in the LaunchPad for PC platform 3 1 Data Sources In Screen Designer click on Tag Data gt Data Sources to access the Data Source Manager which maintains a database of data sources Note You may also click on LaunchPad gt Data Sources gt Comm Links select a data source from the pre view panel and then click on Data Source Manager button Each data source will have a name you provide to identify it In addition you will select the communication driver and the communication link Direct Serial Infrared OPC Server TCP IP to controller or TCP IP to InstantHMl If the selected communication method is direct serial or infrared then you will setup the communication parameters such as baud rate parity data bits and stop bits If the communication method is TCP IP then you will select or create a Device that links to the IP address and Port of the controller or InstantHMI device that originates the data f Instant Mata Source Editor InstantHMI
201. ble below for data logging The PC runtime engine was used File oie romat SampleTime Influent Q Meter D O Meter MLSS Meter CL2 Level pH Level RAS WAS TSS Meter 13 3 2 Log Application Data In our example the PC runtime engine logs the CL2 level Chlorine every 60 seconds and the D O Meter reading Dissolved Oxygen also every 60 seconds The other four variables are also logged as shown The logged data is captured directly in the ODBC database IHMIDatalog MDB If your runtime platform is other than a PC use steps below Transfer Logged Data from Pocket PC runtime to IHMIDatalog MDB Database on PC This applies to many Windows CE platforms as well e Click on the LaunchPad gt Reports Button Click on the Logs tab select the Pocket PC Datalogs option and click View Datalogs Button Datalog Viewer Dialog Box will appear e Click on Transfer Datalogs Button to transfer the datalogs from your Pocket PC and save that file under your lt Project Name gt Datalogs directory e When the Datalog transfer from Pocket PC is complete a message box will appear Select Yes to transfer datalogs into the ODBC Database e When transfer of datalogs to ODBC database IHMI MDB is finished click on OK button on Datalog Viewer dialog box Transfer Logged Data from Palm runtime to IHMIDatalog MDB Database on PC 13 3 3 Analyze Logged Data in IHMITrend Step 1 Run IHMITrend Utility Click on Launc
202. ble click on the row where the input tag is listed and enter the new value 9 9 Printing Reports With InstantHMI you can print reports very easily and with utmost flexibility Use Report Designer see Section 5 to create the report templates Review the discussion in Section 9 5 on the two system keys PRINT and SPOOL Using these keys the operator can print a variety of reports The Operator can print on demand a report associated with any screen by pressing the PRINT function key The report may include information from the displayed screen some other screen or any other information accessible from your PLC Use of the SPOOL key in conjunction with the PRINT key can produce very flexible reports see Section 5 3 Printer setup if needed will be done using Windows Control Panel 9 10 Touch Screen InstantHMI allows a mouse to activate touch zones on any screen see Section 4 6 5 No touch hardware is necessary for this feature activated by touch 9 11 Communications Errors lf touch hardware is available the touch zones may be For the purpose of trouble shooting communication error codes are listed below If you see any error codes on the status line the following table may be helpful Runtime Error Codes General Error Mismatch Error Transmit Time Out Receive Time Out General Communication Error Sum Check CRC etc Error Request Error Response Error Invalid Address Bad Command Invalid Bit Number Command Dis
203. by the OLE document s application Excel in our example right click on the OLE document object to pop up its OLE Edit Functions as listed below Copy Copy the selection and put it on clipboard Delete Delete selected object OLE Object gt Example Worksheet Object OLE Verbs Animate Control Assign InstantHMI Tags Scripts to Control Object Figure 4 31 OLE Edit Functions InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 29 Copy Use this option to copy the OLE object After the object is selected hold down the left mouse button and drag the outline of the bounding rectangle to the desired location Release the mouse button to finish Hit the ESC key to deselect all selected objects Delete Use this command or the Del key to delete any selected OLE object from your screen OLE Object When you select this command you will see a list of the OLE verbs Edit Open etc See Section 4 6 11 applicable to the selected OLE object Worksheet in our example When you select an OLE verb the OLE application Excel in our example that created the OLE object will run and allow you to perform the OLE verb Edit Open etc on the OLE document es Screen with Excel WOrkbook scr InstantHMl Screen Designer File Edit View TagData Objects Format Tools Options Help Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Help alms m m l gt 1 o we EILEAR T S M Arial 2110 ARE A4 xl 2
204. cE num Application ID 1134860 44 4821 1102 4494 3CB 306C1 0000 Application Type Local Server Authentication Level 11 Sissi Local Path Figure 12 17 Configuring DCOM for OPCEnum Client Steps A D InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHM OPC Page 12 10 Step E In the Location tab choose Run application on the following computer and enter the name of the Server PC in this example SERVER _PC Do not make more than one selection in this dialog OpcEnum Properties ki Ei General Location Security Endpoints Identity The following settings allow DCOM to locate the corect computer for this application IF you make more than one selection then DCOM uses the first applicable one Client applications may overde your selections T Run application on the computer where the data is located Aun application on this computer M Aun application on the following computer SERVE RPC Browse Figure 12 18 Configuring DCOM for OPCEnum Client Step E Step F In the Security tab Select Use Default for Launch and Activation Permissions Access Permissions and Customize for the Configuration Permissions Click the Edit button under Configuration Permissions to edit permissions OpcEnum Properties El Ei General Location Security Endpoints Identity Launch and Activation Permissions Customize Access Permissions
205. can decide what InstantHMI functions are accessible when user is Guest To leave InstantHMI in a locked state select Lock InstantHM A Resume Screen appears and all LaunchPad functions are locked out until you click on Resume button and enter your password een HMI PROJECT MyProject InstantHMI 5 0 Reinforces Simpler is Better HMI Technology Resume AS GU m sorrwane Licensed to ORIZONS d Mc My Name It My Company np Figure 2 9 Locking InstantHMI LaunchPad 2 3 Design 2 3 1 Design gt Screens InstantHMI implements a Design Once Deploy Anywhere technology The project Tag Database can be transferred to any target platform which has an installed InstantHMI runtime engine Likewise the project screens created in the Screen Designer will be transferable to Windows PC CE and PDA platforms Screens for different platforms with different screen resolutions may be designed on the LaunchPad platform and converted automatically while deploying on the target platform PROJECT Demo PROJECT Demo Screen Elements Project Screens 18 Screen Elements Project Screens 18 Screens Thumbnails a Screens TEE E CE Application Steel scr Screens List i A E sy gt E CE tmpzone1 scr Scripts IE J Scripts CE tmpzones scr Macros O y Macros Demo Application Control Center scr Recipes r f S Reci
206. ce a data object You will be presented with Display Object Properties dialog box where you make the required selections InstantHMl Select Tag Display Object P ti aa select Group Display Properties Tag Information lt All Tags gt Data Type Input Tag Meme _Select Tag Select Tag Switch Screen Counter l Text Graphic sensor 1 Current Reading Display eee Ma eta Eaire Mesina sensor 2 Current Reading Format Alpha gne z 10 Bead estaa a i id El it ensor urrent Reading SIN E Border Local 4030 Bit 0 set Point one 1 No Border Sample Time 1000 msec s Font Font BT Minto puree Script lt o Script gt Edit Color Foreground A Background Set Input Lirnits Switch Screen Counter Remark Switch Fone 1 las OK Cancel Tag Manager Figure 4 45 Creating a Screen Data Display Object Think of the first method above as a shortcut to create the widget data objects on screen With this view in mind we shall discuss creating the data objects using only Method 2 with brief remarks regarding Method 1 where appropriate InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Pag Only the display area of the screen and the system resource in your computer limit the number of data fields on a screen The theoretical maximum number of fields is 65536 Only the system resources available in your computer likewise limit the number of screens The theoretical
207. ces Network Database Message Groups Bitmap Groups Diatalog Events Start in Screen Mode leploy using TEPIP Deploy L P o O En E SOFTWARE i to HORIZONS My Mame dl E INC My Company Figure 11 6 Launch Pad Deploy Project to PDA Platforms using HotSync Active Sync Tap on Deploy Project Using TCP IP to access this facility for deploying projects on nodes with InstantHMI TCP IP file transfer capability You will see the following dialog InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI TCP IP Page 11 6 Deploy Project Connection Type Connected Target Platformy s Super Node super Node IP Port Close C Target Node 192 166 0 55 2364 ii Chat Window Text Message Send Project screens Databases etc Sent Wlessages MAME scr tmpzonel scr Received Messages elevator scr features scr Send Files Figure 11 7 Launch Pad Deploy Project to any Platforms using TCP IP link Select LaunchPad PC as Super Node and other nodes as Target Nodes Click on Listen Button on the Super Node so it can connect to any target nodes attempting to connect All Target Nodes will use Super Node s known IP address example 192 168 0 55 Do not change the port number 2364 the special assigned port for InstantHMI Now click a Connect button on any target nodes to connect to the Super Node Try to chat with Super Node to verify connection S
208. ck on the specific report name in the right panel Report Elements Alarm Tags 5 Printer Report Templates Switch Screen Counter PROJECT Demo Spool Report Templates Temp Zone 1 Historic Trend Profiles Temp Zone 2 Alarm Tags Temp Zone 3 Z Temp Zone 4 Tag Manager E SOFTWARE HORIZONS 4 Eine Figure 2 13 Design gt Reports Other Report types Spool Reports Alarm Reports Historic Trends and Logs are created or edited in a similar manner The LaunchPad provides access to the Report Designer Section 5 to create the spool and printer report templates that can be used by the runtime engines to produce printer and spool reports In addition Special Tags Section 2 4 7 can be setup in the LaunchPad to generate event driven reports and logs Table in Figure 2 14 briefly summarizes the report elements associated design tools and a reference to Sections where these are discussed Command Function__ Report Elements Tool or Utility Reports Printer Reports Report Designer Spool Reports Report Designer Alarm Reports Alarm Viewer Historic Trend Utility Logs Log Viewer Figure 2 14 Designing Report Elements The LaunchPad can collect all Reports produced in the various runtime engines Printer Spool Datalogs Alarm Logs Event Logs System User activity logs etc 2 3 4 Design gt Tags The screen data display objects get their parameters from a tag object in the Tag Dat
209. code gt Download v4 0 34 Non Unicode gt z R l You will need a runtime engine to Runtime Engine for Pocket PC match your OS version CPU etc Ver 5 0 Build 2001 Unicode Click here to provide your CE Date 02 October 2007 hardware platform specs Size 900 KB Contact Us gt Download v5 0 Unicode gt Caution Users of InstantHMI 4 0 or 4 imust obtain a Palm OS Runtime Engine license upgrade before installing InstantHMI 5 0 Ver 4 0 21 Build 1003 Date 2 Feb 2006 Download v4 2 0 Unicode gt Size 502 KB Download 4 1 2 Unicode gt Download v4 0 34 Unicode gt Figure A 1 InstantHMI Downloads You may Download LaunchPad amp PC Runtime Pocket PC Runtime etc from www InstantHMl com or you may use the installation CD from Software Horizons Installing InstantHMl from Download We illustrate using download of the PC Installation file IHMI PCInstall Unicode exe Click on the PC link Download v4 1 2 Unicode Note select the latest version appropriate for you Select the option to Save the file to your computer Create a new folder IHMI4 Download for example on your desktop to receive the downloaded file Save s Save in 9 IHMI4 Download 0 2 en My Recent Documents E Desktop My Documents My Computer m 4 File name HMI PCinstall Unicode exe Y My Network Save as type Application v The download takes a minute or two in mos
210. creen Designer menu Objects gt Object Assembly to recall an object assembly from the object assembly library When you choose this option you will see a dialog box listing the objects from the selected library In version 5 0 the Object Assembly Library has been enhanced to support several new functions e Assembly Groups to organize object assemblies in named groups e Import assemblies from another project assembly library e Each Assembly has dynamic properties useful at runtime Section 4 3 6 InstantHMl Object Assembly Library 19 Actuators Total Assemblies E All Objects E Buttons Preview E Electrical Symbols E Miscellaneous 18 Pipes Pumps Pump Pump Gray Pump Green Pump_Red Group Functions E Valves New G 1 Water Supply System E E Delete Group Tank Status Add Assembly Remove Assembly Object Assembly Library Functions Insert on Screen Delete Assembly Import Assembly Done Figure 4 22 Screen Designer Select Object Assembly You may select the default All Object Assemblies group scroll through the object names as you view them in the pre view window to help you select the desired object Use New Group button to create a new group use Add Assembly button to add selected object assemblies to the group etc to organize your object assembly library After selecting an object assembly click on Insert on Screen button to retrieve the object assembly you selected from the library a
211. cript gt Edit Datalog Interval Alarm Sample Time DJ Log To Database Setup Alarms Default Tag Display Properties Text Format Field Width Monitor Sample Time Decimal v 8 2 1000 msec Y Graphic Format Low End Value High End Value Remark lt None gt vw iO 100 e Figure 4 19 Display Object Properties Left Screen Designer Right Tag Editor InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 20 Note The Screen Designer can access the Display Object Properties stored with objects on user designed screens these properties supersede the default display properties stored with the tag definition Tag Display Properties stored with the tag definition as shown in the Tag Editor Section 3 3 3 dialog are used for pre formatted screen display objects in InstantHMI usually on non PC platforms Select the Data Type Input Monitor Input Monitor from the pull down list Select the Display Format Text and one of the options Integer Long etc or Graphic and one of the options LED Gauge etc Select the Tag Name to be associated with this data display object The detailed tag definition under this Tag Name is made using the Tag Manager Section 3 3 1 If you change your mind about creating the new data item you may click on the Cancel button If you choose to accept your data display object properties by clicking on the OK button you will return to the design window Here y
212. cro button and Touch Zone objects facilitate operator access to system commands as described in the Macro Editor discussion in Section 6 In addition you may execute a Script using a Macro The Runtime Engine processes any script attached to a data field or a macro button or touch zone The script Startup sct is executed once when the InstantHMI Runtime Engine starts executing The script ShutDown sct is executed once when the InstantHMI Runtime Engine exits its runtime execution state The script Runtime sct is executed periodically when the InstantHM Runtime Engine is executing Use the Script Editor described in this Section to create view and edit scripts 7 1 Getting Started InstantHMI for Windows includes several tools Report Designer Section 5 Macro Editor Section 6 Script Editor this Section 7 and Data Source Manager Section 2 3 5 All these tools are integrated into the Screen Designer discussed in Section 4 If you have not installed InstantHMI for Windows on your computer do so now see Appendix A When installation is complete you should see a program group InstantHMI Human Machine Interface and an icon for InstantHMI LaunchPad Run InstantHMI LaunchPad and click on LaunchPad gt Screens button and then double click on any screen bitmap to run the Screen Designer Click on Tools gt Script Editor menu in Screen Designer to run the Script Editor Script Editor TempZone1 scT File Edit ff This script is used in Temp
213. ct The Alarm Log Viewer tool allows you to place an Alarm Log Viewer object on the screen This object is re sizable but has no other settable properties At runtime all tags in alarm condition will be displayed in the Alarm Log Viewer From the pull down menu at the top the operator can select to view the tags in Active Alarm condition the status of All Alarm Tags or Alarm History Six different icons identify the tag alarm status These are color coded Green for OK Yellow for Alert and Red for Critical Two shapes are used Circle for Normal and Triangle for Alert Critical When Acked these icons have an Ack embedded in them The tags currently in High High or Low Low critical alarm condition are marked with a Red icon dd Be The tags currently in High or Low alert alarm condition are marked with a Yellow icon A The Acked alarms are marked with an Ack Superimposed on the icon depending on the current state of the tag Ack A Aih Tags in normal condition not in alarm are marked with a green OK icon a The operator may click on a tag name to select it and click on the Ack button to acknowledge it He may click on the Ack All button to acknowledge all tags in alarm condition See also Show Alarms macro in Section 6 3 All Alarm Tags ETa Ack All wy Your Tag 1 Mo Alarm 07 39 02 01 21 2006 Low 07 39 02 01 21 2006 High High 07 39 02 01 21 2006 Figure 4 26 Screen Designer Alarm Log Viewer 4 6 8 Real Tim
214. ct the text object and then using the Font and Color menus The changes apply only to the selected text object all future text objects will have the color and font shown on the status bar See also Section 4 7 1 Text Display Mode Note that you may use the customization option Section 4 9 2 to set the default Color Font etc for Text objects Line Poly Line Object Use the Line tool accessed from the Screen Designer menu Objects gt Static Objects gt Line to draw a line on screen that is create a static line object The current pen width and pen color are used to draw the line Note that the Status Bar shows the pen color for the line and the Style bar shows the Line Style and Line Color To draw a line position the mouse on one end of the proposed line and drag the mouse hold the left button down while moving the mouse You will see a rubber band line indicating what your line would look like When you are happy with the line on screen release the mouse button To change the line style after it is drawn select it and use the Line Style pull down list on the Style bar or use the Format gt Pattern menu Use the Poly Line tool accessed from the Screen Designer menu Objects gt Static Objects gt Poly Line to draw multiple connected lines on the screen To draw a straight line click on the screen at the start of the line release the mouse button and move the mouse to the end of the line A rubber band line will appear on screen
215. ction 8 Screen Capture See Section 3 5 1 4 9 Options The Options menu offers the following commands to configure InstantHMI Tabbing Order Set tabbing order for keyboard input via data Input objects Customization Customize default parameters in Screen Designer Password Set screen password 4 9 1 Tabbing Order Option The tabbing order command displays on the current screen the labels for each data input field as a number tag in the top left corner of the data object This number is the relative order in which the operator can access set keyboard focus to the data objects To change the tabbing order just InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 38 point to the tag on the data item you want to be the first in the tabbing order and click the left button repeat for the next data item and so on When you are satisfied with the displayed tabbing order press the Enter key Press the Esc key to cancel the changes you made and return to the previous tabbing order At runtime the operator will be able to enter data in the tabbing order you have setup 4 9 2 Customization Option This command pops up a tabbed dialog box to help you setup the default choices for Colors Text Patterns View and Object Assemblies as shown below The parameters you set will be in effect each time you run Screen Designer subsequent to your customization Screen Designer Customization Screen Desi
216. ction buttons to let you accomplish the desired project management objectives All setup functions apply to the specific project selected from the pull down list of projects For convenient setup project elements are grouped under four functional groups with a correspondingly labeled button Project Screens Reports and Special Tags For example if you click on Setup gt Project you will see the following dialog ATAC DESIGN Projects Target Platform s Demo Windows PC MyProject Windows CE Quick Start PC Windows PC aa Deploy PROJECT MyProject Change Platform o secs Figure 2 22 Setup gt Project The hierarchy of setup functions and the associated Project Elements as well as the Tool or Utility used in the setup are shown in Figure 2 23 Click on one of these function buttons select a project element on the left and or right hand panel and proceed with your setup of that project element Command Functions _ ProjectElements Tool or Utility Section 2 4 1 oe ee Add Insert Remove Delete Dialog Reports Report Designer Assign Remove Delete Dialog Special Tags Print Control Tags TagManager Add Remove Dialog Figure 2 23 Setup Functions Associated Project Elements and Design Tools InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 12 2 4 1 Setup gt Project New Remove Platform Click on Setup gt Projec
217. ction to device M90 PLC e UniOPC Server Add PLC Add PLC PLE Name M50 Type M3091 Unit ID Direct Connection Channel Enable W Enabled e UniOPC Server 3 Register e UniOPC Server 3 Run Now you are ready to get data from to Uni OPC Server Create IHMI Data Source Unitronics OPC Server Figure 12 3 OPC Server Setup Example When you create any data object in the InstantHMI Screen Designer you will have the option of addressing a local client s own data source or a remote server data source InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHM OPC Page 12 3 InstantHHl Data Source Editor Data Source Marne Unitronics OPC Comm Link OPC Server ka OPC Server Mame Time Out Station Offset Figure 12 4 OPC Data Source Setup Example The data source identifies where the runtime data will come from Each data source will have a name you provide to identify it In addition you will select the communication link OPC Server The remote data item for the OPC client will come from an OPC server Create OPC Data Source as shown The OPC tags in Tag Manager will correspond to OPC items For the UniOPC server the tag name has the form lt PLC Name gt lt ltem Prefix gt lt Address gt for example the tag name M90 MI1 identifies the Memory Integer 1 in PLC M90 Display Object Properties Display Properties Tag Information sa E Displa
218. d You may edit the default tag at a later time or use it as is for preliminary testing of screen objects InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad InstantHMl Tag Editor Tag Name Page 2 9 Data Source Auto Manual InstantHMl lt Enter tag description gt lt None gt Device Name Select Tag Select Group lt All Tags gt v Select Tag Tag Definitions de Station po Memory Type Address Bit 100 o Data Type E Int16 Y O Unsigned Local Auto M anual Chemical Bulk Tank Date Alarm Sample Time Demo Mode tomo Field Width Monitor Sample Time 5 2 1000 msec Low End Value High End Value x 0 o Figure 2 18 Tag Editor Datalog Interval ClLog To Database Setup Alarms Default Tag Display Properties Text Format Demo Screen Transition Time Decimal de Demo Spool Register Demo Sprayer Batch Weight Demo Sprayer Chunk Scale Mj Graphic Format lt None gt The Tag Manager implemented as a DLL serves as a common interface for use with the Screen Designer Runtime Engine Report Designer and other LaunchPad utilities The Data Table implementation in InstantHMI allows for rapid creation of pre tested tags which can be transferred to the Tag Database The Tag Manager allows for automatic tag name creation and tag customization where prefix and postfix s
219. d displaying the trend of the tags from the Tag Group macro parameter See also Plot widget in Section 4 11 5 18 Spool This macro available only for the PC Runtime allows you to create a spool report using a selected spool template and has the syntax Spool Spool Name Select macro key and command as explained above Select the spool template name from the pull down list 19 Switch Screen This macro allows you to switch to any screen and has the syntax Switch Screen Screen Name Macro Key Command lt SHIFT gt P Switch Screen Training tmpzonel For example this is how you can define a macro key P to switch to screen Training tmpzonet in our Demo Select the macro key P Now select the command Switch Screen by clicking on it in the commands list box Select the Parameter Screen Name Training tmpzone1 from the pull down list that appears Click on Enter Macro button Note that for upper case P you must click on the Shift check box and then select the P key 20 Transmit String This macro is reserved and should not be used 21 Wait This macro allows you to cause a specified wait period and has the syntax Wait msec Select the macro key and command as before and type in the number of milli seconds in the value field This macro is useful in conjunction with other macros you can ensure that InstantHMI allows enough time for previous command to complete before issuing further commands 22 SYSTEM KEYS See Section 9 5
220. d function to read the recipe parameters from the controller RecipeSave RecipeName You may need Password authorization for this function The recipe will be saved to the storage medium on the runtime platform RecipeWrite RecipeName Use the Recipe Write function to transfer the recipe to the controller 7 Time Date Functions GetElapsedTime GetHour GetMinute GetSecond GetMonth GetDay GetYear GetElapsedTime This function returns the elapsed time as a double precision number of msecs since the execution of InstantHMI runtime started By using two calls to this function you can determine time intervals precisely Example a GetElapsedTime InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Script Editor Page 7 11 In this example local variable a will be assigned the amount of milliseconds since the InstantHMI Runtime has been started GetHour This function returns the Hour portion of current time as an integer value Example a GetHour In this example local variable a will be assigned the integer value of hour GetMinute This function returns the Minute portion of current time as an integer value Example a GetMinute In this example local variable a will be assigned the integer value of minute GetSecond This function returns the Second portion of current time as an integer value Example a Ge
221. d in binary and contain critical pre processed information about your script source code they should only be edited using the InstantHMI script Editor Use the File gt Open command to open any existing script use the File gt New command to create a new script File gt Save command to save the edited script File gt Save As command to save the edited script under a new name File gt Print command to print the script Three script file names Startup Runtime and ShutDown are reserved Startup sct is executed once when the InstantHMI Runtime Engine starts executing ShutDown sct is executed once when the InstantHMI Runtime Engine exits its runtime execution state Runtime sct is executed once every RUNTIME SCRIPT SAMPLE_TIME when the InstantHMI Runtime Engine is executing This parameter has the default value 1000 msec initialized in the IHMIRT section of the Project ini file in your Project folder You may edit this Project ini file using NotePad or any text editor Any other script you create may be attached to any monitor data field on any screen in your project Such a script will be executed when it is time for the Runtime Engine to sample the associated field Since the Runtime Engine performs other tasks besides script execution it allocates a percentage of the Sample Time for each script specified by the parameter SCRIPT EXEC DURATION PERCENT This parameter has the default value 50 initialized in the IHMIRT section of the P
222. d not allow access to that project file In the LaunchPad when you click on Setup gt Project gt Protect the Project Protection dialog displays the current protection status of project components that may be selected to Protect Unprotect A checked box indicates the component is or will be protected InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 16 PROJECT MyProject Project Protection Status Project Components C Tag Database C Data Sources screens CI Datalog Events Cl Report Templates Cl Recipes Configuration Cl Message Database Y Scripts Bitmap Database CI Macros Cl Object Assembly Library Y Troubleshoot Database CI Select All Project Components Password eee Change Protection E SOFTWARE HORIZONS 4 Mine Figure 2 30 Setup gt Project gt Protect An unchecked box indicates the component is or will be unprotected After selecting the desired components enter a password and click on Change Protection Click X to cancel that is leave the dialog without making any changes to component protection You should record this password in a safe place for any future changes to the project protection This password will be used in all future protection schemes for this project until the project is completely unprotected lf you have selected Screens to be protected you will see the dialog box shown below Subsequently each
223. ddresses you specify 4 11 3 Graphic Data Format Input Widgets The input widgets allow the operator input of analog and discrete values using a mouse and no keyboard input When you select Graphic display category and data type Input you have a choice of the input widgets shown in the table below InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 46 Graphic Data Display Category wig Widget Data Format Monitor pop o lr Radio Button Check Box Combo Box peg Select Button to place a button on screen that the operator can toggle between two states On and Off Double click on the Button to see its display object properties Input Monitor Graphic Button Click on Properties to see the dialog box for Button Properties Here you may select one of three button types Widget Button or Windows Button or Bitmap Button Display Object Properties Button Properties Display Properties Tag Information Type Mr Preview Data Type Input monitor_y rea W Show Frame Color Start Stop Motor m Start Display Text ff Graphic Y Latch Input Format Data Source My DataSrc Station O A Register 1 Bit 0 Width 135 Height 60 k Press On Release Off Parameters Sample Time 1000 msec s ey on Text Text Button Font Color Color Yalue Text Properties ee p _Properties _ Script lt No Script gt Edit of lo Start Set Set Set Y Same
224. delete any selected ActiveX object Properties Inserted Object When you select this command you will see a Property Dialog exposed to the container by the ActiveX control In our example DAS DigitalLED Class Object Properties dialog appears as shown below Your dialog will depend on your ActiveX control InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer DAS_DigitalLED Class Properties General Digit Color Inclined Show Flashing Digit Font width Digit Width Page 4 32 No Digit Frame Flashing Duration Digit Number Digit Type fo Ladder v Digit Height Cancel Apply Help Figure 4 36 ActiveX LED Object Properties Note When you select some ActiveX controls on screen you may only see a placeholder rectangle selected The LED control for example will show itself when you hold the control key and double click on the object Animate Control If you select the Animate Control menu you will see the Animate Control Setup dialog see LED Example in Figure 4 34 This dialog lists all the Properties and Events exposed by the ActiveX control to its container Any properties exposed by the control such as value displayed by the LED object may be assigned an InstantHMI Tag by double clicking on it which brings up the Property Setup dialog shown In this dialog you assign a Tag LED Value The data will be transferred From Tag to the LED proper
225. dialog box in which you can locate and open the desired file File Save Save the active report with its current name If you have not named the report displays the Save As dialog box Edit Cut Remove selected text from the report and store it on the clipboard Edit Copy Copy the selection to the clipboard Edit Paste Insert the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point File Print Print the active report Help Show information about IHMIRPT Figure 5 4 Tool Bar Buttons Status Bar Use this command to display or hide the Status Bar which describes the action to be executed by the selected menu item or depressed toolbar button and keyboard latch states A check mark appears next to the menu item when the Status Bar is displayed Ready CAP INUM SCAL 00007 001 CAP NUM SCALE 00001 001 Figure 5 5 Report Designer Status Bar The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Report Designer window and consists of seven panels as shown above The Command Prompt panel of the status bar describes actions of menu items as you use the mouse to navigate through menus If after viewing the description of the command you do not wish to execute the command then release the mouse button while the pointer is off the command or press the Esc key The four panels labeled CAP NUM SCRL OVR describe the state of the Caps Lock Num Lock Scroll Lock and Insert keys respectively When any of these locks are engaged then the corres
226. discussed in Section 5 2 5 and then flushed deleted as discussed here Step 2 Archive the spooled data from Step 1 Archiving allows you to save the individual spool reports SPOOL SXX XX 1 99 or the aggregate spool report SPOOL SOO in disk files created every day hour minute or second as in Method 1 The high byte value 10 13 determines the saved file name Day YYMMDD Hour YYMMDDHH Minute MMDDHHmm or Second DDHHmmss The low byte value xx O 99 and the corresponding spool report SPOOL SXX determines the saved file extension Note that when you archive any spool report its contents are automatically deleted flushed Example The Spool Register has the value 3074 high byte 12 low byte 2 The data records in the spool report file SPOOL S02 will be archived in the hourly report 99112010 S02 assuming the time was 10AM and the date was 20 Nov 99 and the SPOOL S02 will be flushed so that it is ready to receive new data records If the Spool Register has the value 3074 again during the same hour 10AM additional records stored in the spool report SPOOL S02 will be appended to the archive 99112010 S02 InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 IHMIRPT Report Designer Register Word Decimal Spool 256 Spool 512 Spool 2560 Spool 2816 Spool 3072 Spool 3328 Spool 5120 Spool 5376 Spool 5632 Spool 5888 Spool Page 5 15 SPOO
227. does not support in place activation this verb has the same action as Show 3 Hide Causes an object to remove its user interface from the view Applies only to objects that are activated in place 4 Ulactivate Activates an object in place along with its full set of user interface tools including menus toolbars and its name in the title bar of the container window 5 InPlaceActivate Activates an object in place without displaying tools such as menus and toolbars that users need to change the behavior or appearance of the object Single clicking such an object causes it to negotiate the display of its user interface tools with its container If the container refuses the object remains active but without its tools displayed InstantHMI obtains the custom verbs supported by a control identified with ID values 1 and above by enumerating the verbs of the control The Primary verb is defined by the control itself and activates the control for its main purpose In most cases the Primary verb for OLE objects is Edit Examples Word Document and Excel worksheet objects An exception to this is the Sound Recorder object whose primary verb is a custom verb Play which plays the sound associated with the object In InstantHMI runtime when you single click an embedded control the verb specified as the Default Activation Verb will be invoked If the user double clicks the control the Primary verb is invoked If the user holds the c
228. e Water Supply System The Water Supply System for a small community consists of two Tanks A B a Well Pump and a Booster Pump station monitored and controlled from a central facility Tank A supplies water to community members living in its vicinity Tank A draws its water from the Well by initiating a Required command to the Well Pump Tank B supplies water to community members living in its vicinity Tank B draws its water from Tank A by initiating a Required command to the Booster Pump Manual overrides are required at the central facility to operate Well Pump and Booster Pump All Remote sites are connected to the host central site s PLC via radio RTUs The variables of interest tabulated below are maintained and the site logic is programmed in the PLC Our task is to provide a Human Machine Interface for the operator s in the Water Supply System facility InstantHMI can provide such an interface on multiple platforms The HMI solutions on these platforms are very similar InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 1 2 LaunchPad Development System An InstantHMI Project implements the model of the Process or Machine Control Application for the benefit of operators supervisors and management who are responsible for the proper and efficient operation of the machine and the plant The project design and setup are done using the LaunchPad HMI Project Development and M
229. e click on the tag to edit it To exclude a tag from the list of recipe tags click on it to select it and then click on the Remove Tag button To define a new recipe group quickly you may click on the Copy Recipe button to copy a selected recipe group to a new recipe name and then edit it as needed To delete a selected recipe group click on the Delete Recipe button Note that the tags included in the recipe definition will not be deleted from the tag database only the tag values defined for the recipe will be deleted 3 6 2 Recipes PDA When InstantHMI is running tap on the Utilities gt Recipes button This brings up the following screen if the Recipe option is included in your InstantHMI installation InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 23 Recipe Manager Recipe Defintions Recipe Define Recipes Del Recipe w Initial Configuration Recipes w Initial Configuration Boiler 1 Pressure Boiler 1 Pressure Boiler 1 Status Boiler 1 Status Boiler 1 Temperature Boiler 1 Temperature Figure 3 21 Recipe Manager PDA Tap on the Define Recipes button to define new recipes Select the desired recipe from the previously defined pull down list of recipes by tapping on the down arrow 7 You can now preview the tag values stored under this recipe name in the scrollable table which lists tag names with their values shown in editable fields Make any changes you want for
230. e ELE Figure 4 1 Screen Designer Window You will be working with your screen in the Design Area of the Screen Designer window using the Menu Bar Section 4 1 5 This window also has a Title Bar at the top Section 4 1 1 and a Status Bar at the bottom Section 4 1 2 A Tool Bar and a Style Bar are also provided below the Menu Bar in the Design Area for direct short cut access to some of the frequently used menu items Section 4 1 3 In addition a re sizable Figure 4 1 and dockable Figure 4 2 Tool Palette and Widget Palette are provided The Screen Designer window View is customizable by you For example you may use the View menu to turn off the visibility of the Tool Bar Style Bar Tool Palette and Widget Palette leaving the entire Design Area of the Screen Designer window exposed You may skip over the discussion in Section 4 1 1 if you are familiar with other Windows programs it is included here for reference purposes Note InstantHMI implements a Design Once Deploy Anywhere HMI solution This will allow you to design your HMI project screens on a Windows PC platform and deploy it on any Windows PC or PDA Palm or Pocket PC or Windows CE platform which has an installed InstantHMI Runtime engine When the target platform is not a Windows PC for example Pocket PC with a resolution of 240 x 320 the Design Area for your screen will be restricted to match the target platform size You will be allowed to convert a screen
231. e Historic Trend Select Objects gt Real Time Historic Trend to include a trend plot on your screen This plot object includes both real time and historic views of the trend selectable on demand at runtime Figure 4 27 shows example Plot Parameters for a trend plot after entering all the specifications You can get the desired plot by choosing appropriate plot parameters Real Time History Plot Parameters Time Period Samples Plot Plot Display Properties E Second s 60 Plot Title Real Historic Trend Window Color Plot Width Plot Height Y Axis Title Tag value E EE select 733 189 Background Real MP History Fens Tag Group lt All Taqs gt Tag Name Low Value High Value Pen Color Pen 1 Temp zore f Clr Pen 3 Temp zornea yjfo io cow E Pen 4 Temp zone4 fo io color MW Grid Scale W Show Grid Grid Color B E vertical Large Tics 6 Small Tics 4 Intermediate Grid Color E ama Large Tics 7 Small Tics E l Include Legend Pens Tags iM Include History Cancel Figure 4 27 Plot Parameters Dialog for Trend Plot Specify Plot Width and Plot Height visually using object sizing Enter the Time Period to be shown on screen Units for time Seconds minutes hours or milliseconds the number of Samples Plot Period You can enter the Plot Title and the vertical Y axis Title The horizontal x axis will display InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0
232. e Read Edit passwords by tapping on the Edit button For the old password enter the previous password or a higher level password with authorization to change the database header record After entering the Read Edit Passwords tap on Save to make the changes or Cancel to discard the changes Tap on Msg DB Info to access Message Database header record exactly as in Tag DB Info InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 1 4 Screen Designer Use the Screen Designer to create your application project including all your Application screens operator help screens and Macro Script elements attached to your screen objects Use Screen Designer also for defining data sources modifying setup parameters passwords recipe control flags data entry order and for TCP IP links with other nodes running InstantHMI runtime engine 4 1 Getting Started Click on the Design gt Screens command button on the LaunchPad Section 2 for an overview of your project screens in the LaunchPad Click on Screen Designer button or double click on any screen pre view to view and edit it in the Screen Designer Figure 4 1 You may also double click on the New Screen or right click on any screen pre view and then click on the New Screen or Edit Screen menu to run the Screen Designer eo Until scr Joetenihl Screen Desks Tie Cot Wee Tag0ete Obiecte Formal Took Options Hal O akT Eeeeehartv are 31
233. e Style and Line Size tools are used to set the line style and size of a selected object on screen The Fill Pattern tool is used to change the fill pattern of the selected object on screen The Color tool is used to change the predominant color border or fill depending on the object of the selected object 4 1 5 Menu Bar Main Menu The menu bar lists the main menu commands which are discussed in detail in Sections 4 2 4 10 File See Section 4 2 Edit See Section 4 3 View See Section 4 4 Tag Data See Section 4 5 Objects See Section 4 6 Format See Section 4 7 Tools See Section 4 8 Options See Section 4 9 Help See Section 4 10 You may select any menu command by pointing to it with the mouse and clicking the left button You may de select any menu command by clicking on it again or by pressing the Alt key 4 1 6 Creating Application Screens A Thumb Nail Sketch The Screen Designer includes four features Data Viewer Watch List Screen Capture and Object Assemblies which facilitate rapid creation of your project screens e Step 1 Use the Data Viewer feature to automatically create tags pre test the tags for proper communication with your controller if desired Here you may transfer the automatically created tags to the tag database The tag names can be edited to suit your own naming preferences as well as assigned to convenient Tag Groups The Watch List object allows you to monitor modify tags from your Tag Groups at Ru
234. e USERERR_CMDNOTSUPPORTED 1 Information passed between the Runtime and User DLL class IHMIUSER joule dane WORD Seas Strarus on last assued command upon Enkering Usermnery WORD Command See commands above WORD bUseTagName If true read write operation based on Tag Name member if false read write operation based on MemType Address BitNum Station DataSourceName and DeviceName members TCHAR TagName 30 Tag Name to use for read write when bUseTagName member is true WORD MemoryType See memory types in IHMIUser cpp Check manual for Ta daltional Use tot memory E pes DWORD Address Address to Read from or Write to WORD BitNum Bit number Used in select drivers WORD Stat Lon Station number of device to communicate with This will e added tco the Stacion Orrset of che collected Daca Source TCHAR DataSourceName 30 Data source the command is to be issued on TCHAR DeviceName 30 Device Name from IP Manager for TCP IP comms BYTE ements 256 Buffer to pass data back and forth between Runtime and USE RDI WORD pLocalMem Pointer ror direct access cto local memory Avoids need co issue command to Runtime to read write Local Memory WORD NumBytes Number of bytes to read write WORD BELOL Used to pass error codes between Runtime and USERDLL y endif USERDLL H Figure 14 4 Include File UserDLL h InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horiz
235. e a knob on the screen The operator can enter any values between low end value and high end value to an associated memory address by tuning the knob in any direction You can set the low end value and high end value in tag editor screen Select Graphic Format V Meter Monitor Widget to place a vertical meter on screen which lights up strips of Green Yellow and Red to indicate the values in associated memory address You can set the meter low end value and high end value in tag editor screen Note that the V Meter Green range 0 60 Yellow range 61 90 and Red range 91 100 are specified in Select Graphic Format Tank Monitor Widget to see a tank with an embedded dynamic vertical bar on the screen The memory address associated with the tank Vertical Bar represents the tank level If level falls the outlet is open otherwise it is closed Select Graphic Format Dual Spinner Input Monitor Widget to place a dual thumb wheel spinner on your screen The operator can click on either left fast or right slow thumb wheel to increment or decrement the value in the associated memory address You can set the Dual Spinner high end value and low end value in tag editor screen The range of the dual spinner is Low End Value High End Value and it wraps around You can specify a Low High End Value for Graphical Widgets like V Bars and Spinners and Trend Graphs These limits are for display input purposes Setting a Low High end v
236. e data is to be alpha numeric This format is useful to store Alpha numeric data in your PLC registers even if such a feature is not provided on your PLC In this case the field width can be up to 50 characters wide and the Type can be Input or Monitor The field is stored in consecutive memory locations two characters per location Example Assume that the data in an Alpha field of width eight is ABCD56GH and the address chosen by you for this field is Register 101 Here Register 101 will contain the first two characters AB Register 102 will contain CD Register 103 will contain the two characters 56 and the Register 104 will contain the last two characters GH Select Fixed format if you wish to treat the integer value in a single memory location as a fixed point number For example Suppose you wish to have on your screen a fixed point field separated by a decimal point Choose Fixed format and Register Memory enter the register Address say address 101 You should then move to and select Field Width Enter the width of the integral part 3 in this example and then Fractional width 2 in this example InstantHMI at runtime will use two consecutive bytes in a single Register to store the fixed point number Select Long Fixed format if you wish to treat the long integer value stored in two consecutive 16 bit memory words as a long fixed point number The Long Fixed format works similar to the Fixed format Select Float if you desire the 32 b
237. e set up with Input Widgets Buttons and Touch zones so that data entry discrete and analog can be done entirely with the help of a mouse without using the keyboard All that is needed is the tap of the stylus to press a button or touch zone or drag a slide or turn a dial or toggle a switch Data Entry Using Keyboard and Stylus When your screen has usual integer or boolean data entry fields and also input widgets you may use the stylus to directly tap on an input field and enter your data 10 6 Printing Reports With InstantHMI you can print reports very easily and with utmost flexibility Use Report Designer see Section 5 to create the report templates Review the discussion in Section 9 5 on the two system keys PRINT and SPOOL Using these keys the operator can print a variety of reports The InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PDA Page 10 20 Operator can print on demand a report associated with any screen by pressing the PRINT function key The report may include information from the displayed screen some other screen or any other information accessible from your PLC Use of the SPOOL key in conjunction with the PRINT key can produce very flexible reports see Section 5 3 Printer setup if needed will be done using a pop up printer setup dialog InstantHMI supports printing from PDA and CE platforms using Bluetooth Infrared WiFi network and serial links Printing support
238. e tag for the field If you tap the C position it acts to perform the monitor function continuously at every sample time for the tag Note that if any of the tags are being monitored continuously at small sample times it may be difficult or impossible for you to access other InstantHMI functions It is recommended that you change from C to M to overcome this difficulty or use a sufficiently large sample time 500 msec or larger for continuous monitoring InstantHMI allows tags to be grouped under group names of your choice With tag groups you may select a specific group name such as Boiler Variables in the monitor screen shown above This automatically assigns the first four tags in this group to the four tag display fields on the screen and a scroll bar appears on the right side of the screen Use the scroll bar to scroll through and monitor all the Boiler Variables on the screen The concept of Tag Groups along with the Scrollable Monitor Screen makes monitoring any number of tags on the handheld an easy task in InstantHMI 10 3 3 Controller Data Table The Data Monitor screen allows you to monitor and or modify data values for tag groups or any tags from the lt All Tags gt group This process however requires that tags be pre defined The Data Table function in InstantHMI allows you to monitor modify memory locations in your controller without the need for any Tag Definition InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Softw
239. each Sample Time to ascertain if the field is in alarm condition At first you should enable alarm check only for changing data that is critical If the performance of InstantHMI is satisfactory then you may include other less critical data fields for Alarm checking Note that this feature may also be used with Boolean Bit memory Note Some features in this paragraph may not be available in the current implementation InstantHMI allows you to specify for each tag several possible alarm conditions including low high low low and high high alarm conditions In addition other types of alarm triggers such as Range of values rate of change major and minor deviations can be specified For these alarm conditions InstantHMI provides a description parameter which accepts operator entered text while acknowledging the alarm to record the symptoms observed The alarm description will be available and displayed in the alarm monitoring and history screens You may also specify a dead band to eliminate momentary alarm conditions based on the length of time the tag is in alarm condition Corrective actions may be incorporated into the new alarm definitions If a tag goes into alarm condition it can initiate execution of scripts or spool print reports A script could also be executed when the alarm is acknowledged to let the controller know that the alarm has been acknowledged If an alarm is not acknowledged after a predetermined amount of time the runtime could
240. ecision Page 7 8 This is the inverse of the Sine function 39 If Value is the double precision result returned by Sin Degrees then degrees will be returned by ASin Value Example a Asin 0 7660 This example will return the inverse sine of 0 7660 in degrees Note Acos and Atan have the same Syntax Acos Value This is the inverse of the Cosine function 40 If Value is the double precision result returned by Cos Degrees then degrees will be returned by Acos Value Atan Value This is the inverse of the Tangent function 41 If Value is the double precision result returned by Tan Degrees then degrees will be returned by Atan Value Sinh Value This is the hyperbolic Sine function The argument Value is used in the hyperbolic Sine function to return a double precision value Cosh Value This is the hyperbolic Cosine function The argument Value is used in the hyperbolic Cosine function to return a double precision value Tanh Value This is the hyperbolic Tangent function The argument Value is used in the hyperbolic Tangent function to return a double precision value Sin Degrees This function returns the value of Sine function of the Degrees specified as a double precision number Example a Sin 50 InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008
241. ect Radio Button to place one or more radio buttons on the screen You will be prompted for the number of radio button controls you want on the screen The radio button is functionally equivalent to the Windows radio button control Note that the radio button display object properties dialog box allows you to place a Label text in your choice of colors Display Object Properties Display Properties Tag Information Data Types fimput Tag Name Select Tag lt NoTagSelected gt Radio Button Properties Display Text Graphic Format Width 61 Height 24 Sample Time 1000 msec s Checked Value E _ Properties Script lt NoScript gt y Edit Check Mark Side Left y Color Foreground i Background First Item In Group Tab Stop OK Cancel Figure 4 57 Radio Button Selector Object The Radio Button Properties dialog box allows you to change the text label and its font In addition you may position the Bullet mark on the right or left of the label text and assign the checked values to be associated with the selected radio Button control You must select the checked values for the different radio buttons in a group to be distinct Then one of the radio control buttons will be checked when the tag value matches the enumerated trigger value otherwise it will be unchecked Note that this allows for the possibility that none of the radio buttons will be checked when the tag value is none of the enumerated values 4
242. ected tag data items defined from the Tag database in the data log tag list for logging in the handheld at specified sample times Tap the Remove Tag button to delete an item from the data log tag list Tap the Done button to leave the Data Log Manager screen You may tap the Start Stop button to start stop the logging of data in the Handheld If the button label shows Stop you may tap it to stop data logging in progress If the button label shows Start you may tap it to start data logging Tap Delete All Logged Data to delete all logged data from the database Datalog Manager Patalog Tag List Boiler 1 Pressure Boiler 1 Status Boiler 1 Temperature Figure 10 29 Datalog Manager PDA You may think of event triggered Data Logging as the response to the following statements If Event1 then datalog Tag List1 If Event2 then datalog Tag List2 etc Setup Event Triggers a 10 57 InstantHMI Events e F Event List Datalog Trigger Events j Etch Setpoint Etch Setpoint Setpoint New P Sputter Setpiont Check Event from Startup Delete Trigger Tag Trigger value Sample Time 1000 Tag Manager Trigger Type Logging Method Tags to Log Eich Setpoint OE cad El Figure 10 30 Datalog Trigger Events Setup PDA For example suppose you have a tag called Temperature with a high value THigh and a low value TLow and you wish to log Temperature values if it is in high a
243. ection of your IHMI 4 INI should contain the following TRIGGER_MINUTE TRIGGER_SECOND SPOOL_ACTION 5632 LOCAL_START_ADDRESS 1 14 7 Example 3 Time Triggered Control 14 7 1 Introduction This User DLL allows you to specify On time and an Off time At these times a value will be written to the controller This action can be done upon multiple controllers on a network Note The source code is not included here Contact Software Horizons Inc for implementation of this and other User DLL to suit your application requirements We will gladly provide a quote for your User DLL application development Use of User DLL 14 7 2 Use of User DLL Step 1 Make sure the following lines are included in IHMI 4 INI file in your Windows directory InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI User DLL Page 14 8 Value to be written at specified address at off time SKIP_ SATURDAYS YES YES Do not write values to the controller on Saturdays NO Continue to write values to the controller on YES Do not write values to the controller on Sundays NO Continue to write values to the controller on Sundays NUMBER_OF EXCEPTIONS 1 Number of days to skip writing values to controller SKIP1 09 08 97 Date to skip writing values to controller Date must be of format MM DD YY where MM DD and YY are all two digit numbers The FIRST STATION and LAST STATION parameters refer
244. ecture InstantHMI 5 0 hopes to be your preferred HMI SCADA solution The InstantHMI 5 0 Development Team SOFTWARE HORIZONS INC InstantHMI PROGRAM LICENSE AGREEMENT YOU SHOULD CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING THIS PACKAGE IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THEM PROMPTLY RETURN THE PACKAGE UNUSED WITHIN 10 DAYS AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED USING THIS PACKAGE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS Software Horizons Inc SH provides InstantHMI the Program and licenses its use pursuant to license agreements You assume responsibility for the selection of the Program to achieve your intended results and for the installation use and results obtained from the Program You may a Install and operate the Program on a single computer b Transfer the Program subject to the terms of this license to another party if the other party agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement If you transfer the Program you must at the same time either transfer all copies whether in printed or machine readable form to the same party or destroy any copies not transferred You may not a use copy modify or transfer the Program or any copy in whole or in part except as expressly provided for in this license b provide or allow use of the Program in any network time sharing multiple CPU or multiple user arrangements c grant sub licenses or other rights in the Program d reproduce the documentation
245. eeeessesaasseeeesensaaas 3 19 O RE PRCT tee Oo eS Re Ret Ee Pee ere eee ee ere ee 3 20 3 5 1 Bitmap Screen Capture Utility eo dd 3 20 202 DIEM AO GROWS PO ana a A TEA TE E E 3 21 253 Bitmap Groups PDAS ysin a Ena 3 21 30 Recipes and COniguratioh Sese dies 3 21 3071 OCI OCS P O rae a a a a a a 3 22 202 Recipes RDA ii ad 3 22 3 63 COMMOUNANIONS PO ate laca 3 23 3 04 CONMQUIAUONS ADA i 3 24 O A Sl o 3 25 74 121 62 0150 Lo APPEARS PRE PCE o A A eee ee me cee eee en ener 3 28 Sal TM Bas co Pala LOGGING e a o ld 3 28 3 2 Event Triggered Data Logging ersa E oca 3 29 SS A a lee teesuaiete 3 30 IO A A O A N 3 30 A O EE ee ee 4 1 AoW Geim A 4 1 Pa Ved AGS Masset ta arse A A Mae arte E 4 2 A NE2 SLU S Bahian ho acces et a ee as Ha tans ua esau cat Saat jetta a au acc nab hat gina 4 3 2S ES TOOB a eee Orne se Mee A ER ae O ORO oe ce Rien CER ne ree Oe 4 3 7 SO A eer eee eee eee 4 4 ADO Menu Bar Mai Men lira ia 4 5 4 1 6 Creating Application Seres iii ai aa 4 5 AEEA A O eee ae ee ees eee 4 6 APS EdE A vente ent naaaey 4 8 A A commences 4 9 A PP aaia i e a Ra O 4 9 dia MOVE ODJECE rrenan a cuted obasaac as ctuuecasaraumceh ct Neconebaedeasauaesclianneaadeelecesebaaeeuneeecacand 4 9 As A SSG 4 9 430 0 Delete ODE sas A A A RA A A a cil 4 9 43 05 Make ODJET ASSEMDIY at ia dos 4 9 43 1 break Object ASSEIMDIY anaconda 4 12 ASL ANMO SOD ES AM eee E eon Ee ene eer re mee eee ne Tee erro eee een ee eee ne 4 13 A 4 13 A t
246. eet Microsoft Graph Chart Microsoft Map Mi Result Inserts a new Microsoft Excel Worksheet object rs a into pour document Figure 4 29 Screen Designer Insert Object Select the object type you wish to insert in the Screen and click OK This will create a place holder rectangle container for the object type you selected example Excel Worksheet If you right click on this rectangle you will access the OLE Verbs menu appropriate for the inserted OLE object Section 4 6 11 When finished creating the document object return to the Screen Designer the ESC key would usually work or you may click outside the OLE object on the screen The container rectangle for an OLE object is like any other object on the screen You may select move or resize the object on the screen Editing OLE Objects To avoid confusion with non OLE object commands example Edit gt Copy Object the OLE Edit commands are accessed only by right clicking the OLE container rectangle they are not accessible from the Edit menu oral Feriae 10 Part ofl Pagentatord 10 Drang biracki Cip berigi a remi Mirror sos other pagasi Flew faja nba pour document Screen with Embedded OLE Document Excel Worksheet object Figure 4 30 Example Screen with Inserted OLE Document Excel Worksheet Figure 4 30 shows an Example Screen with Inserted OLE Document Excel Worksheet To access the OLE edit properties that have been exposed to the container
247. eger Register Address 803 monitor KVAR Monitor Local Address 3 Monitor Script 1 Register Address 806 In Script 1 SCT compute and store KW in Local 1 KVAR in Local3 and KVA in R806 InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Script Editor Page 7 15 Example 2 Standard 4 20 mA Signal Figure 7 4 illustrates a screen used in this example The fader simulates the 4 20 mA input signal to the PLC converted to a digital value ranging from 2048 4095 The gauge displays the calculated D to A 4 20 mA signal Input from PLE 4 20 mA Signal The dataspecs are listed below e Input Fader Widget Register Address 101 Properties Low End Data Value 2048 High End Data Value 4096 Label Spacing 10 e Monitor Gauge Widget Local Address 102 e Monitor Integer Local Address 102 Script 4 20 mA Note the following register allocations Register Meaning L101 Simulated Analog input signal converted to digital value ranging from 2048 to 4096 L102 Digital value in L101 converted using Script 4 20 mA SCT back to a 4 20 mA gauge reading Figure 7 5 Register Definition for 4 20 MA Example The Script used in this example is shown in the Figure below Variable Temp1 converts the Analog In A D digital value to a zero based one ranging from O to 2048 The range 2048 corresponds to 20 4 16 mA This yields the scaling factor 16 2048 and the offset 4 used in the script InstantHMI
248. elect the Target Node IP address from the list of connected Target platforms before you send a chat message or file s from Super Node to Target Node If you do file transfer the files are saved on the other side under selected Project Directory on Windows PC nodes and under lnstantHMI Directory on PDA nodes Use the file transfer facility to transfer any of the Project Screens Databases etc to the target nodes Figure 11 8 Launch Pad Chat with any Platforms using TCP IP link 11 2 5 TCP IP Chat Utility When the TCP IP connectivity option is installed you may use the InstantHMI Chat utility This allows for text messages to be exchanged between two InstantHMI nodes Chat can be useful in many instances For example suppose there is a supervisory InstantHMI node responsible for keeping track of efficiency production rates and other information about the process being monitored The InstantHMI Chat feature allows for communication to the plant factory floor to discuss with Operators about an Alarm low production or other problem that may be occurring These nodes may be located across the room only a few feet away on your company LAN or miles away on your company WAN or across the world over the Internet InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI TCP IP Page 11 7 InstantHMI Chat Utility Available InstantHMl Nodes Sent Received Messages E gt lt This Node gt
249. ely you may tap on the Screens gt Graphic Monitor gt Large Menu to go to the monitor screen with large graphic widgets On this screen you will see a pull down list of available tag groups and two large graphic widget tag display fields E InstantHMI 2 37p E InstantHMI Group lt All Tags gt v Group lt All Tags gt M ocal 202 Gauge File Screens Setup Help E Figure 10 20 Graphic Monitor Large PDA Tap on the Group pull down arrow Y at the top to select one of the named tag groups or the un named lt All Tags gt group which is your entire tag database and the default choice Each graphic tag display field consists of two lines of information pertaining to the selected tag from your tag database The first line displays the Tag name and a small pull down arrow Y which you can tap to select a different tag from the selected group to be associated with the graphic tag display field The second line displays the data value associated with the tag usually a specified register address from your controller Note that to be included for display on the graphic monitor screen a tag must have a Graphic Format other than lt None gt defined Tags without Graphic Format will be automatically eliminated from the Graphic Monitor screens Also displayed is a graphic widget selected by you for this field See Section 3 3 7 for a discussion of available graphic widgets Some of the Widgets Button Spinner Fader Knob etc allo
250. en Designer Page 4 9 objects to position them precisely on the screen The grid size may be set to 1 for the finest nudge positioning If you click on a sizer box for a selected text object you will see the font dialog box which you can use to change the font size etc To select a data object for editing double click on it when you are in the Select mode The Edit menu offers the following commands to operate on selected object s Redraw Clear screen to background color and redraw all objects UnDelete Object Undelete the objects deleted via select Move Object Move the selection to a new location Copy Object Copy all objects in the selection to new location Delete Object Delete all objects in the selection Make Object Assembly Combine selected objects into an object Assembly Break Object Assembly Separate object assembly into individual objects Arrange Objects Align selected Objects to match last selection 4 3 1 Redraw The Redraw command clears your application screen to the screen background color then redraws all objects in your application screen This command is useful to check out your actual application screen when you find crumbs left over after certain Edit operations 4 3 2 UnDelete Object Ctrl A Use the Undelete command to restore objects deleted by using Delete or Del key 4 3 3 Move Object To move a group of objects use the Select tool to establish the selection After the objects are selected
251. en be subjected to analysis using Microsoft Excel companion tools such as Historic Trending Section 13 or other tools available to you 9 4 9 Help The Help menu includes following Troubleshoot User Guide Help Screen About Troubleshoot When implemented this will display a Troubleshoot script for the operator User Guide When implemented this will display a User Guide for the operator Help Screen This will display the Application Help screen if setup by the project designer About This will display the following dialog box About InstantHMl Runtime Copyright C 1993 2007 Software Horizons Inc Version 5 0 0 Build 2001 All Rights Reserved Figure 9 16 About InstantHMI Runtime Engine 9 4 10 Print Save Screen Print Save Screen feature helps operator to create an Instant Runtime Status Dump 9 4 11 Exit This command allows you to setup a macro button to exit runtime 9 5 System Commands To access any screens on the monitor when Runtime Engine is running use the Function keys Some of the functions are also accessible through the menu bar It is recommended that System Integrator or Administrators on site provide appropriate keyboard labels for the Operator Note that Macro Editor Section 6 may be used to thoroughly customize your system by reassigning keys defining special purpose keys and so on to suit your application needs InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0
252. en click the New Msg button You will see the Message Editor dialog box where you can enter a message value and the corresponding text of the message to display If you indicated a reference group for this message group then select your message from the displayed list of messages from the reference group All messages message value and text of message corresponding to the selected message group will be displayed in the table of messages in the Message Manager dialog box To select a message click on it in the message list box and see it hi lighted You may then click on the Delete Msg button to delete the message from the message group or click on the Edit Msg button to edit the selected message You may click on the Copy Group button to copy a selected Message Group and all its associated messages to another group name which may be edited as needed to define a new message group quickly You may click on the Delete Group button to delete a selected message group together with all messages in the group Note that each message group has its own list of messages and deleting messages in a group does not affect copies of the same messages in other message groups InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 19 3 4 2 Message Database Manager PDAs You may access the Message Groups screen through the InstantHMI Menu Screen Tag Variables gt Messages If the Message database is passwo
253. en see the tag group definitions screen Tag Group Definitions Del Group Groupiss e Boiler 1 Variables Select Tag Boiler 1 Pressure Boiler 1 Status Boiler 1 Temperature Set Point Closed Loop Set Point Current Ramp Set Point Ramp Target Set Point High Lirit mAr Set Point High Lirit RTE Set Point High Lirit te Set Point Low Limit mAr Y Figure 3 11 Tag Group Definitions PDA Tap on the New Group button to define a new Tag Group name Tap on the Del Group button to delete the Group name the tags in the group and the group name are displayed on the screen from the list of Tag Groups Note that the tags in the group will not be deleted but only the tag group definition will be deleted You select a different Tag Group to view on this screen from the pull down list of Tag Groups by tapping on the down arrow Y near the top of the screen and then selecting the Tag Group from the list of groups shown You will then see this current tag group name together with all the tags associated with this group Do not mistake the Tag Positioning Bar InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 14 described below for the scroll bar which appears when the number of tags exceeds the display area available Use the scroll bar on the right to view all the tags in this group To select a tag tap on its name in the selected tag group Tap on the Remo
254. entially replicates the Menu Bar commands This menu may be used to Hide Show the Menu Bar View command or Hide Show the Status Bar or Exit the runtime Screens Section943 Alarms Help Section949 Exit Section 9 4 11 9 4 1 Login The System Administrator may require a Login Username and Password for authorization to access various runtime functions including exit from Runtime Engine 9 4 2 View The View menu offers the following commands to customize the view of the Runtime Engine windows to suit your preferences InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PC Page 9 11 Title Hide or show Menu Bar Menu Hide or show Menu Bar Status Hide or show Status Bar 9 4 3 Screens Click on Screens gt Select to select a screen click on OK and Runtime Engine will switch to the screen you selected You may need Password authorization for this function For convenience you may click on the Screens gt Next or Screens gt Back command to switch to next project screen or switch back to the previous project screen Your screen designer can also setup touch zone buttons Section 4 6 5 on your screen to switch to different screens 9 4 4 Recipe See Section 3 6 1 for a discussion of recipes When you click on Recipe you will see the Recipe Manager dialog box which includes a pull down list of recipes from which you select the desired recipe The tags from the tag database included in
255. ents in InstantHMI and gain future business for application enhancements required by their customers OEMs may sell an OEM version of InstantHMI at a different price higher or lower compared to the Software Horizons published list price If the OEM sells InstantHMI at a higher price than the Software Horizons list price to reflect their own value add components the Project Protection feature will prevent their end users from purchasing InstantHMI software through Software Horizons at a lower cost thus safeguarding the OEM sales Project Protection enables the OEM to sell OEM version of InstantHMI at a price lower than the Software Horizons list price as a bundling promotion with OEM s own products End users who are not OEM customers will be unable to use OEM version of InstantHMI for non OEM projects OEM Protection Mechanism Each OEM is issued an OEM ID by Software Horizons This OEM ID will be stored with the project to identify unique value added components from different OEMs and also by Software Horizons The standard version of InstantHMI will contain the Software Horizons OEM ID internally in the software When necessary OEMs will be provided with a specialized version of InstantHMI that will contain their OEM ID in the software All project files created will contain the OEM ID of the software that produced them If a project file is accessed by a program that does not have the same OEM ID the program will deny permission to run an
256. ents may trigger a script spool print a report initiate a call to User DLL function written by you play sound video clips or start data logging of a predefined tag group Event scheduling would be another useful feature Here users could schedule scripts to execute spool or print reports and other features based on a Time of Day Hourly Daily Weekly and or Monthly basis Tag Display Properties Default Note The Show Display Properties button exposes the Tag Display Properties These display properties stored with the tag definition are used for pre formatted screen display objects in InstantHMI usually on non PC platforms The Screen Designer can access the Display Object Properties Section 4 6 2 stored with objects on user designed screens these properties supersede the default display properties stored with the tag definition Text Format Field Width Monitor Sample Time Graphic Format Text Format See Section 4 11 2 Field Width The first field indicates the total number of digits for the data field The second field following the implicit decimal point allows you to specify the number of implicit Decimal Places in the data value integer Int16 or long Int32 signed or unsigned stored in registers InstantHMI supports the concept of Fixed Format integers to promote operator understanding of displayed raw data unsigned or signed This concept also implies an implicit scaling of the data stored in the registe
257. eport Designer Section 5 to create all the printer report and spool record templates InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PC Page 9 4 STEP 4 Customization Use the Macro Editor Section 6 Script Editor Section 7 and Data Source Manager Section 2 3 5 to set up macro commands scripts and remote data sources to enhance operator convenience STEP 5 Special Tags If your application requirements dictate use of the special tags setup by you in your PLC ladder logic or in Local memory define them in your InstantHMI project setup to enable event driven printer reports spool reports etc Simulated PLC functions are available in certain Local memory locations Section 3 3 3 STEP 6 Test Click on the Run button on the LaunchPad or on the Runtime Engine icon Test your application screens Repeat Steps 1 6 for each screen incrementally and test your application and proceed to complete your project The method you adopt will depend on your convenience We recommend that at the beginning you skip Steps 3 5 and get a simple screen working and then include Step 3 and or Step 4 and or Step 5 in the next iteration t is important that you check out communication with your PLC before investing your time on elaborate screens Note The number of monitored fields and the sampling time will affect the communication performance of InstantHMI Smaller number of monitored fields on the cu
258. er Ww Save To Library Add Group Remove Group Add Tag Remove Tar Figure 4 14 Tag Group Selected by User at Runtime for Tank Status Object Assembly 4 3 7 Break Object Assembly This Edit menu option is enabled when you have selected an object assembly on the screen Select the object assembly you want to break up into individual objects and then click on the Edit gt Break Object Assembly command After the break up individual objects in the former object assembly can be selected moved deleted etc All object assembly properties defined for this assembly will be discarded InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 13 4 3 8 Arrange Objects The Arrange menu offers the following commands to facilitate screen design Align Left Align selected Objects to match last selection Align Right Align selected Objects to match last selection Align Top Align selected Objects to match last selection Align Bottom Align selected Objects to match last selection Move to Front Move Selected Object to front Move to Back Move Selected Object to back These menu items are also available on the Style Bar Section 4 1 4 Four of the commands are used for alignment of selected objects on screen and they work in the same manner For example if you select three Box objects on screen and then click on Align Left then the first two boxes will be moved on screen so that thei
259. er InstantHMI Datalogs in the Data Source Name field and enter DSN used by IHMI Trend Utility in the Description field and then click the Select button Step 5 Navigate to your IHMI Project Datalog directory usually C IHMI 5 MYPROJECT Datalogs and select the database IHMIDatalog MDB and then click OK When you are finished click OK again Select Database Database Name Directories IHMID atalog mdb culhm Simyproject datalogs gt ca IHMID atalog D efault mi E IHMI 5 gt MYPROJECT Cancel Help Datalogs Read Only Exclusive List Files of Type Dries lAccess Databases Pm _ E c Network Figure 13 6 ODBC DSN Setup Step 5 Historic trending utility on your LaunchPad PC should now be configured properly 13 1 3 Create Default IHMIDatalog Default MDB Database Your standard InstantHMI installation includes a ready to use database IHMIDatalog MDB as well as a backup database IHMIDatalog Default mdb located in your project directory usually C IHMI 5 MyProject For the sake of completeness we show below the detailed steps in creating the IHMIDatalog Default MDB database using Microsoft Access database software You should never have to use these steps to create the empty IHMiDatalog MDB database from scratch A simple copy command to transfer the contents of the IHMIDatalog Default MDB from C IHMI 5 MyProject to IHMIDatalog MDB in your Project directory should suff
260. er e Modbus ATU Enhanced Ef Auto Screen Protection 3 mins E Allow Auto Power Off Figure 10 15 Comm Setup PDA Tap on the appropriate fields and enter the Baud rate Parity Data Bits and Stop Bits to match with the settings on your controller Select the communication driver for your controller The Time Out parameter default value 1000 msec may be changed if necessary to suit your controller The Station Offset parameter default value 0 is used in Recipes Section 3 6 and allows the recipe parameters saved from a Station A to be uploaded to another Station B by using the simple scheme Station B Station Station A Station Station offset This scheme allows tags defined for Station A to be used for Station B Similarly the comm driver will use the modified station for all communications with the controller See Section 3 3 7 InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PDA Page 10 9 InstantHMI has a built in Screen Protection which super imposes a Resume Screen to hide any monitor data entry screens after some specified period of operator inactivity 30 secs 10 Min Screen Protection can be disabled if you so desire When the Resume Screen appears a valid password must be entered to resume normal InstantHMI screen functionality The Handheld s Auto Power Off feature may be prevented to continue InstantHMI monitoring and data logging 10 3 2 Data Monito
261. er parean Poni password A ne spete account services only Figure 12 34 DCOM for UniOPC Server Client Step H InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Historic Trend Utility Page 13 1 13 Historic Trend Utility When using a PC runtime engine the datalog will be saved in an ODBC compatible database IHMIDatalog MDB When using a PDA or Win CE runtime engine the datalog will be saved in a format compatible with the specific platform which can then be converted using the PC LaunchPad to the ODBC compatible database IHMIDatalog MDB as well as a CSV file in some cases The IHMiDatalog MDB database may be used for historical trending or other analysis using tools available to you Note that your copy of InstantHMI LaunchPad must have the Historical trending option installed for the logged data to be useful for trending analysis IHMITrend Historic Trend Utility provides you with a graphical representation of data logged by InstantHMI The IHMITrend Utility discussed in this section will enable you to select data items time periods and data formats Line or Scattered symbol graphs Data interpolation may be done using Linear or Spline algorithm To view your database in IHMITrend a trend profile must be created A trend profile will include the name of the source database pen assignments labels colors fonts etc The same database data may be displayed using several different profile
262. er 1 here sw Moo Figure 7 7 Ramp Soak Profile Data Entry Screen InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Script Editor Ramp Soak Uses Temp Zones Screen in Demo Project Ramp Soak Uses TempZones Screen Assumes initial value of z 0 LocalVar LocalVar LocalVar LocalVar LocalVar LocalVar LocalVar LocalVar LocalVar LocalVar Stage SetPoint Low SetPoint High RampRate Heat RampRate Cool Temperature Duration Soak1 Duration Ramp1 Duration Soak2 Duration Ramp2 N AT AT ATA ATA ATA ATA ATA ATA STO f z 0 Not setup yet Initialize Ramp Soak parameters ZA Temperature Start 20 Duration Soak1 10 SetPoint High 80 Duration Ramp1 15 Duration Soak2 20 SetPoint Low 10 Duration Ramp2 10 u GetElapsedTime SetTag Temp Zone 4 Temperature Start Stage 0 goto END if Stage 0 goto SOAK1 if Stage 1 m RAMP1 if e 2 SOAK2 if rns 3 goto RAMP2 goto END SOAK1 t GetElapsedTime t t u 1000 if t lt Duration Soak1 Do nothing Just Soak SetTag Temp Zone 4 Temperature Start goto END else InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc Page 7 17 5 0 20Jul2008 Script Editor Stage 1 RampRate Heat SetPoint High Temperature Start Duration Ramp1 goto END RAMP 1 t GetElapsedTime t t
263. er of screens in your project the platform on which the project will be deployed etc For a detailed review of your project setup click on LaunchPad gt Setup and modify setup parameters if desired Section 9 3 The Runtime Options dialog shows status of parameters such as Auto Start Runtime Datalog Database Type Access or SQL etc You may double click on any of these to edit these parameter settings You may also review your project runtime options by clicking on LaunchPad gt Setup and modify setup parameters if desired Section 9 3 Note We strongly recommend that you do not change setup parameters directly in the Project ini file to avoid unpredictable or inconsistent runtime behavior Click on the Run button or click on the Runtime Engine icon to run Runtime Engine You should see the InstantHMI splash screen Figure 9 12 on the Monitor You may replace this splash screen with your own The file 0 BMR contains a list of bitmap files BMP which represent the splash screen Create your own bitmap files and include their names in 0 BMR Note that animation effects can be achieved by a clever sequence of bitmaps InstantHMI Runtime Startup Runtime Engines Designer amp Runtime Y Loading Screens Y lnitializing Communication Ports Y Initializing Screen Data Status Initializing Project data Windows PC Figure 9 12 Runtime Splash Screen amp Startup Status Once the splash screen appears Runtime Engine initializ
264. erited from the project template or change the Target Runtime Platform Windows PC CE Mobile Pocket PC Smart Phone or Palm OS using the pull down list D Accept the Screen Resolution inherited from the project template or change it to one of the available Screen Resolutions for your new project This will allow you to design your HMI project screens on a Windows PC platform and deploy it on the target platform which has an installed InstantHMI Runtime engine Click on Done button to proceed with the new project creation or X to cancel The New Project Wizard will take you to the next step Om gt Note You may use the Change Platform button to change the Screen Resolution to match the screen size resolution for a new target platform at a later date This would be 640x480 or higher for desktop applications 240x320 or higher for Pocket PC Windows CE based applications and 160x160 or higher for Palm based applications InstantHMI implements a Design Once Deploy Anywhere HMI solution you may design your screens for one platform and easily convert them for use on another platform To accomplish this click on Setup gt Project gt Change Platform switch the platform selection and then click on Setup gt Screens button Section 2 4 5 and then re save each of the project screens for the new platform resolution You may use the automatic re saving of screens and other selected project elements feature built in project
265. erred into the ODBC database MDB identified in the ODBC DSN setup 2 6 Exit Click on X button on LaunchPad to access the Exit dialog under password control InstantHMl YD Exit LaunchPad Figure 2 43 LaunchPad Exit Dialog InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 1 3 Data Bases The information for Monitoring and Control of your machine process is presented using display data objects on project screens These display data objects get their parameters from a tag object in the Tag Database The data source for the tag provides the raw data of the tag object The screen object then translates the raw data into the chosen display format of the screen object InstantHMI maintains a database of all the various raw data information items tags of interest to you in a tag database For convenience the tags may be assigned to one or more named tag groups All the tags assigned to a tag group can be monitored on a preformatted Data Monitor Screen on a PDA Section 10 2 2 or on project screens designed by you Special tag groups for Recipes and Alarms are also available Tags may also be used to represent messages from Message Groups and to display a bitmap from Bitmap Groups on the screen Finally tags may be automatically and implicitly associated with a Data Table representing arrays of memory locations from your controller The databases resident in PDAs Windows Mo
266. es its internal data structure for each of the tags associated with your screen data fields You will see a Runtime Engine Startup Status message InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PC Page 9 10 box informing you of progress Finally the first screen for your application will be displayed on the monitor If this does not happen you should check to make sure that all the communication cables are properly connected and then run InstantHMI again You may copy the Runtime icon to the Start Up Program Group so that InstantHMI will run automatically when the PC boots up Water Supply System Status Y TANK B STATUS Water Level Alarm State 13 Feet TANK A STATUS Water Level Alarm State 0 Feet Low Level Alarm Water Supply Comunity B Ed Booster Pump Running Water Supply RUN MODE Comunity A WELL Stopped et HMI Figure 9 13 Runtime Engine Window Title Menu Status Bars not in View The Runtime Engine window Figure 9 12 has a Title Bar at the top and a Status Bar at the bottom which may appear based on the operator preference The project designer may setup the project so that a Menu Bar appears or not depending on the operator preference The Menu Bar which may or may not be in view includes the following commands Note The Title Bar Menu Bar and Status Bar may be hidden at Runtime You may right click on any runtime screen to pop up a menu that ess
267. et the pen style to dotted Dash and one dot Set the pen style to one dash and one dot Dash and two dots Set the pen style to one dash and two dots Size Specify pen width through a popup dialog box Filled Object The Patterns gt Filled Object menu offers the following commands to set the fill patterns for filled objects Solid Set the fill style to solid Horizontal Hatch Set the fill style to horizontal hatch Vertical Hatch Set the fill style to vertical hatch FDiagonal Hatch Set the fill style to forward diagonal hatch BDiagonal Hatch Set the fill style to backward diagonal hatch Cross Hatch Set fill style to cross hatch Diagonal Cross Hatch Set fill style to diagonal cross hatch Text Display Mode The Patterns gt Text Display Mode menu offers two choices InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 35 Opaque Make Text Background Opaque Transparent Make Text Background Transparent The Text object has a foreground color and background color You may think of this as writing the text with a foreground color pen on a background color placard Normally the placard is opaque and hence its color the text background color hides the object behind it You may use the Select tool to select any text you entered on screen and set its Text Display Mode to Transparent which makes the usually opaque text placard to be transparent so you can see through behind
268. ets handshake from controller to InstantHMI register R2165 and R2365 1 Tap on control program will maintain Download button to read recipe tag data this for about 10 secs values from the controller Tap on Save button to save Recipe A AS A Pf along with the handshake register R2365 which has value 1 PLC control program resets handshake A A registers R2165 and R2365 after 10 secs or so to allow time for saving of recipe by InstantHMI Preview New Recipe Recipe Manager Screen ili AN LA lt P LN INR Recipe A FA gt good Recipe A ipe Manager Screen new recipe tag values Recipe A InstantHMI transfers new recipe to Remee Reopen New recipe signal from controller The handshake register Recipe B Recipe A InstantHMI to controller control R2365 is restored along with the recipe program PLC control program transfers new New 1 New recipe from Group B to Group A when it Recipe B Recipe B is ready for the next batch oa OP ee 2 eer registers R2165 amp R2365 Recipe B Example 3 Configuration of Controllers Using Recipe The close similarly between Recipes and Configuration sometimes leads to confusion InstantHMI provides separate function buttons for Recipes and Configuration Here we will explain how the recipe concept can be used to mimic the configuration of a controller which is performing as desired in another similar controller quickly without the need for any tedious parameter setup
269. ew list of tags and then tap on the Remove Tag button to remove this tag from the recipe definition The Tag Positioning Bar Section 3 3 7 allows you to re order the tags included in the Recipe exactly the way you want them Tap on the Done button when you are finished with the recipe definition and review This will return you to the Recipe Manager screen where you can review and edit the tag data values for any selected recipe 3 6 3 Configurations PC In InstantHMI the definition and management of Configuration parameters is very similar to that of Recipe parameters InstantHMI allows you to define the configurations as tag groups download configurations in the runtime engine from your controller registers preview configurations in the configuration manager and upload any selected configuration from the runtime engine to the controller registers Configurations are included as one of the project elements To access configurations click on LaunchPad gt Design gt Screens and select Configurations in the Screen Elements column select a configuration if available from Configuration Groups pre view panel and then click on the Recipe Manager button InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 24 Instant HMI InstantHMI Configuration Manager PROJECT IBTA Configurations Total 2 Test Config screen Elements Configurations 2 Group Functions Screens
270. executing under the control of the Runtime Engine If your project runtime target platform is not the same PC as the LaunchPad the InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 22 RUN button will be replaced by the Emulate button which allows you to execute your project under the emulation of the PC Runtime Engine Runtime Engine Instant HMI a Designer amp Runtime Design Once Deploy Anywhere Platform Scalable Independent New Generation HMI Technology Windows PC A a a2 PalmOS Pocket PC Figure 2 39 Project Execution Splash Screen Note You may replace the splash file IHMIsplash bmp in project folder with your own bitmap of same size 2 5 4 Project Reports Depending on the project setup InstantHMI Runtime Engine will produce various reports Printer reports Spool reports Alarm reports etc and logs Runtime data logs Event logs Communication status logs etc The Run gt Runtime Reports command on the LaunchPad displays a dialog which gives you access to the reports and logs produced by the runtime engine for the selected Project MyProject in the figure SP HMI PROJECT Demo Project Reports Project Elements Status Printer Report Not Created Spool Report Not Created Datalog Trend History TempZone Alarm Log Alarms Daily 071101 log Alarm Log Alarms Daily 071024 log Alarm Log Alarms Daily 071012 log Alarm Log Alarm
271. ey is set to YES the runtime will beep when data is entered through the screen By default BEEP_ON_DATA_ENTRY is set to NO 9 7 Trending InstantHMI allows you to include trend plots on screen see Section 4 11 5 1 Real Historic Trend 1 I 1 1 I ie lS EA 0 00 i 49 00 100 00 65 00 100 00 MIA Temp Zone 3 40 00 MIA Temp Zone 4 20 00 Figure 9 20 Sample Plot Screen Trend Each plot can be located anywhere on screen and show up to four trend variables per plot You have control over the sampling rate and the trend window You can have multiple plots on same screen You will see in the Free Demo a screen like the one in Figure 9 20 showing a 60 sec trend of four variables sampled every second You will also note that InstantHMI allows you to annotate the plot quite freely 9 8 Watch Lists The Watch List object allows you to monitor modify tags from your Tag Groups at Runtime InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PC Tag Name Wate ChOO Process Value WiatE HOO Set Point Page 9 19 High Lirnit Low Limit Date Time 100 0 02 19 2008 13 41 19 100 0 d2na 2008 13 41 19 Figure 9 21 Watch List Object in Runtime Need New Fig At runtime the same watch list can be used to watch tags from any of the watch groups included in the pull down list at the top In addition if the Tag allows data input you may enter data through the watch list just dou
272. fixed at 9600 baud Your controller and InstantHMI must be configured to use 9600 baud to ensure proper communications Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Connect the end labeled To Infrared on your InstantHMI IR Adapter item B to the infrared Converter Adapter item A Connect the end labeled To Controller on your InstantHMI IR Adapter item B to the PLC cable end that usually goes to PC After checking all connections carefully Plug in the power supply Software Horizons Part 37PIR 220LR xx to a 110V AC outlet Beam the Palm or Pocket PC IR port at the IR adapter connected to the PLC from 4 to a maximum of about 6 to 10 feet away from the IR adapter This range depends on many factors For the IR Link to function properly the IR beam from the Palm or Pocket PC to the IR adapter should have a clear cone of sight just like a TV remote controller Figure 8 3 InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Communication Links Page 8 3 1 2 Meters Infrared Cone of Sight Figure 8 3 IR 30 Cone of Sight 8 4 RF Link using RF Kit Kit Contents Item A 1 Wireless Access Point Item B 1 Compact Flash Wireless Network Adapter Item C 1 10 Mbit Ethernet Hub 4 Port Standard Item D 4 14ft RJ 45 Ethernet Cables Item E 1 5ft RJ 45 Crossover Cable We provide several RF kits to suit your PLC configuration s Some RF Kits do not include an Ethernet Hub item C or 4
273. formation you will be issued an activation code that will be entered through the Activation Utility to enable your InstantHMI installation The activation utility also allows you to transfer this activation from one computer to another This process is explained in Sections A 4 A 5 Note The facility to move or remove activation is only available for InstantHMI PC installations InstantHMI activation on the Palm and Pocket PC handheld cannot be moved such installation may be backed up after activation and restored on the same PDA see Section A 4 3 A 4 4 InstantHMI Copyright 2000 20088 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Installation Registration and Activation Page A 11 A 3 2 PC LaunchPad Runtime Registration Activation After installing InstantHMI LaunchPad on your PC click on Help gt Activation to run the Activation Utility The InstantHMI Activation Utility will display a window similar to the one below InstantHMI amp Activation Utility Instant HMI Step 1 Register Step 2 Activate Step 3 Design your Application q E SOFTWARE HORIZONS 4 Oe Step 1 Register Click on the Register button You will see the main registration form window similar to the one shown below Please fill in the form Click on save button to save the registration form and email to Software Horizons activate I InstantHMI com Click on the Print button so that you can have a hard copy of the registration form IHMIREGINF
274. framework and enjoy all the new functionality including access to the PDA platform deployment Users of earlier versions of InstantHMI can transfer their project Tag databases screens etc easily to InstantHMI 5 0 framework and take advantage of all the new functionality including powerful new object assemblies for screen development Simpler is Better architecture and numerous enhancements Benefit from Important InstantHMI features including the following e The screen data object display format is independent of the raw data of the tag object in the Tag Database You can view data from a data source in different formats on one or more screens e Use enhanced Data Table Viewer in Screen Designer to monitor modify controller tags and transfer pre tested tags to the Tag database 5 0 9 Real Time and Historic Trend Plots that can be viewed in the PDA as well as PC 4 1 Project Protection to helo OEMs and Designers to prevent screen tag modifications 4 1 Alarm Logging as an Object 4 1 Enhanced Tanks Scales Gauges Faders Knobs and other widgets 4 1 Print Screen feature to help operator create an Instant Runtime Status Dump 4 1 The Title Bar Menu Bar and Status Bar may be hidden at Runtime A right click on screen allows the screen view to include or exclude Title Menu Status bars 4 1 4 2 Widget and Plot objects allow negative and floating point values and labels 4 2 InstantHMI software release is made avai
275. ftware Horizons When you see the Registration Activation Screen enter the Activation Code provided by Software Horizons and tap on Activate button Once registered the Registration Screen will not appear when you run InstantHMI program A 4 Moving InstantHMI Activation A 4 1 Moving PC Runtime Activation Scenario Assume you have a valid InstantHMI LaunchPad activation and Runtime activation on one computer PC1 and you wish to move the Runtime activation to another computer PC2 This is uSually the case encountered by System Designers who wish to transfer the Runtime activation to the runtime production PC To accomplish this task you must carefully follow the steps below Caution Do not move the activation unless it is necessary as you might accidentally destroy your activation Software Horizons may assess a substantial service charge for providing a new activation InstantHMI Copyright 2000 20088 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Installation Registration and Activation Page A 13 Step 1a On PC2 Install InstantHMI Section A 2 1 To activate this InstantHMI installation on PC2 you need not contact Software Horizons Step 1b On PC2 Start the InstantHMI Activation Utility LaunchPad gt Help gt Activation InstantHMI Activation Utility Instant HMI InstantHMI Activation Status ee xi Step 1 Register Runtime Engine LaunchPad Designer Step 2 Activate Ep Es AL
276. ftware Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI OPC Page 12 2 InstantHMI nodes Each of the server InstantHMI nodes is an OPC client connected to an OPC server connected to a PLC or network of PLCs This allows the Super Node to read and or write data to the attached PLCs of the remote nodes Using the above example as a guide you can configure InstantHMI to exchange information among InstantHMI nodes This can be used for example if you need to transfer data from one PLC to another that are at different sites or to transfer data from one type of PLC model A to another model B at a remote location 12 2 OPC Client Objects in Screen Designer InstantHMI OPC Client reads writes data from to the OPC Server Each tag in the tag database will have a Data Source attached to it The tags and display objects for the OPC client are similar to what we have discussed in earlier sections Sections 4 6 4 11 However one big difference is that the Data Source is an OPC server The server is identified by selecting the Comm Link as an OPC Server with OPC Server Name to match that of the relevant OPC server You must install and register the OPC Server s relevant to your application so that their registered OPC Server names are available in the PC s list of OPC servers for the Data Source identification in InstantHMI Example Unitronics PLC UniOPC OPC Server e Install UniOPC Server from Unitronics e UniOPC Server Add Channel conne
277. g data items defined from the Tag database in the data log tag list for logging in the handheld at specified sample times Tap the Remove Tag button to delete an item from the data log tag list Tap the Done button to leave the Data Log Manager screen You may tap the Start Stop button to start stop the logging of data in the Handheld If the button label shows Stop you may tap it to stop data logging in progress If the button label shows Start you may tap it to start data logging Tap Delete All Logged Data to delete all logged data from the database Tap the View Data button to view the logged data 3 7 2 Event Triggered Data Logging Datalog Events are included as one of the project elements To access Datalog Events click on LaunchPad gt Design gt Tags and select Datalog Events in the Tag Elements column select a datalog event if available from the Datalog Events pre view panel and then click on the Datalog Events button to define the datalog event triggers Instant HMI InstantHMl Setup Event Triggers Events 1 Check Event from Startup Tag Elements Datalog Events 1 Tag Database E Demo Tank Setpoint Datalog Events Trigger Type Transition On Message Groups El Logging Method Log Once Bitmap Groups El Trigger Tag El Trigger Value 1 Transition On i Log Once v EWM Aeration Tank Selgin Trigger Tag EWM Grit Tank E Handshake Value 0 a 3 Datalog Sample Time 1000 Auto Manual Y iii d
278. g the Tag Editor or if no tag specification is desired at the time then a default tag linked to local memory will be generated You may edit the default tag at a later time or use it as is for preliminary testing of screen objects Section 2 3 4 Table in Figure 2 11 briefly summarizes the screen elements associated design tools and a reference to Sections where these are discussed Command Function Screen Elements Tool or Utility Screen Objects Scripts Script Editor Macro Editor E Recipe Editor Configurations Configuration Editor Troubleshoot Scripts Troubleshoot Editor Figure 2 11 Designing Screen Elements 2 3 2 Design gt Screen gt Troubleshoot Scripts Click on Design gt Screen gt Troubleshoot Scripts gt Troubleshoot Editor button provided your System Administrator has granted you this access privilege to create a custom troubleshooting script for your application to be downloaded to the Runtime Engine on any supported platform Figure 2 12 shows a sample troubleshoot script database IHMI TroubleshootDB idb for a Watlow Temperature Controller application PROJECT Demo PROJECT Demo Screen Elements Troubleshoot Scripts 5 AA DESIGN Troubleshoot Editor Screens Thumbnails S Ge IHMI TroubleshootDB idb ES explana possible sateen sI Screens List E Ape J E Alarm wont clear Alarm may be silenced Scripts c dii Communication Alarm output may be off Macros actual J Input Errors Ala
279. gister based Messages here Suppose the message group Event Condition contains four lines of text 0 Low 1 High 2 Rise 3 Fall each line representing a possible message to be displayed in a field data format Message data Memory Register Address 123 Message Group Event Condition At runtime if register 123 has the value 2 in it then the text Rise for line 2 in message group Event Condition will be displayed Also if the value in register 123 has no associated message text defined then the message text will be blanked Select Long format if data in the field is to be a signed long integer stored in two consecutive 16 bit registers Data will be stored with the least significant word at lower address Select ULong if the data is to be an unsigned long integer Fixed Format Field Width and Decimal Places are as discussed in Section 3 3 3 InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 16 Graphic Format Pocket PC lt None gt LED Button Spinner VBar Gauge Fader Knob V Meter Tank Dual Spinner InstantHMI takes advantage of the enhanced graphic capability of Pocket PC to support graphic format for display of the numeric data discussed earlier in this Section Tap on the Graphic Format pull down list down arrow 7 to select a graphic format from the list of available formats Many different graphic formats are available for convenient di
280. gner Customization Colors Text Patterns View Colors Text Pattems View Descriptive Text Fill Test Face Properties Test Forground Test Background Data Text Data Text Face Properties Font Hatch Lines Screen Background OK Cancel Help OK Cancel Help Figure 4 41 Customization gt Colors and Customization gt Text The Customization gt Colors tab allows you to set the default colors for Pen Fill Text Foreground Text Background Hatch Lines and Screen Background The Customization gt Text tab allows you to set the default fonts for Descriptive Text static text and Data Text Screen Designer Customization Screen Designer Customization Colors Text Pattems View Colors Text Patterns View Status Bar Fill Object Hatching Visible C Horizontal C Dashed C Vertical Style Bar Keypad C Dotted C Forward Diagonal Visible G b Left Coordinate 474 C Dash and One Dot C Backward Diagonal Tool Bar Top Coordinate 243 C Dash and Two Dots Cross Size f1 C Diagonal Cross None Tool Palette Widget Palette Visible C Yes e No Visible C Yes No inate 744 Hao BE Text Display Mode Bitmap Display Mode Left Coordinate Left Coordinate Opaque T Sizeable Top Coordinate 227 Top Coordinate 228 ae Visible Yes C No Visible Yes C No OK Cancel i Figure 4 42 Customization gt Patterns and Customization gt View The Customization gt Pattern
281. hPad gt Design gt Reports gt Historic Trend Profiles and then click on Historic Trend Utility button to run the IHMITrend You will see the IHMITrend window Figure 13 7 You will see a Datasets Profile Specification dialog InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Historic Trend Utility Page 13 10 Step 2 Create Trend Profile Profile Specification Plot Properties Data Source Mame DSM Plot Interval InstantHMl Datalogs i Minia amp Trend From Start C Trend Most Recent C Trend From Chosen Time 1074072007 08 21 Oe C Trend Specific Interval Stark Time End Time 0740742007 08 21 014 08 07 2007 1 42012 Data Sets HMA Project Tag Hame Pen Color M Test HTrend MTempzonetr gt Ste Test HTrend TempzZone2 y W sue Y Test HTrend MTempzonez Ste Test HTrend TempZoret y w Open Existing Profile Figure 13 11 Historic Trend Datasets Profile Setup Plot Properties Enter the Plot Interval and select the time units from the list Next select one of the following four options for trend Trend From Start Shows entire database from the Start Trend From Chosen Time Shows the data from the chosen date and Time Trend Most Recent Shows the most recent data including end of database Trend Specific Interval Shows the data from the specified Start to End Date amp Time Data Sets Choose the IHMI Project TagNa
282. has been assigned to Click on OK to finish the tag definition and InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 6 assignment to tag groups and return to the Tag Manager dialog Continue to define all the tags and tag groups and make the tag assignments to one or more groups as needed 3 3 3 Tag Alias PC A Tag Alias is just another name for a tag You may assign one or more tag aliases to any tag name InstantHMI treats Tag Alias as a pointer to another Tag You may use multiple aliases for a single tag however you may not use an alias for another alias Tag Alias is useful when a controller tag name Example ControlLogix Tag Name or Bristol Signal Name is not known when designing your tag database and screen objects and you need to refer to a controller tag on the fly Click on Alias Tag Map button in the Tag Manager to access the Alias Tag Map dialog where you can review the alias tag names and the tags they refer to Click on Create Alias tag to create an alias name for any existing tag Click on any displayed alias name to select it and then click on the Edit Alias button to edit alias name and referenced tag or click on Delete Alias button to delete it from the Alias Tag Map Click on Done when finished defining the Alias Tag Map InstantHMI Alias Tag Map 2 Alias Tag Name Alias for Tag Alias for BCD L1 BCD L1 Synonim for L2 L2 InstantHMl Edit Ali
283. he A Comm Link TCP IP en ate H mh 314 A EEEE MARA 2 Ene ee Device Name Walchem r E Dirace Name Cor ralLos Y enn E Driver Walchem Modbus TCP E Orr EtharheniP z f AR Timeout 1000 Timeout 2000 Pin E Sistion Offset O i r Modbus Tce a tation Offset O Instan Lal P Manager m eon Unik TEPP Deco Mame IP Address Pony Total 2 E Device Mame Walchem 142 1607 O E Diver Walcham Modbus TEF Walehern an Data Source Manager i Lhe Coane Cenu l Screens Heporls lags Dala Sources pas Rimimi p E SOFTWARE Ping nc hiie Paro one rr omaan 4 Mic Figure 11 4 Data Source Manager and Editor PC We shall now illustrate the creation of a remote server data source In Screen Designer click on Tag Data gt Data Sources to display the Data Source Manager dialog Click on Add New button to display the Data Source Editor dialog Here you can identify the remote InstantHMI server node as follows Select the Comm Link IHMI Node Click on Edit button to display the IP Manager dialog Click on the Add button and enter the server node Device Name WinME in our illustration and its IP address 192 168 0 7 in our illustration Click Done to return to the Data Source Editor with the just defined WinME server IHMI Node Name Since the remote server may have associated with it more than one Data Source enter the specific Remote Data Source Name Mitsubishi in our illustr
284. he Enter key data will not be written to the memory address You may setup the Runtime to write the current field data value to its memory address when you use the Tab key to move to the next data entry field o Keypads for Data Entry Decimal Hex and Alpha To enter numeric data use the numeric keys 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 and 9 If you make a mistake use Backspace key Use the lt Enter gt key to transfer the current field entry to the designated tag memory address Use the System Keys labeled YES ON NO OFF and TOGGLE BIT ON OFF to enter data in fields which expect the boolean values YES ON or NO OFF Use any alpha numeric key in fields where you are allowed to enter alpha numeric data In general InstantHMI will ignore any keys that are disallowed with a warning Beep if available on your system InstantHMI has a built in facility for checking if the data entered by the Operator is in a valid range This feature for Checking Limits must be requested at screen creation time in SCREEN DESIGNER see Section 3 3 3 Data Entry Using the TAB Key By Default InstantHMI only writes data on the screen field to its associated memory address when a user hits the ENTER key on a field This is to minimize data communication and ensure that the user only enters the desired data In some cases it may be desirable for data to be entered when the TAB key is pressed For example applications where a lot of data need to be entered through the
285. he Log to Database check box in the Tag Editor dialog box if you wish to log the data in a monitored data field When using a PC runtime engine the datalog will be saved in an ODBC compatible database InstantHMI MDB When using a PDA or Win CE runtime engine the datalog will be saved in a format compatible with the specific platform which can then be converted using the PC LaunchPad to the ODBC compatible database InstantHMI MDB as well as a CSV file in some cases The InstantHMI MDB database may be used for historical trending Section 13 or other analysis using tools such as Microsoft Access available to you You may select the logging interval Specifying a smaller datalog sample time will cause data to be logged more frequently a higher sample time leads to the tag value to be logged less frequently Note that your copy of InstantHMI LaunchPad must have the Historical trending option installed for the logged data to be useful for trending analysis InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 29 Datalog Manager Patalog Tag List Boiler 1 Pressure Boiler 1 Status Boiler 1 Temperature Figure 3 28 Datalog Manager PDA Note On a PDA you can access the Data Log Manager at runtime This enables you to decide to log data on the fly Use the Data Log button menu from the Main Menu to display the Data Log Manager screen Tap the Add Tag button to include any selected ta
286. he current segment re se 2 z make changes then click Apply Start Position 0 Start Size O0 a lick End Position 10 EndSize 100 the New button w Figure 4 63 Animated Line Segments You may then enter the Start size and End size of the object assembly as it travels from Start to End of the line The size will be varied proportionally between the Start and End size as the object travels the length of the line Once you specify all the parameters for the current animation click on Apply button You may now repeat the above process to introduce a line segment or click on Done button To review your specification click on the Next button to cycle through the animation line segments Click on the Delete button to delete the Segment under review Click on the Done button when you are finished Note The Function Key Menu screen included in the Demo project has two animated vertical line segments which animates the Click Me and Touch Me objects The limit switch on the Waste Water screen See Demo project uses line animation to achieve the desired effect 4 11 6 Color and Font Screen Designer Display Object Properties dialog provides buttons for Foreground and Background colors Click on these buttons to specify the colors for the data field see also Section 4 7 2 Click on the Font button to specify the font for the data field 4 11 7 Sample Time The Sample Time for each display object data field defaults to the Mo
287. he term ActiveX to refer to a set of COM based technologies ActiveX controls inherit much of their design and reputation for being among the most complex COM objects from the larger and more complex OLE documents which allow applications to embed their data transparently in other applications This implies several complex interactions including inter process communication Controls were introduced as an in process special case version of OLE documents which made them immediately usable by containers that knew how to embed OLE documents InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 30 An ActiveX control is just another term for an OLE Control Object or COM Object In general ActiveX Controls are COM objects with an User Interface The term OLE reverted back to the OLE technologies that apply to object linking and embedding An OCX is a file that can hold one or more ActiveX controls Since other files example DLL files may also hold one or more ActiveX controls these controls should not be referred to as OCXs ActiveX controls are designed to behave much like native Windows controls You may integrate your or third party ActiveX components into InstantHMI screen documents In general InstantHMI container should be able to ask the ActiveX control to Create its window Toggle the window s display Set the window size Get the window size and Destroy the window ActiveX controls can also p
288. he tool bar button or press the shortcut key Ctrl S instead of the menu choice to execute the File Save command When you save a profile for the first time a Save As Dialog box is displayed so you can name it If you want to change the name and or directory of an existing profile choose the Save As command Use File gt Save Profile As command to name and save the current profile To save a profile with its existing name and directory use the Save command Type or select the profile File Name you want to save as A PRF extension is assigned to any profile you save Select the Folder directory where you wish to store the profile Use File gt Print Window command to print the trend for the current profile on your printer Windows Print Manager takes care of the printing details by presenting a Print Dialog Box If your printer is not setup correctly use the Print Setup command Use File gt Print Options command to setup print parameters If you select Exact Size for Printing Style then you may locate the upper left corner of the plot on the printed page by entering a value for the Left and Right Note Print options are provided for you to experiment with to see if you can obtain more desirable results Use File gt Print Setup command to setup your printer for printing Windows Print Manager takes care of the printer setup details by presenting a Print Setup Dialog Box 13 2 4 View Menu The View Menu offers the following command
289. he value in the Print register to produce event driven reports as often as you want Note that the Operator can use the Print system key Section 9 4 10 to produce reports on demand Spool Control Tag The Spool Control Tag is analogous to the Print Control Tag and is used for spooling reports to disk based on some events detected in your PLC See Section 5 3 for a detailed discussion of Spooling You may equate the process of spooling to printing on virtual printers i e print spools created for you inside your computer A value of 1 in this register will cause spool report corresponding to the spool record format file 1 SPL to be spooled to disk a value of 2 will cause spooling of 2 SPL etc The register value will be changed back to 0 automatically by Runtime Engine once your request for spooling is processed You should control the value in the spool register to produce event driven spooling Note that the operator may use the Spool System Key Section 9 4 10 to produce InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PC Page 9 7 spooling on demand Of course any of the spooled reports can be included as part of a regular printed report See Section 5 2 4and also Section 5 3 Switch Screen Tag Use Switch Screen Tag if you wish to switch screens dynamically from your PLC without Operator intervention The value in this register will determine which screen will be displayed on the monitor Thi
290. he watch list as well as set the colors for the watch list Background Title and Data At runtime the same watch list can be used to watch tags from any of the watch groups In addition if the Tag allows data input that is it has r w property you may enter data through the watch list by double clicking on that tag name Using Watch List in an Object Assembly You may convert the Watch List object into a single object object assembly to create a compact and yet powerful monitoring and data entry screen In this case the object assembly tag groups which will supersede the watch list groups pull down list may be selected based on tag values etc as discussed earlier Section 4 3 6 An example screen using such a concept is shown in Figure 4 21 here a single watch list is capable of providing monitoring and data entry access to over 1600 tags associated with three different controller types EZ Zone ST Series SD and Series 96 connected on a Modbus network the tags for each controller station being organized neatly into Pages Operations Setup Factory etc with menus that is tag groups Alarm Analog Input Operations etc changing based on operator selected page The Pages and Menus are implemented as Touch Zones with associated macros enabling the object assembly tag group selection Controller Watch List i Alarm Controller Type EZ PM Station ID 1 T Operations E A Tag Name Tag Value High Lirnit Lowy Limit Ez Operation
291. hil InstantHhll Registration 1 iF Watie HIM Palm Serial 10GE 15607 KT3 2002 Software Horizons Inc IHMII Serial CEF4 CEf6 FSAF E242 All Rights Reserved Update dt 1 IHMII ID 0E10 6201 3E45 2767 About IH Program Version Build InstantHhvil 2 0 0 0 1003 Registration Comm gLib 231 1004 Enter Mew Registration Commd0Lib 3 4 1 1001 CommSOLib 3 4 1 1001 Figure 10 14 Help About InstantHMI Runtime Engine PDA Registration Info Registered On 1171702 For v2 0 Version Info Tap on the Version Info button on the Menu Screen to see the version and build details to identify the driver and program versions about your InstantHMI installation This screen provides important information to Software Horizons Technical Support staff to help identify and correct any problems you may experience Registration Tap on the Registration button to review your registration information or to enter any New Registration provided by Software Horizons Tap on Register button if you entered New Registration otherwise tap on Cancel button to return to your screen InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PDA Page 10 8 Return Tap on the Return button to return to the previous screen 10 2 10 Exit The Exit button on the Menu Screen allows authorized users to exit the InstantHMI application program You may then access other applications on the Palm through the silk scree
292. huttle and 1 conveyor and requires the following parameters to be setup in the USERDLL section of the IHMI 4 INI file in the Windows directory FIRST WASH_STATION LAST WASH _STATION FIRST _DRY_STATION LAST DRY_STATION WASH _LOCATION2 2 WASH LOCATION9 9 DRY LOCATION1 21 DRY LOCATION2 22 DRY LOCATION9 29 InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 JestantAMI User DEE _________________fago 11 For each washer there is an ACS wash controller and a PLC Also for each dryer there is an ACS dry controller and a PLC There is also one PLC to control the shuttle and one PLC to control the conveyor The ACS_DATASOURCE determines the communication port the ACS wash and dry controllers are connected to and the PLC _ DATASOURCE determines the port the PLCs are connected to The FIRST WASH_STATION and LAST WASH_ STATION notifies the User DLL of how many washers there are and the station numbers that correspond to them The station numbers of the washers must be in consecutive order If there is only one washer set the FIRST WASH_STATION and LAST WASH_STATION to the same station number The FIRST DRY STATION and LAST DRY STATION parameters are similar to the FIRST WASH_STATION and LAST WASH_STATION parameters described above The SHUTTLE STATION parameter specifies the station number of the shuttles PLC and the CONVEYOR_STATION parameter specifies the station number of the conveyor s
293. i Alarrm Logic Alarm Message CP Enter Possword Alarm Silencing Analog Output Units Auto Mangal Control Method Possword Decimal Places en ee Heat Control Method High Alarm Figure 3 10 Tag Database Manager PDA The Tabbed Scroll Bar provides rapid scrolling even when you have a very long list of tags Use the arrows above and below the Tabs A B C Z Note that any specific alphabet tab is included only if there are any tag names starting with that alphabet When you tap on a Tab say the letter S you will see the alphabetized list of all tags starting with the letter S Now you may use the Down Up Arrow inside the tag list view to scroll further To select any existing tag from the scrollable list of tags just tap on it the selected tag will be highlighted Tap on the Del button to delete the selected tag from the tag database To edit the selected tag tap on the Edit button To define a new tag and add it to the tag database tap on the New button The Tag Editor screen Section 3 3 7 appears and you can enter your tag specifications for the new or edited data item Tap on the Define Groups button to define the tag groups Section 3 3 6 Tap on the Done button to exit the Tag Manager screen 3 3 6 Tag Group Functions PDAs The tags in a tag database are assigned to various tag groups You may access the Tag Group Definitions by tapping on the Define Groups button on the Tag Manager screen You will th
294. ice Step 1 Run Microsoft Access Step 2 From the File menu choose New Database and enter the name IHMIDatalog MDB and click lt OK gt Step 3 Create a New table Using Design view enter the following table elements and save as Header Table gt Open will show the empty database InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Historic Trend Utility Page 13 5 Field Name Data Type ID AutoNumber Step 4 Repeat Step 3 to create a second table using the following table elements and save as Tag Info Field Name Data Type IDO AutoNumber _ Text Step 5 Repeat Step 3 to create a third table using the following table elements and save as Datalogs Field Name Data Type ID AutoNumber ____ Text Number Step 6 Exit Microsoft Access program 13 2 IHMITrend Program Elements Click on LaunchPad gt Design gt Reports gt Historic Trend Profiles and then click on Historic Trend Utility button to run the IHMITrend You will see the IHMITrend window InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Historic Trend Utility Page 13 6 SP HMI PROJECT MIES Report Elements Historic Trend Profiles 0 Printer Report Templates lt Not Defined gt Spool Report Templates Historic Trend Profiles Alarm Tags Historic Trend Utility o Licensed to a E SOFTWARE My Name d Eie My Company Figure 13 7 Ru
295. iew the same parameter from multiple controllers where the only difference may be the IP address of the server Note An IP address is like a Postal Address for the Internet It lets any computer know how to reach any other computer To find your computer s IP Address in Windows click Start gt Run gt and type cmd and in the command window type ipconfig You may see more than one network adapter lf dialing into the Internet get the IP address from the PPP adapter If you are unsure what your IP address is please consult your company s Network Administrator Software Horizons does not provide assistance to configure or troubleshoot your network or Internet connection we provide Technical Support only for matters relating to the InstantHMI Software Package and its TCP IP functionality InstantHMl TCP IP Client Server Interaction InstantHhll InstantHMl Client Node Server Node Start Start Runtime Engine Runtime Engine Check Remote Listen for Client Server Node Availability Connection Request Request Remote Data Sources Send List of Send Object Tag Information to Server Add Client Tags to Monitor List Update Send Tag Yalue Client Objects by Exception Process Chatand gt rite transfer Task File Transfer Tasks File Transfer Tasks Same node may act as a Server and or Client Figure 11 3 TCP IP Client Server Interaction in InstantHMI Runtime Engines InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizon
296. ight 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Script Editor Page 7 7 Example SetMemory 1 100 0 1 200 This example will set the current value of Register Address 100 Bit 0 Station 1 to a value of 200 3 Local Memory Functions GetLocallnt Address GetLocalLong Address GetLocalFloat Address GetLocalDouble Address SetLocallnt Address IntValue SetLocalLong Address LongValue SetLocalFloat Address FloatValue SetLocalDouble Address DoubleValue GetLocallnt Address This function returns the integer value in local memory Address specified Example a GetLocallnt 2500 In this Example the integer value at Local Address 2500 will be placed into variable a Note GetLocalLong GetLocalFloat and GetLocalDouble have the same syntax and will return a Long Float or Double value respectively GetLocalLong Address This function returns the long integer value stored in two consecutive locations starting with local memory Address specified GetLocalFloat Address This function returns the floating point value stored in two consecutive locations starting with local memory Address specified GetLocalDouble Address This function returns the double precision value stored in four consecutive locations starting with local memory Address specified SetLocallnt Address IntValue This function sets the value in Local memory Address equal to the Int Val
297. ignals the Shuttle to move to the free Dryer unloads the Shuttle into the Dryer and transfers the Product Code and corresponding Dry formula to the Dryer Step 10 User DLL monitors Dryer controller Step 11 When drying is complete User DLL signals the dryer to unload onto the conveyor 14 8 3 User DLL Overview This implementation of IHMlUser dll has two functions i allow for creating and editing of Product Wash and Dry formulas ii automate the washing and drying process and serve as a traffic cop to oversee the transfer of product among the Washers Dryers Shuttle and conveyor See Section 14 8 2for a Time Line of Activity in the Laundry application The IHMlIUser dll allows for the creation of 9 999 product formulas 255 wash formulas with 99 steps per formula and 255 dry formulas All of these formulas are saved to disk and are loaded when InstantHMI is started All formulas may also be printed The following should be in the USERDLL section of the IHMI 4 INI file located in the Windows directory OutputStr1 Cold Water OutputStr2 Hot Water OutputStr32 Steam The strings listed above are used in the printing of the wash formulas OutputStr1 will correspond with Output 1 of the wash controller OutputStr2 will correspond with Output 2 of the wash controller etc The automation portion of the IHMlUser dll is setup to run with four washers extensible to maximum of 9 3 dryers extensible to a maximum of 9 1 s
298. il Sketch You will be using the main menu and other menu commands to create your report template The status Bar will provide instantaneous feed back Use the context sensitive help by pressing the help key F1 after highlighting any menu item this will tell you about the menu item selected Since the primary purpose of Report Designer is to create or modify printer report we will illustrate the use of Report Designer in this context To modify an existing application report template use the File Open command to retrieve your report template file You may have any number of printer and spool reports each printer and spool report may be of any size up to 65535 lines The resources available on your PC may limit these capabilities To create a multiple page report use the Insert gt New Page option or the lt F5 gt key to indicate start of a new page in your report The Steps in modifying creating your application reports are summarized below Step 1 Enter Text Use the edit control keys Up Down Left Right Home End lt Page Up gt and lt Page Down gt to position the cursor anywhere in the report template and type text as desired Use the lt Enter gt key to begin a new line lt Home gt key to move to the beginning of the current line and lt End gt to move to the end of the line The Status Bar indicates where the cursor is Your report may have numerous lines but only about 40 lines will be shown on the screen at any given time
299. ile ID Spool Functions 5 SpooLFile w 5 S pool Individual cancel Figure 5 6 Report Designer Spool Register Dataspec Page Break F5 Use this command to insert a new page character in the report printer will start printing on a new page at this point in your report You may use the shortcut key F5 for this command 5 2 5 Tag Data This menu has two commands New Tag F2 Insert a new tag data spec Edit Tag Ctrl E Edit an existing tag dataspec New Tag F2 You may include data from any data source your PLC or other I O devices in your report Locate the text cursor where you wish to include data in your report Click on Tag Data gt New Tag command or use the short cut key F2 to include data from any raw data source in your report A pop up dialog box Figure 5 7 appears Select a tag name which has the data source associated with it from the tag database or create a new tag using the Tag Manager The discussion of Data Format in Section 4 11 2 applies here for Integer Binary Hex Long Boolean Message Alpha Fixed Float Double BCD Date Time Unsigned Int Unsigned Fixed and Long Fixed When you use binary and Hex formats in your reports Binary data will be printed as 16 digits value O or 1 and Hex data will be printed as 4 digits value 0 9 A F DATASPEC Tag ID Tag Names New Process Value Tag Manager Field width Format Message Groups lt No Msg Group Selected gt y
300. images InstantHMI Screen Designer provides a powerful Screen Capture tool to acquire bitmaps from other sources available to you You may also use the Clip Board image or previously saved bitmaps which may include scanned photographic images as the source of your images in the Screen Capture utility to create the bitmaps for use in your InstantHMI projects To access the Screen Capture utility tap on the Tools gt Screen Capture in InstantHMI Screen Designer You will see the following dialog InstantHMl Screen Capture Utility E pa ES lt lt a Q Figure 3 18 Screen Capture Utility The InstantHMI Screen Capture utility includes several tools whose icons are displayed on the left These tools are described below 1 Open Open a bitmap file by browsing bitmap files bmp in your project folder or elsewhere 2 Select Cut Select a rectangular region of the displayed bitmap and cut the desired region to extract 3 Save Save edited bitmap 4 Paste Paste bitmap from Windows clipboard 5 Print Print edited bitmap 6 Rotate Specify the angle in degrees to rotate the displayed or cropped bitmap and tap on the Rotate button 7 Done Click on Done button bottom right to exit the Screen Capture utility InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 21 3 5 2 Bitmap Groups PC Click on Tag Data gt Bitmap Groups to design edit
301. ime Engine Instructions Move activation from this PC to target PC Step 1 Install InstantHidl on target PC Step Record Runtime Engine Serial from the target PE Step 3 Enter Serial from Step 2 in field below Caution Verify Seral E incorrect Serial E will result in lost actration Step 4 Click Move Activation to generate target PC activation file Step 5 Use ClnstanthHMl4lHMlARuntine ac to activate target PC Runtime Engine Serial 20 142508 Cancel Figure A 10 Moving PC1 Runtime Activation Step 3d On PC1 Enter the Serial Runtime noted in Step 2 in the designated field in this dialog Step 4a On PC1 Click the Move Activation button You will see a dialog box similar to the one below Make sure that the target serial matches that generated on PC1 in Step 2 As noted in Step 2 copying down the serial incorrectly or typing it incorrectly in Step 3d is bound to be disastrous InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 20088 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Installation Registration and Activation Page A 14 InstantHM Activation Utility T Create Runtime Engine activation For target PC Serial 20114250077 This will remove activation From this PC Figure A 11 Moving PC1 Runtime Activation Confirm Step 4b On PC1 When you are assured of the accuracy of the serial click on Yes button PC1 will generate the activation code for PC2 and also save it in a file IHMIRuntime ac I
302. in the script text window Likewise to export a script to a text file you may use Edit gt Copy the script displayed in the Script Editor text window and paste it into Windows Notepad with ease Use the Edit gt Cut Edit gt Copy and Edit gt Paste command to modify selected script lines in the obvious manner Although buttons are provided for Keywords Logical Operators and Math Operators you may find it more convenient to type them using the corresponding keys on your keyboard Use the pull down list of Functions to select a function Click on Insert button to insert Functions and or Tag Names and or Data Source in your script Click on Keywords and or Operators as required to create your script source lines Click on Validate button to check for syntax and other script errors and save your script Click on the Done button when you are finished creating your script this will validate your script save the script if you choose and return you back to the Screen Designer If any syntax errors are detected edit the script to fix the errors InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Script Editor Page 7 3 7 2 1 Variables and Keywords Starting with version 4 1 2 B2005 you are allowed to use any long variable names for local and global variables Each variable name must start with a letter alphabetic character A Z or a z and may contain any number of letters numbers period and underscore _
303. ine At runtime the operator can select the scroll speed freeze slow medium or fast and scroll direction up or down Not implemented in this version You may use the object assembly concept to create an assembly to tie the text scroll box with a check list and action sequence Instructions The Demo project includes sample screens Fach Screen uses objects to illustrate one or more aspects of Instant HNI screens Screen 1 Function Key Menu Screen Text Scroller Properties This screen has Macro Buttons to switch to other screens Text File IMI 4 Demo MenuScreen TextScrall ty Browse screen 2 Temperature Zone 1 Colors OK This screen illustrates Set Point and Actual Temperature display for a trivial system which heats up Text Background Cancel of cools instantaneously Canth or PA i Figure 4 25 Text Scroll Object Instructions s The Demo project includes sample screens Each Screen uses objects to illustrate one or more aspects of InstantHMI screens m Screen 1 Function Key Menu Screen s This screen has Macro Buttons to switch to other screens m screen 2 Temperature Zone 1 s This screen illustrates Set Point and Actual Temperature display for a trivial system which heats up InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 26 4 6 7 Alarm Log Viewer Obje
304. ing a batch process Batch operation Recipe A in using Recipe A in register R2101 R2164 progress Tap on Download button to read recipe tag A AAI data values from the controller Tap on Save button to save Recipe A Recipe A o Preview Recipe Recipe Manager Screen Confirm that Batch operation with Recipe A is Batch operation with Recipe A is complete and controller is ready for new recipe finished Manager Recipe A Review Recipe B on screen confirm it is good Old Recipe A Upload Recipe Recipe Manager Screen Tap on upload button E E InstantHMI transfers new recipe to controller New Batch operation with new Recipe B Recipe B is ready to start Example 2 Complex Recipe Scheme with Safeguards Our application example See Figure below involves a batch process which uses 64 parameters stored in a group call it Group A of registers R 2101 R2164 To allow for smooth transition from one recipe that is currently running in the machine to a new recipe we use a backup group call it Group B of registers R2301 R2364 In addition each bank will have a hand shake register R2165 for A and R2365 for B to signal intentions between InstantHMI running in the handheld and your control program running in the controller Controller Falm PROCESS Handheld MACHINE Instant HMI r B A CONTROL PROGRAM Figure 3 26 Enhanced Batch Recipe with 64 Tags In this example application we define a single recipe contai
305. inner Click on OK button to change the spinner parameters or Cancel button to retain the old parameters and return to the Display Object Properties dialog box You may also create a Spinner by using the Widgets palette Click on the Spinner Widget note that the cursor changes shape to a spinner cursor move to the desired location on screen and click You get the default spinner on screen and the cursor changes to a Select Tool cursor Double click on the spinner and change any spinner parameters The input widgets Button Fader Knob and Spinner may also be used as Input Monitor Widgets In this case the Buttons Faders and Knobs on the screen will show the correct value of the memory location attached to them Of course all input widgets will display the information correctly as of their last use on that screen The graphic input widgets Combo Box Check Box and Radio Buiton are included in the Clipboard Tools discussed in Section 4 11 4 4 11 4 Clipboard Tools Static Text CLIPBOARD Check List Text Box Y Step 1 Completed v Step 2 Completed Radio Button Operator All Pull Down List On Off Run Auto Stop Check Box Item This machine is fine Macro Button Figure 4 53 Clipboard Tools Usually HMI software screens include input and or monitor fields that are tied to data sources which in turn derive their data values from memory locations in controllers However when the purpose is manual data en
306. ion 100 Treble Cove Road ad N Billerica MA 01862 USA a INC Tel 978 670 8700 simplify
307. ion from the pop up menu You will see the dialog box for the data object selected Make the editing changes to the data display object specs and click on OK button InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 58 To delete a display object you created earlier select it and use the Del key You may also right click on a display object and select the Delete option from the pop up menu Screen Designer will delete the selected data object from the screen After deletion click on Redraw if necessary 4 13 Document Data Display Object When you are finished with screen creation and saved it in a file Screen Designer automatically creates a doc file listing every data object included on your screen Review the Demo project screen documentation files doc InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 IHMIRPT Report Designer Page 5 1 5 Report Designer InstantHMI for Windows includes several tools Report Designer discussed in this Section Macro Editor Section 6 Script Editor Section 7 and Data Source Manager Section 2 3 5 All these tools are integrated into the Screen Designer discussed in Section 4 The Report Designer allows you to generate customized free form report templates to be used for printer reports It also allows you to generate spool record templates which you can use with the help of the spooling capability Section 5 3 provided t
308. ions may overide pour selections F Run application on the computer where the data is located F Run application on this computer I Run application on the following computer f ERVER_PC Browse m e Figure 12 31 DCOM for UniOPC Server Client Step E Step F In the Security tab Select Use Default for Launch and Activation Permissions and Customize for the Configuration Permissions Click the Edit button under Configuration Permissions to edit permissions UmOPC Server Properties REI General Location Security Endpoints Identity Launch and Activation Permissions Customize Access Permissions t Use Default Customize Configuration Permissions Use Default i Customize Edit Cancel Apply Figure 12 32 DCOM for UniOPC Server Client Step F Step G For each user that may launch OPCEnum set permissions to Full Control Allow and Read Allow Click OK to save changes InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI OPC Step H Page 12 18 Change Configuration Permission fr Exerpore EE INTERACTIVE Full Control Read Special Permissions Figure 12 33 DCOM for UniOPC Server Client Step G In the Identity tab you can select either of the options It is recommended to use either The launching user or The System Account services only UniOPC Server Properties Us
309. is or for monitoring and controlling systems external to the runtime process ee ee e a ae aad Wa so Runtime Operator LaunchPad i Display Data Source ript on renos TERR Human Operator Figure 14 1 InstantHMI Architecture showing User DLL Functionality 14 2 Writing User DLL The responsibility of writing a properly functioning User DLL is entirely yours Writing DLL s is somewhat more complicated than conventional C C programming If you are an inexperienced DLL programmer you should consult references such as compiler documentation or the MS Windows SDK Guide To Programming or books such as Charles Petzold s Programming Windows If you are unfamiliar or new to writing DLLs we strongly recommend that you seek competent help Software Horizons provides engineering services at a reasonable cost you may choose this option and let us write your User DLL for you We provide a skeleton User DLL that may be modified by you To modify the DLL use a MS Windows compatible language compiler preferably a C C compiler such as the Microsoft Visual C C version 6 0 or later Compilers have standard make project templates that you may use to build a MS Windows compatible DLL The make project file performs the required programming steps of compilation and object module linking of the DLL It is recommended that you use a standard compiler make file to ensure that appropriate object modules and windows libraries are li
310. it IEEE floating point format for the data Note that this representation requires 32 bits and hence two consecutive registers starting with the register address you specify will be used to store the floating point data Select Double if you desire the 64 bit IEEE floating point format for the data Note that this representation requires 64 bits and hence four consecutive registers starting with the register address you specify will be used to store the double precision value Select BCD format if data in the field is to be a Binary Coded Decimal Note that in this case the highest value you can store in a 16 bit register is 9999 Note BCD text object can be displayed in a fixed format if Fixed is selected as the Default Display Format in the tag Select Binary format if data in the field is to be represented as a string of sixteen zeros and ones Select Hex format if data in the field is to be represented as a string of four hex digits 0 9 A F Select Message format if you wish to display an appropriate message from a Message Group Note that Message format is valid only if you have chosen data type Monitor You may create any number of message groups each containing any number of messages The Tag associated with the message display object may refer to a 16 bit register local memory or a single bit At run time the integer value in the memory location associated with the tag will be used as the message number to display the corresponding te
311. it these files Use of any other program will corrupt the Tag information and render these files useless 5 2 6 Help The Help menu includes the following commands InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Index Shows an index to IHMIRPT topics on which you can get help Using Help Provides general instructions on using the Help system About IHMIRPT Displays the version number of IHMIRPT program Index Use this command to display the Report Designer Help Index Table of Contents From the index of Help topics you can select any desired topic to browse through the available information online Figure 5 13 Report Designer Help You can click the Contents button in the Help window whenever you want to return to the Index Table of Contents of Help topics You may also click on the Search button and look for help on topics of interest to you Using Help Use this command for instructions about using Help Report Designer includes an elaborate online help system like the one available in some Windows application programs If you are not familiar with this help system you may want to learn about using help We suggest that you try and use the Help Index command as described above and return to Using Help command only if you find it necessary This is because the Using Help command is not specific to Report Designer but applies to the underlying Windows Help system in general Since the Report
312. ivation Page A 12 To activate Runtime click on Activate Runtime Similar to activating LaunchPad enter the code for Runtime Click on the Done button to complete the Activation process If you have entered the correct information a dialog box will appear thanking you for activating InstantHMI InstantHMl Activation Status Runtime Engine LaunchPad Designer Status Activated Status Activated Serial 181772811 Serial 181750139 Update 1 Update 1 Product Code IHMIPCDS i i Move Remove Activate Move Remove i Activation Activation LaunchPad Activation Activation Done Figure A 7 Activation Status A 3 3 PDA CE Runtime Registration Activation If InstantHMI installation on your PDA Palm or Pocket PC or Windows CE is not registered with Software Horizons when you run InstantHMI program you will see the following screen InstantHMI T Be a x 12 40 PPC Serial 01234567804BCDEF THM Serial OFSE 142B 7C8D 546F Activation Info Activated on 01 02 2007 for v4 1 Enter New Activation Code Figure A 8 Registration Activation PDA CE Note down the 16 digit Serial displayed on your screen and fax or email to Software Horizons Registration is required to activate your InstantHMI program in the PDA CE hardware and enable communication with your PLC or other controller Tap Cancel button to continue to use InstantHMI in its un registered state until you receive the Activation Code from So
313. ks Pages i Instant HOD Si Reinforces Sinapler 6 Herer HMI Philosophy 3 9 Runtime Engine PC SS ae HDS 10 Runtime Engine PDA ET a oo FHP 11 TCPAP Interface AM EHIS 12 OPC Interface 3 13 Historic Trend Utility EHS 14 User DLL F A Installation Registration and Activation 3 B InstantHMl Designed for OEM D C Communication Drivers O Attachment E Comments rp bi Oo OT Figure 2 5 LaunchPad gt Help gt User Manual 2 2 Login After the installation of InstantHMI usually an Administrator would setup Project Users using the User Profile Manager discussed in Section 2 4 2 with user names passwords and access InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 4 privileges Login password access control will be enabled when the User Manager is enabled You may play the role of the system administrator using default Login User Name Administrator Password a and setup users passwords and assigned functions The InstantHMI LaunchPad maintains a registry of users their passwords and assigned functions The System Integrator is responsible for setup of this registry and may designate a System Administrator at the customer site to setup additional users passwords and assigned functions Logout administrator Change Password Project Status Lock InstantHMl Project Reports Project Status Help Documents Quick Skart User Manual
314. l 5 8 Tags to Log Value Tag Manager 4 Event Definition Trigger Type Logging Method Tags to Log E EWM Aeration Tank El EVWM Clarifier Datalog Events ee z ia ehia Tag EU x Value Sample Time panida gorras po sea HORIZONS a 4 Wine Figure 3 29 Datalog Event Manager PC InstantHMI provides a Setup Event Triggers dialog which allows you to define one or more Event Triggers Tap on New Event button in this dialog and enter a new Event Trigger name such as Etch Setpoint shown in the figure For each event trigger you may select a Trigger Tag and an associated Trigger Value The On True condition is defined for the Trigger Tag when its data value exceeds the Trigger Value otherwise the Trigger Tag is in the Off False condition You have a choice of two Trigger Types Transition On when the Trigger Tag enters its On state and Transition Off when the Trigger Tag enters its Off state You also have two Data logging Methods Log Once on Trigger condition On or Off Log Continuously as long as trigger condition On state or Off state persists In addition you may select one or more tags Tags to Log List to be logged when the trigger event happens If defined the Runtime engine will use the Handshake tag to signal InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 30 the controller that data loggi
315. l and the current fill color will appear on the Status bar To change the fill color use the Format gt Color gt Fill menu option Section 4 7 2 and to change the boundary color use the Format gt Color gt Pen option Section 4 7 1 Now click inside an area you propose to fill If all goes well the intended area will be filled and a little fill identifier box would appear at the point where you started the creation of the fill object This box will be used by select tool to identify the Fill object Note Since fill can lead to an occasional runaway situation it is suggested that you save the current screen before creating fill objects It is always a good idea to save your screen periodically to serve as a backup starting point in case an unexpected catastrophe strikes Box Object Use this tool accessed from the Screen Designer menu Objects gt Static Objects gt Box to create static box objects unfilled rectangles that is to draw a box on screen Note that the Status Bar shows the pen color for the box To draw a box position the mouse on the top left corner of the proposed box and drag the mouse hold the left button down while moving the mouse You will see a rubber band rectangle indicating what your box would look like When you are satisfied with the size of box on screen release the mouse button You may also choose to fill the interior of the box with the current fill color The current pen width and pen color are used
316. l installation Section A 4 4 A 4 4 Backing up InstantHMI CE PDA Activation Pocket PC Installation Once you have registered and activated the software we recommend that you backup the InstantHMI installation on your Pocket PC In case you ever have to hard reset your Pocket PC you will simply need to reinstall InstantHMI and then restore the backup files to your Pocket PC This will avoid the need to re register and re activate the InstantHMI installation with Software Horizons Re activation of InstantHMI will incur a service charge from Software Horizons that can be avoided if you follow the backup procedure in this section Before starting the backup make sure that InstantHMI is not running on your PocketPC Connect your PocketPC to your PC and run ActiveSync on your PC Click the Explore Icon this will open a Mobile Device window In the Mobile Device Window double click My Pocket PC a Backing up from PDA No memory card Click and Drag the InstantHMI Folder from the Mobile Device window to your Desktop This will copy your InstantHMI installation to your PC 4b Backing up from PDA SD CF There will be a folder SD Card CF Card or Storage Card corresponding to your Memory Card inserted in the PDA Double click the folder where InstantHMI is installed Next click and drag the InstantHMI Folder from the Mobile Device window to your Desktop This will copy your InstantHMI installation to your PC 5 Keep the backed
317. l2008 Runtime Engine PDA Page 10 4 Tap on Tag Manager button to access the Tag Database and the Tag Editor to create delete and group tags See Section 3 Tap on Messages button to create edit delete and group text messages See Section 3 4 Use InstantHMI IP Manager to create edit and delete entries in a table of device names and IP Addresses See Section 3 4 Tap on Return button to get back to the InstantHMI Menu Screen Tap on Ei for help tips on this Tag Variables popup screen 10 2 5 Utilities When you tap on the Utilities button on the Menu Screen you will see the following dialog box Tap on il for help tips on this Utilities popup screen Utilities Figure 10 6 Utilities Menu PDA Recipes Tap on the Recipes button to access the Recipe function see Section 3 6 for details Recipes in InstantHMI are useful for repeatable and quick batch process setup The Recipe function is similar to the Configuration function You may think of a Recipe as an underlying script implemented in the controller whose parameters like the configuration parameters are stored in the handheld InstantHMI allows you to define recipes download recipes in the handheld from your controller registers preview recipes on screen and upload any selected recipe from the handheld to the controller registers You could also setup additional safeguards for recipe transfers from the handheld to the controller to ensure a smo
318. lable in Unicode as well as non Unicode versions 4 2 5 0 Scripting tool is enhanced You may use any long variable names for local and global variables 4 2 5 0 OLE COM ActiveX component support enhanced with improved user interface and functionality 4 2 5 0 Simpler is Better architecture and related enhancements 5 0 Tag Alias feature and related enhancements 5 0 1 5 0 5 Use dynamic runtime association of Object Assemblies with multiple Tag Groups for streamlined monitoring of similar sub systems 5 0 5 5 0 9 e Use Watch Lists in Runtime to monitor modify controller tags from different groups 5 0 5 5 0 8 A single watch list in an object assembly can provide a comprehensive yet simple interface to let you monitor thousands of tag variables for dozens of controller stations in a very concise and familiar manner like browsing through the Controller user manuals New Project Wizard guides you step by step to quickly create and run a new project in minutes 5 0 9 Enhanced Buttons Widget Windows or Bitmap with settable colors and font as well as testable preview 5 0 10 Enhanced Widgets LEDs Gauge Knob etc with many settable properties etc as well as testable preview 5 0 14 All Known and customer reported bugs have been fixed and many feature requests implemented 5 0 14 We appreciate the feedback from our valued customers With these powerful enhancements and Simpler is Better archit
319. larm condition Temperature gt THigh or in low alarm condition Temperature lt TLow You define Eventi with Trigger Tag as Temperature and Trigger value Thigh Trigger Type Transition On Datalog Type Log Continuous and include Temperature tag in the datalog tag list You also define Event2 with Trigger Tag as Temperature and Trigger value TLow Trigger Type Transition Off Datalog Type Log Continuous and include Temperature tag in the datalog tag list Finally you choose both Event1 and Event2 as Datalog Trigger Events This will ensure that the tag Temperature will be logged whenever it is in alarm condition To View the logged data tap on the View Data button on the Data Log Manager screen You will see a scrollable table listing the data logged for the selected tag Tap the pull down list of Tags to select a tag from the list of tags for which data has been logged Use the scroll bar on the right to InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PDA Page 10 18 browse through the table tapping the arrow scrolls the table one line at a time tapping the scroll bar scrolls the table one page ata time Tap the Delete Tag Data button to delete the logged data for the selected tag Tap the Done button when you are done viewing the data log Instant HAN DataLog Viewer Tags w Boiler 2 Pressure Time value 1 40 30 prin 1 40 31 pro 1 40 31 pro 1 40 31 pro 1 40 31 pro 1 40 3
320. le For convenience this dialog has a Pause button which can be activated when there is time left to go ahead with the Runtime Execution You may click on RUN to proceed immediately The Run button is enabled if the Target Platform for the current project is the Windows PC platform on which the LaunchPad is installed Otherwise the RUN button will be relabeled Emulate Target The Runtime may also be setup to be run in the future on its own without LaunchPad involvement Click on Overview button for a Project Overview click on Options button to review the Runtime Options Click on RUN button to let the Runtime Engine run your project Note You may right click on the LaunchPad border and select Project Overview or Runtime Options from the pop up menu to display the corresponding dialog Project Overview Runtime Options Project Elements status 3 Project Elernents Status Target Platform Windows PC Auto Start Runtime Disabled Tag Database 63 Tags Enable Run Delay Data Sources 2 Run Delay Time Project Screens T ODBC DSN Recipes Mot Installed Database Type Microsoft Access Configurations Mot Installed Runtime Script Sample Time 1000 Message Groups 5 script Execution Time a 50 Bitmap Groups a special Tags Sample Time 1000 Datalog Events Mot Installed w Tab on Data Entry Disabled Figure 9 11 Project Overview and Runtime Options The Project Overview dialog shows which project elements are included in your project the numb
321. le identified by the data retrieval date Note It is recommended you save the file to the default name and directory that is prompted At each transfer time you will have the option to delete the previously logged data from the target platform Select Datalog Data and click on View Log button to access the Datalog Viewer dialog shown Instant HMI 52 pesigy Petalog Files 3 Logs Sep 07 2006 idb Date Time Logged Data Tag Names 09 07 06 13 23 46 123 09 07 06 13 23 45 123 L140 Float Double Ml 090706 13 23 44 123 Tag Details 09 07 06 13 23 43 123 Memory Type Local A 09 07 06 13 23 42 123 Data Type Float Doub 09 07 06 13 23 41 123 Data Format Float 09 07 06 13 23 40 123 Address 140 09 07 06 13 23 39 123 Bit 0 09 07 06 13 23 38 123 Station 0 OSONA 137337 195 PROJECT MyProject Licensed to E SOFTWARE My N H HORIZONS a d INC My Company Figure 2 41 Runtime Reports Datalog Data Datalog Viewer From the pull down lists select the Datalog File for the specific date of interest Example Logs Sep 07 2006 idb and the logged Tag Name to view The logged data for that tag will be displayed How to import datalogs into Microsoft Excel a Run Microsoft Excel b File gt Open gt C IHMI 5 Project Name Datalogs Logs Month DD YYYY txt c In the text import wizard after making sure you allow All Files to be selected select Delimited a
322. lenames for the bitmaps to be used to represent the Up untouched and the Down touched state of the touch zone Use the Latch check box to keep the touch zone latched in the touched state as a reminder to the operator Note that instead of attaching any macros to the Touch zone you may choose a switch to screen action and select a screen to switch to This latter functionality is useful on runtime engines that do not support macros Select Bitmap Bitmaps UFARWON BMP UPAR WLP BMP 3 LUPSPLETN BMP UPSTAT BMP VALE BMP VALVE 2 BMP P_LF_OF EMP Touch Zone Setup Touched Pressed Parameters Untouched Released Parameters Bitmap wafr_gon bmp El Bitmap wafr_rof bmp V Simulate Macro Key MV Latch Simulate Macro Key F14 _ NOT USED Switch to Screen TE None vw OK aa TACO DAI DAD Figure 4 24 Touch Zone Note Use Windows Paint program or some other application to create your own bitmaps You may also use what we have provided in the Demo project as the starting point for your bitmaps InstantHMI includes a powerful Screen Capture utility Section 3 5 1 which you may use for creating a bitmap collection for your project screens InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 25 At runtime you can test the touch zone pressed action by clicking and holding the mouse on the touch zone to activate the touch zone released action y
323. ll be deployed etc Note You may right click on the LaunchPad and select Project Overview from the pop up menu to display the Project Overview dialog 2 5 2 Project Runtime Options CRAG HMI PROJECT MyProject Runtime Options Project Elements Status Auto Start Runtime Disabled Enable Run Delay Enabled Run Delay Time 10 ODBC DSN InstantHMI Datalogs Runtime Script Sample Time 1000 Script Execution Time 50 Special Tags Sample Time 1000 Tab on Data Entry Disabled Data Entry on Tab Disabled v Figure 2 38 Project Runtime Options Click on the Options button to pop up the Project Runtime Options dialog which shows project runtime parameters for your project Double click on any of them to review and or change its value Note These parameters are saved in the file Project ini in your project folder and may be edited using Windows Notepad 2 5 3 Run Emulate Project When you click on the Run button the LaunchPad displays the Splash screen for the selected Project The Run Function button is enabled if the Target Platform for the current project is the Windows PC platform on which the LaunchPad is installed Otherwise the RUN button will be replaced with the Emulate Target button If you are ready to run the project click on the Run Project button If your project runtime target platform is PC and you have the Runtime Engine installed on the same PC as LaunchPad your project will start
324. ll be compared against some alarm value The result of this comparison will be transferred back to a bit in the PLC via InstantHMI In summary 1 InstantHMI accepts a single command from the User DLL and will return the result the next time the runtime calls the User DLL 2 By piggy backing on the runtime engine with its PLC driver the User DLL communicates with the PLC without any knowledge of the PLC communication protocol 3 The logic in User DLL becomes an extension of the PLC ladder logic without any need for modifying the PLC ladder logic This feature is helpful in trying out modification in PLC logic without changing the original ladder logic 4 InstantHMI runtime serves as the bridge between any devices connected and known only to the User DLL and any devices connected and known only to InstantHMI CommXX32 DLL InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI User DLL Page 14 5 KR KK ee ee ee A ee A ee ee ee I ee I Ke He He DISCLAIMER The software sample is provided on an AS IS basis without warranty Software Horizons Inc does not make any representation or warranty either express or implied with respect to the software programs their quality accuracy or fitness for a specific purpose Therefore Software Horizons Inc shall have no liability to you or any other person or entity with respect to any liability loss or damage caused or alleged to have been caused direct
325. lly C IHMI 5 MyProject Datalogs where MyProject is your project name in the LaunchPad Software and Datalogs is a folder created to organize your datalogs IHMITrend Datalog Database Files IHMIDatalog Default IHMITrend Database IHMIDatalog Default Empty IHMITrend Database Note The IHMIDatalog MDB in your project directory is the database that InstantHMI LaunchPad will use to transfer logged data from other runtime platforms such as Pocket PC to LaunchPad PC 13 1 2 Install ODBC DSN Data Source Name Setup Note The text file Project Ini in your Project directory usually C IHMI 5 MyProject where MyProject is the name of your project should have the following line in the Setup section Setup ODBC_DSN InstantHMI Datalogs or some other name Once IHMITrend is installed and configured correctly run the 32 Bit ODBC Administrator on your PC The discussion below applies to Windows 2000 and XP The details of the procedure on your Windows OS may differ slightly Step 1 Click Start gt Setting gt Control panel and double click on Administrative tools InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Historic Trend Utility Page 13 3 2 fed E aH Pater Sor a eer IBLE pileta Cole Tere Cala Dpiiers hase Pe Tan Laa thes pattinegs in Control Paral bo E yy A ay E pirsa nom E Bemi AA rimai aa Plugin Erster Soleil oh en Lo viim he een Ophir LL
326. log box to display All bitmaps bitmap value and associated bitmap corresponding to the selected bitmap group will be displayed in the table of bitmaps in the Bitmap Manager dialog box To select a bitmap click on it in the bitmap list box and see it hilighted You may then click on the Remove Bitmap button to delete the bitmap from the bitmap group You may click on the Copy Group button to copy a selected Bitmap Group and all its associated bitmaps to another group name which may be edited as needed to define a new bitmap group quickly You may click on the Delete Group button to delete a selected bitmap group together with all bitmaps in the group Note that each bitmap group has its own list of bitmaps and deleting names of bitmaps in a group does not affect copies of the same bitmap names in other bitmap groups 3 5 3 Bitmap Groups PDAs Note Some features in this paragraph may not be available in the current implementation InstantHMI allows you to define bitmaps corresponding to numeric values stored in controller registers or local memory InstantHMI maintains a database of all the various bitmap items of interest to you in a bitmap database A bitmap item consists of a numeric value or range of values and a corresponding bitmap to be displayed on screen 3 6 Recipes and Configurations Recipes in InstantHMI are useful for repeatable and quick batch process setup Configuration parameters from one controller may also be saved
327. lted All automation done by the running state will also be halted until local memory address 500 is reset The running state sequences all of the automation from unloading the Washers to unloading the Dryers The run state sequencing is done in the file named ACSRUN CPP The shuttle automation is sequenced by an ownership concept This concept only allows the washers or dryers to move if that washer or dryer is the owner of the shuttle Moving the shuttle to the park location does not require ownership The conveyor automation is also sequenced by an ownership concept Only the dryer that owns the conveyor may unload its contents on to the conveyor belt 14 8 4 User DLL Project File Descriptions USERACS DSW USERACS DSP Contain project settings to build the project with the Microsoft Visual C 6 0 Compiler IHMIUSER CPP IHMIUSER H Contains the single entry point into the User DLL This entry point is the exported function UserEntry This file also contains code to read initialization variables from the IHMI 4 INI file located in the Windows directory and to initialize the Product assignments and Wash and Dry formulas ACSREAD CPP ACSREAD H Contains the code to read the status of all Washers all Dryers Shuttle Conveyor Also contains code to read the status of the Product Assignment editor Wash formula editor and Dry formula editor for creating editing deleting and loading assignments and InstantHMI Copyright
328. ly can provide a comprehensive yet simple interface to let you monitor thousands of tag variables for dozens of controller stations in a very concise and familiar manner like browsing through the Controller user manuals Subsequent times you are running New Project Setup the project to run the way you want Design project elements Screens macros scripts etc as desired Use dynamic runtime association of Object Assemblies with multiple Tag Groups for streamlined monitoring of similar sub systems 9 2 2 Methodically Design Your HMI Now that you have a functional HMI proceed to methodically enhance your InstantHMI Project design to suit all your application requirements Step 0 Game Plan An InstantHMI Project implements the model of the Process or Machine Control Application for the benefit of operators Supervisors and management who are responsible for the proper and efficient operation of the machine and the plant Visualize your application in terms of the data sources available for the raw data to be presented via display data objects on the screens to assist the Operator in his task of monitoring and control of the Machine Process using the runtime platform chosen by you STEP 1 Screens Use InstantHMI LaunchPad tools Tag Manager Data Source Manager Data Table Watch List and Screen Designer to rapidly create and test the Tag Database and preliminary screens for your application see Sections 2 4 Refine the sc
329. ly to glue together the selected objects on screen and make them into a single object assembly You may convert a single object as well into an Object Assembly since Object Assemblies have additional properties beyond the included object s These properties enable dynamic runtime association of object assemblies based on multiple data sources multiple stations and multiple tag groups each of which may be selected at runtime by User or by Tag Value of associated tags Example How to Build Object Assembly Tank A Here we will show you how to build the Tank A object assembly using native objects included in the InstantHMI Designer Figure 4 9 shows the component objects used in building the Tank A object assembly which are listed below 1 Tank Structure 2 Tank Level Indicator 3 Tank supply pipe label etc Outlet Pipe Water Supply Comunity A 1 Tank Structure 2 Tank Level Indicator Figure 4 9 Tank A Object Assembly Components 1 Tank Structure To build the Tank Structure we assemble together the following objects a Tank body b Tank legs c Tank top In the Screen Designer click on Objects gt Static Objects gt Tank You will see the Tank dialog Figure 4 10 where you make the entries as shown Note that we selected a vertical orientation Flat End Tank and Tank Color as shown Click OK and position the Tank Body on the screen as desired ff Select f Select Flat End Tank cur
330. ly or indirectly by the programs contained here This includes but is not limited to interruption of service loss of data loss of consulting or anticipatory profits or consequential damages from the use of these programs DM Sek eee Copyright e 2000 2006 Sottware Horizon ine KO ee I ee ee ee A A ee A include lt windows h gt fine lude UserDLL h DEtinition of LEHMIUSER structure include IHMIUser h TUMmetion defini ions fine lide lt stdio h gt Tine lide lt stalmb M gt Fimelude lt string gt The beginning Of the user defi es and global variables define READ_PLC 1 define WRITE_PLC 2 define NO_COMMAND 0 define ALARM_CONDITION 100 Defined for register 810 statie LAT My Sidi Wise TREADS Ei y call count Os USERDEML Entry polnt int UserEntry IHMIUSER userinfo LNE rest Success sutiles ass Case READ PLC Ask the runtime module te read a register from che PLC Set a bit in the ple depending on the condition or the register Userin o command USERCMD READ M Sc ommeancds tom reac userinfo memorytype REG_MEM Reg memory type Merit solemnes SO Address 810 serinto stacion 0z i Station 0 USerin amp o porkid 0 ler commell installec mystatus WRITE_PLC switch to WRITE_PLC next time result SUCERSS break case WRITE_PLC te userinto crreor l SUCCESS hiere was a Communicacion error mystatus NO_COMMAND userinfo co
331. match a specific tag value from CFG 1 to that for CFG 2 or you may tap on a tag field to enter a new value You will not be allowed to modify tag values of the Current Configuration which is meant to reflect the configuration in the controller 3 6 5 Examples Example 1 Simple Recipe Scheme Our application example See Figure below involves a batch process which uses 64 parameters stored in a bank of registers R 2101 R2164 To allow for smooth transition from one recipe that is currently running in the machine to a new recipe we depend on the operator to confirm that the batch is completed and that the controller is ready to accept a new recipe Controller Palm PROCESS Handheld MACHINE Instant HMI CONTROL PROGRAM Figure 3 25 Simple Batch Recipe with 64 Tags Note In Example 2 below the use of dual banks of registers and handshaking provides a very safe batch operation If we can assume that the batch has finished and the operator can safely and directly upload a new recipe from the handheld to the controller the recipe upload and download InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 26 can be carried out using a single bank A of registers The handshake register R2165 can be eliminated as well This simpler scheme is shown in table below GROUP A ACTION R2101 R2164 Download and Save Recipe Recipe Manager Screen Initially controller is execut
332. me in the script prior to the line calling this function SetByte Address Byte Station Value This function can be used to set the Value stored in the low byte Byte 0 or high byte Byte 1 of the register at specified Address Station Use the function 3 SetDataSource Data Source Name in the script prior to the line calling this function GetMemory MemType Address Bit Station This function returns the value stored in MemType location specified by the four function parameters Address Bit Station see Section 3 3 3 Valid definitions of MemType are listed below Use the function 3 SetDataSource Data Source Name in the script prior to the line calling this function 1 Register 9 Input 2 Bit 10 Output 3 PTimer 11 PCounter 4 Ctimer 12 CCounter 6 Local 17 Byte Example a GetMemory 1 100 0 1 This example will get the current value of Register MemType 1 Address 100 Bit 0 Station 1 from your device and place the value into variable a SetMemory MemType Address Bit Station Value This function can be used to write the Value in the MemType location register specified by the by the four function parameters Address Bit Station see Section 3 3 3 See MemType listed under GetMemory Use the function 3 SetDataSource Data Source Name in the script prior to the line calling this function InstantHMI Copyr
333. me pair from the drop down lists Click on the button to the right of the pen color shown to change it You may also click the Style button to change the Line color along with other line parameters Repeat this for the other pens as required Step 3 View Logged Data Once you have completed specifying the DataSet profile click on Done to view your data Figure 13 12 below shows a sample trend with the profile defined in Step 2 InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 E HMM frend Untitled File View Window Help Es Ms Ms Leh amp Plot End Time Plot Start Time aa Historic Trend a 07 07 2007 08 21 04 O7 0Ff2007 08 22 04 100 A A A A A A A A A E A A A A A E C ee 30 EEN A A OA E PD a DA A 07 PE AA HE i c i A AT YAA RA A A a ath oe oe e ro hes oo wD 60 we al a 3 al co a gt de F a A e e e et a B LJ L 20 4450 50 00 a D 0 5 O 21 04 21 14 21 24 21 34 21 44 21 54 MM SS Time Test HTrend Temp Zone 1 lt Test HTrend Temp Zone 2 Test HTrend Temp Zone 3 Test HTrend Temp Zone 4 Data at Cursor Line 07 07 2007 08 21 04 View Selected Time Period Plot Properties Project Tag Name Value Trace Olojo F EEE Saari a Profile Test HTrend Temp Zone 1 116 0000 _Hide foo fi 00 Reset Zoom Test HTrend Temp Zone 2 160 0000 _Hide Go To Period 1 IT tH Trend Hide Data Stark Data End e H Eee ee Elo sola Linear Plat
334. me as possible for less important fields InstantHMI provides a powerful feature called Ol Widgets which you can access when you choose the Graphic display category The Ol Widgets feature in Screen Designer is a metaphor that makes HMI screens analogous to bolting and wiring together available gadgets into a control panel To implement this metaphor the Ol Widgets are provided in a Palette form as shown earlier in Section 4 11 Ol Widgets are animated representations of common system monitor control units like Gauges Meters Knobs Buttons and LED s Some sample widgets are shown in Figure 4 47 These are fully scalable and movable You have full control over the aesthetic features like colors labels and text Ol Widgets are included for both data entry Knobs Buttons Spinners etc and monitoring Gauges Meters LED s etc Ol Widgets with 3 D features and eye catching colors enhance the look and feel of your application They make common actions like increasing the value of a Register updating Boolean fields and monitoring PLC data registers easy The operator does not even need a keyboard to enter data Ol Widgets Slider Thumb Wheel Meter 100 30 Figure 4 47 Sample Ol Widgets InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 43 The monitor widgets allow you to add several dynamic capabilities to your screens based on changing data values in associated registe
335. mixed will appear in the custom color box and thereafter it can be used just like the basic colors You may define up to 16 custom colors for a screen and use them for the screen objects in addition to the 48 basic colors When you are done click the OK button InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 36 Sat ColorlSad Lum ue Cancel Add to Custom Colors Figure 4 39 Color Dialog Pen Drawing Color The Color gt Pen menu is used to draw line objects the outlines of graphic objects such as Boxes and Circles etc This command pops up the Color Dialog box to select a new pen color If an object is currently selected this command will change only the pen color for the selected object If no object is selected then this command will set the pen color for all subsequently created objects that use the pen Fill Color The Color gt Fill menu is used to color fill solid objects such as filled boxes and filled circles etc This command pops up the Color Dialog box to select a new fill color If an object is currently selected this command will change only the fill color for the selected object If no object is selected then this command will set the fill color for all subsequently created filled objects Text Foreground Color This Color gt Text Foreground menu item is used to change the foreground color of static text objects This command pops up the Color Dialog box t
336. mmand USERNOCMD No command for Runtime result SUCCESSI TEATE else j IE the register 6810 is in alarm condicion set Output 200 Else reset output 200 userinfo command USERWRITE Command to write userinfo memorytype OPUT_MEM Output memory type Mserimtro edaress 200 Address 200 userinio stacion 07 J Station 0 serinio portid 0 lest comma ly installed it atoil chaz tserimto butter gt ALARM CONDITION in alarm condition strcpy char Usetinko biknen Ul YES Set the Output else strcpy char iserimnto bufrfer 0 gt NO Reset the Output mystatus NO_COMMAND Switch to NO_COMMAND RSS SUE CSS break default NO_COMMAND if call_count gt 10 Issue commands to InstantHMI once every 10 times call count 0z mystatus READ PLC Switch to read ple else userinfo command USERNOCMD restii SUCCESS break reruia results Figure 14 5 Example User DLL to Read Write PLC Data InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI User DLL Page 14 6 14 6 Example 2 Time Triggered Spooling 14 6 1 Introduction Described here is a User DLL allowing you to specify a time to trigger different spooling actions The spooling actions can be done upon single or multiple spool files Note The source code is not included here Contact Software Horizons for implementation of this and other User DLL to sui
337. mmand is not specific to Screen Designer but applies to the underlying Windows Help system in general InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 40 You may run Screen Designer and Help in two windows use the Screen Designer window to do your work after displaying the help on the topic you need in the Help window in the Help window click on Options keep help on Top There are many different ways you can use the Help System experiment and find the way that suits the way you work About Screen Designer Use this command to display the copyright notice and version number of your copy of Screen Designer 4 11 Create Data Display Object You may use one of two methods to create data display objects on screen Method 1 If widget palette is not displayed on screen click on the Widget tool on the Tool Bar or click on the View gt Widget Palette menu command Select the widget tool on the screen by clicking on the widget palette Note that you will not be able to change one widget type to another by changing its properties Now click on the screen to display the selected widget object with its default properties Double click on the widget object to see its Display Object Properties dialog box discussed in detail below and make any required changes Figure 4 44 Widget Palette Method 2 Click on the Objects gt Data Object menu choice Now click on screen where you want to pla
338. mmand to print the report template file on your printer Windows Print Manager takes care of the printing details by presenting a Print Dialog Box If your printer is not setup correctly use the Print Setup command File gt Print Setup Use this command to setup your printer for printing Windows Print Manager takes care of the printer setup details by presenting a Print Setup Dialog Box File gt Exit Use this command to end your Report Designer session Report Designer prompts you to save your current application report template if necessary You will now return to the Screen Designer program from where the Report Designer was launched 5 2 2 Edit The Edit menu lists the following five commands InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 IHMIRPT Report Designer Page 5 5 Ctrl Z Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V Undo Ctrl Z Use this command to reverse the last editing action if possible Cut Ctrl X Use this command to delete the currently selected text from the report and copy it to clipboard To select text in the report position the mouse at the beginning of the selection click and drag the mouse to the end of the selection The selected text will be highlighted This command is not avallable grayed if there is no text currently selected Cutting data to the clipboard replaces the previously stored clipboard contents You may use the toolbar Cut icon or the shortcut key Ctrl X
339. monitored It may be convenient to include a Macro Button Section 4 11 4 labeled Refresh Screen and attach it to the Read Inputs Macro 9 Recipe Save Available only for the PC Runtime Use this macro to save the recipe from the controller using the recipe group name parameter specified Section 3 6 has a discussion of Recipes This macro has the syntax Recipe Save Recipe Name Select macro key and command as explained above Select the Recipe Name from the pull down list 10 Recipe Write This macro is similar to the Recipe Save macro Use this command to transfer a recipe to the controller 11 Screen Write This macro may be used to transfer all data entered in input fields on the current screen to the corresponding tag memory locations It may be convenient to include a Macro Button Section 4 11 4 labeled Write Screen Data and attach it to the Screen Write Macro 12 Set Data This macro allows you to set the data value associated with a tag which need not be on the current or any screen The syntax for this macro is Set Data Tag Name data value Macro Key Command lt CTRL gt lt SHIFT gt INS Set Data Tag29 1 For example suppose you want the macro key lt Ctrl gt lt Shift gt Insert to set the tag Tag29 to the value 1 Select the macro key by clicking on the two check boxes Ctrl and Shift and select the Insert key from the Macro key list box Then select the command Set Data select the tag name Tag29 and en
340. mpatible with the highest number 32767 that can be stored in the 16 bit PLC registers For Message data display format the field width should be large enough to accommodate the longest message also click on the Select Message button to invoke the Message Manager Section 3 4 and select the message group containing the text messages to be associated with the values for the data field To change Field Width click inside its edit box InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 12 the mouse pointer changes to an l beam and enter the width If the display format is Fixed enter the number of Decimal Places to the right of the decimal point Data Entry Limits Click on Data Entry Limits button to specify High and Low limits for data entry If the data type is Input then the Operator entry will be restricted to be within the High and Low limits specified Tag Alias Click on Tag Alias if you wish to assign an alias to a tag name A Tag Alias is useful when a controller tag name Example ControlLogix Tag Name or Bristol Signal Name is not known when designing your tag database and screen objects and you need to refer to a controller tag on the fly using its name in the controller Since the communication driver provided in InstantHMI for your controller is aware of the communication requirements of the controller the appropriate Signal Name will be used via the Tag Alias
341. mplate file OperatorJohn SPL was assigned the slot 1 and the Spool Register contained the value 3073 i e Archive SPOOL SO1 into file YYMMDDHH SO1 as per the old scheme using numbered spool format file 1 SPL The Spool Register value 3073 will then cause the spooled report file SPOOL SO1 to be archived under the name YYMMDDHH OperatorJohn S01 identifying by name the spool format file used in producing the spooled report SPOOL S01 InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 IHMIRPT Report Designer Page 5 13 5 3 2 Overview In general you may think of spooling as saving data to disk for later use Traditionally spooling has been used as an intermediate step to printing and allows the running program to do other things while printing in the background In InstantHMI spooling is used to set up multiple up to 99 virtual printers to produce many different reports simultaneously These spooled reports could be later included in any printed report Spooling feature in InstantHMI is controlled by a Special Register the Tag named Spool Register in the Tag Group Special Registers setup in InstantHMI as shown in Section 9 3 3 and is summarized below What is done by the PC InstantHMI Spool Record template is setup in a spool template file The spool register is read to determine appropriate event driven action The operator may demand spooling action through the runtime Reports gt
342. must have the Datalogging and or Historical trending option installed for the logged data to be useful for trending analysis On a PDA to view the logged data tap on the View Data button on the Data Log Manager screen Section 3 7 1 You will see a scrollable table listing the data logged for the selected tag Tap the pull down list of Tags to select a tag from the list of tags for which data has been logged Use the scroll bar on the right to browse through the table tapping the arrow scrolls the table one line at a time tapping the scroll bar scrolls the table one page at atime Tap the Delete Tag Data button to delete the logged data for the selected tag Tap the Done button when you are done viewing the data log The logged data is saved in the runtime engine The logged data may be transferred to a desktop PC using the InstantHMI LaunchPad software and after transfer to the LaunchPad platform it is saved in the database InstantHMI MDB and or a CSV file The transferred data can be subjected to analysis using Microsoft Excel companion tools such as Historic Trending Section 13 or other tools available to you 3 8 Database Info InstantHMI maintains information about tags messages etc in databases Each database has a header record which contains information such as Creation Date Last Modified Date Password required to read database Password required to edit database etc The crucial Passwords to InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2
343. n Historic Trend Utility Initially IHMITrend pops up a Profile Specification dialog Work with this profile to create your new profile or click on Open Existing Profile button to choose one of the previously created profiles IHMITrend Untitled SH SIN oie Profile Specification Plot Properties Data Source Name DSN Plot Interval Trend From Start 07 07 2007 08 21 04 C Trend Most Recent 08 07 200 ta 28 12 C Trend From Chosen Time 07 07 2007 08 21 04 C Trend Specific Interval Start Time End Time 07 07 2007 08 21 04 08 07 2007 14 28 12 Data Sets IHMI Project Tag Name Pen Color M Test HTrend y Temp Zone 1 7 Style and Ai rama tina gt tule Mi Bo Open Existing Profile Cancel Data at Cursor Line 01 05 2007 12 12 00 View Selected Time Period _ Plot Properties ject i 3007 Za Yan Ch Project Tag Name Value Trace ogg h gt soni Cad A ra p LT Go To Period fa a eee Linear Plot Edit Properties Data End For Help press F1 Figure 13 8 Historic Trend Utility Window You can create your trend profiles in the IHMITrend window using commands executed from the Main Menu This window also has a Title Bar at the top and a Status Bar at the bottom in addition to navigation buttons and plot property fields 13 2 1 Status Bar Figure 13 9 Historic Trend Utility Status Bar Instant
344. n InstantHMlI project screens tag database etc that can not be modified by their end users See Section 2 4 3 Please contact Software Horizons with your requirements so we can discuss a mutually beneficial technical and business agreement and create a special OEM version for you B 2 Assorted Questions 1 want to launch my application when the PC starts How can do that Use Windows Explorer and navigate to the InstantHMI folder C IHMI 4 or C IHMI 5 Right click IHMIRt exe Runtime Engine and choose Create Shortcut Right click the shortcut created and choose Properties In the Properties dialog change the Start In folder to match the path of the InstantHMI Project Folder e g C IHMI 4 YourProjectName that you want to run e Copy Move the Shortcut to your Startup folder in your Windows Start Menu f When you restart your Windows PC your InstantHMI application would run automatically IS 2 want to install another InstantHMI PC node and want to use a Runtime Engine as tag database server What do need to do this You will need the TCP IP Server Option Part 43 Win TCP Server to be included with the Runtime Engine Part 40 Win Std xx that will act as the server node You will also need a standard Runtime Engine Part 4 40 Win Std xx to be used as the client node 3 want to add the tag descriptions to the alarm banner Is it possible It is not clear what you mean by alarm banner Most
345. n first You may need Password authorization to access these System Key functions Note that the Macro Editor Section 6 may reassign some keys For this reason we shall refer here to System Keys in terms of their functionality The specific keys that perform these functions may be the Default keys in Figure 9 17 or any other keys as set up by your System Integrator or Administrator System Key 0 Screen Use this key to access the Screens menu and then select any screen You may also access a screen directly by pressing its dedicated key lt F1 gt lt F2 gt etc or as defined in Macros IDB System Key 1 Input Field Select You may use this key to enter data input mode The Tabbing Order of the user input data fields can be set in Screen Designer Section 4 9 1 If there are no user input data fields on a screen then this key is inoperative on that screen See password protection in Section 4 9 3 Press this key repeatedly to select the user input data field you wish to update or click the mouse on the field to be updated You may now enter new data for the field using the numeric keys 0 1 2 9 or the alpha keys A B Z or the boolean System Key 4 or System Key 5 Note The Tab key may perform the Write function if Data Entry on TAB is set to YES in InstantHMI INI file Section 9 6 System Key 2 Write This key is operative only in the data update mode Section 9 4 10 Once you have entered the new data for a field press the Write
346. nables you to do everything you need in the InstantHMI framework e Design project screens reports etc to suit your application requirements An InstantHMI Project implements the model of the Process or Machine Control Application for the benefit of operators Supervisors and management who are responsible for the proper and efficient operation of the machine and the plant e Setup all project elements and users so it is Ready to Run on the target platform e RUN the project if the target is the same PC on which the LaunchPad is installed The information for Monitoring and Control of your machine process is presented using display data objects on project screens These display data objects get their parameters from a tag object in the Tag Database Most project screens include Macros and Scripts that make the project screens more powerful and convenient Reports can be designed to assist supervisory and management personnel e Help provides access to Documentation and Registration Activation information PROJECT Demo Screen Elements Project Screens 18 Screens List Scripts Macros Recipes mie Configurations Troubleshoot Scripts ESENCIA eee ee Ta Screen Designer PC Fmnznanes CF Ffmnznnet b Screens Reports Tags Data Sources GU m sorrwane ds Gay sorrwane HORIZONS HORIZONS ame 4 Wine ame 4 Mine My Company ee ompan stapitty Figure 1 4 LaunchPad at Start
347. nces between the two PDA OS implementations were for all practical purposes eliminated Our legacy HMI technology Ol 2000 continued to support Windows PC platforms The elegance and strength of the InstantHMI architecture was realized in version 4 0 which was capable of supporting all the powerful and convenient features of earlier PC based HMI technology Ol 2000 3 50 for Windows as well as infusing the Instant On Ready to Go philosophy incorporated in the Version 2 0 for PDA platforms InstantHMI 4 0 incorporated the new Windows PC based LaunchPad Development System which you use to design your Project screens and Tag database that can then be deployed on any of the target platforms which has an installed InstantHMI Runtime engine The LaunchPad allows pre testing of the tags and screens on the Windows PC platform before deploying on the target PC CE or PDA platform InstantHMI 5 0 reinforces our motto Simplify while furthering our objective of providing Anytime Anywhere connectivity to process and machine control information taking advantage of the unique features of the various platforms mobility wireless connectivity barcoding and GPS capabilities of PDAs compactness and power of CE platforms and full featured functionality of PC platforms Why Upgrade to InstantHMI 5 0 Our legacy technology Ol 2000 for Windows has been retired Users of Ol 2000 3 50 can easily transfer their PC projects to the new InstantHMI 5 0
348. nctions Add Tag To Remove Tag Group From Group Datalog Interval Alarm Sample Time 1000_ msec Figure 4 46 Tag Manager and Tag Editor The Select Tag button allows you to associate a previously defined tag from the Tag database created and maintained using the Tag Manager Click on the New Tag or Edit Tag button to invoke the Tag Editor Here you may specify the tag Group Name Tag Name Tag Description etc The Tag definition includes data Memory Type with a combo list box showing the current selection There are edit fields similar to display Field Width where you can enter numeric data such as Station Number Memory Address etc You can customize some of the names for the fields using InstantHMI INI file to suit your PLC naming conventions see Section 9 Active items are shown in black and inactive items are shown in gray Additional information such as Bit number may be shown but not used When you click on an Edit Field such as Address that requires entering a number the pointer changes to an l beam You may now use any of the usual Edit control keys Arrows Ins Del Bksp Home End etc while entering your number InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 42 When the tag data specifications in the Tag Editor Dialog box meet your requirements click the OK button You will return to the design screen which shows appropriate indication a raised box etc for y
349. nd or as often as possible Variables used ffqe A ritFlag 0 initilize Localar InitFlag 2 Platform platform 0 PC 1 CE 2 PPC 3 Palm Local ar Plattorm ff ScreeniD Demo Current Screen ID Local arlS creeniD w lt I gt K Logical Operators Math Operators y vite cao ef aww von ppp ee pps Functions Tag Names IritAllGlobals _ Insert Auto Manual Insert void InibAllGlobals M alue Data Sources This function allows you to set the initial value of all lt No Sources Defined xl Insert the 6 global script variables A B to the specified Value Validate Done Figure 4 64 Script Editor 4 11 9 Remark In the Remark field you may enter a description of the data field or other notes Note that these remarks are for your convenience in documentation 4 11 10 OK and Cancel After completing the display object data specification review the dialog box entries and click OK to accept your specification for the data field If you change your mind about creating the new data field click on Cancel button You will return to the design screen 4 12 Edit Data Display Object After you accept the Display Object data spec and return to the design screen if you wish to edit the data specs for any data object then choose the Select tool from the Tool bar and double click on the data object You may also right click on a display object and select the Properties opt
350. nd Click Next select comma and Click Next and select column data formats as appropriate and click Finish d File gt Save and Exit Excel For your convenience the idb file on the PC is automatically transferred to a comma separated text file for easy import into Microsoft Excel NOTE InstantHMI Historic Trending utility must be installed and properly configured including defining an ODBC data source name Section 13 before you can successfully transfer data to an ODBC database Click on the Transfer Logs to ODBC button to convert the data to an ODBC database which is compatible with several analysis programs including InstantHMI Historic Trend Utility discussed in Section 13 Since data may be logged on several different platforms running InstantHMI it is important to identify the runtime node where the data was logged For this purpose you will see a Datalog Association Dialog to flag the logged data with a Runtime Node Name You can use data selected from one or more runtime nodes for trending purposes see Section 13 2 InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 24 Pocket PC POA Node X Pocket PC PDA Node Add Node Retrieve Datalog 4 Figure 2 42 Database User Dialog Use a Different ID name Create New Node Name or select a previously defined node name and click Start Transfer The logged data from the idb file will be transf
351. nd place it on the top left corner of your screen Click on it to select it and drag and resize it like any other object on screen InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 23 ga Training Object ssembly scr InstantHMl Screen Designer File Edit View TagData Objects Format Tools Options Help Object Assemblies Figure 4 23 Screen Designer Object Assemblies To select a different library use the Options gt Customization gt Object Assemblies tab Here you may also assign object assemblies to custom user widgets on the widget palette To delete object assemblies from the library click on the Delete button when you are viewing the object assemblies from the library Object Assembly Properties Object Assemblies have additional properties beyond the included object s as tabulated below These properties enable dynamic runtime association of object assemblies based on multiple data sources multiple stations and multiple tag groups each of which may be selected at runtime by User or by Tag Value of associated tags Section 4 6 3 To take advantage of these properties you may convert a single object into an Object Assembly No assignment selected by the Operator at runtime Scheme 3 Not Used Selected By One of the tag groups defined for the object assembly is Tag Value selected by an associated tag at runtime This tag value may also be set by the opera
352. ndshake register value 1 when a new barcode was scanned The controller can reset this handshake register value 0 when it has processed the barcode and is ready for the next barcode reading In addition you may select how to store the barcode string in the controller High Byte first or Low Byte first and whether to switch to the Barcode viewer screen when the trigger on the handheld is pressed to scan in a new barcode InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PDA Barcode Setup x A InstantHMI 2 44p ok e Popup Barcode Viewer after scan Last Scan 4 Transfer barcodes to controller 720063236065 Barcode Transfer Settings senda Deini eek Barcode Date Time Barcode Tag ea 790069210660 11 08 02 2 092636107155 11 09 02 Max Barcode Registers eo 606449000818 11 08 02 Barcode String Order 7390069220414 11 08 02 ry High byte low byte 790069233845 11 08 02 40069228404 11 08 02 Low byte high byte 745683550340 11 08 02 Handshaking Tag 700069228414 11 08 02 o 1 Delete History SE 10 28 miners Scan Setup PDA Scan History di Page 10 16 The Barcode Viewer screen shows the Scan History of the scanned barcodes as well as the most recent Last barcode scan Tap on the Delete History button to delete the barcodes from the Log 10 3 8 Communication Errors General Error Framing Error Mism
353. ned Home button Calculator button etc or turn off the power on the Handheld 10 3 Data Monitoring InstantHMI has built in communication driver to interface with your controller The list of drivers supported is included in Appendix C Make sure the version of InstantHMI installed on your handheld supports your controller Connect the appropriate communication cable from the controller to the serial port on the handheld See details for your driver in Appendix C 10 3 1 Comm Setup Screen To access the Comm Setup screen tap on Comm Setup or Setup gt Comm Setup button on the Main Menu screen You will see the following communication parameters on the Comm Setup screen Tap on Done button after making any desired changes on the Comm Setup screen InstantHMI supports direct serial connection as well as the Infrared port on the handheld If your controller is equipped with a serial port it could be converted to an Infrared port using an IR Kit When this is done select Infrared link in the Comm Setup and then use the infrared port on the handheld to beam the comm driver communication requests at the controller Similarly you can convert the serial port on your controller to support TCP IP over Ethernet and or RF capability Contact Software Horizons for IR Kit Serial to Ethernet Kit and or RF Kit for your controller w Direct Serial w 3600 w Hone Dota Bits w Stop Bits w 1 Time Gut 1000 msec Station Offset 0 Driv
354. ner Page 4 55 e A 24 bit color circle based on the rgb value in the associated tag long integer stored in register or Local memory Select Active Box if you wish to include a box whose height and width you specify on your screen and change its color dynamically You have three choices e a bit box whose On Color and Off Color you can specify The color at runtime reflects the On value 1 or Off value 0 state of the bit you specify in a tag e g Register or Local memory address and bit number e A 16 color box based on the integer value 0 15 in the associated tag register or Local memory Any register values higher than 15 will be reduced to the range 0 15 by using the remainder obtained after dividing the register value by 16 Note that the circle can be animated on the screen using sixteen colors you specify e A 24 bit color box based on the rgb value in the associated tag long integer stored in register or Local memory Note If you wish to include an animated box or circle widget we suggest that you draw it first using the box or circle drawing feature and take note of its upper left and lower right coordinates or measure its radius Then by subtraction you ll Know the pixel height and width or radius of the box or circle you want to create with the monitor widget facility After you ve noted the coordinates and are satisfied with them you can delete the box or circle Remember that the point you mark
355. nes how DCOM handles and authenticates users Domains In a Domain configuration there is a Network Server where all user accounts are stored When DCOM needs to authenticate a user it contacts the Network Server Note this is usually a different PC than the OPC Server and uses the accounts configuration information that was setup using dcomenfg in sections 1 and 2 In a Domain configuration dealing with OPC over DCOM no special action needs to be taken InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI OPC Workgroups Page 12 12 In a Workgroup configuration there is no main server that handles user authentication Each computer has it s own security and account settings user accounts on each PC are usually different This can cause problems with DCOM as the In order for DCOM to work in this network configuration each computer must have the same User Account information Username Password for any user that will be running accessing the OPC Server OPCEnum over the network 12 3 5 DCOM over TCP IP Protocol with NetBIOS lt is important when using DCOM over TCP IP that you have the NetBIOS option enabled Without NetBIOS DCOM will not be able to browse remote computers Use the following steps to enable NetBIOS in TCP IP Step A Click Start gt Settings gt Network Connections Step B Step D Right Click your Network Card and click Properties Step C Select Internet Pr
356. nfig Screens List EWM Aeration Tank 45 Scripts El EWM Clarifier 65 ci El EWM Grit Tank 78 EWM Settling Tank 56 Troubleshoot Scripts e Gi Test Config2 Bitmaps Group Functions Tag Name Tag Value New Config EWM Settling Tank 6 EWM Grit Tank EWM Clarifier EWM Aeration Tank Copy Config Delete Config Config Functions Configuration Manager Gag gorra HORIZONS d One Add Tag s Edit Tag Value Remove Tag s Figure 9 15 Configuration Manager To make it easier for the operator you may set up macros and buttons as discussed in Section 3 6 5 9 4 6 Comm Links Note Some features in this Section may not be available in the current implementation This menu includes two commands Comm Status and Chat Utility See Section 11 2 5 for a discussion of Chat Utility 9 4 7 Alarms lf you observe any alarm conditions displayed on the Status line or hear any alarm beeping sounds you may click on the Alarms menu You will be shown a list of tags which are in alarm condition High or Low the alarm limits set for each tag and the current data value for that tag You may select any field in alarm condition and click on the Acknowledge button to acknowledge the alarm Note that under any alarm condition InstantHMI can cause a Beep sound from the computer speaker depending on how the screen tag is setup See also Section 9 4 10 9 4 8 Reports Print Report Use the Reports gt
357. nfiguration from OEM Menu Screen The current configuration in the controller will be monitored and displayed on the handheld You may review the Tag Names and associated parameter values and edit the parameter values by tapping on that field Tap on the Menu gt Save button to save the configuration under a convenient name Tap on the Menu gt Delete button to delete the selected configuration The unique name current configuration can not be deleted as it will always reflect the current configuration parameters in the controller Tap on the Restore button to transfer the configuration being viewed on the handheld to the controller Tap on the Done button to return to the Menu Screen Compare Configurations Compare Configurations Select Configurations to compare CFG 1 Current Configuration CFG 2 e Fast Contig 10 of 109 tags mismatched Select mismatched tag to review w Sensor Type A oa Match cfg RID Match cfg Figure 3 24 Compare Configurations PDA You may compare any two saved configurations Also any configuration may be compared with the Current Configuration in the controller To proceed select CFG 1 and CFG 2 from the available saved configurations Tap on Compare button to compare the two selected configurations If the two configurations do not match then you will see the number of mismatched tags Select any mismatched tag from pull down list Review the associated tag values You may
358. ng is done for the event Once you have Setup Events for data logging you may specify which if any some or all of the defined trigger events will be used as Datalog Trigger Events during the current run of InstantHMI The Events are saved in a database lHDLEvents IDB and may be deployed on the runtime platform PC or PDA or WIN CE You may also setup datalog trigger events directly on the PDA as shown below InstantHMI Datalog Trigger Events Etch Setpoint Check Event from Startup sputter Setpiont Trigger Type Logging Methad Log Continuous Trigger Taq Value Handshake Tag Value lt No Tag Selected gt op Sample Time 1000 Tag Manager ags to Log Etch Setpoint Add Event Vacuum mTorr Remove Setup Events Figure 3 30 Datalog Event Manager PDA 3 7 3 Viewing Logged Data When using a PC runtime engine the datalog will be saved in an ODBC compatible database IHMIDatalog MDB When using a PDA or Win CE runtime engine the datalog will be saved in a format compatible with the specific platform which can then be converted using the PC LaunchPad to the ODBC compatible database IHMIDatalog MDB as well as a CSV file in some cases The IHMIDatalog MDB database may be used for historical trending using on line plot history se Plot widget in Section 4 11 5 or off line historic trending module Section 13 or subject to other analysis using tools available to you Note that your copy of InstantHMl LaunchPad
359. ning 64 tags as shown in the list of tags below rece ecb Date Recor Initial Configuration Boiler 1 Pressure Diagnostic Operation Boiler 1 Status Initial Configuration Boiler 1 Temperature Mew Configuration Boiler 2 Pressure Optimal Configuration Boiler 2 Status Shutdown Sequence Boiler 2 Temperature Startup Sequence Boiler 3 Pressure Boiler 3 Status Boiler 3 Temperature Figure 3 27 Recipe Manager PDA InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 27 In addition we include a tag for the handshake register InstantHMI provides a scrollable list of recipe names so the operator never has to type in the recipe names etc The chart below lists the various operator actions and the state of the registers in the controller during the recipe upload download and save process Use this chart as a guide to understand the details of the recipe management process and troubleshoot the application acmon or RE TR TES R2364 R2164 Download and Save Recipe Recipe Manager Screen Initially controller is executing a batch Recipe A Batch operation Recipe A ee po eee R2101 R2164 Through a screen field set handshake E e A Recipe Save request signal register R2365 2 and wait 100 msec JS from InstantHMI to controller PLC to complete next step control Program PLC control Program copies Recipe from Recipe A A Recipe ready to save signal Group A to Group B S
360. nition of data source on the client In our simple TCP IP Demo example there was a simple screen and tag database which were copied onto the client Of course you may have totally different screens and tags on the client node if you like InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHM OPC Page 12 1 12 OPC Interface 12 1 Introduction OPC OLE for Process Control is a standard OLE COM interface communication protocol that allows OPC Servers and OPC Clients to exchange information relevant to field devices and process controllers InstantHMI implements OPC Client Data Access to OPC Servers For illustrative purposes we show below two InstantHMI configurations for OPC Data Access Many other configurations are of course possible Windows PC Figure 12 1 InstantHMI OPC Data Access Single PC platform Figure 12 1 shows InstantHMI software OPC Data Access client connected to an OPC Server connected to a PLC The InstantHMI client can view and modify data from the PLC connected to the server This allows you the flexibility of connecting with multiple servers InstantHMI Client Windows PE Network of PLCs Figure 12 2 InstantHMI OPC Data Access over LAN Figure 12 2 shows a more complex configuration We have one InstantHMI node acting as a supervisory computer Super OPC Client Node that is collecting data from several server InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 So
361. nitor Sample Time defined for the associated Tag You may change the Sample Time for the display object InstantHMI runtime InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 57 interface provides a mechanism to update the data field by sampling the associated data memory at the sample time you specify A smaller sample time means that this field will be checked most frequently a higher sample time means that the field will be sampled less frequently Select the units msec s sec s min s or hour s for sample time Note that in addition to monitor sample time InstantHMI Tag Editor also allows an Alarm Sample Time as well as a Datalog Interval to be defined for each tag 4 11 8 Script You can create and edit Scripts from within Screen Designer First create a monitor data item to which you wish to attach a Script Double Click on the new data object The Data Display Object dialog will appear Select a Script from the pull down list if it exists Click on the Edit button for viewing editing selected script or to create a new script A dialog entitled Select Script File will appear Click on the Create Script File check box and enter a new script name Click OK The Script field will display the script you selected or created See Section 7 for details on how to create scripts Script Editor Runtime sct File Edit Runtime script Th script will be executed once every seco
362. nked to from your DLL There are no additional InstantHMI files or libraries required to build User DLL InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI User DLL Page 14 2 After writing your DLL you should copy it to the InstantHMI runtime project directory for PC runtime engines and to the InstantHMI installation directory for PDA CE runtime engines At startup if the User DLL option is enabled the runtime program searches for the DLL named IHMI User dll and automatically loads it You must name your User DLL IHMIUser dll 14 3 Skeleton User DLL The source code of the Skeleton User DLL is shown below It is a bare bones MS Windows DLL with the single entry point UserEntry The file IHMlUser cpp contains example code for UserEntry function Figure 14 2 Examination of the included header file Figure 14 3 shows that the above function is treated as a C function not a C function This single entry point function is called periodically by the runtime program The userinfo Figure 14 4 structure is used to transfer information between the runtime engine and User DLL Pee TT A EA EA E AA AA AAA AA AA EA EA EA EA EE EEE EA EEE SE SEE SESE PES EE EEE EE EEE EE EEE DISCLAIMER The software sample is provided on an 45 15 basis without ranty Software Horizons Inc does not make any represent ation Or Warranty either express or implied vith respect to the software orogr amns their quaelitw
363. nononnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononenanenininons 5 17 5 4 3 Using Spooled Data in Printer Reports cccccsccccccssseececceeeeececcseueeeeeceeaeceeesaeaeeeessaueeeessseaeesesssaegeeesssaaeeeess 5 17 Macro Edi title teauasmeee 6 1 A bedslascatobcudsaniinatine a a E 6 2 C2 oreen Proe MACOS ic 6 2 6 3 Macio Commands rerna a 6 3 GA Macro Example conan E E E cats 6 5 F SCHL EGU OP aena aa aa a aa a e e a 7 1 TA GEA SLAC ea a a 7 1 ES A e a E E E A 7 1 Hal Vanablesand Ke ywOn dS cid a E a 7 3 EA A canecceanenes 7 3 SAA ION eta 7 3 LME SON o E avetecescauceaa doc ae Toners anciana 7 12 Le o ASSigAmentotale ment pica 7 13 A esc a ocheasmdadenec tem wee Gedesens erected an coacebleneds eater ees 7 13 P27 COMO A TE E EE E E E E EE een 7 13 FO exe 21 91 9 O nassen a r eer ere eee eer eee 7 14 TALON A O A 7 19 e COMMUUNICANONEMNKS associated 8 1 8 1 R9232 Signal ASSiGhMenS sl aT EIE AE E IS RA Oi 8 1 82 Ro 232 h9 485 Serial LINK USING Cables cc ada 8 1 A A A O 8 2 SA RFE ENKUSINO AE A ta 8 3 FROMME ENONSE RO ii A a 9 1 A act aa naatsiud eee aneba tienda arene canted est setae dee aeee a R 9 1 9 2 YOU Application SIE By e e dio 9 2 9 21 ile ne Ground RUNNING seese land acs a e A ade Arca dcadateniacleaatabseaiteda AENT 9 2 9 2 2 Methodically Design Your AM is cs siassisctnetevs sratausnstecdadevtasnniaadnadadeveciiuascdesdslaateunilscivadavsonsbiads Ads 9 3 A tee eee a ee mee eee mee ere 9 5 go Dala SUCE tai caco 9 5 A
364. ns Other wise CE PDA Runtime activations can not be surrendered Please contact Software Horizons if you have any questions InstantHMI Copyright 2000 20088 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 FAQ Frequently Asked Questions Page B 1 B FAQ Frequently Asked Questions B 1 What is InstantHMI Designed for OEM Software Horizons Inc offers its services to enhance InstantHMI for Palm Pocket PC Windows CE or other hardware platforms to provide additional functionality for OEMs and other customers with special requirements Such customized versions may include customized databases Tags messages Troubleshoot etc and or additional screens including a startup Menu Screen with buttons tailored to provide the end users easy access to the functions provided by the OEM s product In addition the usual InstantHMI Functions for Tag editing Comm setup etc are hidden from the end user through Password Protection The OEM may be provided with special passwords to access these functions to make any desired changes in setup etc Note Some OEM versions have restricted availability The following special OEM versions are available e Temperature Controllers e Traffic Monitoring e Semiconductor Equipment Interface e Application tailored to meet your needs InstantHMI provides a powerful Project Protection feature to benefit OEMs System Integrators and InstantHMI project designers OEMs and System Integrators will be able to design a
365. ns for other CE platforms see Section A 2 1 a lant 4 1 lnetallation Ins i H MI Platform Scalable Platform Independent Platform Scalable Platform Independent nstant anai ew Generation HMI Techn loqy New Generatlon HMI Technology InstantHMl Setup Device not detected Please connect device and click Install Figure A 3 Windows CE Runtime Installation Welcome and Device Not Detected A 2 4 InstantHMI Runtime Engine for Pocket PC Desktop software for Pocket PC must be installed before installing InstantHMI LaunchPad if you have ordered runtime engine for Pocket PC In order to Install InstantHMI for Pocket PC on your handheld you must have Microsoft ActiveSync version 3 5 or later installed on your PC ActiveSync is available from Microsoft site at http www microsoft com pocketpc Connect your Pocket PC to your PC and turn your handheld on before starting installation The Pocket PC must remain connected throughout the installation process Removing the Pocket PC during installation can cause unpredictable results and possible loss of data Once your Pocket PC is connected to your PC you can begin installation If installing from a CD Figure A 2 click on the button labeled Pocket PC Runtime Engine If you have downloaded the Pocket PC Runtime software Section A 2 1 run Setup exe If you have a floppy disk InstantHMI for Pocket PC insert it into your floppy drive Click Start gt Run
366. nstantHMI Activation Utility a xl A Copy protection parameter changing aes Protection removed From C IHMI 4 Activation code For serial number 306611646 is 03 Sc c3 36 6d de 89 9c c9 Se cO OF Fa SF FF FF FS OF Fa se e3 Se 69 Ge e9 Of Fe e7 79 99 99 99 96 66 6b b 06 64 07 73 23 55 5d 6b dO Ef d7 58 bb c1 22 1a 94 6f cc b2 63 1F 90 Od eb 8d eb Se d7 4d el 20 3a a9 as 64 09 b3 le 00 80 78 67 86 d dd dd Sd 75 b7 db 9d 99 19 01 00 303573575555 45 d4 6d d fd FF OF 00 e0 e 87 78 17 01 00 al 0a b ib 11 01 60 06 c Oc 30 35 93 09 00 40 44 ed ee ae Oa cO Sc 83 Ber fe bF 5b 05 80 a8 ea ae 2a 42 84 98 19 31 F3 OF 80 68 26 02 1081 26 02 90 29 F2 FF ef 7e 67 06 90 79 17 al 0a 1011 al la 71 07 al Da FO SF a3 3a 93 49 44 04 aa daed Ge 36 43 44 64 86 58 a5 ba db ad 6a 06 cO ec ae da 9d a9 ea 3e 73 67 a 64 36 83 30 63 bs 2b 62 d 1d 61 58 78 F7 787 de 1d b1 ib bi 0b dO 1d di 0d 50 35 53 05 30 73 d7 ed ee ee de 24 Ff ce ca e cb 21 20 ez b5 be c4 Sa Activation code has been saved to C IHMI 4 HM IRuntine ac Figure A 12 Generate Activation Code for PC2 Step 4c On PC1 Copy this file to a disk or some other drive that you can access from PC2 in Step 5 below to activate Runtime on PC2 Exit Activation Utility on PC1 Step 5a On PC2 continued from Step 2 Click on Activate Runtime You will see the following dialog Make sure the Radio Button Select Activation File is selected and then click on Activate button Activate R
367. nstantHMI Tag or from the Tag to the control If you have selected to transfer data From Control To Tag the data associated with that property will be transferred at the specified control sample time from the control to the Data source of the tag assigned to that property If you have selected to transfer data From Tag To Control the data will be sampled from the assigned tag s Data Source and transferred to the control If the control generates an event that notifies the container that a property value has changed the associated script will be executed for any special handling needed for this event ActiveX Verbs See Section 4 6 11 4 6 11 OLE ActiveX Verbs OLE ActiveX controls must be activated before the user can interact with the control The user interaction will be determined by the verb used to activate the control The standard predefined verbs are tabulated below o over osn Primary Action performed when user double clicks the object in InstantHMI Runtime The object not the Runtime determines this action If the object supports in place activation the primary verb usually performs this action 1 Show Instructs an object to show itself for editing or viewing Called to display newly inserted objects for initial editing and to show link sources 2 Open Instructs an object including one that supports in place activation to open itself for editing in its own window distinct from the container s window If the object
368. ntHMI will be disabled This feature is provided for your convenience to turn off the password checking mechanism if it is not needed in your installation InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 15 een HMI PROJECT MyProject PROJECT MyProject User Profile Manager FA Sl User Profile Manager User Profile 247 DESIGN User Profile r User Name Admin Y Access Level Administrator OY senor Password eee Confirm Password eee SETUP User Name Joe Access Level Operator Assigned Functions Available Functions Assigned Functions Shut Down Computer Printing Alf ign Exit Runtime Spooling Recipe From Controller Recipe From Controller Start Runtime Recipe To Controller Assign All gt Recipe To Controller St RUN Status Access Setup Access Spooling Trend History Shut Down aa Start Runtime User Manager Access p y Start Runtime w lt Remove Al Y Require User Login My Name My Company Figure 2 29 Setup gt Project gt Users gt New User Operator Joe To set up a new User Profile click on New User button and enter a User Name Note that User Name must be unique Select the Access Level from the pull down list enter a User Password and repeat to Confirm Password Click on one of the Available Functions in the left panel and then click on the Assign b
369. ntime e Step 2 Use the Screen Capture feature to import any bitmaps that you wish to place on the application screens to enhance operator familiarity e Step 3 Use the Object Assembly feature to build functional objects for placing on screen These named object assemblies stored in a library of object assemblies may include re sizable collection of active widgets touch zones and static objects They also allow for dynamic association with multiple tag groups at Runtime e Step 4 Use the other LaunchPad utilities to define other project elements as desired InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 6 Details Use the Screen Designer main menu and other menu commands or the Tool Bar buttons or the Widget Palette to create your screen The Status Bar will provide instantaneous feed back Use the context sensitive help by pressing the help key F1 after highlighting any menu item this will tell you about the menu item selected To modify an existing application screen use the File Open option to retrieve your screen Use Select or Block Select item from the Tool palette and click on any object to select it The Edit menu is used to Copy Move or Delete the selected block of objects you may also Save selected objects as an Object Assembly for re use in other screens Use any of the options from the Objects menu to add new objects such as Text Box Line etc to your screen The Grid o
370. o change the Meter parameters or Cancel button to retain the old parameters and return to the data specification dialog box Select Bitmap if you wish to display active bitmaps Compare this with the static bitmap object discussed in Section 4 6 1 This option works like register and bit based message instead of messages in your message group you will now specify bitmap file names in your bitmap groups The register or bit values will be used to select the bitmap file name that will be displayed on screen This feature can be used to produce nice animation effects see InstantHMI Demo Note Transparency attribute may be set for active bitmaps Section 4 6 1 Select Active Circle if you wish to include a circle whose radius you specify on your screen and change its color dynamically You have three choices e a bit circle whose On Color and Off Color you can specify The color at runtime reflects the On value 1 or Off value 0 state of the bit you specify in a tag e g Register or Local memory address and bit number e A 16 color circle based on the integer value 0 15 in the associated tag register or Local memory Any register values higher than 15 will be reduced to the range 0 15 by using the remainder obtained after dividing the register value by 16 Note that the circle can be animated on the screen using sixteen colors you specify InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Desig
371. o place a Label text in your choice of colors The Check Box Properties dialog box allows you to change the text label and its font In addition you may position the check mark on the right or left of the label text and assign the checked and unchecked values to be associated with the check box control The meaning of the checked unchecked values is as follows Assume the box is unchecked to start with When the tag associated with the check box control exceeds the checked value a InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 51 check mark appears in this field If subsequently after being checked the tag value falls below the un checked value the control will be un checked You may select the checked and un checked values to be the same Then the control will be checked when the tag value exceeds the common trigger value otherwise it will be unchecked E Step1 Completed Step 2 Completed Display Object Properties Display Properties Tag Infor mation Data Type fimput x Tag Name Sekct Tag lt NoTagSelected gt Check Box Properties Display text Graphic Format CheckBox y Label AMA o Width 178 Height 24 Sample Time 1000 msec s v Checked Value 2 Properties Script lt No Script gt v Edit Unchecked Value 1 Color Foreground i Background Check Mark Side Left me Remark PO OK Cancel Figure 4 56 Check List Object Sel
372. o print multiple reports to disk concurrently This spooling capability in effect provides you with multiple up to 100 virtual printers You may also merge the spooled reports into a single printed report whose template is under your total control The Report Designer is used to create inspect or modify printer report and spool record templates to be used by the runtime engine Section 9 to generate the printer and spool reports A sample printer report is shown below Note We distinguish between report templates and reports Report Designer creates the report template files and Runtime engine uses these template files to print the corresponding reports at runtime Date 00 25 05 Time 5 00 00 PRINTER REPORT STATION NUMBER 10 RUBBER LOT NUMBER OPERATOR NUMBER 17 BATCH NURBER SHIFT HOB EF 18 LOT DATE 1225 89 PART HUMBER 225 HEAT NUMBER MOLO NUMBER 824 1023 MANIFOLD CSET POINT SET UP NUMBER 19 20 21 UPPER ZONE 25 PRESS HOURS 5 LOWER ZONE MOLDING PROCESS PARAMETERS CURE TIME EC 30 GATE TIME SECT 31 INJECTION TIME cS ECT ain TEMPERATURES Deg F UPPER PLATE SET POINT SCREW BARREL FONE 11 SET POINT 131 FONE 21 FONE 31 INJECTION BARREL SET POINT 141 LOWER PLATE SET POINT FONE1 04i NOZZLE FONE 05i SET POINT FONE 061 INJECTION UNIT PULL BACK POSITION 1ST IMI ZONE SPEED 209 PLASTICIZING SPEED 157 IMI ZONE PRESSURE 9053 BACK PRESSURE 15T IMU ZOME TRANS FT aaa SHOT VOLUME CH HD INJ ZONE
373. o select a new text foreground color If a text object is currently selected this command will change only the foreground color for the selected object If no object is selected then this command will set the text foreground color for all subsequently created text objects Note To change the foreground color of data objects use the color button in display object properties dialog Text Background Color This Color gt Text Background menu item is used to change the background color of static text objects This command pops up the Color Dialog box to select a new text background color If a text object is currently selected this command will change only the background color for the selected text object If no object is selected then this command will set the text background color for all subsequently created text objects Note To change the background color of data objects use the color button in the display object properties dialog Hatch Lines Color The Color gt Hatch Lines menu item is used to draw filled objects that are assigned a hatched pattern This command pops up the Color Dialog box to select a new hatch lines color If a filled hatched object is currently selected this command will change only the color of the hatched lines for the selected object If no object is selected then this command will set the hatched line color for all subsequently created filled hatched objects Screen Background Color The Color gt Screen Backgr
374. of project components protected unprotected Password to protect unprotect the project components InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 17 It is strictly recommended that no attempt be made to tamper with or modify this protection file A corrupted protection file will render your InstantHMI installation useless as it will not be able to run any of your projects When running the protected project the runtime will verify that all project components conform to the original protected file state by checking the information stored in the master protection file with the information in the component files If any project component fails the verification the project will not be run and will produce an error code and a log file 2 4 4 Setup gt Project gt Deploy InstantHM LaunchPad allows you to design your project on a Windows PC platform and deploy it on any target platform such as Windows PC or Windows CE or PDA Palm or Pocket PC which has an installed InstantHM Runtime engine We assume you have established connectivity between the design PC and the runtime platform see details below for various platform connectivity before attempting to deploy the project If the Project you wish to deploy is different from the current project select it from the pull down list of projects Click on the Setup gt Project gt Deploy button in LaunchPad Select the Runtime Platf
375. of the Screen Designer design area whenever it is enabled in the View menu For Help press F1 67 ler SELECT MM System 10 E Pi Figure 4 3 Screen Designer Status Bar The Command Prompt area of the status bar describes actions of menu items as you use the arrow keys to navigate through menus If after viewing the description of the command you do not wish to execute the command then release the mouse button while the pointer is off the command The XPOS and YPOS panes areas identify the mouse cursor position The Object pane shows the currently chosen object or tool The pane to the right of object pane shows a filled box whose border is the current Pen Color and whose interior is the current Fill Color The rightmost pane shows the text Font amp Color 4 1 3 Tool Bar The Tool bar is usually displayed across the top of the Screen Designer window below the Menu bar You may hide the tool bar using the View Tool bar menu The tool bar buttons provide short cuts to some of the more commonly used menu commands as shown A Tool Palette that includes commonly used tools from the Tool Bar is also provided for your convenience in screen creation You may re size the Tool Palette window or dock it to any edge of the design screen To dock the tool palette move it to the left or right or bottom border of the Screen Designer window by clicking on its title bar and dragging it to the desired boundary InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software H
376. og box has elements similar to File Open To save an application with its existing name and directory use the Save command Athankyou impzonel Pl trapzones P wastevutr File name trpzones Save as type ser sch Cancel Figure 4 7 Screen Designer File Save As Dialog InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 8 The following options allow you to specify the name and location of the file application screen you are about to save Save in Folders Select the project directory or the Folder in which you want to store the application screen File Name Type a new filename to save an application screen with a different name A filename can contain many characters and an extension file type of up to three characters Screen Designer adds the extension you specify in the Save File As Type box Click on the Save button when you are finished specifying the file name etc You may click on the Cancel button to cancel the File Save request File Exit Use this command to end your Screen Designer session Screen Designer prompts you to save your current application screen if necessary 4 3 Edit The standard mouse cursor arrow pointer acts as a Select tool Use this tool to select any specific object on screen by clicking the mouse on or near it When an object is selected on the screen eight small sizer boxes Figure 4 8 appear around it You may point inside
377. ogging on most platforms Time based data logging and Event triggered data logging You may think of Data Logging as the response to the following conditional statements If Event1 then datalog Tag List1 If Event2 then datalog Tag List2 etc In Time based data logging the Event is simply defined in terms of datalog Sample Time associated with each tag Event triggered data logging is illustrated by an example below Example General event triggered data logging Suppose you have a tag called Temperature with a high value THigh and a low value TLow and you wish to log Temperature values if it is in high alarm condition Temperature gt THigh or in low alarm condition Temperature lt TLow You define Eventi with Trigger Tag as Temperature and Trigger value THigh Trigger Type Transition On Data Logging Method Log Continuous and include the Temperature tag in the Tags to Log list You also define Event2 with Trigger Tag as Temperature and Trigger value TLow Trigger Type Transition Off Data Logging Method Log Continuous and include the Temperature tag in the Tags to Log list Finally you choose both Eventi and Event2 as Datalog Trigger Events This will ensure that the Temperature tag will be logged whenever it is in high or low alarm condition 3 7 1 Time Based Data Logging Any tags from the tag database may be assigned a Datalog Sample Time Sections 3 3 3 and 3 3 7 To setup time driven data logging click t
378. ol reports include them in a printer report template using the special data format Spool_file and then print that report You may use Spool file data format only inside a printer report template and never inside a spool record template that is Spooled files can not included in spool records When you use the Spool_file data format you must enter the spool template File ID other fields in the dataspecs will be ignored For example type in 5 for File ID if you wish to include in your printer report the spooled report SPOOL S05 SPOOL represents the name of fifth spool template in your project Of course you must create the spool record template to generate the spooled report SPOOL SO5 at a later time using Report Designer Note For convenience you may select a Spool Register Function Section 5 3 from a pull down list Figure 5 8 illustrates use of spooled report One spool record will be spooled saved to disk every time a request is made to activate the spool report The saved spool report in our example will be named SPOOL SO5 see Section 5 3 for Daily Hourly etc spool reports The extension S05 indicates that the spool record format used for the spool report was 5 SPL The spool activation request is made to Report Designer at run time by changing the zero value in the Spool Register to the spool template File ID 5 in our example The Spool Register is discussed in Section 9 2 and Section 5 3 When the spool regi
379. olders 7 Zip Accessories Administrative Tools Advanced Serial Port Monitor AEgis Technologies ArcSoft Software Suite Autodesk 5 z E 3 l To install InstantHMI in the selected folder click Next To select a different folder click Browse aer gt 3 DAQFactory Selected Installation Folder eBLVD C MIHMI 4 Browse Free DWG Viewer Exit f Exit Program icons will be added to the selected Program Folder Space Required 65 MB Space Available 15 GB i j Enter a new folder name or Select one of the existing folders Platform Scalable Platform Independent New Generation HMI Technology Next comes the selection of the Program folder InstantHMI 4 1 Human Machine Interface by default where the Program icons shortcuts will be installed You will now see the Current Settings selected by you for your installation Click Back to change any settings Click Next to start the process of copying program files to complete the installation Installation Settings Platform Scalable Platform Independent CNEL HMI h New Generation HMI Technology Easy Screen Creation T Widget amp Tool Palettes Clipboard Tools and Pick amp Place methodology make Screen Design a cinch Current Settings Target Directory C IHMI 4 Program Manager Group InstantHMI 4 1 Human Machine Interface InstantHMI Copyright 2000 20088 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Installation Registration and Activation
380. oller for additional model specific information InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 8 Choose Register if you wish to use a data register 16 bits usually from your controller for the data Choose Bit to use a specific bit in a register for the Boolean data for this field Choose Digital Input to specify discrete inputs and Digital Output for discrete outputs Choose Analog Input to specify analog inputs and Analog Output for analog outputs Choose Timer Preset to use preset value of Timers and Timer Current for current value of Timers Note that the Timer choices may not be distinct for some PLC s which use Register for this purpose Choose Counter Preset to use preset value of counters and Counter Current to use current value of counters note that the counter choices may not be distinct for some Controllers which use Register for this purpose Choose Alias Tag if you wish for this tag to inherit its memory type and other tag properties from another tag defined earlier You may access the Alias Tag Map from the Tag Manager Section 3 3 3 Choose Local if you wish to use local storage for the data item Local Memory is provided for storage of the screen field data without using up controller registers that incur a communication overhead Local memory is allocated from your computer memory you may use any addresses except the ones reserved for special purposes as documented
381. on Y 3 Monitor Sample Time 1000 w ms Datalog Sample Time 1000 e ms Data Format w Integer Field Width 5 Decimal Places 2 Figure 3 12 Tag Editor PDA The Memory Type Address Bit Number and Station Number are same as discussed in Section dd You may enter a Monitor Sample Time for each monitor field InstantHMI provides a mechanism to update the data field by continuously sampling the data memory associated with the Tag at the sample time you specify A smaller sample time means that this field will be checked more frequently a higher sample time means that the field will be sampled less frequently Sample time is specified in milliseconds or seconds We recommend a minimum of 500 msec to ensure efficient communications You may enter a Datalog Sample Time for each field you wish to include in a datalog InstantHMlI provides a mechanism to log the data from the field by sampling the data memory associated with the Tag at the sample time you specify Sample time is specified in milliseconds or seconds We recommend a minimum of 500 msec to ensure efficient communications Tap on the Data Format pull down list down arrow to select a data format from the list of available formats Many different data formats are supported in InstantHMI InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 15 Integer Uinteger Hex Binary BCD Message Long Ulong Fixed Int
382. on the same PC Section 9 2 lists the steps you need to follow to get your application running in InstantHMI 9 2 Your Application Step By Step 9 2 1 Hit the Ground Running If you wish to add HMI capability to an existing controller and have a computer with InstantHMI Runtime installed just use an appropriate communication link to hook up the controller to the Runtime The New Project Wizard gets you ready to hit the ground running New Project Wizard This wizard provides the quickest way to create an HMil Project for your application TT Step 1 Create New Project step 2 Define Data Source otep 3 Identify Tags step 4 Design Screen step 5 Test in Runtime Figure 9 2 New Project Wizard First time you are running New Project Click on LaunchPad gt Setup gt New Project This starts the New Project Wizard At any step click on Help for a quick review if needed Step 1 Click on Create New Project button Step 2 Click on Define Data Source to specify a Data Source to access the controller The Data Source sets up the communication link with your controller Step 3 Click on Identify Tags to specify a Data Block to monitor from the controller The wizard will display a Data Table Viewer for the controller Use Data Table Viewer to monitor modify controller tags and transfer selected pre tested tags of interest to the Tag database Data Source Name Memory Type Data Type Display Format
383. ons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI User DLL Ssss Pe 14 4 Special Considerations In general you can do anything in your modified version of IHMlUser dll that you are allowed to do in any MS Windows DLL To simplify writing User DLL as an InstantHMI extension consider the following f you must export functions write them as C not C functions C function names are mangled decorated and are much more difficult to export Remember that your DLL must co exist with the rest of the runtime engine and the responsibility for writing a well behaved IHMlIUser dll is entirely yours If your dll hogs the CPU you may degrade runtime program performance and even bring it to a grinding halt The runtime calls the DLL periodically You cannot depend on a specific calling frequency or fixed number of time slices The runtime engine tries to call the entry point constantly whenever no other program has messages in its input queue Note Four application examples are described in Sections 14 5 14 8 to illustrate the power and flexibility of the User DLL extensibility built into the InstantHMI runtime architecture Contact Software Horizons for a quote if you need a custom User DLL implementation 14 5 Example 1 Read Write PLC Data This example implementation of User DLL Figure 1 4 illustrates how User DLL may interact with InstantHMI to read a register value form a PLC using a InstantHMI driver The register value read wi
384. ontrol key down and double clicks the control the Open verb is invoked If the user right clicks the control the runtime pops up a menu to allow the selection of the custom verbs Supported by the control InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 34 InstantHMI Container invokes the Do Verb as part of initializing a newly created object InstantHMI first informs the object of its display location and alerts the object that it is an embedded object so as to trigger appropriate changes to the user interface of the object application in preparation for Opening an editing window The Do Verb automatically runs the OLE server application If an error occurs during verb execution the object application Excel Word etc is shut down 4 7 Format The Format Menu has the following commands Patterns Set the patterns for pen and filled objects Color Set the color for pen filled objects etc Font Set the display font type size etc for text 4 7 1 Patterns The Patterns menu offers the following commands to set patterns for pen and filled object styles Pen Set the pen style and size width Filled Object Set the fill pattern for filled objects Text Display Mode Set the display mode for text Pen The Patterns gt Pen menu offers the following commands to set the drawing pen size and style Solid Set the pen style to solid Dashed Set the pen style to dashed Dotted S
385. ood idea to have a backup of your work You may use your desktop PC to restore all data that was backed up If you have the InstantHMI LaunchPad option installed then you can use it for convenient backup and restoration of InstantHMI project and data files InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PDA Page 10 2 For your convenience Software Horizons Inc can provide a Windows CE touch panel InstantPanel with InstantHMI software preinstalled and ready to go You may access InstantHMI by double tapping the InstantHMI Icon on the InstantPanel Desktop Alternatively you can double tap the My Computer Icon on the desktop navigate to the NORFlash gt InstantHMI folder and double tap the InstantHMI Icon IHMI EXE 10 2 Runtime Menu When InstantHMI is running you will see a Menu Screen of buttons OEM versions of InstantHMI will start with a Menu Screen tailor made for the OEM equipment functions That screen will include a button labeled IHMI Functions which leads to the standard function Menu Screen like the one shown Contact Software Horizons for details on OEM screens to suit your customers application needs The Menu Screen consists of 10 buttons which provide access to the powerful features in InstantHMI described below in Sections 10 2 1 10 2 10 ey HMI for Palm os Figure 10 1 Runtime Menu PDA 10 2 1 Login Logout Palm OS Tap on the Login
386. opyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI OPC Page 12 5 My Computer Properties E Connection orented TCP IP Figure 12 8 Configuring DCOM Steps D Step E Click the COM Security Tab On this dialog there are security settings for Access Permissions Limits and Defaults and Launch and Activation Permissions Limits and Defaults My Computer Properties General Opos Figure 12 9 Configuring DCOM Steps E InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHM OPC Page 12 6 Step F Under Access Permissions Step E click Edit Limits Ensure Local Access and Remote Access are checked for Group or User Names ANONYMOUS LOGON and Everyone and click OK Access Permission Security Limits Group or User names ANONYMOUS LOGON 8 Everyone Add Remove Permissions for ANONYMOUS LOGON Allow Deny Local Access Remote Access Figure 12 10 Configuring DCOM Steps F Step G Under Launch and Activation Permissions Step E click Edit Limits Select the Everyone user and check Allow for Permissions for Everyone Launch Permission El ES Security Limits Group or user names 8 Administrators INE TPC Administrators Add Remove Permissions for Everone Allow Deny Local Launch Remote Launch Local Activation E El El El OOOO Remote Activation Figure 12 11
387. or the Select All check box and then click on Create Tag s button to transfer the selected tags to the tag database ca InstantHMl Data Viewer TCP IP Device 940 demo node 120 Modbus TCP Data Source Name Memory Type Data Type Display Format Register Inti6 Y Decimal v Device Name Station Start Address Bit Field Width 940 demo node 120 v Edit 0 1 0 5 R W TagName Address Tag alue Comm Status Comm OK Comm OK Comm OK Comm OK Comm OK Comm OK Comm OK Comm OK Comm OK Comm OK rw Register 1 1 rw Register 2 2 rw Register 3 3 re Register 4 4 re Register 5 5 rw Register 6 6 rw Register 7 7 rw Register 8 8 rw Register 9 9 rw Register 10 1 oo oO co co CoO co Coco Oo Oo O O O O Select All O Data Items oem al e Figure 3 3 Data Table Viewer PC 3 2 2 Data Table Tool PDA The Data Table Viewer discussed in Section 3 2 1 is implemented on the PDA platforms to suit their smaller form factor as shown below InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 4 Data Table Viewer Bajo station o DeviceName o Controller bata Table Update Interval 1000 msec Memory Type w Register Max Consecutive Points To Read Format Integer Registers Bits Start Address 1 Timers Inputs Counters Outputs Display Properties Field Vvidth Fractional Width Message Group 1130 mTorr Messages w Figure
388. orizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer As F AAS EOemeava LA A200 Page 4 4 File Mew File Open File Save select Text Line Poly Line Draw Fill Static Box Circle Tank Scale Bitmap Static Data Help keypad Tool Palette Widget Palette Figure 4 4 Screen Designer Tool Palette amp Tool Bar 4 1 4 Style Bar The Style bar groups together some editing tools for your convenience Align Lett Align Right Align Top Align Bottom Move to Front Move to Back Toggle Grid Display Line Style Line Size Pattem Color Figure 4 5 Screen Designer Style Bar InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 5 The Alignment Tools allow you to align objects to the left right top and bottom of other objects These four alignment tools work in the same manner For example if you select three Box objects on screen and then click on Align Left then the first two boxes will be moved on screen so that their left side aligns with the left side of the third box When two objects are overlapping then you may select one of them and click on the Move to Front or Move to Back tool to achieve the desired effect These tools are helpful when you decide to draw an object underneath another object already on screen The Toggle Grid display tool is used to turn on or turn off grid display on screen to help you during the screen creation process The Lin
389. orm to Deploy to and the Transfer Action Deploy or Retrieve In the Select Project Elements list box select the items such as Tag Database Project Screens etc you want to deploy to the runtime platform Pocket PC platform illustrated in Figure 2 32 Click on Start in Screen Mode on the target node if desired Finally click on Deploy button to transfer the selected project elements to the target node I DESIGN Runtime Target Platform TS Select Project Elements Project Screens Scripts Macros Tag Database Data Sources Network Database Message Groups Bitmap Groups Datalog Events Start in Screen Mode PROJECT MyProject A O O d argur Figure 2 32 Setup gt Project gt Transfer gt Deploy to Pocket PC Note that this feature allows you to Deploy a single master project on the Desktop PC to several target nodes Connectivity with Pocket PC Platform InstantHMI uses the database synchronization feature Active Sync on Pocket PC platforms to deploy projects Step 1 If Active Sync is not installed on your PC do so now ActiveSync can be downloaded from the Microsoft Website using the following link http www microsoft com windowsmobile downloads activesync38 mspx Step 2 If ActiveSync software is running you will see the Active Sync icon in the Windows System Tray on the bottom right of the Windows task bar which includes the Windows Start button If not click Start
390. oth transition from one batch to the next or from one configuration setup to the next without exceeding machine or process limits Data Logging Data Logging is an available optional feature in InstantHMI You can access it by tapping on the Data logging button on the Utilities Screen See Section 10 4 for details Datalog Manager Datalog Tag List Boiler 1 Pressure Boiler 1 Status Boiler 1 Temperature Figure 10 7 Datalog Manager PDA Configuration When you tap on the Utilities gt Configuration you will see the configuration screen Tap on Setup gt Configuration from OEM Menu Screen The current configuration in the controller will be monitored and displayed on the handheld InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PDA Page 10 5 You may review the Tag Names and associated parameter values and edit the parameter values by tapping on that field Tap on the Menu Save button to save the configuration under a convenient name Tap on the Menu gt Delete button to delete the selected configuration The unique name current configuration can not be deleted as it will always reflect the current configuration parameters in the controller Tap on the Restore button to transfer the configuration being viewed on the handheld to the controller Tap on the Done button to return to the Menu Screen Compare Configurations w My Custom Configuration Select Configuration
391. otocol TCP IP and click the Properties button LA Local Area Connection Properties General Advanced Connect using E 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI NIC 30 This connection uses the following items SF NWeLink NetBIOS SA AM Link Peso Pes NetBlOs Compatible Transport Prot Internet Protocol TCP IP Install M Description Transmission Control Protocol internet Protocol The default Wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Urnmetall M Show icon in notification area when connected M Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity Close Epia Figure 12 22 DCOM over TCP IP NetBlOS Steps A C InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc In Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties click the Advanced button as shown below 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI OPC Page 12 13 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Ei ES General fou can get F settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Othernvise you need to ask pour network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically IP address 192 168 U0 2 Subnet mask 255 255 255 O Default gateway D obten DHS sewer address automaticaly f Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred ONS server C ances D Cancel Figure 12 23 DC
392. ou during screen design using the Toggle Grid display on off tool on the Style Bar Section 4 1 4 The Tool Palette and Widget Palette may be re sized as well as dragged and placed anywhere in the Screen Designer window to create a view to suit your convenience The Key Pad feature is reserved for later implementation InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer 4 5 Tag Data Page 4 14 The Tag Data menu offers the following commands which are discussed in detail in other Sections as indicated 4 6 Objects Data Viewer See Section 3 2 Tag Manager See Section 3 4 Data Sources See Section 3 1 Message Groups See Section 3 4 Bitmap Groups See Section 3 5 IP Manager See Section 3 1 The Objects menu offers the following commands to create objects on your application screen Static Objects Data Object Watch List Object Assembly Touch Zone Text Scroll Alarm Log Viewer Real Time Historic Trend OLE Object ActiveX Object 4 6 1 Static Objects Create a static object Text Line Box etc Create data object Create data object Recall object assembly from library Create touch zone object Create a Text Scroll box and specify a file to get text contents from Create alarm log viewer object Create Trend object for viewing Real Time Historic trends Create OLE object Create ActiveX container and identify the ActiveX server file We use the terms
393. ou must release the mouse button before leaving the touch zone You may also activate the touch zone by pressing the keys if they exist on the keyboard associated with the touch zone At runtime when the touch zone is activated action corresponding to the associated keys will be initiated For example look at the Demo Project screen Training mainmenu scr Here we have associated the Switch to Screen Training timpzone1 function with the touch zone having the appearance of Training tmpzonel scr no macro is associated with the touch zone since it is not required AT runtime clicking or touching if touch hardware is present activates the touch zone on the Training mainmenu screen to perform the switch to screen function and switch you over to screen Training tmpzone1 In general you could define the action for the touch zone by defining macros for the touch zone The global macro file macros idb in the Demo project includes all macros definitions 4 6 6 Text Scroll Object The Text Scroll tool allows you to place a Text Scroll object on screen and attach a Text File which contains the text contents to display in the scrolling text box You may also specify the foreground and background colors for the scrolling text in addition as shown in the Text scroll example below You may control font size in any block of text by a preceding font size choice large I at end of line medium m at end of line and small s at end of l
394. ound menu item is used to clear fill the entire application screen before the screen objects are displayed This command pops up a dialog box to select a color for the screen background You may set the screen background even after you have created objects on the screen InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 37 Note You may change Color for multiple selected objects 4 7 3 Font Font style i e old 0 Small Fonts Bold Italic 5 mibol Sample Aabb yy z Script Westem Terminal F Times New Roman Y Wingdings Figure 4 40 Font Dialog The Font command pops up a standard dialog box to select a font type style and size to use for text objects Note To set the font type style and size for data objects use the Font button in the data display object properties dialog box Screen Designer displays the standard windows Font dialog box You choose the Font Type Font Style and Font Size and then observe the Font sample displayed when satisfied with your selection click on OK button to return to your application screen Note You may change Font for multiple selected objects 4 8 Tools The Tools menu allows you to access the companion utilities that come with InstantHMI from the Screen Designer These Tools are discussed in greater detail in other Sections as indicated Report Designer See Section 6 Macro Editor See Section 7 Script Editor See Se
395. our data display object will be indicated by a suitable symbol such as a raised box etc You may click on any widget on the Widgets Palette Sections 4 11 3 4 11 5 and then click on the screen to place the selected widget on screen To customize the widget double click on it and change the data display object properties to suit your requirements Some widgets will be shown on screen using a static bitmap representing the widget which will be animated at runtime by the runtime engine 4 6 3 Watch List The Watch List object allows you to monitor modify tags from your Tag Groups at Runtime Click on Objects gt Watch List to place a watch list on the top left corner of your screen Click on it to select it and drag it to reposition it on screen and resize it like any other object on screen The Watch List object displays tag values from any watch list tag group selected at runtime from its pull down list of tag groups To define the watch list tag groups double click on the watch list title bar to access its Parameters dialog Note that double clicking on a row in the body of the list selects it at runtime for data entry Here you may create Watch List groups which may be groups from the tag database or specially created watch list groups where you may include tags of interest from the tag database by clicking the Add Tag button Rf Tag Mame Tag Value EZ Operations Loop Cool Hysteresis Ez Operations Loop Time Integral E Ope
396. our data field To discard the tag data specification you have started click the CANCEL button you will be immediately returned to the design screen The major elements in the Display Object and Tag Editor Dialog Boxes are discussed in the following sections 4 11 1 Data Type Each data field is assigned one of two categories Text or Graphic each of which can be one of three types User Input Monitor Input Monitor The chosen data type is highlighted in the pull down list combo box Choose the type User Input if you wish to allow entry of data values into memory by the Operator while your application machine is running Note that Data Type User Input should not be confused with discrete Input memory in Section 4 11 5 The User Input fields are initialized by reading monitoring the associated memory value just once at the start when InstantHMI runtime goes through its initialization No further monitoring will take place and this field will reflect the last user input data through the screen Choose the type Monitor if you wish to just display a changing value on a screen for Operator Monitoring Use data type Input Monitor to define a data type to be both User Input and Monitor Note that only monitor fields on a screen will be continuously monitored at the specified Sample Time and updated on screen by the Runtime For faster screen updates you should keep the number of monitored fields as small as possible and or use as large a sample ti
397. pes ED Control Cent Configurations gt EF i l A Configurations SMA VAMO eee Troubleshoot Scripts Amo LOEren Bi cle Troubleshoot Scripts ll Asia ere a ee eee oe tions scr El Demo Sample Applica oF tE Jj Palm Application Watlow scr SE ess E Palm TempMonitor scr Palm TrendDisplay scr z gt MO Arreliastinoa Clanata wv Milans mind m Mj PC Frnzan s CE Hranzane 1 ws amp Y o o Licensed to E SOFTWARE Licensed to a m SOFTWARE My Name d Bi INC My Name dl E INC My Company My Company Figure 2 10 Design gt Screens Thumbnails View and List View The Design gt Screens command shows all the screens included in the selected project Demo in our example as Thumbnail bitmaps or in a list If you right click on any screen in the preview panel you will see a popup menu of options New Screen and Edit Screen Double clicking on a screen in the preview panel invokes the Screen Designer Section 4 and allows the screen objects to be viewed and edited Note Screen editing access may be restricted to designated users via Login password control in the User Manager Section 2 4 2 InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 6 The InstantHMI Screen Designer allows you to assign tags from the Tag Database to any data display objects you include on the screen If the desired tag definition is not already in the Tag Database then you may create a tag on the fly usin
398. ponding panel indicator will show up The ROW and COL panels identify the mouse cursor position Row shows row line number in the report template and Col shows the column character position number on the current line 5 2 4 Insert Spool File Insert a spooled report file Page Break F5 Start a new page Spool File Report Designer supports the special data format Spool file Spooling is a very powerful feature used in data logging and reporting Spool reports are exactly like printer reports the only difference is that they are printed on a virtual printer that is written to a disk file This feature is covered briefly here with a more detailed discussion in Sections 5 2 5 and 5 3 The Insert gt Spool File command is used to include spooled report files written earlier to disk in your printer report Spool files can not be inserted in other spool record templates When using this command you must enter the spool template File ID For example type in 5 for File ID if you wish to include in your printer report the spooled report SPOOL S05 corresponding to the fifth spool template in your project Of course you must create the spool record template to generate the spooled report SPOOL S05 at a later time using Report Designer InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 IHMIRPT Report Designer Page 5 7 Data Specification Tag ID Tag Names New Spool Register Tag Manager Field Width Format F
399. pt Editor Page 7 6 GetTag Tag Name This function returns the value of the tag specified by Tag Name Example a GetTag Local201 where Local201 is a defined tagname This example will get the current value of Tag Local201 and place the value into variable a SetTag Tag Name Value This function can be used to set the value specified by Value of the tag specified by Tag Name Example a SetTag Local201 100 where Local201 is a defined tag name This example will set the current value of tag Local201 to a value of 100 GetRegisterlnt Address Bit Station This function returns the integer value stored in the register specified by the four function parameters Address Bit Station see Section 3 3 3 Use the function 3 SetDataSource Data Source Name in the script prior to the line calling this function SetRegisterInt Address Bit Station Value This function can be used to write the Value in the register specified by the by the four function parameters Address Bit Station see Section 3 3 3 Use the function 3 SetDataSource Data Source Name in the script prior to the line calling this function GetByte Address Byte Station This function can be used to read the value stored in the low byte Byte 0 or high byte Byte 1 of the register at specified Address Station Use the function 3 SetDataSource Data Source Na
400. ption from the View menu is used to set the size of the snap grid Use the Format menu to dress up your objects as desired The Objects gt Data Object menu is utilized to include data items on your screen to enable you to enter data through the screen or monitor data on screen at runtime The Tabbing Order from the Options menu allows you to set your own tabbing order for data entry fields Screen Designer uses many distinct mouse cursors each including a pointer with an object attached depending on the tool selected The tip of the arrow indicates mouse positions in the design area of the screen A simple arrow is used to select objects and to indicate Menu choices At start the default cursor selected by you will appear in the design area and its position will be indicated on the Status Bar Screen Creation Process Summary Create Text and Graphic Objects Use the Status Bar as a guide to position the cursor on the screen at any specific x y coordinates Status Bar shows the object selected Use the Main Menu Object choices or the Tool Palette or the Tool Bar buttons to enter Text draw Box Line Circles etc and obtain the desired layout for the screen Create Ol Widgets and other Data Objects Pick and place widgets from the Widgets Palette or use the Objects gt Data Object or Objects gt Object Assembly menu to define data fields on your screen and tie them to your PLC or other I O devices supported by InstantHMI You may also choose
401. r Example Suppose the physical variable is a voltage 1 056V Stored as milli volts scaled by a factor 10 1 056V 1056mV this represents the raw data value 1056 in the data register To display this variable as 1 056 on screen use the fixed integer format with number of decimals 3 This will cause the raw data value 1056 stored in the register to be displayed on screen as the fixed integer 1 056 with 3 decimal places which exactly matches the external physical variable Note that you should specify a Field Width to accommodate all the digits in the number 4 or more in this example Monitor Sample Time See Section 4 11 7 Graphic Format See Section 4 11 3 and Section 4 11 5 You can specify a Low High End Value for Graphical Widgets Sections 4 11 3 4 11 5 These limits are for display input purposes Setting a Low High end value for non graphic tags has no effect Tag Display Information for non PC Platforms Any tag may be associated with more than one display object The important parameters in the display object properties dialog Section 4 6 2 are included for convenience in the Tag Editor dialog in the Tag Display Information panel The information in this panel is used only when a pre formatted screen object requires the tag display information This is the case for example when the tag database is deployed on a Pocket PC platform Tag display information panel shows the default Field Width value of 5 which is co
402. r CP IP Links Repo Macro Editor R roubleshoot Scripts _ Troubleshoot Editor 3 2 IP Manager New Project New Project Dialog Remove Project Dialog Change Platform Select Platform Dialog User Profile Manager Project Protection Utility Deploy Deploy Retrieve Dialog ec na Historic Trend Utility S ag Database Tag Manager Datalog Events Datalog Events Dialog Message Groups Message Manager B Bi itmap Groups itmap Manager 7 7 ecipe Editor Project Screens Screen Designer Add Insert Remove Delete Dialog Printer Report Report Designer Assign Remove Templates Delete Dialog S E Configurations Configuration Editor T S Spool Reports Templates 2 Emulate Target Runtime Engine Emulation 2 2 PC Runtime Engine _____ Run Reports Reports Activate Activation Utility User Manual_ Documentation Manual Adobe Acrobat Viewer Quick Start Quick Start Guide Figure 2 3 Project Functions Associated Project Elements and Design Tools ove Project Special Tags Print Control Tags Tag Manager Add Remove Dialog Spool Control Tags S ipe Enable T rts rts p 2 1 Help The LaunchPad Help command displays program version information Figure 2 4 and also provides three buttons Activate User Manual and Quick Start InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 3 SP HMI PROJECT InstantHMI 5 0 Copyright 2000 2007 Softw
403. r Screen When you tap on the Data Monitor button on the Main Menu screen you will see a screen displaying a pull down list of available tag groups and four tag display fields Group Boiler 1 Variables w Boiler 1 Pressure ma URE Data Entry Boiler 1 Status Boiler Started i Enter Data w Boiler 1 Temperature x io Ea ea Figure 10 16 Data Monitor Screen PDA Tap on the pull down arrow 7 at the top to select one of the named tag groups or the un named lt All Tags gt group Each tag display field consists of two lines of information pertaining to the selected tag from your tag database The first line displays the Tag name and a small pull down arrow which you can tap to select a different tag from your tag group to be associated with the tag display field The second line displays the data value associated with the tag A three position button labeled M C is provided on the tag display field with M monitor as its default position Tap on the I position to input a data value in the memory address associated with the tag You will see a Data Entry dialog box on your screen Enter the new data value and tap the OK button to make the change or tap the Cancel button to retain the old data value If you tap the M position on the I M C button the communication driver incorporated in InstantHMI for your controller will read once the current value in the memory address associated with th
404. r left side aligns with the left side of the third box When two objects are overlapping then you may select one of them and click on the Move to Front or Move to Back command to achieve the desired effect Any object that is hidden by other objects in front of it may be moved to the front of the screen Just select the hidden object and then click on the Move to Front command You may also select the object in front and then click on the Move to Back command to reveal the objects hidden behind it These tools are also helpful when you decide to draw an object underneath another object already on screen 4 4 View The View menu offers the following commands to customize the view of the Screen Designer design windows to suit your preferences Grid Set grid spacing and Hide show Grid lines Tool Bar Hide or show Tool Bar Style Bar Hide or show Style Bar Status Bar Hide or show Status Bar Tool Palette Hide or show Tool Palette Widget Palette Hide or show Widget Palette Clipboard Palette Hide or show Clipboard Palette Keypad Hide or show Keypad reserved The Grid command pops up a dialog box to specify the horizontal x and vertical y grid dimensions When objects are sized or moved they are aligned to the nearest grid location that is not greater than the current mouse pointer location This option can be used to help you align text and other objects visually on screen You may turn on or turn off the on screen grid display to help y
405. r the LED indicator in each of its states In addition you may also include a Flash attribute for any LED state s The Flash InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 53 attribute makes the LED alternate flash between its OFF state color and the flash color Use the preview panel radio buttons to simulate the LED behavior in each of the defined states Click on Done button to change the LED parameters or the X Cancel button to retain the old parameters and return to the display object properties dialog box You may choose to create animated V H Bar V H Meter and Plot You have complete freedom in creating a frame around these objects including shading hash marks and other annotation You add your annotation making sure to stay outside the active area covered by the plots bars or meters Samples showing Plot Bar etc objects are included in the Demo project Select Gauge to have a dynamic needle moving in a circular arc enclosed in a box on the screen You will see the following dialog box for Gauge Properties Ea Gaune Propertias ES A Limits i En Limits twit i Limits High Value 100 30 High Walle 100 Angle 300 High Walk 100 angie Low Value 100 O Low Value 0 Angle 2 Low Value 0 Angle 180 Ranes f A J Ranges Labels ma Ranges Labels High High cio me E High High tal 10 Monee y LJ x High High as 10 ie Nano r Gage Hi Tor i
406. rae Screen Elements Recipes 2 Group Functions HA DESIGN pes Screens Thumbnails Demo Recipe Tag Name Tag Value 6 New Recipe Screens List EWM Aeration Tank 45 EWM Settling Tank ee E EWM Clarifier 65 EWM Grit Tank wee El EWM Grit Tank 78 EWM Clarifier Recipes EVVM Aeration Tank i Configurations EW M Settling Tank 56 Delete Recipe Troubleshoot Scripts il Demo Recipe2 Bitmaps Copy Recipe Recipe Functions Recipe Manager Edit Tag Value Remove Tagi E SOFTWARE HORIZONS dE sinpli Add Tag s S Figure 3 20 Recipe Manager PC You will see the Recipe Manager dialog box showing a pull down list of recipe groups defined for your project Use Recipe Manager Group Functions to design edit and manage the recipe groups associated with the tag database to suit your project needs To define a new recipe group name click on the New Recipe button The tags from the tag database included in the recipe definition together with their data values for the recipe are displayed in a table in the Recipe Manager dialog To include a new tag in the recipe definition click on the Add Tag s button select the tag s from the tag database displayed and click Done To edit the recipe tag value which defaults to zero click on the tag to select it in the table of recipe tags click on the Edit Tag Value button and then enter the tag value for the recipe You may also doubl
407. rations Loop Time Derivative Ez Operations Loop Dead Band E Operations Loop Open Loop Set Point DEF Operations Loop Error Status Ez Operations Loop Error Clear InstantHMl Watch List Parameters ES InstantHMl Watch List Properties Watch List Groups Title EZ Operations Loop Watch List Add Remove Group from Tag DB llene Background Title Tags in Watch List Group Columns RAA J Tag Mame Ez Operations Loop Closed Loop Set Poir 5 Insert Tag Value TA nese ote ma Tole Md Mi ie Add Tag Remove Tag i w Remove Properties Figure 4 20 Watch List Object Parameters and Properties Dialogs in Screen Designer InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 21 In the Parameters dialog click on Properties button to access the Properties dialog which allows you to setup the tabular tag display columns properties useful at runtime The default columns that must be included are Tag Name and Tag Value Other available Columns are e R W Read Write or Read only tag Date Time High Limit Low Limit Etc The order of the included columns is shown on the right Click on additional column name of interest on the left and then the Add button Use the Insert button to add the column before a selected column already included for the tabular display These are the columns of data included in the Watch List at runtime You may enter title text for t
408. rd location will contain the year YYYY Date will be displayed on screen in the format MM DD YY You should allow for a field width of 8 or more for date display Screen Designer defaults to a width of 10 to accommodate the default Date format MM DD YYYY You may include date fields on multiple screens make sure to use the same addresses Only the addresses for the date field on the current screen will be used to update the memory addresses you specify Select Time format if you wish to display the Computer System Time on your screen The Time format is valid only if you choose Data Type Monitor Note that Time format causes the runtime to constantly update the PLC registers or Local Memory you choose and also the changing fields on the screen For faster screen updates you should use Local Memory with Time format unless you wish to transfer computer system time information into your PLC registers The system time will be read from the Computer and stored in three consecutive PLC Registers or Local memory locations starting with the address you specify for the field with Time format The first location will contain the hour HH the second location will contain the minutes MM and the third location will contain the seconds SS Time will be displayed in the format HH MM SS You may include time fields on multiple screens make sure to use the same addresses Only the addresses for the time field on the current screen will be used to update the Memory a
409. rd protected Passwords may be assigned to Read or Modify Message database you will be asked to Enter Password Depending on your password you will be allowed to view or modify the tag database Once you enter your password and tap OK you will see the Message Groups screen Message Groups Group Names IinstantHivi Alarm Logic Alarm Message CP Enter Password Alarm Silencing Analog Sutput Units Autos Manual Control Method Decimal Places Password Heat Control Method IE Figure 3 16 Message Database Manager PDA You select a Message Group on this screen by tapping on the Message Group from the list of groups shown you will see the selected group hi lighted The Tabbed Scroll Bar See Section 3 provides rapid scrolling even when you have a very long list of messages Tap on the New Group button to enter a new Message Group name Tap on the Del Group button to delete the selected message Group from the list of Message Groups Tap on the Done button to leave the Message Groups screen Message Database CEA Group Boiler 1 Messages O Boiler Stopped 1 Boiler Started 2 Boiler Error 3 Boiler Temp High d Boiler Terp Low Figure 3 17 Message Editor PDA Tap on the Edit Group button to edit the selected message group You will then see a Messages screen with the selected message group name together with all the messages for this group Use the scroll arrows on the right to view all the messages
410. rectangle for an ActiveX object is like any other object on the screen You may select move or resize the object on the screen Editing ActiveX Objects To avoid confusion with non ActiveX object commands example Edit gt Copy Object the Activex Edit commands are accessed only by right clicking the ActiveX container rectangle they are not accessible from the Edit menu a Ole Acthves Tesi scr Fie Fat View Tag Data D da 5 1 1 ATA A A J incest few Actives ALLET E ta Figure 4 34 Example Screen with Inserted ActiveX Control Object LED Figure 4 34 shows an Example Screen with Inserted ActiveX Control Object LED To access the ActiveX edit properties that have been exposed to the container by the ActiveX control application DAS in our example right click on the ActiveX control object to pop up its ActiveX Edit Functions as listed below Copy Copy the selection and put it on clipboard Delete Delete selected object Properties Object gt Example DAS_LED Class ActiveX Properties Animate Control Assign InstantHMI Tags Scripts to Control Object Figure 4 35 ActiveX Edit Functions Copy Use this option to copy the ActiveX object After the object is selected hold down the left mouse button and drag the outline of the bounding rectangle to the desired location Release the mouse button to finish Hit the ESC key to deselect all selected objects Delete Use this command or the Del key to
411. reens to enhance the operator comfort and effectiveness using subsequent iterations as necessary Save your application screens in the Project directory using names of your choice to suit application functions Note At runtime the operator may right click on the screen to access a pop up menu this menu includes the option of displaying or hiding the Status Bar bottom of screen Title Bar top of screen Menu Bar below Title Bar and Tool Bar below Menu Bar While creating your screens you should either not use the space intended for status bar tool bar for your objects or be prepared for some portion of screen to be hidden when status bar tool bar appears in the runtime screen view STEP 2 Setup Click on the LaunchPad gt Setup button and verify that the project setup parameters are as desired Section 9 3 Be sure the Driver Name parameter in data source matches your PLC driver Create as many data sources as necessary to match the communication links and controller network Note If your installation does not include the options you need then you will not be able to access some of the InstantHMI functionality If you only have the demo version of Runtime Engine you do not need a driver Use Screen Designer also for Screen Passwords Exit Screen Designer You may skip Steps 3 5 in the early stages Use the Setup command to setup User password security levels to Administer Design and Run your project STEP 3 Reports Use R
412. rint command then report 2 PRT will be printed Of course the format and content of the report is totally flexible and determined by you Note that using the SPOOL command in conjunction with the PRINT command the operator can produce totally different reports to suit diagnostic or other special needs 5 4 2 Using Reports gt Spool Menu at Runtime If you click on Report gt Spool menu choice when you are looking at screen XX at runtime the effect is same as setting the spool register Upper Byte 00 Lower Byte XX The Runtime Engine will add a data record according to the template XX SPL in the spool report file SPOOL SXX 5 4 3 Using Spooled Data in Printer Reports Data spooled in spool report files SPOOL SXX may be included in printer reports using the Insert gt Spool File command in Report Designer Note that the added functionality listed in Figure 5 16 and Figure 5 17 are available even when you use the Spool file data format The File ID together with your choice of Spool Register Function from the pull down list in the data specification dialog Section 5 2 4 generate the equivalent Spool Register word While printing a report which calls for the inclusion of data in Spool_file format only the existing spools SPOOL SXX will be used InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Macro Editor Page 6 1 6 Macro Editor The Runtime Engine enables the operator to perform his project tasks
413. rizontal bar seen by the operator The color of this bar will be the Fill Color you enter in the Display Object Properties dialog box Note that you may annotate outside the box you have selected for V H Bar any way you choose using scale hash marks division labels etc When you create a Bar object you will see on screen a sample Bar which will be replaced at runtime by the true Bar Tip Use the Bar with a Scale in an object assembly to construct your own custom Bar object InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 54 wH Bar Properties Preview Vertical C Horizontal Limits High Value Low wale Bar Size Width 20 Height 150 Fill Color Figure 4 60 V H Bar Prpoerties Select V H Meter to place a vertical horizontal meter on screen which lights up strips of Green Yellow and Red to indicate the value in the associated memory address You will see the following V H Meter Properties dialog box Meter Properties y Meter HMeter Ee Limits High value 100 Low Value 0 Ranges Red Range 9 10 i me Yellow Range 30 Green Range 9 60 f a Misc Mo of Blocks 10 width 20 Height 150 Figure 4 61 H V Meter Properties Enter the meter width height data values for the low end and high end Low Green range Middle Yellow range High Red range and the number of blocks strips of light in the meter Click on Done button t
414. rm set points incorre Recipes ps Power Alarm sides incorrect Configurations Power Unit Errors Controller in diagnostic Troubleshoot Scripts Bitmaps Unit Errors Corrective Steps Check the alarm sides setting Add Cause Troubleshoot Editor SH IE os aq ga 4 Wi inc amie 4 inc Figure 2 12 Design gt Troubleshoot Scripts and Troubleshoot Editor Dialog Troubleshoot editor has four hierarchical levels for script customization e Topics e Symptoms e Possible Causes and e Corrective Steps Topics identify different subsystems or areas in the application that are prone to have problems Click on the Topics entry field to enter a New Topic as shown and click on Add Topic button Note Add Topic button will be labeled as Add Symptom Add Cause or Add Step depending on context Use the Add Remove and Edit buttons at the chosen hierarchical level of the script for script customization The text entry field is below the corresponding list Topics Symptoms Possible Causes To add an entry enter its text and click Add To remove an entry select the entry from the displayed list and click Remove To edit an entry select the entry and enter the new text and click on Edit button The text entry field for Corrective Steps is scrollable to allow detailed multi line entries Also one or more
415. rn to its state after a momentary transition to the On or Off state Click on the button in the preview panel to verify desired functionality Button height and width are better adjusted visually on screen The on off bitmap will be re sized so as to fit the button size Note that you can tie a button to a bit memory up and down values must be 0 or 1 or register memory up and down values may be any numbers Click on Done button to change the button parameters or Cancel X button to retain the old parameters and return to the data specification dialog box Select Fader to place a fader slider on the screen The Fader is functionally equivalent to the Windows scroll bar The operator can enter any integer values by dragging the slide on the fader up or down If you double click on the fader the Data display object specs dialog is brought up Click on properties and you will see the following Fader Properties dialog Figure 4 50 Enter the Limits values for high end and low end and the major ticks and minor ticks for label spacing Select fader colors Background and Slider as desired Check border if desired Click on Done button to change the fader parameters or X Cancel button to retain the old parameters and return to the Display Object Properties dialog box Click on Fader preview to test the slide operation at runtime You may also create a Fader by using the Widgets palette Click on the Fader Widget note that the cursor changes sh
416. roject ini file in your Project folder These lines are excerpted from Project ini file IHMIRT RUNTIME _SCRIPT_SAMPLE_TIME 1000 SCRIPT_EXEC_DURATION PERCENT 50 You may change it to any value between 10 and 90 to suit your application Scripts which require longer executing time than allotted as a of allocated Sample Time will continue with their execution at the subsequent sample time s Most short scripts will finish execution in the allotted time 50 of Sample Time by default For longer scripts the associated Sample Time and the Script Execution Duration determine the total time needed to finish executing the scripts In the script editor text window directly edit the script statements move the cursor freely to any position in the script You may directly Append or Insert new source lines or Edit or Delete an existing source line in your script file To Import Scripts from Text files use File gt Import and select the text file containing your script source lines which will then appear in the Script Text editor window You may then edit validate and save the script To Export a Script you have edited in the Script editor to a text file use File gt Export and specify the text file name Of course to Import script source text from a text file you may open it in Windows Notepad use Edit gt Copy to copy selected script lines and in the InstantHMI Script Editor use Edit gt Paste to get your script lines
417. rosoft Access Driver mdb MS Access 97 Database Microsoft Access Driver mdb MS Access Database Microsoft Access Driver mdb Text Files Microsoft Text Driver txt csv An ODBC User data source stores information about how to connect to the indicated data provider A User data source is only visible to you and can only be used on the current machine Cancel Appl Help Figure 13 4 ODBC DSN Setup Step 3 You should see the User DSN tab dialog if not click the User DSN tab Step 4 Next click the Add button A Create New Data Source dialog box will appear InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Historic Trend Utility Page 13 4 Create New Data Source ODEC Microsoft Access Setup Data Source Name InstantHM Datalogs Description DSN used by IHMIT rend Utility Cancel Database Database Help System Database Driver para o Microsoft Visual FoxPro Microsoft Access T reiber mdb Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Microsoft dBase YFP Driver dbf Microsoft dB ase Treiber dbf Microsoft Excel Driver xls Microsoft Excel Treiber xls Microsoft FoxPro Driver dbf Miarroba VIL Meissner 1 ARFI Mopran apo None C Database Cancel Espa Options gt gt Figure 13 5 ODBC DSN Setup Step 4 Select the Microsoft Access Driver mdb and click Finish A ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box will appear Ent
418. rovide methods and notifications that the InstantHMI containers can call and respond to We recommend that you test your control with InstantHMI containers for possible use in your application lf a control requires the support of a component category to perform its designated function that category should be entered as a requirement in the Windows Registry to ensure that an inappropriate control will not be inserted in an InstantHMI screen document serving as a container The Screen Designer as a container offers many ways to setup the ActiveX control e Insert ActiveX Control objects into the screen document e Edit the control properties that have been exposed to the container by the control s Property Dialog and by interacting with the control in place not all controls support in place activation e Setup Animation of the ActiveX object if the control has exposed interfaces for the container to interact with the properties of the control The basis for animating the control may involve assigning InstantHMI Tags to Control Properties and designating Script execution to be triggered by Control s property change events The actual animation will take place in the Runtime Engine Creating ActiveX Objects The InstantHMI Screen Designer and PC Runtime Engine are ActiveX containers The Screen Designer as a container will allow you to insert ActiveX Control objects into the screen document Use the Objects gt ActiveX Object menu to inse
419. rrent screen smaller number of alarm check fields smaller number of data log fields and larger sampling times lead to better performance You should keep this in mind while designing your screen We suggest you use Date or Time tied to local memory as a monitor field if you have no other monitor fields on screen Example application screens are shown in Figure 9 4 We recommend that before setting up your own application you review the 2 minute Free Demo for ideas in setting up your project elements We recommend that for self training on screen design controller interface and project design you refer to the separate document Quick Start Guide See Section 1 4 for a brief description of the Water Supply System application used in the Quick Start Guide for illustration Additional training and complete Application setup with screens reports messages alarm logging etc is available at a reasonable cost from Software Horizons e e e e e e e e e a ee ee ee ee ee Figure 9 4 Sample Application Screen Temp Zones amp Sample Application Screen Elevator Your Project directory should have the tag database screens report templates spool record templates macro files script files etc you created for the project Make sure your data source and communication setup is the way you want for your application The standard setup elements are discussed in Section 9 3 Make sure that the Human Machine Interface hardware computer
420. rrow so you can move the active window or dialog box with the arrow keys Press the Enter key after moving the window to desired position This command is not available if you maximize the window Size Control Menu Use this command to display a four headed arrow so you can size the active window with the arrow keys After the pointer changes to the four headed arrow e Press one of the Direction keys left right up or down arrow key to move the pointer to the border you want to move e Press a Direction key to move the border e Press Enter when the window is the size you want InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 3 This command is not available if you maximize the window You may also use the mouse and drag the size bars at the corners or edges of the window Minimize Control Menu Use this command to reduce the Screen Designer window to a task button on the task bar You may also click the Minimize button on the title bar Maximize Control Menu Use this command to enlarge the active window to fill the available space Click the maximize icon on the title bar or double click the title bar Close Control Menu Use this command to close the active window or dialog box Double clicking a Control menu box is the same as choosing the Close command ALT F4 closes the Screen Designer window or dialog box 4 1 2 Status Bar The status bar is displayed at the bottom
421. rs These features which are described further below allow you to e Build shapes from boxes and circles whose colors can change in response to changing data values e Plot trends of up to four data items within a user defined plot box e Fill areas with different colors in response to changing data values e Create vertical and horizontal bars meters and gauges that respond on a percentage basis to changing data values e Display different bitmaps corresponding to different values in the memory address you specify This feature can be used to create eye catching animation The sample demo provided with InstantHMI demonstrates this animation on the waste water screen see Section 4 11 2 Input Widgets include Button Fader Knob or Spinner as discussed in Section 4 11 3 An input widget on the screen facilitates operator input of data values analog or discrete through the screen using only a mouse and no keyboard Monitor Widgets include changing colored Box Circle Plot Trend Graphic Fill Vertical Bar Horizontal Bar Gauge LED Vertical Meter and Horizontal Meter as discussed in Section 4 11 5 Input Monitor Widgets define a data type to be both input widget and monitor widget 4 11 2 Text Data Format Many different data formats are supported in InstantHMI some formats are valid only for some of the data types User Input Monitor Input Monitor as indicated by the entry Y in tables below for Text Graphic Data Displ
422. rt a new ActiveX object on your screen When you choose this menu command you will see the Insert ActiveX Object dialog box shown For inserting ActiveX control object the Create Control option must be selected For inserting OLE objects proceed as discussed in Section 4 6 8 lnsert Activex Object Object Type C Create New w Create from Fil DAS SmartButton Class DAS Switch Class z DAS SwitchKnob Class Create Contral Das SwitchSlider Class eBLYD Actives Control Add Control Inserts a new D45_Enob Class object into your i document Figure 4 33 Insert ActiveX Object Result If you do not see the ActiveX control object you wish to insert on the screen click on the Add Control button and browse to locate the control usual file type is DLL or ocx and add it so it will show up in the list Select the ActiveX control object type you wish to insert in the Screen and click OK This will create a place holder rectangle container for the object type you selected example DAS Knob Class If you right click on this rectangle you will access the ActiveX Verbs menu appropriate for the inserted ActiveX object Section 4 6 11 When finished creating the control InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 31 object return to the Screen Designer the ESC key would usually work or you may click outside the ActiveX object on the screen The container
423. rties lx General Location Security Endpoints Identity The following settings allow DCOM to locate the correct computer for this application If you make more than one selection then DCOM uses the first applicable one Client applications may overnde your selections Y Run application on this computer FT Run application on the following computer MAT Erowse Cancel Apply Figure 12 13 Configuring DCOM for OPCEnum Steps E InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHM OPC Page 12 8 Step F Click on the Security tab Select Use Default for Launch and Activation Permissions and Access Permissions and Select Customize for the Configuration Permissions Click the Edit button under Configuration Permissions to edit permissions OpcEnum Properties lx General Location Security Endpoints Identity Launch and Activation Permissions amp Use Default C Customize Access Permissions C Customize Configuration Permissions C Use Default f Customize Edit Carcel apo Figure 12 14 Configuring DCOM for OPCEnum Steps F Step G For Everyone that may launch OPCEnum set permissions to Full Control Allow and Read Allow Click OK to save changes Change Configuration Permission Ex Security Group or user names Everpone ER INTERACTIVE ER NETWORK EE SYSTEM Add
424. rtion Check the transparent color box and click on the color button you may now move the cursor on the bitmap to choose one of the colors on the bitmap as the transparent color or enter the RGB numbers for the desired transparent color Note a transparent color allows the background beneath the transparent color pixels to show through InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 19 Select Bitmap El Select Transparent Color Bitmaps Instant LO DOC NotS elected bmp DOC Selected bmp E Elbow DownLett bmp Elbow _D ovn ight brp Elbow _UpLeft bmp Elbow _UpR ight bmp help T ouched bmp help Lntouched bmp gt Le sant H T HomeNotS elected bmp HomeSelected bmp IHMIS plash bmp lago bp bmp logo white bkg bmp Main Menu bmp Cancel NewS creen bmp Olor hl tT mlak bee x Bitmap Properties Bitmap File logo white bkg bmp Select Original Size 74 x 20 Width 74 Height 20 Reset Selected RGB 255 255 255 Color if Maintain Aspect Ratio c Figure 4 18 Screen Designer Select Bitmap and its Properties Screen Designer will display your bitmap on screen To reposition the bitmap object click to select it and drag to the desired location To resize the bitmap select it and then resize as desired To restore the bitmap to its original size click Reset Note that Screen Designer also allo
425. s The figure below summarizes the role played by the ODBC drivers using Data Source Name to link the ODBC database with the Historic Trending Utility Note Do not confuse Data Source Name here in the ODBC setup with the name of the Data Source for communications discussed elsewhere Section 2 3 5 InstantHMI Runtime Engines Runtime Engines generate Datakeys LaunchPad recebes Datakeys InstantHMI LaunchPad LaunchPad writes Dataksys to database using specified Sh DSN Data Source Name InstantHM Datalogs HIT rend reads ODBC Database records using specified DSN IHMITrend Figure 13 1 Historic Trending and ODBC Database InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Historic Trend Utility Page 13 2 13 1 Installation Considerations 13 1 1 Install IHMlTrend The IHMITrend Historic Trending utility is included as part of the standard InstantHMI software download delivered over the Internet Step 1 Make sure the InstantHMI LaunchPad software is installed on your PC if not do so first see Appendix A 2 This will also install IHMITrend utility Step 2 optional Verify that the following files are in your InstantHMI LaunchPad installation folder usually C lIHMI 5 IHMITREND QCBASED QCBSEF QCRTD Required DLL QCRTF Required DLL WCT32D Required DLL Step 3 optional Verify that the following files are in your InstantHMI Project Datalog folder usua
426. s Toolbar Hide or show Tool Bar Status Bar Hide or show Status Bar Click on the Toolbar option to turn off or turn on the Toolbar menu option If a check mark appears then the tool bar would be displayed Status Bar selection works similar to the Tool Bar selection 13 2 5 Window Menu When you click on this menu you will have the following choices New Window Cascade Tile Arrange Icons Untitled IHMITrend is implemented as an MDI Multiple Document Interface application This means that each of your profiles will run in its own window You may Cascade or Tile these windows on your screen minimize them to task bar icons etc You may also select the window screen to focus on 13 2 6 Help Menu The Help menu offers the following information about IHMITrend InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Historic Trend Utility Page 13 9 Index Displays an index of Historic Trend Topics Using Help Provides general instructions on using the Help system About IHMITrend Displays the version number of IHMITrend application Click on Help About IHMITrend to see the release information Version and Copyright 13 3 Application Data for Historic Trending 13 3 1 Application Example We will use a Waste Transfer facility application as an example to illustrate how you may use IHMITrend in your application In this example six variables are of interest and they are set up as shown in ta
427. s Alarm 1 Low Set Point 32 100 E Ez Operations Alarm 1 High Set Point 300 100 Ez Operations Alarm 1 Clear Request 100 Ez Operations Alarm 1 Silence Request 100 MITO Ez Operations Alarm 1 Clearable Status 100 MO Ez Operations Alarm 1 Silenced Status 100 MOD Ez Operations Alarm 1 Latched Status 100 MOD Ez Operations Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Working Process Value 76 0229 100 MO Ez Operations Alarm 1 4larm 1 Working Set Point 67 9456 100 Ez Operations Alarm 2 Low Set Point 32 100 Ez Operations Alarm 2 High Set Point 300 100 E Operations Alarm 2 Clear Request 100 Ez Operations Alarm 2 Silence Request 100 MIO Ez Operations Alarm 2 Clearable Status 100 MO Ez Operations Alarm 2 Silenced Status 100 MITO Ez Operations Alarm 2 Latched Status 100 DPE Operations Alarm 2 Working Process Yalue 100 7 OOO OOCco oo A a PE Operations Alarm 2 Working Set Point 67 9456 ii gt Figure 4 21 Watch List Object Assembly in Runtime 4 6 4 Object Assembly In the context of Object Assemblies there are several topics of interest as tabulated below InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 22 Topic Making Object Assembly Section 4 3 6 Breaking Object Assembly Section 4 3 7 Object Assembly Library Object Assembly Properties Runtime Assignment Example Watch List in an Object Assembly Section 4 6 3 Object Assembly Library Use the Object Assembly tool accessed from the S
428. s Daily 071011 l0g Alarm Log Alarms Daily 07 1008 log Alarm Log Alarms Daily 07 1007 log Figure 2 40 Project Runtime Reports View Log Click on the desired Project Report or Log Element to select it and click on View Report Log button This will open the selected report using the appropriate utility Note Pad for text reports logs IHMITrend exe to view historic trend Section 13 data logged in any runtime engine and transferred to the LaunchPad system etc You may access various logs including User Event Log in InstantHMI LaunchPad and Datalogs transferred by ActiveSync HotSync from InstantHMI runs on Pocket PC Palm OS nodes Access privilege may be needed to access some of the logs shown in the dialog box Retrieving Datalog Data from Pocket PC or Windows CE Suppose your project run on the target Pocket PC or CE platform logged data for several tags over a period of time and you wish to retrieve the logged data and view it in Microsoft Excel for example Click on the Runtime Reports select Datalog Data and click on Retrieve Logs button Figure 2 40 If the target platform is properly linked to the LaunchPad PC then the log files for each of the tags from the target platform will be retrieved The log for each tag from the target InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 23 platform in its native idb format is appended into a single idb fi
429. s Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI TCP IP Page 11 3 11 2 1 TCP IP InstantHMI Server Node The tags and display objects for the server node are exactly what we have discussed in earlier sections Sections 4 6 4 11 After the runtime engine is initialized if it has a server task that is it provides read write access to controller data from other client nodes it will begin listening for connections from Runtime Engine clients When a client tries to connect with the server there may be some type of authentication involving user name and password passed between them to ensure the connection is one that should be accepted or not If the connection is accepted the client will ask the server for its available Data Sources the server will send a list of available data sources and the client will match its remote data source name with an appropriate data source name from the server The client will then send a list of active tags referencing the server as the remote IHMI Node which the server will then add to its list of monitor tags When the server detects that the data has changed it will send the changed data to the requesting client 11 2 2 TCP IP InstantHMI Client Node The tags and display objects for the client node are similar to what we have discussed in earlier sections Sections 4 6 4 11 However one big difference is that the remote Data Source is attached to a remote server The server is identified by selecting the Comm Link as an
430. s register may be used for example to display an Alarm Screen when an alarm condition is detected Appropriate alarm messages can be displayed on a designated alarm screen using the Message format for display data object see Section 4 11 2 Update Enable Tag The Update Enable Tag may be used as a Super password for enabling or disabling Operator access for updating the screen input parameters as it provides a means for the PLC ladder logic to control change of input parameters through the InstantHMI interface A value of 2 in this register will signal InstantHMI that the Operator is allowed read write access depending on his password to observe and to change input field data values on any screen A value of 1 in this register will signal InstantHMI the Operator is not allowed to change input field data values as he is allowed only a Read access to monitor the field A value of O in this register disables both Read access to monitor and write access to modify any fields that is no access to any screen with input fields will be provided Of course there is also a separate Password protection for each screen that you could also use see Section 4 9 3 You may eliminate use of this parameter completely in this case it will be assumed that update enable register value is always 2 Note that to use this super password feature effectively the authorized operator supervisor should have a way of modifying the register value A hardware key could be
431. s tab allows you to set the patterns for Pen Solid Dashed Dotted Dash and one Dot or Dash and two Dots and Fill Object Hatching Horizontal Vertical Forward Diagonal Backward Diagonal Cross Diagonal Cross or None The Customization gt View tab allows you to set the visibility of Status Bar Tool Bar Style Bar Tool Palette Widget Palette and InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 39 Keypad In addition it also displays the editable location of the Tool Palette Widget Palette and the Keypad on the Screen Designer window 4 9 3 Password Option This command pops up a dialog box to set password and read write access attributes for the current screen You may enter any password in the combo list box provided click on the Read and or write access check box and click on the Add button Read access is required by the runtime to display data on the current screen Write access is required for input data on screen to be written to PLC or other memory locations You will see the list of passwords for the current screen in the list box To review the current access privileges for a password select it in the password list box and observe the Read Write access check box To delete a password select it in the list box and click on the Delete button Click on OK when you are finished with the password option Set Password and Attributes 3 Enter Password OK Operator E A Add
432. s to compare CFG 1 Current Configuration CFG 2 Fast Config T Linearization Temp Units 10 of 109 tags mismatched Select mismatched tag to review Sensor Type CFG 1 tag value ic Infosense Point3 TZ ALA A O Figure 10 8 Compare Configurations PDA Compare Configurations You may compare any two saved configurations Also any configuration may be compared with the Current Configuration in the controller To proceed select CFG 1 and CFG 2 from the available saved configurations Tap on Compare button to compare the two selected configurations If the two configurations do not match then you will see the number of mismatched tags Select any mismatched tag from pull down list Review the associated tag values You may match a specific tag value from CFG 1 to that for CFG 2 or you may tap on a tag field to enter a new value You will not be allowed to modify tag values of the Current Configuration which is meant to reflect the configuration in the controller Return Tap on the Return button to return to the previous Menu screen 10 2 6 Setup When you tap on the Setup button you will see the following dialog box Tap on Lil for help tips on this Setup popup screen Database Info Figure 10 9 Setup Menu PDA Comm Setup Tap on the Comm Setup button to access the Comm Setup screen where you can select the communication link Serial cable Infrared IR Comm or TCP IP RF
433. s you also need to select a network Device Name from the pull down list to associate that Device Name with the tag If no device name has been defined click on Edit Device Name button to invoke the IP Manager which allows you to associate an IP Address Port Number to a Device Name Tag Definitions The Tag Definitions Memory Address Bit Station and Data Type completely specify the data source for the tag value The Data Type may be a single Bit 8 bit Byte 16 or 32 bit integers Int16 Int32 single float value 32 bits or double float value 64 bits or a String of 8 bit text bytes Check the Unsigned check box if the raw data is unsigned You may make any tag Read Only or allow both Read Write by the operator at runtime Register Bit Digital Input Digital Output Analog Input Analog Output Timer Preset Timer Current Counter Preset Counter Current Alias Tag Local Click on the Memory Type pull down list to select a memory type This list will depend on the communication driver for the controller identified in the Data Source Many different memory types are supported in InstantHMI By choosing the appropriate items from the Memory Type pull down list you connect the tagged data field on the screen with memory locations in your controller or Local memory provided in InstantHMl for your data items The discussion here is generic for all controller types See Appendix C Section XX XX driver number for your contr
434. s you to test the screen objects tied to controller tags Step 5 Test Screen in Runtime New Project Wizard a Water Supply System Status This wizard provides the quickest way to create an ANO STATUS H ll Project for your application a AF d Step 1 Create Mew Project TANKASTATUS Water Level Alarm State y step 2 Define Data Source Water Supply Comunity B S step 3 Identify Tags Ti step 4 Design Screen ng Step 5 Test in Runtime _ Run Screen Ten WELL Running Figure 2 28 New Project Wizard Step5 Test in Runtime Note To remove a project select it from the list of projects in the Setup gt Project dialog Figure 2 22 and then click on Remove Project button To change the target runtime platform select it from the list of projects in the Setup gt Project dialog Figure 2 22 and then click on Change Platform button 2 4 2 Setup gt Project gt Users Click on Setup gt Project gt Users button to access the User Profile Manager provided you have User Manager Access or you are the System Administrator User Profile Manager allows the creation of users with different access levels such as System Integrator Administrator Designer and Operator Each user level has default properties that are assigned to that access level You must ensure that the Require User Login box is checked otherwise no checks will be performed and the entire user password checking mechanism in Insta
435. screen To enable or disable this functionality you must define the following key in the IHMIRT section of your InstantHMI INI file Located in your Windows directory IHMIRT DATA_ENTRY_ON_TAB YES NO No matter what value you have for DATA_ENTRY_ON_TAB pressing the Enter key on the current field will always enter data Note You may include a Macro Key labeled as you wish for example Write Screen Data and attach this key to the macro function Screen Write discussed in Section 6 3 InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PC Page 9 18 Data Entry Using Mouse Only InstantHMI allows any screen to be set up with Input Widgets Buttons and Touch zones so that data entry discrete and analog can be done entirely with the help of a mouse without using the keyboard All that is needed is the click of a mouse to press a button or touch zone or drag a slide or turn a dial or toggle a switch Data Entry Using Keyboard and Mouse When your screen has usual integer or boolean data entry fields and also input widgets you may use the mouse to directly click on an input field no need to go through the Tabbing Order and enter your data User Feedback on Data Entry To enable or disable this functionality you must ADD or CHANGE the following key in the IHMIRT section of your InstantHMI INI file Located in your Windows directory IHMIRT BEEP_ON_DATA ENTRY YES NO When this k
436. screen being protected will be displayed briefly InstantHH ij Each screen being protected will be shown briefly Figure 2 31 Screen Protection To change the password for a protected project you must login with the old password and unprotect it select components to protect enter the new password and then protect the project again Note You may use the automatic re saving of screens and other selected project elements feature built in project protection to change platform and screen resolution Simply select a simple password to protect screens let the screens be protected and re saved Repeat the same resetting the password to no password Forgotten Password If the designer OEM or End User should forget his project protection password the OEM or Software Horizons as appropriate may be able to provide a temporary unlocking password that will be good for the day that it is issued It is preferable for the designer to maintain both a protected and unprotected version of their project to avoid the need for requesting a temporary password and any applicable service charge Protection Verification Among other things an InstantHMI project includes a mandatory master protection file A protection file must be present to run your project whether protected or unprotected This file includes information about the following items Version of the software used for protection OEM ID Time and date of protection Status
437. script variable and pass that variable as the second argument Value This function has no return value void ActiveXDoVerb VerbName This function issues the DoVerb VerbName request to the ActiveX control associated with the script This function has no return value void Example Assume the following script is attached to a OLE Wave Sound Sound Recorder Document object When the Tag PlaySound has the value 1 this script will cause the Sound Recorder to Play the associated wav file a GetTag PlaySound f a 1 SetTag PlaySound 0 ActiveXDoVerb Play ActiveXDoVerbld Verbld This function behaves exactly like ActiveXDoVerb VeroName and issues the DoVerb request using Verbld corresponding to the VerbName as described in Section 4 6 11 to the ActiveX control associated with the script This function has no return value void 2 Communications Functions cript Function Return Value etDataSoure DataSourceName S S S G S S d SetDataSource Data Source Name This function selects the specified Data Source Name from the list of data sources defined for the project for all subsequent communications in the current script All subsequent script functions in this script requiring a data source will use this specified data source itt Example SetDataSource ModbusDevice InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Scri
438. sh Wireless Network Adapter is configured for the address 192 168 0 201 You can change this address from your Handheld with the configuration utility that comes with the adapter InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 We recommend using the RF Kit as a standalone network not connected to any other network If you wish to connect your Wireless RF Kit to an existing network please contact your Network Administrator and or the Manufacturer of the product for assistance in configuring your equipment Controller Configuration Your Controller must have an available Ethernet port to connect to the Wireless RF Kit The Controller must be configured to use an IP address in the 192 168 0 XXX range in order to function properly if you are using the Controller with our pre configured Wireless Kit Instructions Step 1 Connect a 14ft Ethernet cable Item D from the first port 1 on the Hub Item C to the Access Point Item A Step 2 Connect another 14ft Ethernet cable from the second port on the Hub Item C to your Controller s Ethernet Port 10 Mbit Step 3 Connect power to the Ethernet Hub Step 4 Connect power to your Controller Step 5 Connect power to your Access Point Step 6 Insert the Compact Flash Wireless Network Adapter Item B into your Pocket PC s Compact Flash slot and turn the Pocket PC on InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PC P
439. splay of discrete or analog data for monitoring and data entry Some of the graphic features discussed here may not be available or may differ slightly on your implementation The default graphic format is no graphics i e Numeric data will be displayed on the Data Monitor Screen Section 10 2 2 The available graphic formats may be displayed on a Graphic Monitor Screen with small medium or large graphic widgets as illustrated below Select Graphic Format LED Monitor Widget to place an indicator light on the screen You can enter the LED trigger value in tag editor screen The LED assumes Green Color when the value in the associated memory address equals or exceeds the high end value and assumes Red Color when the value is below the low end value Fast Slow Dual Spinner Figure 3 14 Sample Graphic Widgets Select Graphic Format Button Input Monitor Widget to place a button on the screen The operator can toggle between two states Off and On Note that you can tie a button to a bit memory where On 1 and Off 0 or register memory where On high end value and Off low end value Widgets Can Be Displayed Object Small Medium Large LEDO OY Y Y Button Y Y Y lt lt lt lt lt Dual Spinner N Y Y Z lt lt InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 17 Select Graphic Format Spinner
440. st Display Formats may be Text or Graphic as you specify with available display formats shown in a pull down list You can enter the field width for the integral and decimal part of the data In addition you may choose to have a border around the data field or not There are Buttons you can click on to call up dialog boxes for Foreground color Background color and Font InstantHMl Tag Editor Tag Editor InstantHMl Tag Manager Group Name Tag Definitions Demo Management Ala del Y Data Source T E Elevator y Total Tags 240 Tag Name lt None gt Y Edit Data Source i r 1 e l Garage Control Set SL Memory Type IHMI Palm Tag Description Local bs EA IHMI PPC New Tag Press pE Tran a IHMI Training Edit Ta Jl A IHMI WYinCE J Device Name Data Type 3 Miscellaneous Delete Tag lt None gt v Int16 C Unsigned Gi Real Historic Trend L J a Temp Zone 1 Tag Grouping Tag Display Information Sl Flame Group Functions Groups containing this tag Text Format Graphic Format Monitor Sample Time Regulation Zonel IHMI PPC Decimal v lt None gt v 1000 msec v Set Point Zone 1 New Group IHMI Training dedicada e Stat p E Temp Zone 1 Field Width Low End Value High End Value atus 4o0ne Add Tag 2 0 0 Switch Zone 1 Temp Message Zone 1 Remove Tag E Temp Zone 1 a pi emove Group Datal Al 2 Waste Management v api soli Co fa own oom tit C Log To Database Set Database Fu
441. ster has the value 5 the record according to record template 5 SPL will be spooled to disk This can be repeated as often as desired based on events detected in the PLC When a request is made to print the report as per report template containing a data format spool file with file id 5 the entire data spooled to disk in file SPOOL S05 will be included in the printer report SPOOL SAA DELETE SPOOL REGISTER 10 11 12 EA SRCHIVE 13 40 COHHmmes BAX er ARCHIVE REPORT FORMAT 13 SPOOL 1 PRT gt RECORD FORMAT SPOOL i 5 S3PL MINUTE MMDDHHmm SX Le INCLUDES 21 HOUR ell eee 2 _ REPORT MMDD SAX ARCHIVED OR SAVED FILES Figure 5 8 Illustrating Spool Register Functions and Use of Spooled Report Example Suppose you wish to print a report that summarizes the defects produced during a production run Each time a defect is detected during the run the relevant data in three registers 1 2 and 3 must be recorded Other reports also must be printed during the same production run on the same physical printer The spooling feature provides the answer to this demand Figure 5 9 shows the Summary of Defects report file 1 PRT which includes data from the spool report file SPOOL S5 This file 1 PRT contains 4 data tags 1 4 discussed below Tag 1 This dataspec requires that spooled data SPOOL S5 with the record format 5 SPL be included here The number of spooled records included
442. sually supplied with your Palm PDA Step 2 If the HotSync Manager software is running you will see the HotSync icon in the Windows System Tray on the bottom right of the Windows task bar which includes the Windows Start button If not click Start gt Programs gt Palm Desktop gt HotSync Manager to start the HotSync Manager Step 3 Connect the HotSync cradle to your PC InstantHMI LaunchPad software running on the Desktop Windows PC does not require the Palm Desktop software to be running to perform its Deploy Project functions Moreover if you click the Setup gt Project gt Transfer gt Deploy button in LaunchPad InstantHMI LaunchPad will offer to start the HotSync Manager automatically You will see a list of Palm Users to Sync with Click on Add User s button and select users from the list of available Palm Users and click OK You may also Remove Users form the list by first selecting the user in the list and then clicking on the Remove User s button Using TCP IP to Transfer InstantHMI Project s This feature is not available at this time 2 4 5 Setup gt Screens When you click on the Screens button you will see the Available Screens for the selected project in the left panel see Figure 2 33 Use the buttons provided Add Insert and Remove to define which screens from the Available List of screens are included in your project In our example the Demo project is selected and 18 screens are included in the list of
443. t gt New Project or use the Project pull down list and select lt New Project gt to access the New Project Wizard The wizard will guide you through the steps in creating and testing a new project Click on Help button for a quick review of Step 1 Create New Project When ready click on Create New Project button This will display the New Project Definition dialog Step 1 Create New Project Click on Help button for a quick review of how to create a new project When ready click on Create New Project button New Project Wizard Ed Step 1 Create New Project This wizard provides the quickest way to create an HMil Project for your application I New Project Definition dida z Select Change m gt Step1 Create Mew Project ea Project Name Enter Proiect Name Target Runtime Platfoy 4 puntine Platform MyProject step 2 Define Data Source Project Template lt Default gt step 3 Identify Tags Step 4 Design Screen or other Project Step 5 Test in Runtime This action creates a new project folder using a copy of the Project Template You may change the Runtime Platform and Resolution The Project Template screens etc will be converted in the LaunchPad Designer Create Mew Project Figure 2 24 New Project Wizard Step1 Create New Project Enter the desired project name Choose lt Default gt or other Project Template to create a new project folder Accept Runtime Platform inh
444. t cases and its progress is indicated When finished downloading click on RUN If you see a Open File Security Warning confirm that you have downloaded InstantHMI software and then click on RUN InstantHMI Copyright 2000 20088 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Installation Registration and Activation Page A 5 p s 21 of IHMI PCInstall Unicode exe from w E O K f Open File Security Warning _ The publisher could not be verified Are you sure you want to ee run this software 7 Name IHMI PCInstall Unicode exe Publisher Unknown Publisher Type Application o THMI PCInstall Unicode exe From waa instantAmi com From C HMI4 Download TOCA Estimated time left 1 min 37 sec 5 24MB of 24 5MB copied Download Eo 201HM114 0 WHMI PCInstall Unicode exe SS aia bes Always ask before opening this file a This file does not have a valid digital signature that verifies its publisher ou should only run software from publishers you trust How can decide what software bo run This runs the self extracting executable file you downloaded IHMI PCInstall Unicode exe etc You will see a Welcome screen Click on Install button to start the installation Instant HMI Installation for Windows PC Previous Version of InstantHMl detected ls Platform Scalable Platform Independent Instant H M I New Generation HMI Technology omn Schabe Matton indepen sa Ceneration HAI Technor Previous Ins
445. t using any object from the Object Assembly library The concept of line animation is as follows You specify graphically any straight line on the screen This line is defaulted to be a short horizontal line which you could reposition stretch or shrink as desired The line itself will be invisible at runtime lts purpose is to serve as a reference animation path for the object assembly you have selected The point of reference will move along this line based on the value in the associated memory location register or local defined by the associated tag name You may specify the Start End value corresponding to the Start End of the line You then select an object assembly to attach to the line InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 56 Line Animate Properties start e Coordinate 130 Start Y Coordinate 7 End Coordinate 1330 End Coordinate 7 Start Data Value oO End Data Value 1100 Library Mame IHMI Object ssembly lib Object Assembly Figure 4 62 Animated Line Object You may click OK button at this point and get the single segment single object line animation If you click on the More button you will have access to additional parameters for the animation If the animated line segment dialog covers your animated line on the screen move the dialog box so your animated line is visible Animated Line Seaments a 2 Mote Composite Object ERE E To edit t
446. t your application requirements We will gladly provide a quote for your User DLL application development 14 6 2 Use of Time Triggered User DLL Make sure your installation supports the User DLL option and the correct IHMlUser dll file is in the project directory Add the following to the USERDLL section in IHMI 4 INI file in your Windows directory USERDLL FIRST SPOOL 1 must be greater than 0 LAST SPOOL 1 must be greater than or equal to FIRST SPOOL TRIGGER_HOUR 0 0 23 TRIGGER_MINUTE 0 0 59 TRIGGER_SECOND 0 Reserved for future use SPOOL_ACTION 3328 Spool function from Section 6 3 3 LOCAL START ADDRESS 1 Must be greater than 0 The parameters FIRST SPOOL and LAST SPOOL refer to the first and last spool control files XX SPL when the SPOOL_ACTION is spool individual or spool aggregate If the SPOOL_ACTION is other than spool individual or spool aggregate the FIRST SPOOL and LAST SPOOL parameters refer to spooled data files SPOOL SXX The spooling action SPOOL ACTION will be initiated at the trigger time TRIGGER _HOUR and TRIGGER_MINUTE The spool action can be any of the actions described in Section 5 3 3 The first six parameters listed in USERDLL section of IHMI 4 INI see above will be stored at run time in six consecutive local memory locations starting at address LOCAL START _ ADDRESS For example if LOCAL _ START ADDRESS 1 then the FIRST SPOOL parameter will be stored in local memory address 1 L
447. tHMI Activation Utility also allows you to remove the activation from your computer Removing the activation should only be done if you no longer intend to use InstantHMI and surrender your InstantHMI license InstantHMI Activation Utility xi Copy protection parameter changing Confirmation Code 0 15206 InstantAMl Activation Utility Product Code IHMIPCDS Serial 207936072 Update 10 Figure A 14 Removing LaunchPad Activation To remove the activation start the InstantHMI Activation Utility LaunchPad gt Help gt Activation Click the Activate Now button In the resulting dialog click Remove Activation for the product you wish to remove LaunchPad Runtime A warning is then displayed to inform you that activation will be removed Select Yes if you would like to remove the activation You will see a dialog similar to the one shown here and same information will be written to a file IHMIPCLaunchPadConfirm txt for LaunchPad or IHMIPCRuntimeConfirm txt for Runtime in Windows directory confirming that the activation has been removed Software Horizons requires this confirmation file in case you are returning the InstantHMI product for a refund of your product license purchase price less any applicable service and handling charge A 5 2 Removing CE PDA Runtime Activation Only InstantChip activation for your CE PDA installation may be surrendered by returning the InstantChip to Software Horizo
448. tSecond In this example local variable a will be assigned the integer value of second GetMonth This function returns the Month portion of current date as an integer value Example a GetMonth In this example local variable a will be assigned the integer value of month GetDay This function returns the Day portion of current date as an integer value Example a GetDay In this example local variable a will be assigned the integer value of day GetYear This function returns the Year portion of current date as an integer value Example a GetYear In this example local variable a will be assigned the integer value of year GetDayOfWeek This function returns the Day of Week for current date as an integer value Example a GetDayOfWeek In this example local variable a will be assigned the integer value of day of week InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Script Editor Page 7 12 8 Variable Initialization Functions Script Function Return Value GlobalVar VariableName InitAllGlobals Value LocalVar VariableName nitAllLocals Value GlobalVar VariableName Starting with version 4 1 2 B2005 you are allowed to use any long variable names for global variables You were previously restricted to use any of 26 global variables A B Z Each variable name must start with a letter alphabetic character A Z or a z
449. tantHMI installation detected Overwrite Demo Yes C No Overwrite MyProject Yes C No Overwrite Quick Start PC Yes C No Coppnght 2007 Sahara Hormone frg Caution InstantHMI 4 1 will not function with a 4 0 or earlier license Contact us for license upgrade before installing InstantHMI 4 1 Exit Click Next to continue lf a previous version of InstantHMI was installed on your PC you should see a dialog like the one shown Choose whether or not to overwrite existing projects on your PC In general Demo and Quick Start PC are standard projects provided by Software Horizons and will be updated My Project is a project stub provided for your use and if you have created screens etc in this project folder you may not want to overwrite My Project It is always a good idea to use your own project names and or backup your projects so that there is no possibility of accidental overwrites or loss of your data Click the Next button to continue with the installation InstantHMl Installation for Windows PC Ready to Install InstantHMI q Platform Scalable Platform Independent we Platform Scalable Platform Independent Instant HMI New Generation HMI Technology Instant HMI New Generation HMI Technology Your N Application _ py ol AA Breathe new life into your old HMI with Solution to your HMI Applications I LaunchPad Enjoy Wireless Connectivity Development System Mobile Data
450. tantHMI node including a PDA node can stand alone that is PDA based InstantHMI does not require a PC node to act as a server InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI for Your Application Page 1 2 tent CITEC DEE tenet hae ete eat i Figure 1 2 Illustrating InstantHMI on Windows CE and PDA platforms Why Deploy InstantHMI on a PDA Mobility low cost and wireless connectivity are some of the reasons why PDA based HMI can enhance your total HMI solution We list a few illustrative scenarios below Scenario 1 You are the operator responsible for running your process Your boilers are working OK but you know you can make them work more efficiently if you could only monitor what the controller was doing You have that wonderful handheld computer Palm or Pocket PC in your shirt pocket Moreover you have InstantHMI software installed in your handheld You walk over to the controller cabinet plug in the communication cable to the serial port on the handheld turn on the handheld and tap the stylus over the InstantHMI icon on the touch screen The monitoring screen shows the Boiler Temperature and pressures for the two boilers If your controller has an infrared port on it you don t even need a cable just beam the handheld s built in IR head at the controller Of course InstantHMI will show any other variables that are relevant to your task at hand You decide to look at the P
451. te file SpoolName SPL to act as the numbered template file SPL 1 2 99 In LaunchPad click on Setup and then click on the button Spool Reports In the Available Spool Reports panel select SpoolName SPL In the Assigned Spool Reports panel click on 5 and then click on the Assign button PROJECT Demo Report Templates O Printer Spool Assigned Report Templates Service Log SPL 11 A SpoolName SPL 2 Service Log SPL 3 4 5 16 fie 8 9 11 a Remo o 4 v Delete Template Report Desinger en E SOFTWARE HORIZONS d Oe Figure 5 15 Named Spool Template assignments Repeat this with each available spool report that is to be used in the project Note that for the sake of backward compatibility any available spool reports with names 1 SPL 2 SPL etc will be implicitly assigned to slots 1 2 etc This implicit assignment will not be shown explicitly unless you make the corresponding assignments or override the corresponding assignments Click the Remove button to clear or reset a specific assignment Click the Done button when you have completely assigned the spool reports for the project The assignments are recorded in the Project INI file in the Project folder Note that the spooled reports will include the spool template file name in addition to the YYMMDDHH etc name as documented in Section 5 3 3 For example assume that the spool te
452. ter the value 1 Click on Enter Macro 13 Show Alarms This macro has the syntax Show Alarms Size When this macro is executed at runtime it will pop up an Alarm Log Viewer object sized as per the macro size parameter Large Medium Small See also Section 4 6 7 The operator can view the Alarms and Alarm History Acknowledge all or selected alarms and dismiss the pop up Alarm Log Viewer when Done 14 Show Help Screen This macro has the syntax Show Help Screen Screen Name and causes the indicated help screen to be displayed 15 Show Historic Trend available for Pocket PC and CE Runtime This macro has the syntax Show Historic Trend Tag Group Plot Size When this macro is executed at runtime it will pop up a Historic Trend Viewer sized as per the macro size parameter Large Small and displaying the historic trend of the tags from the Tag Group macro parameter See also Plot widget in Section 4 11 5 16 Show Keypad This macro available only for the Pocket PC and CE Runtime displays the QuickPad keypad to aid in data entry for the specified tag field InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Macro Editor Page 6 5 17 Show Real Time Trend available only for the Pocket PC and CE Runtime This macro has the syntax Show Real Time Trend Tag Group Plot Size When this macro is executed at runtime it will pop up a Real Time Trend Viewer sized as per the macro size parameter Large Medium Small an
453. th Use the text edit field to enter the New Message to Send to the selected node Type Enter key or click Send The message will be sent to the node user you want to have a private chat with If he accepts your private chat will begin When you click the Send button the message will be displayed in a scrollable Sent Received Messages panel on all of the chat screens involved in the chat including the sender of the message The message displayed will be preceded by the node name and or user name the message was sent from To go back to the broadcast chat mode click on the Broadcast Sent Message button 11 3 TCP IP Interface Example For illustrative purposes assume we have two InstantHMI nodes Node 1 and Node 2 connected over an Ethernet LAN Node 1 has a Direct Logic DL205 PLC connected to its serial port Assume you have created and tested an HMI project capable of monitoring and modifying memory locations registers and I O in the PLC Now you wish to mimic the functionality of Node 1 in Node 2 so that you may monitor and control the process PLC parameters from Node 2 as easily as you could from Node 1 The situation is as follows Node 1 has a server task provides read write access to its controller data from Node 2 Node 2 has a Client task requires read write access to Node 1 controller data InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI TCP IP Page 11 8 InstantHMI Node 1 Server
454. the tag parameter values At this point the controller still has the old recipe Tap on the Upload button to transfer the selected and edited recipe tag values to the corresponding registers in the controller Tap on the Save button to save the edited recipe under a new name or under the old name Tap on the Dnload button to transfer the register values from the controller to the recipe tags Tap on the Save button to save the downloaded recipe under a new name or an existing recipe name Tap on Done button to return to the InstantHMI monitor screen You may think of a Recipe Cluster as consisting of all the recipes that share a common recipe definition that is they include exactly the same tags from the tag database and exactly in the same order InstantHMI maintains the recipe names in sorted order alphabetically We suggest that while saving downloaded recipes from the controller you name the recipes using the common recipe name followed by a suitable suffix you can then see the recipes in convenient clusters when you review the list of recipes Tap on the down arrow Y and select a recipe name from the list of available recipes created by you earlier You may now preview the tags included in this recipe definition Tap on the New Recipe button to create a new recipe Tap the Del Recipe button to delete any selected recipe Tap the Add Tag button to add a new tag in the definition of recipe displayed on screen Select a tag in the previ
455. the text object You may switch the text display mode as often as you like 4 7 2 Color The Color menu offers the following commands to set color properties of objects Pen Set the pen color Fill Set the color of filled objects Text Foreground Set foreground color of text objects Text Background Set background color of text objects Hatch Lines Set hatched line color of hatched objects Screen Background Set application screen background color The Status Bar indicates current colors for text and pen In addition to the standard Windows Color Dialog InstantHMI has internally defined RGB color combinations as shown in the color chart below If you are asked to enter a color number you may use this chart The colors in this chart will be displayed when a register value int 0 16 or long 24 bit rgb value is used to display a color on screen at runtime Color Ref Number R G Bl ack 0 Red Gray 8 192 192 192 LightBlue 9 128 128 255 Yelow 14 255 255 J0 When you choose any Color menu command you will see a Color Dialog box to help you choose color Click on one of the 48 Basic color choices Custom colors 16 choices are also implemented in Screen Designer To use custom colors click on one of the 16 custom color boxes mix the custom color by clicking on the Define Custom Color button and then setting the Hue Saturation and luminance and then click the Add Custom Color button The custom color you
456. then datalog Tag List2 etc For example suppose you have a tag called Temperature with a high value THigh and a low value TLow and you wish to log Temperature values if it is in high alarm condition Temperature gt THigh or in low alarm condition Temperature lt TLow You define Eventi with Trigger Tag as Temperature and Trigger value Thigh Trigger Type Transition On Datalog Type Log Continuous and include Temperature tag in the datalog tag list You also define Event2 with Trigger Tag as Temperature and Trigger value TLow Trigger Type Transition Off Datalog Type Log Continuous and include Temperature tag in the datalog tag list Finally you choose both Eventi and Event2 as Datalog Trigger Events This will ensure that the tag Temperature will be logged whenever it is in alarm condition 9 4 Runtime Menu When you click on the Run button the LaunchPad gets ready to run your project and displays the following dialog Rena HMI PROJECT MyProject w InstantHMI ensures your Project will be On Target and On Time Seconds f to Run Licensed to E SOFTWARE HORIZONS My Name d Eie fimo bid ge My Company Figure 9 10 Project Runtime Paused for Review InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PC Page 9 9 LaunchPad will start the runtime after a five second delay if you include LP_RUN PROJECT AT START 1 in the Setup section of the Project ini fi
457. to the first and last station number the ON_VALUE and OFF_VALUE should be written to To write the value to only one specific station number you would set the FIRST STATION station number LAST _ STATION station number FIRST STATION The ON HOUR and ON_MINUTE refer to the hour and minute that trigger the writing of the ON_VALUE the specified controllers The OFF_HOUR and OFF_MINUTE refer to the hour and minute that trigger the writing of the OFF_VALUE to the specified controllers The SKIP_SATURDAYS and SKIP_SUNDAYS parameters allow you to disable the time triggering action User DLL on Saturdays and Sundays The NUMBER_OF_EXCEPTIONS parameter allows you to specify the number of other days such as holidays you would like to disable the time triggering To specify the dates the time triggering is to be disabled use the parameters SKIP1 SKIP2 SKIP3 etc These SKIP parameters have the format of MM DD YY where MM is the two digit month DD is the two digit day and YY is the last two digits of the year Step 2 The appropriate DLL file IHMlUser dll should be in the InstantHMI project directory InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI User DLL Page 14 9 Step 3 Make sure your controller is connected properly and communicates with InstantHMI Step 4 Verify that the time triggering occurs as expected and the controllers 1 and 2 turn On and Off as desired 14 7 3 Application to Watlow
458. ton to suspend auto run of the project At this time you may verify Project Overview and Options before clicking on Run button to start execution of the project in the Runtime Engine After project execution the Runtime Reports may be viewed as well Without Runtime execution privileges you will not be able to access the Runtime Engine PT HMI al PROJECT Demo Ins stantHMI ensures ur Project will be In Te arget and On Time Figure 2 36 LaunchPad gt Run Command eat awe Note If the target platform is not a PC you may Emulate it using runtime engine on PC if available You may replace the image file IHMIProjectlmage bmp in your project folder with your own project image bitmap of same size Likewise IHHMICompanylmage bmp may also be replaced InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI LaunchPad Page 2 21 2 5 1 Project Overview Demo Project Overview Project Elements Status Target Platform Windows PC Tag Database 240 Tags Data Sources Not Defined Project Screens 18 Recipes Not Installed Configurations Not Installed Message Groups 17 Bitmap Groups 38 Datalog Events Not Installed x Figure 2 37 Project Runtime Overview Click on the Overview button to pop up the Project Overview dialog which shows project elements included in your project the number of screens in your project the platform on which the project wi
459. tor macro button elected By Not Used One of the Station IDs defined for the object assembly is selected by the Operator at runtime spinner Scheme 5 Not Used Not Used One of the Station IDs defined for the object assembly is selected by an associated tag at runtime This tag value may also be set by the operator spinner Not Used One of the Data Sources defined for the object assembly User is selected by the Operator at runtime pull down list Scheme 7 Selected By Not Used One of the Data Sources defined for the object assembly Tag Value is selected by an associated tag at runtime This tag value may also be set by the operator pull down list Other Schemes A combination of above scenarios can be accomplished by other assignment schemes InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 24 4 6 5 Touch Zone Object A Touch Zone Object defines a rectangular touch zone area on the screen At runtime the Touch Object on a screen may be activated in one of three ways e touch screen hardware is installed and the operator touches inside the zone e the operator clicks the mouse inside the touch zone and e the operator presses the key corresponding to the macro key code associated with the touch zone if such a key exists on his keyboard Touch zone objects are useful to convert a screen into a control panel with graphical buttons to initiate various actions Yo
460. trings can be included in tag names The prefix and postfix may be variable based on the memory type data type and other such parameters The tag names can be edited to suit your preference at a later time 2 3 5 Design gt Data Sources InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc InstantHMI implements a Data Source Manager as a DLL that maintains a list of all the data sources The data source identifies where the runtime data will come from Typically field sensor devices bring the physical plant machine data to the I O modules on the controller As far as InstantHMI is concerned the raw data is stored in the controller memory The controller stations may be in a network The communication link between the InstantHMI node and the raw data may be any of the following direct serial link infrared link TCP IP link to controller TCP IP link to a remote InstantHMI node to which the data source is linked Barcode Scanner and OPC Server to which the data source is linked oe Cs DESIGN PROJECT AMES Y Comm Links 3 43 DirectLogic Ecom Comm Link TCP IP Device Name D Driver ECOM Ethernet Timeout 1000 Station Offset O DirectLogic Serial Modbus TCP PROJECT Quick Start PC v Network Devices 2 5 DirectLogic Controller IP Address 192 168 0 171 Port Number O Modbus Controller Data Sources TCPAP Links Data Sources Comm Links TC
461. try by the operator it maybe unnecessary to burden the controller program logic and memory for this purpose InstantHMI Screen Designer includes various screen elements that are amenable to manual data entry by the operator These elements are grouped together under the heading Clipboard Tools and can be used to build a Clipboard for use by the operator See Figure above The clipboard tools are as follows InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 50 Static Text tool Section 4 6 1 Objects gt Static Objects gt Text is used to enter descriptive text on the screen It is repeated as part of clipboard palette for convenience The Text Box allows the operator entry of Ascii text and is obtained from the standard Text Display object Section 4 11 2 with data format Alpha Select Pull Down List to place a pull down list of options on the screen The Pull Down List is functionally equivalent to the Windows combo box The operator can enter any one of text messages displayed when the pull down list arrow is clicked The text messages would be included in a message group Operator Names in the figure associated with the pull down list as shown in the Display Object Properties dialog box Display Object Properties Display Properties Tag Information Data Type input gt Tag Name Select Tag lt No Tag Selected gt Display Text f Graphic Format Width 135 Height
462. ttons as discussed in Section 3 6 5 9 4 5 Configuration Note Some features in this Section may not be available in the current implementation See Section 3 6 3 for a discussion of configurations When you click on Configuration you will see the Configuration Manager dialog box which includes a pull down list of configurations from which you select the desired configuration The tags from the tag database included in the configuration together with the associated data values for the selected configuration are displayed in a table in the Configuration Manager dialog To edit the configuration tag value click on the tag to select it in the table of configuration tags click on the Edit Value button and then enter the tag value for the configuration You may also double click on the tag to edit it To save an edited configuration click on the Save button You may need Password authorization for this function The configuration will be saved to the storage medium on InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PC Page 9 12 the runtime platform Click the Write to Controller button to transfer the configuration to the controller Click the Read from Controller button to read the configuration parameters from the controller een HMI InstantHMl Configuration Manager Configurations Test Config Total 2 Screen Elements Configurations 2 Screens Thumbnails ES Test Co
463. tware Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 17 End or Curved End in any one of the six selections shown in the Table and as illustrated in the Tank Dialog Orientation _ Vertical Horizontal _ Light Source 3 D shading effect A F ES C Select f Select C Select f Select f Select C Select Curved End Tank Tank Color OK Cancel Figure 4 15 Screen Designer Tank Object Dialog Click on the Tank Color button and select the color from a standard color dialog Section 4 7 2 Choose a Flat End Tank or Curved End Tank and then click on one of the six available selections and then click OK This places a resizable Tank on the top left corner of your screen Re size and drag the tank to position it at the desired location on the screen Scale Object Use this tool accessed from the Screen Designer menu Objects gt Static Objects gt Scale to create and include Scale objects on your screen You have a choice of scale hash mark number of Large Small tics in any one of the four selections shown in the Table and as illustrated in the Scale Dialog Orientation Vertical Horizontal Hash marks Right aligned Bottom aligned alignment Left aligned Top aligned hn M i vl li pe i ln f Select C Select Choose Tics for Scale Range Large Tics Small Tics f Select C Select l6 E Cancel Figure 4 16 Screen Designer Scale Object Dialog E show Label
464. ty Value You may also assign a script to be executed if the control provides access to the Property Change event Animate Control Setup Sample Time Script Default Activation Verb f 000 lt No Script gt v Primary Properties Property Setup Property Name To From Tag Ve z Associated InstantHMI Tag LED Value y Tag Manager MouseD own MouseUp MouseMove KeyDown Property Change Script lt No Script gt Script Editor InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc Cancel Figure 4 37 ActiveX LED Object Animation Setup Similarly any Events exposed by the control such as mouse events click double click etc key events key down key up etc and custom events Setpoint Change etc may also be assigned scripts through the Setup dialog Event Setup Event Mame Mousellp Event Script Script Editor cancel Figure 4 38 ActiveX Knob Object Event Setup OnkKnobMouselp sct 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 33 Similar to object scripts assigned to other standard data objects an object script may also be attached to the embedded control object to be executed at the object sample time in the Runtime Two new script functions Section 0 support getting and setting of control properties e ActiveXGetProperty PropertyName e ActiveXSetProperty PropertyName Value The data for the control property may be transferred to the associated I
465. u 1000 Temperature Getlag Temp Zone 4 Temperature Temperature RampRate Heat if Temperature gt SetPoint High Temperature SetPoint High SetTag Temp Zone 4 Temperature if t lt Duration Soak1 Duration Ramp1 goto END else Stage 2 goto SOAK2 SOAK2 t GetElapsedTime t t u 1000 if t lt Duration Soak1 Duration Ramp1 Duration Soak2 Do nothing Just Soak goto END Stage 3 RampRate Cool SetPoint Low SetPoint High Duration Ramp2 Temperature GetTag Temp Zone 4 goto END else RAMP2 t GetElapsedTime t t u 1000 Temperature Temperature RampRate Cool if Temperature lt Temperature Start Temperature Temperature Start SetTag Temp Zone 4 Temperature if t lt Duration Soak1 Duration Ramp1 Duration Soak2 Duration Ramp2 goto END Stage 0 Temperature Start 20 else InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc Page 7 18 5 0 20Jul2008 Script Editor Page 7 19 u GetElapsedTime END co amplelscr gt niamh Screen Designer a lf Fle Belk Yes Taj Geta Obits Formal Tab Galen Help akeles AO AA Time ih Sec t For Help Press Fl c SELECT MM System 108 Figure 7 8 Ramp Soak Trend Screen 7 4 Error Messages The table in Figure 7 9 lists the error messages you might encounter during script execution Error
466. u can associate two bitmaps with the touch zone object These bitmaps represent how the touch zone will appear in the normal untouched state and the touched state The purpose of these bitmaps is to give a visual feedback to the operator at runtime Two actions can be associated with the touch zone the first action to be taken when the touch zone is pressed and the second action to be taken when the touch zone is released Actions may be defined by associating macros see Section 6 with the touch zone pressed and or released Note that you may be able to use the macros to affect the execution of selected functions in Scripts associated with the current screen This feature can be used to set up simple touch zones to help the operator initiate complex actions Use the Touch Object tool accessed from the Screen Designer menu Objects gt Touch Zone to create touch zone objects To create the desired touch zone locate and drag the mouse as you would while drawing a box A pop up dialog box Figure 4 24 appears and allows you to specify two action macros to associate with the touch zone one to correspond to the touch zone pressed and the other to the touch zone released See Section 6 for details If you do not need the action of both macros leave the macro key for touch zone pressed unused and specify only the macro key for touch zone released Click on the button to browse the available bitmaps for your project and select the fi
467. u design using the LaunchPad This Section focuses on the preformatted screens and other features built into InstantHMI Runtime Engines for PDAs If InstantHMI runtime engine is not installed in your Pocket PC or Windows CE or Palm platform do so now Appendix A lists compatible hardware and describes the installation procedure Turn on the PDA handheld or CE hardware tap on the InstantHMI icon with your stylus to run InstantHMI Runtime Engine referred to as IHMI for short If you have not registered the software with Software Horizons please do so now Appendix A 10 1 PDA and CE Platform Familiarity Pocket PC We assume that you will review the documentation for your Pocket PC and achieve sufficient familiarity with the use of the Pocket PC and its useful functions A book such as How to do Everything with Your Pocket PC published by Osborne may serve as a useful tool to become familiar with your Pocket PC You should at least familiarize yourself with the ActiveSync feature of the Pocket PC When you are using InstantHMI to create tags tag groups etc or some other application on the Pocket PC to enter data it is always a good idea to have a backup of your work on the Pocket PC ActiveSync operation only ensures that all your personal data in your Pocket PC is backed up on your PC You may use ActiveSync with your desktop PC to restore all data that was backed up during the previous ActiveSync operation ActiveSync
468. uctFormula Contains the Product Code Wash and Dry Formula ID s Category and Description for that Product Code Also contains the number of steps in the Wash Formula CWashFormula Contains its formula ID Description and number of steps in the formula Contains an array of pointers of CWashStep objects that contain the specifics of each wash step CWashStep Contains the specific information about the step CDryFormula Contains the specifics of a Dry formula CWashLoad Contains information for Washer automation CDryLoad Contains information for automation of Dryers 14 8 6 Remarks The InstantHMI architecture with extensibility afforded by its User DLL and OEM DLL allows you to apply InstantHMI to any conceivable applications Bring us your Application challenge and we will provide you with a cost effective solution InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Installation Registration and Activation Page A 1 A Installation Registration and Activation A 1 Overview InstantHMI installation will include the LaunchPad development system for Windows PC 9x 2000 ME XP and InstantHMI runtime engines for one or more platform nodes You may order runtime engine for Windows PC 9x 2000 ME XP Windows CE 4 10 or later Windows CE Net and or PDA Palm OS version 3 5 or later and Pocket PC 2000 or later Note InstantHMI for Windows PC is available in Uni code and non Unicode
469. ue specified It returns Success 1 or failure 0 as a Bool value Example a SetLocallnt 2500 500 This example will set the current integer value of Local Address 2500 to 500 Note SetLocalLong SetLocalFloat and SetLocalDouble have the same syntax and will set a Long Float or Double value respectively SetLocalLong Address LongValue This function sets the long value in two consecutive addresses starting with Local memory Address equal to the Long Value specified It returns Success 1 or Failure O as a Bool value SetLocalFloat Address FloatValue This function sets the float value in two consecutive addresses starting with Local memory Address equal to the Float Value specified It returns Success 1 or Failure 0 as a Bool value InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Script Editor SetLocalDouble Address DoubleValue This function sets the double value in four consecutive addresses starting with Local memory Address equal to the Double Value specified It returns Success 1 or Failure 0 as a Bool value 4 Math Trig Functions Asin Value Script Function Return Value Asin Value Acos Value Atan Value Sinh Value Cosh Value Tanh Value Sin Degrees Cos Degrees Tan Degrees Sart Number ABS Number Log Number Ceiling Number Precision Floor Number Precision Round Number Pr
470. ul2008 InstantHMI User DLL Page 14 3 KKK RK KR I I I I eK KK KK KK DISCLAIMER The software sample is provided on an AS IS basis without warranty Software Horizons Inc does not make any representation or warranty either express or implied with respect to the software programs their quality accuracy or fitness for a specific purpose Therefore Software Horizons Inc shall have no liability to you or any other person or entity with respect to any liability loss or damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or indirectly by the programs contained here This includes but is not Limited bo interruption Of service loss of daca loss Of consulting or anticipatory profits Or consequential damages from the use of these programs UserD1l h Copyrigat e 2000 2006 Software Horizons Ime BR SS SS SS SA A ifndef __USERDLL_H_ define __USERDLL_H_ define SUCCESS 0 Commands to be processed by Runtime define USERCMD_NOCMD define USERCMD_READ define USERCMD_WRITE define USERCMD_ SPOOL COM m js Scacus Definicions OEF commande senc co Runtime define USERSTAT_NOSTATUS 0 define USERSTAT_NOCMD_DONE ii define USERSTAT_NOCMD_PENDING 2 define USERSTAT_READ_DONE 3 define USERSTAT_READ_PENDING 4 define USERSTAT_WRITE_DONE 5 define USERSTAT_WRITE_PENDING 6 define USERSTAT_SPOOL_DONE 7 define USERSTAT_SPOOL_PENDING 8 j Error Codes Af Command not successfully processed define USERERR_NOERR 0 defin
471. umber specified in the tag object InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI Databases Page 3 2 InstantHMI allows access to controllers over an Ethernet LAN using wireless RF connectivity using Modbus TCP or other protocols involving TCP IP which require IP addresses for the PLC or InstantHMI runtime nodes InstantHMI makes the job of specifying IP addresses more convenient by allowing you to associate Device Names to IP addresses Only the device names will be used in Tags associated with that controller device All you need to do is use the IP Manager to reenter the changed IP address for the device name Click on Edit button next to Device Names in the Data Source Editor to specify a Device Name and associated IP address Use the IP Manager to manage the list of device names and their associated IP addresses Click on the Add button to enter a new device name and its IP address Click on Done to exit the IP Manager The Data Source Manager discussed above applies to PDAs as well The screens for Data Source IP Manager are shown below IP Manager a 12 03 Data Source Editor m 11 55 InstantHMI Device Names Data Source Manager 13 com RS 1005 ClMe Remote Station 1005 CCM Remote Station 1005 Driver Mame Properties Como Link Device Mame TCP IP RF CM2 AS 1005 IP Address 192 168 4 0 TCP Port 1 34 Station Offset Time Cut Figure 3 2 Data Source IP
472. untime Engine x Select Activation File Enter Activation Code i Cancel on Select Activation File for PC2 Step 5b On PC2 Browse and select the activation file saved in Step 4c Once the file is successfully processed you should receive confirmation of successfully activating InstantHMIl Runtime installation on PC2 A 4 2 Moving PC LaunchPad Designer Activation The steps here are similar to that in Section A 4 1 You will select LaunchPad instead of Runtime in Steps la 5b above A 4 3 CE PDA Runtime Installation Registration Activation of a CE or PDA installation has some restrictions if you are interested in restoring or moving such activation InstantHMI Copyright 2000 20088 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Installation Registration and Activation Page A 15 InstantChip Software Horizons Instant Chip technology provides pre activated InstantHMI runtime software including project files for OEM s installed on memory cards CF SD mini SD micro SD and ready for use in compatible hardware CE Panels Pocket PC PDA Windows Mobile devices such as Smart Phones Palm PDA etc InstantChip activations can be moved physically by transferring the memory card from one CE or PDA unit to another Registration Activations provided for InstantHMI installations directly on CE or PDA units without the use of InstantChip can only be backed up and restored on the same CE or PDA unit as the origina
473. up InstantHMI folder in a safe convenient place for easy recovery if needed in the future ee Note This backup can only be used to restore InstantHMI to the same physical PDA or Memory Card from which it was backed up Restoring a backup to a different PocketPC or Memory Card will invalidate your activation and the software will not function InstantChip activation registration of InstatnHMI on memory cards can be moved from on Pocket PC to another If you have any questions about backing up or restoring InstantHMI please contact Software Horizons Palm Installation Before starting the backup make sure that InstantHMI is not running on your Palm 1 Connect your Palm to your PC and run the Palm Desktop Software on your PC 2 Press the HotSync button on your Sync Cradle Cable or run HotSync from your Palm to start the HotSync process 3 Wait for the HotSync to end InstantHMI Copyright 2000 20088 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Installation Registration and Activation Page A 16 Note This backup can only be used to restore InstantHMI to the same physical PDA from which it was backed up Restoring a backup to a different Palm PDA will invalidate your activation and the software will not function on that PDA If you have any questions about backing up or restoring InstantHMI please contact Software Horizons A 5 Removing InstantHMI Activation A 5 1 Removing PC LaunchPad Designer Activation The Instan
474. up Real Time Plot History lec 1 35 32 pm Start Time 117 57 02 3 40 32 End Time 11 57020 13 15 04 Time Period w Minute Plot Interpolation w Line History Logs 1 0 Process Value 223 Set Point Closed Loop FO E Figure 10 23 History Plot PDA On the Plot Setup screen you may select the trend Time Period and the Plot Interpolation In addition you may assign the 4 four pens to tags for which Trend History logs are available This includes any tags you designated for data logging previously or any tags you selected for real time trending and hence implicitly assigned for data logging You may select pen trace colors turn off grid show hide pen trace etc as in the Real Time trend The Start Time and End Time of the trend history log are shown at the top You may tap the Y control to trend from beginning of the History Log or P control to trend from the end of the History Log or the scroll arrows IN to scroll the trend left or right by one third of the Time Period To see the x y values on any trace tap on it You will see the trace blink to acknowledge your tap and then you will see the following info Tap on the Delete History button to review the Trend History log in a chart form and then confirm deletion by tapping on the Delete History button again Trend History History Tags e Process Value Time 9 50 19 am 9 50 19 am 9 50 19 am 9 50 20 am 9 50 20 am 9 50 20 am 9 50 21 am 9 50 21 am 4 50 21 am
475. up and in Design Mode InstantHMI Projects are managed created stored deployed etc using tools included in the LaunchPad Section 2 Critical information used to define project elements is stored in Databases Section 3 The LaunchPad includes a Screen Designer Section 4 Managers for Tag Database and Data Sources Editors for Reports Section 5 Macros Section 6 and Scripts Section 7 and utilities such as Data Table and Screen Capture InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHMI for Your Application Page 1 5 Your Project may include some or all of the Project Elements listed below e Tag Database Section 2 3 4 Section 3 3 e Screens Section 2 3 1 Section 4 e Report Spool Templates Section 2 3 3 Section 5 e Data Sources Section 2 3 5 Section 3 1 controller and InstantHMI IP node address database communication setup parameters and drivers e Project Users Section 2 4 2 and e Target Platforms PC PDA CE where project will be deployed Section 2 4 1 The LaunchPad enables you to deploy InstantHMI Projects to one or more Runtime Engine platforms of your choice PC PDA or Windows CE Sections 9 and 10 The Runtime uses available Communication Link s Section 8 and its Communication Interfaces Sections 11 and 12 to retrieve Process Machine information and renders them on the Operator Display for monitoring by the Human Operator as well as enabling Operator input
476. using displayed screen objects and keyboard mouse or touch hardware to control the Process Machine operation Runtime Engine may also log Data for Historic Trending analysis Section 13 1 4 Get Started Immediately e Review InstantHMI License see front of the manual e Review Activation Registration Policy moving and removing the Activation Appendix A e Install InstantHMI LaunchPad on Windows PC and the Runtime Engine on target platforms Windows PC CE Pocket PC Palm etc See Appendix A for details e Register and Activate InstantHMI on all nodes handhelds and Desktop Before proceeding further it is important that you take a minute to fill in and email fax or mail your Registration Form This is the only way we have of informing you about important changes and improvements to InstantHMI Special update and support privileges are only available to Registered customers so please send in your registration form promptly Quick Familiarity with InstantHMI For illustrative purposes InstantHMI includes a 18 Screen Demo Project which includes a few illustrative applications To make it convenient for you when you complete installing InstantHMI on your PC the LaunchPad which serves as the command and control center from which you may access the main program elements of InstantHMI appears and presents you with an opportunity to run the 2 minute demo Run this 2 minute Demo to get a feel for various InstantHMI features that you can
477. ussed in Section 5 3 1 of the manual InstantHMI allows data logging to disk using two different methods as discussed below Method 1 Save data directly in disk files created every day hour minute or second The Spool Register triggers the saving of data by its non zero content InstantHMI resets the spool register back to zero after performing the required function The low byte value 1 99 selects one of the spool template files 1 99 for the data record format The high byte value 20 23 determines the duration for which data continues to be saved in the same file one Day one Hour one Minute or one Second The saved file names depend on the year YY day DD hour HH minute mm second ss and the spool template file XX Example The Spool Register has the value 5635 with high byte value 22 and low byte value 3 It causes a data record according to the data format in 3 SPL to be saved in an hourly file 99112010 S03 when the date and time are YY 99 MM 11 DD 20 HH 10 10AM on 12 Nov 99 Until the time is past 11AM on this day each time the Spool Register contains the value InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 5635 a new data record according to the template in 3 SPL will be appended to the spool report file 99112010 S03 Method 2 Use a two step process to save data in disk files created every day hour minute or second Step 1 Spool save data in an intermediate file SPOOL SX
478. utton to set up a user assigned function Repeat until the Assigned Functions panel shows all desired functions for this user To remove an Assigned Function select it in the right panel and then click on the Remove button For faster setup you may click on the Assign All button and selectively Remove the undesired user assigned functions Click the Save User button to save the user profile in the user database IHMI UsersDB idb Click the Delete button to delete the selected user from the user database Click X button to Cancel without saving the user setup in progress Click Done when finished setting up User Profiles 2 4 3 Setup gt Project gt Protect Benefits of Protection Project Protection provides benefits OEMs System Integrators and Project Designers InstantHMI project designers may use the Project Protection feature to prevent the end users operators from using InstantHMI design features such as screen modifications that are not required to perform their tasks This will be accomplished by disabling design features selected by the project designer for Project Protection Thus OEMs and System Integrators will be able to design an InstantHMI project screens tag database etc that can not be modified by their end users Project Protection has many beneficial aspects lt protects the end users from shooting themselves in the foot lt allows OEMs and System Integrators to safeguard their own value add project design compon
479. variables a b z Each variable name must start with a letter alphabetic character A Z or a z and may contain any number of letters numbers period and underscore _ You may not use blanks or the minus sign in variable names Local variables are not shared between scripts These variables retain their values between executions of the same script The declaration LocalVar VarName defines VarName as a local script variable This function has no return value void Any undeclared variables will be treated as local variables For backward compatibility with scripts created using previous version of InstantHMI Script Editor undeclared single character upper case variables A B Z are treated as global variables declared automatically by the Script Editor We recommend you use local vars a b z with or without declaration for temporary variables in your script InitAllLocals Value This function allows you to set the initial value of all the 26 local script variables a b z for the current script to the specified Value This function has no return value void 7 2 4 Expression An expression is any valid mathematical expression obtained by combining variables constants functions returning a value and operators InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Script Editor Page 7 13 Example expressions 10 0 Sin a Cos a 0 5 A 5 GetTag TagN
480. ve Tag bution to remove the selected tag from the tag group Tap on the Add Tag button and then select a tag name from the list of All Tags to assign it to the current group The functionality of the Tabbed Scroll Bar is exactly as described in Section 3 3 5 The Tag Positioning Bar has four controls on it which are used to re position a selected tag within the group The Top control moves the tag to the top of the list of tags in the group The Bottom control moves the tag to the bottom of the list of tags in the group The Up and Down controls in the middle 4 7 move the selected tag one position up or down in the list of tags in the group Thus the Tag Positioning Bar allows you to visually define the exact order of the tags within a group This is extremely useful while viewing the tags in a group on the scrollable Data Monitor or Graphic Monitor or the Bar Graph Monitor screens 3 3 Tag Editor PDAs When you Edit a selected tag from the tag database or when you add a New tag to the tag database you will see the Tag Editor screen The Tag Editor screen includes several fields which are discussed below Tap on the Tag Name field and enter a descriptive tag name using the graffit area on the Palm or the built in keyboard on the PDA This identifies the information item in your controller for monitoring data logging etc Tag Editor Mame Boiler 1 Temperature Memory Type w Register Address 173 Bit 0 Stati
481. ved End Tank OK Cancel Figure 4 10 Tank A Tank Body InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 11 Use the same Tank dialog to build the two Tank Legs You may accept the Tank Top as is We have chosen to re shape the Tank Top by placing an Ellipse of the right size and color from the Tool palette We could also have chosen to use a Curved End tank instead of Flat End You have several flexible choices in building a Tank Structure 2 Tank Level Indicator To build the Tank Level Indicator we assemble together the following objects a Scale b VBar widget c VBar bounding rectangle In the Screen Designer click on Objects gt Static Objects gt Scale You will see the Scale dialog Figure 4 11 where you make the entries as shown Select Select Choose Tics for Scale Range Large Tics Small Tics f Select 17 lo la Cancel Figure 4 11 Tank A Scale Position the Scale on the Tank as desired Now Pick and Place a VBar widget position it next to the Scale on the Tank Body double click on the VBar widget and attach the Tag Water Level Tank A If you so wish you may place a bounding rectangle for special effect before placing the VBar widget You may also use the Tank dialog to add the outlet pipe Finally enter any Label Text desired Now you have finished assembling Tank A object assembly Use the Block Select tool
482. verview Msg Functions 3 Door Status E Elevator Car A Messages 6 Elevator Car B Messages Edit Msg H Elevator Load 3 Exit Message Delete Msg 3 Machine ld FA Motor Status 0 Motor Stopped E 1 Motor Running H On Off New Group G4 Open Close 3 Operator Shift Copy Group 3 Sample Projects Messages Y 3 Selector Solenoid Delete Group 3 Temp Regulation Database Functions Figure 3 15 Message Manager l eel H New Msg eb Ee Ee EE EF Group Functions To define a new group name click on the New Group button and enter the new message group name select a reference group if desired and then click OK For your convenience you may define all messages for a project collectively in a Reference Group and then let any Message Group define its messages by reference to messages from the reference group All reference messages that is messages for a group with an associated reference group must be created or edited in the reference group Maintaining all message text in a single reference file may be very useful when dealing with multi lingual setup The Export function allows all messages for all groups to be exported to a CSV file you may add message groups and messages in the CSV file and use the Import function to update your message database To define messages associated with any message group select it in the list of message groups displayed in the Message Manager dialog and th
483. w you to do data entry while others LED VBar Gauge Tank etc are for monitoring only For your convenience the data entry widgets will also monitor and reflect external changes made to the associated memory addresses InstantHMI allows tags to be grouped under group names of your choice With tag groups you may select a specific group name such as Boiler Variables in the graphic monitor screen shown above The concept of Tag Groups and the Tag Positioning Bar in the Tag Manager along with the graphic Ol Widgets makes monitoring any number of tags an easy task in InstantHMI InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Runtime Engine PDA Page 10 12 10 3 5 Trend Graphs When you tap on the Trend Graphs button you will see the following dialog box Tap on il for help tips on this Trend Graphs popup screen Trend Graphs 1 Figure 10 21 Trend Graphs Menu PDA Real Time Trend Tap on Real Time button and set Real Time Trend Properties on the Plot Setup screen to see the Real Time trend plot Real Time Plot Setup 1171 02 1 35 32 pm Plot CET History fion Start Time 11 102 13 29 58 End Time 1171 02 13 30 58 Time Period e Minute Plot Interpolation w Line Groups Process Bor Graph 1 Set Point Closed Loop Mp0 2 Process Value O 303 Filtered Process value O 4 SetPoint Ramp Torget B 0 E 35 17 Tine 35 32 Y Figure 10 22 Real Time History Plot PDA
484. want to use to run this application The interactive user This user ser Password Eontimpasenord The system account services only Browse carcel ooh Figure 12 27 DCOM for UniOPC Server Step F Step G For Everyone that may launch OPCEnum set permissions to Full Control Allow and Read Allow Click OK to save changes Change Configuration Permission Ei ES Security Group or user names sh Ey enone i INTERACTIVE EE NETWORK i SYSTEM Add Remove Permissions for Everpone Allow Dery Full Contral 0O Read O Special Permissions O O For special permissions or for advanced settings Mieres click Advanced Figure 12 28 DCOM for UniOPC Server Step G InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHM OPC Page 12 16 Step H In the Identity tab you can select either of the options It is recommended to use either The launching user or The System Account services only UniOPC Server Properties x General Location Security Endpoints Identity Which user account do you want to use to run this application C The interactive user Cancel Epp Figure 12 29 DCOM Tor UniOPO Server Step H 12 4 2 Configure DCOM on Client PC When using OPC over DCOM it is necessary for the Client PC to know the program name of the OPC Server on the Server PC This allows the Client PC to remotely launch the Server PC s
485. wired as a direct input to the PLC Update Enable Register for this purpose 9 3 4 File Locations Drive and Directory for Data Logging This is the drive that will be used for saving or retrieving any data while InstantHMI is running If this is a floppy drive make sure you have a formatted disk available in this drive when InstantHMI is running You may also specify a directory for data logging The files saved in this directory include Alarm Logs spooled report files and printer reports See Section 5 3 for a discussion of data logging Drive and Directory for Recipes This specification similar to data logging allows you to keep the recipe files separate from other files You specify the name of the recipe group The tags in the group define the data fields to be included in the recipe see Section 3 6 for details Database Source Name InstantHMI allows you to collect data from any of the monitored data fields on any of the screens at specified data logging rates for the fields You can specify the database source name for the data collection see Section 13 9 3 5 Data Logging Data Logging is an available optional feature in InstantHMI As discussed in Section 3 7 two types of data logging may be supported on your platform e Time based data logging and e Event triggered data logging For Time Based Data Logging any tags from the tag database may be assigned a Datalog Sample Time Section 3 3 7 At runtime access the Data
486. ws an animated Bitmap data object Section 4 11 2 4 6 2 Data Object This section gives a brief sketch of the Data Object A more detailed discussion is included in the later Section 4 11 Use this tool accessed from the Screen Designer menu Objects gt Data Object to create data objects on screen Note that Ol Widgets data objects can be accessed from a convenient Widgets Palette Sections 4 11 3 4 11 5 Data objects display information to the operator for monitoring and control when the InstantHMI Runtime Engine application is running Locate the data object on screen by moving the mouse cursor and then click the left button When the data object is thus created a pop up dialog box is presented to help you enter the data Display Object Properties Data Type Display Format Field Width Font Color etc Also shown is the associated Tag Information Tag Name Data Source Sample Time etc Display Object Properties x InstantHMI Tag Editor Tag Name Data Source 4 20 mA Output Status 1 Modbus TCP v Data Type Racine F Tag Name Select Tag lt Enter tag description gt Device Name ae elie Le Display Text Graphic Format Fader No Data Source Assigned Tag Definitions Station 0 Memory Type Address Bit Station Data Type Mich 74 Height 125 Local 2021 Bit 0 Register v 2020 0 1 Int32 Sample Time 100 Imsec s Unsigned Display Properties Tag Information Properties ime p Script eno S
487. x for Ctrl Select the key T Click on the command Go To Field Select screen name parameter Training impzone1 and enter the Field ID value 29 Click on Enter Macro button 5 PLC Function This macro is reserved for use with drivers that support PLC Functions such as Flash Write Run Mode Stop Mode for Yaskawa PLC Please contact Software Horizons if you need this functionality InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Macro Editor Page 6 4 6 Print This macro included with PC Runtime at no charge requires the Printing option to be enabled for CE and PDA platforms allows you to print a report using the selected report template and has the syntax Print Report Name Select macro key and command as explained above Select the report template name from the pull down list 7 Print Screen available only for PC CE and PDA Runtime This macro has the syntax Print Screen Option When this macro is executed at runtime it will perform the Print Screen function Print Save Print amp Save depending on the macro option parameter The saved screen is a bitmap of the screen view 8 Read Inputs This macro available only for the PC Runtime has the syntax Read Inputs Screen Name and causes all the data fields with a data type user Input on the specified screen current screen to be updated This macro is useful to update all fields on a screen without requiring them to be constantly
488. xt message from the selected message group for example Temperature Msgs as in the figure The values associated with a bit are O and 1 which can support two text messages InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Screen Designer Page 4 45 InstantHMl Message Manager 8 On Off l Total Groups 17 3 Open Close Display Object Properties a Operator Shift die iS 8 Sample Projects Messages New Msg Display Properties Tag Information Selector Solenoid Select Tag 58 Temp Regulation Edit Ms Data Type a Tag Name _ Select Tag g i Temp Message Zone1 SS AS Display Text Graphic P 3 0 Temp between O and 10 degrees Delete Msg Format Message No Data Source Assigned 1 Temp between 10 and 20 degrees Station O 2 Temp between 20 and 30 degrees 3 Temp between 30 and 40 degrees 4 Temp between 40 and 50 degrees 5 Temp between 50 and 60 degrees New Group 6 Temp between 60 and 70 degrees 7 Temp between 70 and 80 degrees Copy Group 5 Temp between 60 and 90 degrees 9 Temp between 90 and 100 degrees Delete Group Group Functions Field Width El Border Local 2029 Bit 0 No Border Sample Time 100 Imsec s v Font i ont Tahoma pt bold Script lt No Script gt Edit Color Foreground i Background Messages Temperature Msgs s5 Database Functions po Cancel Import Export Access Info aon ooon ooo ooon CC CC Remark
489. y Text Graphic Data Source Unitronics OPC Station O Field width 3 Border Register 0 Bit 0 No Border Sample Time 1000 Imsec s Format Integer Font Ak E SEN APPR Bale rale Script lt Mo Script gt Edit Color Foreground Background Rernark o res Figure 12 5 OPC Display Object Properties Example 12 3 OPC over DCOM via TCP IP This section describes how to configure an OPC Server and an OPC Client for communication over a network using DCOM This document applies to Windows XP Service Pack 2 other Operating System Versions are not covered This document assumes you have two computers which will be referred to as Server PC and Client PC The Server PC denotes the PC that will be actively running the OPC Server The Client PC refers to the PC that will connect to the Server PC to get OPC data over DCOM Before proceeding install an OPC Server on your Server PC and Client PC See Example in Section 12 2 12 3 1 Configure DCOM on Server PC and Client PCs The steps in this section should be performed on both the Server PC and Client PC In Windows click on Start gt Run type dcomenfg and then click OK InstantHMI Copyright 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 InstantHM OPC Page 12 4 Step A Under Component Services click Computers Step B Right Click My Computer in the right pane and choose Properties ie Component Services Ge File Acton View Window Help
490. you to associate Device Names to IP addresses Only the device names will be used in Tags associated with that controller device so that if a network is reconfigured updating the tag database is easy All you need to do is use the IP Manager to reenter the changed IP address for the device name When assigning a target platform PDAs or PCs or CE panels to the project you will be able to specify whether the data source for each tag is Local or Remote When the data source is Local it will be polled by the runtime engine on the target platform and when the data source is Remote the tag data for this client node will come from another InstantHMI runtime engine on a platform server node identified by you 2 4 Setup Project Setup command gives access to Project Management features These include administrative functions such as setting up Project Users and their access privileges Deploying InstantHMI Copyright O 2000 2008 Software Horizons Inc 5 0 20Jul2008 Projects on target platforms assigning project elements Such as operator Screens Printer and Spool Reports and setting up Special Registers for creating event driven Printer reports Spool reports etc Without Administrative privileges you will not be able to access the Project Users button and some other critical setup features For each selected function the Project Setup dialog reconfigures itself to display the details in panels and provides appropriately labeled fun

downloaded

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents